diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:52:30 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:52:30 -0700 |
| commit | 7988c4b8363b581d4447ea188db837cee55f833c (patch) | |
| tree | 31b7b511cdcbd58c2d875def49d126faa3d05327 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 18076-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 622286 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 18076-h/18076-h.htm | 7174 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 18076-h/images/image01.jpg | bin | 0 -> 153184 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 18076-h/images/image02.jpg | bin | 0 -> 126919 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 18076-h/images/image03.jpg | bin | 0 -> 115446 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 18076-h/images/image04.jpg | bin | 0 -> 92466 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 18076.txt | 7167 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 18076.zip | bin | 0 -> 132315 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
11 files changed, 14357 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/18076-h.zip b/18076-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bcbf55e --- /dev/null +++ b/18076-h.zip diff --git a/18076-h/18076-h.htm b/18076-h/18076-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3ae6e01 --- /dev/null +++ b/18076-h/18076-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7174 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=US-ASCII"> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Boy Trapper, by Harry Castlemon</title> +<style type="text/css"> +body {text-align:justify} +div.figcenter, div.titlepage {text-align:center} +h3.chapheader {margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 2em; text-align:center} +h4 {margin-bottom: 0;} +ul {margin-top: 0; list-style-type: none;} +</style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Boy Trapper, by Harry Castlemon + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Boy Trapper + +Author: Harry Castlemon + +Release Date: March 29, 2006 [EBook #18076] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BOY TRAPPER *** + + + + +Produced by Alan Johns and Andrew Sly + + + + + +</pre> + + +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/image01.jpg" width="503" height="758" +alt="Dave meets Lester Brigham."></div> + +<div class="titlepage"> +<p>Boy Trapper Series</p> +<h1>THE<br> +BOY TRAPPER.</h1> + +<p>By HARRY CASTLEMON,<br> +AUTHOR OF “THE FRANK NELSON SERIES,” “THE SPORTSMAN'S CLUB +SERIES,”<br> “GUNBOAT SERIES,” &C.</p> + +<p>PHILADELPHIA<br> +HENRY T. COATES & CO.</p> +</div> + +<hr> + +<h3>FAMOUS CASTLEMON BOOKS.</h3> + +<h4>Gunboat Series. By Harry Castlemon. 6 vols. 12mo.</h4> +<ul> +<li>Frank the Young Naturalist.</li> +<li>Frank on a Gunboat.</li> +<li>Frank in the Woods.</li> +<li>Frank before Vicksburg.</li> +<li>Frank on the Lower Mississippi.</li> +<li>Frank on the Prairie.</li></ul> + +<h4>Rocky Mountain Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth.</h4> +<ul> +<li>Frank among the Rancheros.</li> +<li>Frank at Don Carlos' Ranch.</li> +<li>Frank in the Mountains.</li></ul> + +<h4>Sportsman's Club Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth.</h4> +<ul> +<li>The Sportsman's Club in the Saddle.</li> +<li>The Sportsman's Club Afloat.</li> +<li>The Sportsman's Club among the Trappers.</li></ul> + +<h4>Frank Nelson Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth.</h4> +<ul> +<li>Snowed Up.</li> +<li>Frank in the Forecastle.</li> +<li>The Boy Traders.</li></ul> + +<h4>Boy Trapper Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth.</h4> +<ul> +<li>The Buried Treasure.</li> +<li>The Boy Trapper.</li> +<li>The Mail-Carrier.</li></ul> + +<h4>Roughing It Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth.</h4> +<ul> +<li>George in Camp.</li> +<li>George at the Wheel.</li> +<li>George at the Fort.</li></ul> + +<h4>Rod and Gun Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth.</h4> +<ul> +<li>Don Gordon's Shooting Box.</li> +<li>Rod and Gun Club.</li> +<li>The Young Wild Fowlers.</li></ul> + +<h4>Go-Ahead Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth.</h4> +<ul> +<li>Tom Newcombe.</li> +<li>Go-Ahead.</li> +<li>No Moss.</li></ul> + +<h4>Forest and Stream Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth.</h4> +<ul> +<li>Joe Wayring.</li> +<li>Snagged and Sunk.</li> +<li>Steel Horse.</li></ul> + +<h4>War Series. By Harry Castlemon. 5 vols. 12mo. Cloth.</h4> +<ul> +<li>True to his Colors.</li> +<li>Rodney the Partisan.</li> +<li>Rodney the Overseer.</li> +<li>Marcy the Blockade-Runner.</li> +<li>Marcy the Refugee.</li></ul> + +<p>Other Volumes in Preparation.</p> + +<hr> + +<p>Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1878, by PORTER & +COATES, in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.</p> + +<hr> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<h3>CONTENTS</h3> + +<table cellspacing="5"> +<tr><td align="right" valign="top"> +I.<br> +II.<br> +III.<br> +IV.<br> +V.<br> +VI.<br> +VII.<br> +VIII.<br> +IX.<br> +X.<br> +XI.<br> +XII.<br> +XIII.<br> +XIV.<br> +XV.<br> +XVI.<br> +XVII.</td> + +<td align="left" valign="top"> +<a href="#bt1">A GLANCE AT THE PAST</a><br> +<a href="#bt2">DAVID'S VISITORS</a><br> +<a href="#bt3">AN OFFER OF PARTNERSHIP</a><br> +<a href="#bt4">MORE BAD NEWS</a><br> +<a href="#bt5">DAN IS ASTONISHED</a><br> +<a href="#bt6">BRUIN'S ISLAND</a><br> +<a href="#bt7">WHAT HAPPENED THERE</a><br> +<a href="#bt8">DOGS IN THE MANGER</a><br> +<a href="#bt9">NATURAL HISTORY</a><br> +<a href="#bt10">A BEAR HUNT</a><br> +<a href="#bt11">TRAPPING QUAILS</a><br> +<a href="#bt12">WHERE THE POINTER WAS</a><br> +<a href="#bt13">TEN DOLLARS REWARD</a><br> +<a href="#bt14">SOME DISCOVERIES</a><br> +<a href="#bt15">BOB'S ASPIRATIONS</a><br> +<a href="#bt16">DON'S HOUNDS TREE SOMETHING</a><br> +<a href="#bt17">CONCLUSION</a></td> +</tr> +</table> +</div> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt1">CHAPTER I.<br> + +A GLANCE AT THE PAST.</a></h3> + +<p>“Don't worry about it, mother. It is nothing we can help.”</p> + +<p>“It seems to me that I might have helped it. If I had gone to General +Gordon when your father first spoke about that barrel with the eighty +thousand dollars in it, and told him the whole story, things might +have turned out differently. But in spite of all he said, I did not +suppose that he was in earnest.”</p> + +<p>“Neither did I. That any man in his sober senses should think of such +a thing! Why, mother, if there had been so much money buried in that +potato-patch, the General would have known it, and don't you suppose +he would have found it if he'd had to plough the field up ten feet +deep? Of course he would.”</p> + +<p>“But just think of the disgrace that has been brought upon us.”</p> + +<p>“Father is the only one who has done anything to be ashamed of, and +he made matters worse by running away. If he would come home and +attend to his business, no one would say a word to him. The General +told me so this morning.”</p> + +<p>“I am afraid you couldn't make your father believe it.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps not, but if I knew where to find him I should try.”</p> + +<p>It was David Evans who spoke last. He and his mother were talking +over the strange incidents that had happened in the settlement during +the last few days, and which we have attempted to describe in the +preceding volume of this series. The events were brought about by a +very foolish notion which Godfrey Evans, David's father, suddenly got +into his head.</p> + +<p>During our late war it was the custom of the people living in the +South to conceal their valuables when they heard of the approach of +the Union army. They were also careful to take the same precautions +to save their property when it became known that the rebel guerillas +were near at hand; for these worthies were oftentimes but little +better than organized bands of robbers, and the people stood as much +in fear of them as they did of the Federals. These valuables, +consisting for the most part of money, jewelry and silverware, were +sometimes hidden in cellars, in hollow logs in the woods and in +barns; but more frequently they were buried in the ground. The work +of hiding them was sometimes performed by the planters themselves, if +they happened to be at home, but it was generally intrusted to old +and faithful servants in whom their owners had every confidence. It +not unfrequently happened that these old and faithful servants proved +themselves utterly unworthy of the trust reposed in them. Sometimes +they told the raiding soldiers where the property was concealed, and +at others they ran away without telling even their masters where the +valuables were hidden. General Gordon's old servant, Jordan, was one +of this stamp. He went off with the Union forces, who raided that +part of Mississippi, and before he went he told a rebel soldier, +Godfrey Evans, who happened to be at home on a furlough, and who was +skulking in the woods to avoid capture, that he had just buried a +barrel containing eighty thousand dollars in gold and silver in his +master's potato-patch, and that none of the family knew where it was.</p> + +<p>This Godfrey Evans had been well off in the world at one time. He had +property to the amount of fifteen thousand dollars; but, like many +others, he lost it all during the war, and returned home after the +surrender of General Lee to find himself a poor man. His comfortable +house had been burned over the heads of his wife and children, who +were now living in a rude hut which some kind-hearted neighbors had +hastily erected; his negroes, who had made his money for him, were +all gone; his cattle had been slaughtered by both rebel and Union +troops, and his mules and horses carried off; his fine drove of hogs, +which ran loose in the woods, and upon which he relied to furnish his +year's supply of bacon, had wandered away and become wild; and +Godfrey had nothing but his rifle and his two hands with which to +begin the world anew. But it was hard to go back and begin again +where he had begun forty years ago. The bare thought of it was enough +to discourage Godfrey, who declared that he wouldn't do it, and made +his words good by becoming a roving vagabond. He spent the most of +his time at the landing, watching the steamers as they came in, and +the rest in wandering listlessly about the woods, shooting just game +enough to keep him in powder, lead and tobacco. His sole companion +and friend was his son Daniel, who, being a chip of the old block, +faithfully imitated his father's lazy, useless mode of life. Mrs. +Evans and the younger son, David, were the only members of the family +who worked. They never lost an opportunity to turn an honest penny, +and there were times when Godfrey and Dan would have gone supperless +to bed if it had not been for these two faithful toilers.</p> + +<p>Godfrey disliked this aimless, joyless existence as much as he +disliked work, and even Dan at times longed for something better. +They both wanted to be rich. Godfrey wanted to see his fine +plantation, which was now abandoned to briers and cane, cultivated as +it used to be; while it was Dan's ambition to have two or three +painted boats in the lake, to have a pointer following at his heels, +and to do his shooting with a double-barrel gun that “broke in two in +the middle.” He wanted to take his morning's exercise on a spotted +pony—a circus horse, he called it; and to wear a broadcloth suit, +a Panama hat and patent leather boots, when he went to church on +Sundays. Don and Bert Gordon had all these aids to happiness, and +they were the jolliest fellows he had ever seen—always laughing, +singing or whistling. Dan thought he would be happy too, if he could +only have so many fine things to call his own, but he could see no +way to get them, and that made him angry. He hated Don and Bert so +heartily that he could never look at them without wishing that some +evil might befall them. He threatened to steal their horses, shoot +their dogs, sink their boats, and do a host of other desperate +things, believing that in this way he could render the two happy +brothers as miserable as he was himself.</p> + +<p>Godfrey and Dan lived in a most unenviable frame of mind for a year +or more, and then the former one day happened to think of the barrel +which old Jordan had told him was hidden in the potato-patch. He +spoke of it while the family were at dinner, and announced that he +and Dan would begin the work of unearthing the BURIED TREASURE that +very night. If they didn't find it the first time they tried, they +would go the next night; and they would keep on digging until they +obtained possession of it, if they had to dig up the whole state of +Mississippi. Dan almost went wild over the news. He and his father +spent a few minutes in building air-castles, and then Godfrey, who +felt as rich as though he already had the money in his possession, +hurried down to the landing, entered the store there and called for a +plug of tobacco, which the merchant refused to give him until he +showed that he had twenty-five cents to pay for it.</p> + +<p>Although Dan and his father had great expectations, which they +believed would very soon be realized, they did not neglect to pay +attention to small matters, and to pick up any stray dollars that +chanced to fall in their way. David was a famous dog-breaker, and Don +Gordon had offered him ten dollars to train a pointer for him. The +offer was made in the presence of Dan and his father, and the former +at once laid his plans to obtain possession of a portion of the +money. While the two were on their way to the landing, where a +shooting-match was to be held that afternoon, Dan stopped at General +Gordon's barn, and having borrowed a shovel, with which to dig up the +buried treasure, he went to the house, where he found Bert reading a +book. He told him that David had sent him there after five dollars, +as he wished to buy a new dress for his mother, and Bert, although +he was well aware that, according to the agreement his brother had +made with David, the money was not to be paid until the pointer +was thoroughly broken for the field, advanced him the amount he +requested. Arriving at the landing, Dan got the bill changed for +notes of smaller denomination, and, while he was picking up his +money, was surprised by his father, who was greatly amazed to see his +son with such a roll of greenbacks in his hand. Knowing that Dan +was too lazy to work—too much of a gentleman was the way Godfrey +expressed it—he could not imagine where the money came from, and Dan +refused to enlighten him on this point, fearing that if he did his +father would go straight to Don Gordon and ask for the rest of the +ten dollars. Godfrey urged and commanded to no purpose, and was +obliged to be satisfied with the loan of a dollar, which he promised +to return with heavy interest as soon as the barrel was found. He +paid seventy-five cents of it for the privilege of entering as one +of the contestants in the shooting-match, and the rest he used in +purchasing the plug of tobacco for which the grocer had refused +to credit him. He won nothing during the match, while Dan, to his +father's great disgust, came in for one of the first prizes—a fine +quarter of beef.</p> + +<p>When the shooting-match was over, the father and son returned to the +little hovel they called home. Dan at once put the mule into the cart +and started back to the landing to bring home his quarter of beef; +while Godfrey, by pretending to fall asleep on the bench in front of +the cabin, was able to carry out a little stratagem that suddenly +suggested itself to him. He knew that Dan was a thrifty lad in spite +of his laziness, and that he believed in laying by something for +a rainy day. He was never out of ammunition for his rifle, but he +always took care to keep his little stock hidden away, so that his +father could not find it. By watching him on this particular day, +Godfrey was lucky enough to find out where the boy's hiding-place +was. He went to it as soon as Dan drove away in the cart, and found +there a goodly supply of powder, lead and caps, and also three +dollars and twenty-five cents in money; all of which he put into his +pocket.</p> + +<p>Dan came back from the landing in due time, and his father, who had +been calculating on having a good supper that night, was astonished +to find that the beef had been sold. He was enraged at first, but +when he learned that Dan had received three dollars and a half for +it, he was quieted at once, and a happy thought came into his mind. +He sent Dan into the woods to shoot some squirrels for supper, and +while the boy was gone he went to the hiding-place and put back the +ammunition and money just as he found them, believing that when Dan +returned he would put the three dollars and a half there too. Nor was +he mistaken. The boy presently came back with squirrels enough for +supper, and as soon as he thought he could do so without being seen +by any one, he went to his storehouse, and having made sure that the +property he had already hidden there was safe, he added to it the sum +he had received for the quarter of beef, and went away happy. His +father was happy too for he had seen the whole operation.</p> + +<p>Godfrey was too tired to dig for the buried treasure that night, so +Dan went to bed as soon as it was fairly dark. His father waited +until he was soundly asleep, and then went to the storehouse and took +out all it contained. Dan's rage when he discovered his loss the next +morning was something to wonder at. He knew where his property was, +and he demanded its immediate return, threatening in case of refusal, +to tell General Gordon about the barrel in the potato-field. This +frightened Godfrey, who gave up the contents of his pockets, but not +until he had forced Dan to tell him where he obtained the money he +had seen in his hands at the landing the day before. He was +astonished when he learned that it came from Bert Gordon, and set his +wits at work to conjure up some plan, by which he might obtain +possession of the rest. He went over to the General's at once, and +there learned that Don and Bert had gone down to the landing with +their father, where they were awaiting the arrival of two cousins, +whom they were expecting from the North. Godfrey followed them there +with all haste, sought an interview with Don, and by telling him some +plausible story, induced him to advance the other five dollars. +Godfrey hoped in this way to get the start of Dan and enjoy his +ill-gotten gains all by himself, but Dan was there and saw it all, +and his father, alarmed by the look he saw on his face, divided the +money with him. Of course David knew nothing of this. He was saving +those ten dollars for his mother. He did not expect to spend a cent +of it on himself; and how he first learned of his loss and what was +done about it, perhaps we shall see as our story progresses.</p> + +<p>The two young gentlemen, Clarence and Marshall Gordon, for whom Don +and Bert were waiting, and who landed from the steamer, Emma Deane, +that morning, had been sent away from the city by their father, in +order that they might be out of the way of temptation; but, as it +happened, one of them ran directly into it. Clarence, the older, was +anything but a model boy. He was much addicted to ale and cigars, and +thought of nothing in the world so much as money. He was a +spendthrift, and, like Godfrey Evans, had a great desire to be rich, +but he never thought of working and saving in order to gain the +wished-for end. This good old-fashioned and safe way was too long and +tedious for him, and he was constantly on the lookout for a short +road to wealth and consequent happiness. Before he had been +twenty-four hours under his uncle's roof, he thought he had +discovered it, and this was the way it came about:</p> + +<p>Clarence and his brother arrived at the General's house in the +forenoon, and before night came, the former wished most heartily that +he had stayed at home. He was lonely and utterly disgusted with the +quiet of the country, and the old-fashioned, prosy way his two +cousins had of enjoying themselves. Music, horseback-riding, hunting, +fishing and visiting made up the round of their amusements, and +Clarence could see no fun in such things. As soon as it grew dark he +slipped out of the house, and leaning over a fence that ran between +the barnyard and a potato-patch, lighted a cigar and settled into a +comfortable position to enjoy it. He had not been there many minutes, +before he was startled by the stealthy approach of two persons, a man +and a boy, who stopped a short distance from him and began digging +with a shovel. Clarence listened to the words which the man uttered +for the encouragement of the boy, who was doing the work, and was +amazed to learn that there was a fortune hidden in that field, and +that these two had come there to dig it up. In his eagerness and +excitement Clarence leaned half way over the fence, puffing +vigorously at his cigar all the while. The little round ball of fire +glowing through the darkness caught the eye of the boy, who showed it +to his companion, and the two, frightened almost out of their senses, +took to their heels, leaving the eavesdropper lost in wonder.</p> + +<p>Clarence was almost overwhelmed by the discovery he had just made. It +was an opportunity too good to be lost, and he at once resolved that +if there were eighty thousand dollars buried in that field, he must +have a share of the money when it was brought to light. In order to +bring this about, he must find out who this man and boy were. He had +a very slight cue to guide him, but he followed it up so skillfully +that by noon of the next day he knew as much about the eighty +thousand dollars as Godfrey did, and had formed a partnership with +that worthy, Dan being dropped as a useless encumbrance. They met, +according to agreement, as soon as it grew dark. It happened that +there was one who witnessed their interview, and heard all that +passed between them, and that was Don Gordon, who had just returned +from the landing, whither he had been to mail a letter to his cousin. +Not finding the hostler about when he came back, Don attended to his +pony himself, and was about to shut up the barn for the night, when +he discovered what he supposed to be a thief prowling about. The +lighted end of a cigar glowed through the darkness a moment later, +and then Don saw that the prowler was his cousin Clarence. Greatly +amused at his mistake, he was about to make his presence known, when +it occurred to him that since Clarence had taken so much pains to get +out of sight of the family, in order that he might enjoy his cigar, +perhaps he would not like it if Don caught him in the act; so Don +remained in his place of concealment, heard every word that was said +when Godfrey came up, saw both of them get over the fence in the +potato-patch, and followed and watched them while they were digging +for the barrel.</p> + +<p>Now, Don was one of the most inveterate practical jokers in the +world, and the most accomplished one we ever saw. Godfrey had +received more than one proof of his skill. He had been tripped up +when there was no one near him; his hat had been knocked off his head +by invisible hands, and he had seen horrid great things with eyes of +fire staring at him from fence-corners, until he had become fully +satisfied that the General's lane was haunted, and he would go a mile +around through the fields before he would pass through it after +nightfall. Here was another opportunity to frighten him, and Don knew +just how to do it. Before he went to sleep that night, he had thought +of something that beat all the other tricks he had heard of far out +of sight.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt2">CHAPTER II.<br> + +DAVID'S VISITORS.</a></h3> + +<p>The trouble began the very next morning. While Godfrey was sitting on +the bench in front of his cabin, deeply engrossed with his own +thoughts, Dan came rushing up with a face full of terror, and +conveyed to him the startling intelligence that a “haunt”—a Northern +boy would have called it a ghost—had been seen at General Gordon's +barn. It looked exactly like old Jordan, the negro, who had buried +the treasure in the potato-patch; but of course it couldn't be old +Jordan, for he had never been heard of since he ran away with the +Yankees, and everybody believed him to be dead. Godfrey listened in +great amazement to his son's story, and, to satisfy himself of the +truth of it, went up to the barn, with his rifle for company. He had +not been there many minutes before he received convincing proof that +Dan had told the truth, for he saw the object with his own eyes—a +feeble old negro, dressed in a white plantation suit, and wearing a +battered plug hat, who limped along in plain view of him, and finally +disappeared, no one could tell how or when. That was enough for +Godfrey. He started for home at the top of his speed, and scarcely +dared to venture out of doors that night. He had an appointment with +Clarence Gordon at dark, but he would not have passed that barn in +his present state of mind, if he had known that he could make twice +eighty thousand dollars by it.</p> + +<p>Bright and early the next morning, Clarence came down to see why he +had not kept his promise, and talked to him in such a way that +Godfrey finally agreed to meet him that night, the boy promising to +protect him from anything in the shape of a ghost that might cross +their path. He kept his appointment this time, but he was sorry +enough for it afterward, for the first object on which his eyes +rested, when he and his companion reached the potato-field, was old +Jordan, digging away as if he too were in search of the buried +treasure. Godfrey would have taken to his heels at once, but +Clarence, who did not believe in “haunts,” walked up and seized the +negro by the arm. After much argument, Godfrey was induced to do the +same, and then his fears all vanished, for it was a veritable human +being that he took hold of and not a spirit, as he feared it was. He +declared, too, that the interloper was the missing Jordan, beyond a +doubt, and that he had come there to steal the money he had buried in +that same field years before. The negro was commanded to point out +the spot where the treasure was hidden, but nothing could be learned +from the old fellow. He would not speak at all, until Godfrey +threatened to punch him in the ribs with his shovel, and then he +denied all knowledge of the barrel. Upon hearing this, Clarence and +his companion seized him by the arms, dragged him across the field, +over the fence and down the road to Godfrey's potato-cellar, where he +was tied to a stanchion with a plough-line and left with the +assurance that he should never see daylight again until he told where +the fortune was to be found.</p> + +<p>Godfrey was stirring the next morning before it was fairly light, and +the first sound that fell on his ears caused him to start and tremble +with terror. He listened until it was repeated, and then started post +haste for General Gordon's house. When he reached it, he found the +whole plantation in an uproar. Don was missing and a search was being +instituted. Clarence came out about this time, and Godfrey told him a +most astounding piece of news. It wasn't old Jordan at all whom they +had captured the night before, it was Don Gordon. Godfrey was sure of +it, for he had heard him whistle as nobody in the world except Don +Gordon could whistle. As soon as Clarence recovered from his +amazement and terror, he mounted Don's pony and set out for the +potato-cellar to see for himself. When he reached it, he found that +the prisoner had already been liberated by somebody (it was Bert, who +was guided to his place of confinement by Don's loud and continued +whistling) and was no doubt on the way home by that time. What was +Clarence to do? Of course he could not go back to the plantation and +face his relatives after what he had done, and there was no other +house in the settlement open to him. Just then he heard the whistle +of a steamer coming up the river, and that settled the matter for +him. He would go home. He jumped on the pony and was riding post +haste toward the landing when he was waylaid by Godfrey Evans, who +robbed him of twenty dollars, all the money he had in the world. As +soon as he was released, Clarence made his way to the landing on +foot, reaching it just in time to secure passage on the Emma Deane, +pawned his watch for money enough to pay his way home, and finally +reached his father's house in safety, only to be packed off to sea on +the school-ship, where he remains to this day.</p> + +<p>Don Gordon reached home with his brother's assistance, and has been a +close prisoner there ever since, not yet having recovered from the +effects of his night in the potato-cellar. Godfrey Evans is hiding in +the swamp somewhere, fearing that if he comes home he will be +arrested for three offences—robbing Clarence, assaulting Don, and +trying to steal the eighty thousand dollars, which he still firmly +believes to be hidden in the potato-patch. A week has passed since +the occurrence of the events which we have so rapidly reviewed, and +now that you are acquainted with them, we are prepared to resume our +story.</p> + +<p>“And if your father doesn't come back, how are we to live this +winter?” asked Mrs. Evans, continuing the conversation which we have +so long interrupted. “How is <i>he</i> to live?”</p> + +<p>“His living will trouble him more than ours will trouble us,” replied +David, who, knowing that he was his mother's main dependence now, +tried hard to keep up a brave heart. “It will be cold out there in +the swamp pretty soon. I saw a flock of wild geese in the lake this +morning, and that is a sure sign that winter is close at hand. Father +had no coat on when he went away, and he was barefooted, too. And as +for <i>our</i> living, mother, who's kept you in clothes and coffee, sugar +and tea, for the last year?”</p> + +<p>“You have, David. I don't know what I should do without you. You are +a great comfort to me.”</p> + +<p>“And I'm never going to be anything else, mother. I never made you +cry, did I? I ain't going to, either. I can take care of you, and I +will, too. If I can't get work to do, I can hunt and trap small game, +you know; and if I only had a rifle, I am sure I could kill at least +one deer every week. That, reckoning venison worth six cents a pound, +would bring us in about thirty dollars a month. Who says we couldn't +live and save money on that?”</p> + +<p>“But you don't own a rifle,” said his mother, smiling at the boy's +enthusiasm.</p> + +<p>“Well, that's so,” said David, sadly. “But,” he added, his face +brightening, “I shall have ten dollars coming to me as soon as Don +Gordon's pointer is field-broken, and you shall have every cent of +it. Besides, you haven't forgotten that I'm going to get a hundred +and fifty dollars for trapping quail for that man up North, have +you?”</p> + +<p>“Have you heard from him yet?”</p> + +<p>David was obliged to confess that he had not.</p> + +<p>“He may have made a bargain with some one else before Don's letter +reached him,” continued Mrs. Evans. “You know this is not the only +country in which quails are to be found, and neither are you the only +one who would be glad to make a hundred and fifty dollars by trapping +them.”</p> + +<p>“I know it, mother; but even if I can't get that job, I can get some +other that will bring us in money,” said David, who was determined to +look on the bright side of things. “I'll earn another ten-dollar bill +before the one I get from Don Gordon is gone, you may depend upon +it.”</p> + +<p>With this assurance the boy kissed his mother and hurried out of the +door, and Mrs. Evans, after clearing away the remnants of their +frugal breakfast, also went out to begin her daily toil at the house +of a neighbor. David made his way around the cabin, and was met by +Don's pointer, which, coming as close to him as the length of his +chain would permit, waited for the friendly word and caress that the +boy never failed to bestow when he passed the kennel in which the +animal was confined. The greeting he extended to his four-footed +friend was a short one this morning, for David had other matters on +his mind. He confidently expected that a few days more would bring +him the wished-for order from the man who had advertised for the +quails, and when it came he wanted to be ready to go to work without +the loss of an hour; so he was spending all his spare time in +building traps. He had four completed already, and just as he had got +boards enough split out for the fifth, he heard the clatter of +horses' hoofs on the road and looked up to see Bert Gordon and his +brother ride up to the fence.</p> + +<p>“Why, Don, I am glad to see you out again,” exclaimed David, dropping +his hammer and hurrying forward to greet his friend.</p> + +<p>“Thank you,” replied Don, accepting David's proffered hand. “I assure +you I am glad to be out again, too. It's a fearful bore to be tied up +in the house for a whole week, but I was bound to come down here this +morning, if I had to come in the carriage, for I have news for you,” +added Don, putting his hand into the breast-pocket of his coat.</p> + +<p>“Has it come?” asked David, in a voice that trembled with excitement.</p> + +<p>“It certainly has. It was addressed to me, you know, and so Bert +opened it. The man says, he wants fifty dozen live quails +immediately, and—but there it is, read it for yourself.”</p> + +<p>Don produced the letter, and David took it with a very unsteady hand. +A hundred and fifty dollars was a fortune in his eyes, a larger one +too than he had hoped to earn for some years to come. He opened the +letter and one glance at it showed him that the money was his, if he +could only capture the required number of birds. They were to be +trapped at once, the sooner the better, put into boxes, which were to +be marked C. O. D. and forwarded, charges paid, to the address at the +bottom of the letter.</p> + +<p>“Cod,” repeated David, whose opportunities for learning how business +was transacted had been very limited, “does he mean codfish?” Don and +Bert laughed heartily.</p> + +<p>“No,” said the former, as soon as he could speak. “C. O. D. means +'collect on delivery.'”</p> + +<p>“O,” said David, in a tone of voice which showed that he did not yet +fully understand.</p> + +<p>“It is nothing to be ashamed of,” said Bert; “we didn't know what the +letters meant until father told us.”</p> + +<p>“That's so,” said Don; “how is a fellow to know a thing he has never +had a chance to learn? Now when the birds are caught, you put so many +of them in a box and on each box you mark the value of its contents. +You send a notice of shipment to the man, and he will know when to +look for the birds. When they arrive he pays the amount of your bill +to the express agent, and the agent forwards it to you. You run no +risk whatever, for the man can't get the quails until your bill is +paid.”</p> + +<p>“Now I'll tell you what we'll do,” said Bert, who saw by the +expression on David's face that his brother had not made matters much +clearer by his explanation, “you go to work and catch the quails, and +when you have made up the required number, we'll help you ship them +off.”</p> + +<p>“That's the idea,” said Don. “We'll do anything we can for you.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you,” answered David, who felt as if a tremendous +responsibility had been removed from his shoulders.</p> + +<p>“I'll write to the man to-day, informing him that you will go to work +at once,” added Don. “I don't suppose you could tell, even within a +week or two, of the time it will take you to fill the order, could +you?”</p> + +<p>“I shouldn't like to make a guess,” said David. “The birds rove +around so that a fellow can't tell anything about them. They are +plenty now, but next week there may not be half a dozen flocks to be +found.”</p> + +<p>“Then I will write to him that the best you can say is, that you will +lose no time. How does the pointer come on?”</p> + +<p>“Finely,” said David. “He works better than half the old dogs now. +He's smart, I tell you.”</p> + +<p>“He takes after his owner, you see. I hope to get firmly on my feet +next week, and if I do, I want to try him. Good-by.”</p> + +<p>“Now, there are two friends worth having,” thought David, gazing +almost lovingly after the brothers, as they rode away. “I don't +wonder that everybody likes them. A hundred and fifty dollars! Whew! +won't mother have some nice, warm clothes this winter, and won't she +have everything else she wants, too?”</p> + +<p>The boy did not see how he could possibly keep his good fortune to +himself until his mother came home that night. His first impulse was +to go over to the neighbor's house, and tell her all about it, but he +was restrained by the thought that that would be a waste of time. He +could make one trap in the hour and a half that it would take him to +go and return, and the sooner his traps were all completed, the +sooner he could get to work. His next thought was that he would let +the traps rest for that day, go down to the landing, purchase some +nice present for his mother and surprise her with it when she came +home. Of course he had no money to pay for it, but what did that +matter? Silas Jones was always willing to trust anybody whom he knew +to be reliable, and when he learned that his customer would have a +hundred and fifty dollars of his own in a few weeks, he would surely +let him have a warm dress or a pair of shoes. When his money came he +would get his mother something fine to wear to church; and, while he +was about it, wouldn't it be a good plan for him to send to Memphis +for a nice hunting outfit and a few dozen steel traps? Like his +father, when he first thought of the barrel with the eighty thousand +dollars in it, David looked upon himself as rich already; and if he +had attempted to carry out all the grand ideas that were continually +suggesting themselves to him, it was probable that his hundred and +fifty dollars would be gone before he had earned them.</p> + +<p>“Halloo, there!” shouted a voice.</p> + +<p>David looked up and saw another horseman standing beside the +fence—Silas Jones, who kept the store at the landing, and the very +man of whom he had been thinking but a moment before.</p> + +<p>“Come here, David,” continued Silas. “I am out collecting bills, and +I thought I would ride around and see if you have heard anything of +that respected father of yours during the last few days.”</p> + +<p>“No, sir; we haven't,” answered David, hanging his head.</p> + +<p>“Well, I suppose you know that he owes me eight dollars, don't you?” +said Silas.</p> + +<p>“I knew he owed you something, but I didn't think it was as much as +that,” replied David, opening his eyes. In his estimation, eight +dollars was a debt of some magnitude.</p> + +<p>“That's the amount, as sure as you live, and if I had charged him as +much as I charge others, it would have been more. I made a little +reduction to him, because I knew that he didn't own more of this +world's goods than the law allows. What is to be done about it? Am I +to lose my money because he has run away?”</p> + +<p>“O, no,” said David, quickly. “I'll pay it, and be glad to do so. We +may want groceries some time, you know, when we have no money to pay +for them.”</p> + +<p>“That's the way to talk. Pay up promptly and your credit will always +be good.”</p> + +<p>“All I ask of you,” continued David, “is that you will wait about a +month longer, until——”</p> + +<p>“Can't do it; can't possibly do it,” exclaimed Silas, shaking his +head and waving his hands up and down in the air. “Must have money +to-day. My creditors are pushing me, and I must push everybody whose +name is on my books.”</p> + +<p>“But my name isn't on your books.”</p> + +<p>“Your father's is, and if you have any honor about you, you will see +the debt paid.”</p> + +<p>“That's what I mean to do, but I can't pay it now.”</p> + +<p>“Can't wait a single day,” said Silas. “If the money isn't +forthcoming at once, you can't get a single thing at my store from +this time forward, unless you have the cash to plank right down on +the counter.”</p> + +<p>“I have always paid you for everything I have bought of you,” said +David, with some spirit.</p> + +<p>“I know it; but your father hasn't, and if you want me to show you +any favors, you will pay that debt to-day. You have always been +called an honest boy, and if you want to keep that reputation, you +had better be doing something.”</p> + +<p>So saying, Silas wheeled his horse and rode away, leaving David lost +in wonder.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt3">CHAPTER III.<br> + +AN OFFER OF PARTNERSHIP.</a></h3> + +<p>This was the first time David had ever heard that a son could be held +responsible for debts contracted by his father. At first he did not +believe it; but Silas seemed to think it could be done, and he was a +business man and ought to know what he was talking about. The truth +of the matter was, that Silas Jones was a hard one to deal with. He +wanted every cent that was due him and more too, if he could get it. +It made no difference how poor his customers were, he always found +means to make them pay the bills they contracted at his store. The +eight dollars that Godfrey owed him looked almost as large in his +eyes as it did in David's. He could not bear to lose it, and he did +not care what tricks he resorted to to get it. When he rode away he +took all David's peace of mind with him, “Wasn't it lucky that I +didn't go down to his store and ask him to trust me for a dress for +mother?” thought the boy; as he picked up his hammer and resumed work +upon his trap. “He would have refused me sure. Now there is only one +way I can pay that debt, and that is to ask Don Gordon for the ten +dollars he promised to give me for breaking his pointer. That's +something I don't like, for the money isn't fairly earned yet, but I +don't see what else I can do. Mother must have something to eat, and +the only way I can get it is by making a friend of Silas by paying +him this debt father owes him. I don't care for myself, and as for +Dan—let him look out for number one. That's what he makes me do.”</p> + +<p>While David was soliloquising in this way he heard a footstep near +him, and looking up saw his brother Dan, whose appearance and actions +surprised him not a little. His face wore a smile instead of the +usual scowl, he had no coat on, his sleeves were rolled up, and he +carried a frow in one hand (a frow is a sharp instrument used for +splitting out shingles), and a heavy mallet in the other. He really +looked as if he had made up his mind to go to work, and David could +not imagine what had happened to put such an idea into his head. He +stopped on the way to speak to the pointer and give him a friendly +pat, and that was another thing that surprised his brother. Dan would +have acted more like himself if he had given the animal a kick.</p> + +<p>“He's up to something,” thought David. “He wouldn't act that way if +he wasn't. I shouldn't wonder if he wants part of that money I am +going to get from Don Gordon, but he needn't waste his breath in +asking for it. Every cent of it goes into mother's hands.”</p> + +<p>“Halloo, Davy!” said Dan, cheerfully. “I thought mebbe you wouldn't +care if I should come out and lend you a hand. I hain't got nothing +much to do this morning.”</p> + +<p>David made no reply. He was waiting to hear what object his brother +had in view in offering his assistance, and he knew it would all be +made plain to him in a few minutes.</p> + +<p>“You got a heap of traps to build, hain't you?” continued Dan. “When +be you goin' to set 'em?”</p> + +<p>“I am going to set some of them to-night,” was David's reply.</p> + +<p>“Fifty dozen is a heap of birds, ain't it?” said Dan.</p> + +<p>“How do you happen to know anything about it?” demanded David, who +was greatly astonished.</p> + +<p>“I heerd you an' Don talkin' about it.”</p> + +<p>“Where were you at the time?”</p> + +<p>“O, I was around,” answered Dan, who did not care to confess that he +had intentionally played the part of eavesdropper.</p> + +<p>David was silent, for he wanted to think about it. Here was another +piece of ill luck. His experience had taught him that if he wished to +make his enterprise successful, he must keep it from the knowledge of +his father and Dan. If they found out that he expected to earn so +much money, they would insist on a division of the spoils, and if +their demand was not complied with, there would be trouble in the +cabin. He had no fear of his father now, but here was Dan, who was an +unpleasant fellow to have about when he was crossed, and he seemed to +know all about it. There were troublous times ahead; David was sure +of that.</p> + +<p>“What does that feller up North want with so many quails, anyhow?” +asked Dan, as he placed one of the oak blocks upon its end and began +splitting off a shingle with the frow. “He can't eat 'em all by +hisself.”</p> + +<p>“No, he wants to turn them loose and let them run,” replied David, +with as much good nature as he could assume. “You see they had an +awful hard winter up there last year, and the quails were all killed +off.”</p> + +<p>“Wall, what does the fule want to let 'em go fur, arter he's bought +'em?”</p> + +<p>“Why, he wants to stock the country. He belongs to a Sportsman's Club +up there. He and his friends will have a law passed keeping folks +from shooting them for two or three years, and then there'll be just +as many birds as there were before.”</p> + +<p>“Is that the way them rich fellers does?”</p> + +<p>“That's what Don says.”</p> + +<p>“It's mighty nice to be rich, ain't it, Davy; to have all the money +you want to spend, a nice hoss to ride, one of them guns what breaks +in two in the middle to do your shootin' with, an' shiny boots an' a +straw hat to wear to church! I wish me an' pap had found that thar +bar'l with the eighty thousand dollars into it. I wouldn't be wearin' +no sich clothes as these yere.”</p> + +<p>“That's all humbug,” exclaimed David. “The silver things that old +Jordan buried, the spoons, knives and dishes, were all dug up again +and are in use now every day. General Gordon never had eighty +thousand dollars in gold and silver.”</p> + +<p>“Don't you b'lieve no sich story as that ar,” replied Dan, with a +knowing shake of his head.</p> + +<p>“That's what the Gordons say, anyhow.”</p> + +<p>“In course they do; an' they say it kase they don't want nobody +diggin' arter that thar bar'l. They wants to find it theirselves. How +much be you goin' to get fur these quail, Davy? As much as +twenty-five dollars, mebbe thirty, won't you?”</p> + +<p>This question showed that Dan didn't know all about the matter, and +David took courage. “Yes, all of that,” he replied.</p> + +<p>“More, I reckon mebbe, won't ye?”</p> + +<p>“I think so.”</p> + +<p>“You won't get fifty, will you?” said Dan, opening his eyes.</p> + +<p>“I hope I shall.”</p> + +<p>“Whew!” whistled Dan. He threw down his frow and mallet and seated +himself on the pile of shingles, with an air which said very plainly, +that with such an amount of money in prospect there was no need that +any more work should be done. “That's a fortin, Davy. It's an amazin' +lot fur poor folks like us, an' I can't somehow git it through my +head that we're goin' to git so much. But if we do get it, Davy, +we'll have some high old times when it comes, me an' you.”</p> + +<p>“You and me!” exclaimed David.</p> + +<p>“Sartin; I want some good clothes an' so do you. 'Twon't be enough to +get us a hoss apiece. I <i>do</i> wish I had a circus hoss like Don +Gordon's, but we kin get some better shootin' irons, me an' you kin, +an' mebbe we can git a boat to hunt ducks in, an' some of them +fish-poles what breaks all in pieces an' you carry 'em under your +arm. An', Davy, mebbe we'll have a leetle left to get something fur +the ole woman.”</p> + +<p>“For mother! I rather think she'll get something,” said David, in a +tone of voice that made his brother look up in surprise. “She'll get +it all, every cent of it.”</p> + +<p>“Not by no means she won't,” exclaimed Dan, striking his open palm +with his clenched hand. “No, sir, not by a long shot. You kin give +her your shar', if you're fule enough to do it, but mine I'll keep +fur myself. I'll bet you on that.”</p> + +<p>“<i>Your</i> share?”</p> + +<p>“In course.”</p> + +<p>“I didn't know that you had any share in this business.”</p> + +<p>“Whoop!” yelled Dan.</p> + +<p>He dashed his hat upon the ground, jumped up and knocked his heels +together, coming down with his feet spread out and his clenched hands +hanging by his side, as if he were waiting for an attack from his +brother.</p> + +<p>“No, sir,” said David, quietly but firmly, “this is my own business. +If you want money, go to work and earn it for yourself. You've got +six dollars and six bits hidden away somewhere that you never offered +to share with me or mother either.”</p> + +<p>“I know it, kase it is my own. I worked hard fur it too.”</p> + +<p>“I don't know how, or when you got it,” answered David, who little +dreamed that his brother had more ready money than that, and that the +most of it rightfully belonged to himself, “and I have never asked +you for any of it. The money I shall receive for these quails will be +mine, all mine.”</p> + +<p>Dan uttered another wild Indian yell and once more went through the +process of preparing himself for a fight, leaping high into the air, +knocking his heels together, coming down with his feet spread out and +his hands clenched, and when he was fairly settled on the ground +again, he exclaimed:</p> + +<p>“Dave, does you want me to wallop you?”</p> + +<p>“No, I don't,” was the reply; “but if you do you won't keep me from +doing what I please with my own money.”</p> + +<p>“But it won't be your own when you get it. I'm older nor you be, an' +now that pap's away I'm the man of the house, I want you to know, an' +it's the properest thing that I should have the handlin' of all the +money that comes into the family. If you don't go 'have yourself it's +likely you won't tech a cent of them fifty dollars when it comes. If +you don't go to crossin' me, I'll give you your shar' an' I'll take +mine; an' we'll get some nice things like Don and Bert Gordon has +got.”</p> + +<p>“But how does it come that you will have any share in it? That's what +I can't understand.”</p> + +<p>“Why, I kalkerlate to help you set the traps an' take out the quail +when they're ketched, an' do a heap of sich hard work.”</p> + +<p>“I intend to do all that myself, and it isn't work either. It's +nothing but fun.”</p> + +<p>“But I'll have a shar' in it anyhow,” said Dan, with a grin, which +showed that he felt sure of his position, “kase look at the boards +I've split out fur you.”</p> + +<p>David laughed outright. “How many of them are there?” said he. “Five; +and I could have split them out in less than half the time you took +to do it, and made better boards besides. I can't use these at all.”</p> + +<p>“Dave,” said Dan, solemnly, as he picked up the frow and mallet, “I +see you're bound to go agin me.”</p> + +<p>“No, I am not, and I don't want you to go against me, either.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, you be. You're goin' to cheat me outen my shar' of them fifty +dollars, ain't you now?”</p> + +<p>“You will have no share in the money. It will all belong to me, and I +shall give it to mother.”</p> + +<p>“Then, Dave, not a quail do you ketch in these yere fields so long as +you hold to them idees. Don't you furget it, nuther.”</p> + +<p>“What do you mean?” asked David, in alarm. “What are you going to +do?”</p> + +<p>“I don't make no threatenings. I only say you can't ketch no birds so +long as you go agin me, an' that's jest what I mean. If you come to +me some day an' say, 'I wus wrong, Dannie, an' now I'm goin' to act +decent, like a brother had oughter do,' I'll give you my hand an' do +what I can to help you. You've got a big job afore you, an' you can't +by no means do it alone. You'd oughter have somebody to help you, an' +thar's a heap of hard work in me, the fust thing you know.”</p> + +<p>“That's so,” thought David, running his eyes over his brother's +stalwart figure; “but I guess it will stay there.”</p> + +<p>“We can make them fifty dollars easy, if we pull together; but you +can't make 'em by yourself, an' you shan't, nuther. You hear me?”</p> + +<p>As Dan said this he disappeared around the corner of the cabin, +leaving his brother standing silent and thoughtful. He came out again +in a few minutes with his rifle on his shoulder, and without saying +another word to David or even looking toward him, climbed over the +fence and went into the woods. When he was out of sight, David sat +down on one of his traps and went off into a brown study. He was in a +bad scrape, that was plain; and the longer he thought about it, the +darker the prospect seemed to grow. He had his choice between two +courses of action: he must either take Dan into partnership, divide +the money with him when it was earned, and permit himself to be +browbeaten and driven about as if he were little better than a dog; +or he must make an enemy of him by asserting his rights. Which of the +two was the more disagreeable and likely to lead to the most +unpleasant consequences, he could not determine. If Dan were accepted +as a partner, he would insist on handling all the money, and in that +case Mrs. Evans would probably see not a single cent of it; for Dan +did not care who suffered so long as his own wishes were gratified. +If he stuck to the resolution he had already formed, and went ahead +on his own responsibility, Dan would smash his traps whenever he +happened to find them (he was always roaming about in the woods, and +there was hardly a square rod of ground in the neighborhood that he +did not pass over in the course of a week), and liberate or wring the +necks of the birds that might chance to be in them. He never could +capture so many quails if Dan was resolved to work against him, and +neither could he make his enterprise successful if he allowed him an +interest in it. David did not know what to do.</p> + +<p>“I might as well give it up,” said he to himself, after a few +minutes' reflection. “I'll go up and tell Don that I can't fill the +order; and while I am about it, I might as well ask him for that +money. Perhaps, if I pay father's debt, Silas Jones will give us +what we need until I can find something to do.”</p> + +<p>With this thought in his mind, David arose and went into the cabin. +He put on the tattered garment he called a coat, exchanged his +dilapidated hat for another that had not seen quite so hard service, +and bent his steps toward General Gordon's house. While he was +hurrying along, thinking about his troubles and the coming interview +with Don Gordon, and wondering how he could word his request so that +his friend would not feel hard toward him for asking for his money +before it had been earned, he was almost ridden down by a horseman, +who came galloping furiously along the road, and who was close upon +him before David knew there was any one near.</p> + +<p>“Get out of the way, there!” shouted the rider. “Are you blind, that +you run right under a fellow's horse that way?”</p> + +<p>David sprang quickly to one side, and the horseman drew up his nag +with a jerk and looked down at him. It was Lester Brigham, one of the +neighborhood boys of whom we have never before had occasion to speak. +He was comparatively a new resident in that country. He had been +there only about a year, but during that time he had made himself +heartily detested by almost all the boys about Rochdale. Of course he +had his cronies—every fellow has; but all the best youngsters, like +Don and Bert Gordon and Fred and Joe Packard, would have little to do +with him. He had lived in the North until the close of the war, and +then his father removed to Mississippi, purchased the plantation +adjoining General Gordon's, and began the cultivation of cotton.</p> + +<p>Mr. Brigham was said to be the richest man in that county, and Lester +had more fine things than all the rest of the boys about there put +together. He took particular pride in his splendid hunting and +fishing outfit, and it was coveted by almost every boy who had seen +it. He had four guns—all breech-loaders; a beautiful little +fowling-piece for such small game as quails and snipes; a larger one +for ducks and geese; a light squirrel rifle, something like the one +Clarence Gordon owned; and a heavier weapon, which he called his deer +gun, and which carried a ball as large as the end of one's thumb. He +had two jointed fish-poles—one a light, split bamboo, such as is +used in fly-fishing, and the other a stout lancewood, for such heavy +fish as black bass and pike.</p> + +<p>If there was any faith to be put in the stories he told, Lester was a +hunter and fisherman who had few equals. Before he came to the South, +it was his custom, he said, to spend a portion of every winter in the +woods in the northern part of Michigan, and many a deer and bear had +fallen to his rifle there. He could catch trout and black bass where +other fellows would not think of looking for them, and as for quails, +it was no trouble at all for him to make a double shot and bag both +the birds every time. There were boys in the neighborhood who doubted +this. Game of all kinds was abundant, and Lester was given every +opportunity to exhibit the skill of which he boasted so loudly, but +he was never in the humor to do it. He seldom went hunting, and when +he did he always went alone, and no one ever knew how much game he +brought home.</p> + +<p>“Your name is Evans, isn't it?” demanded Lester.</p> + +<p>David replied that it was.</p> + +<p>“Are you the fellow who intends to trap fifty dozen quail in this +county, and send them up North?”</p> + +<p>“I am,” answered David.</p> + +<p>“Well, I just rode down here on purpose to tell you that such work as +that will not be allowed.”</p> + +<p>“Who will not allow it?”</p> + +<p>“I will not, for one, and my father for another.”</p> + +<p>“What have you to say about it?” asked David, who did not like the +insolent tone assumed by the young horseman. “Do the birds belong to +you?”</p> + +<p>“They are as much mine as they are yours, and if you have a right to +trap them and ship them off, I have a right to say that you shan't do +it.”</p> + +<p>“Why not? What harm will it do?”</p> + +<p>“It will do just this much harm: it will make the birds scarce about +here, and there are no more than we want to shoot ourselves. O, you +needn't laugh about it, I mean just what I say; and if you don't +promise that you will let the quail alone, you will see trouble. I am +going to get up a Sportsman's Club among the fellows, and then we'll +keep such poachers and pot-hunters as you where you belong. No one +objects to your shooting the birds over a dog—that's the way to +shoot them; but you shan't trap them and send them out of the +country. Will you promise that you will give up the idea?”</p> + +<p>“No, I won't,” answered David.</p> + +<p>“Then you'll find yourself in the hands of the law, the first thing +you know,” exclaimed Lester, angrily. “We won't stand any such work. +Don Gordon ought to be ashamed of himself for what he has done. He's +the meanest——”</p> + +<p>“Hold on, there!” interrupted David, with more spirit than he had yet +exhibited. “You don't want to say anything hard about Don while I am +around. He's a friend of mine, and I won't hear anybody abuse him. +He's the best fellow in the settlement, and so is his brother; and +any one who talks against him is just the opposite.”</p> + +<p>Lester seemed very much astonished at this bold language. He glared +down at David for a moment and then slipping his right hand through +the loop on the handle of his riding-whip, pulled his feet out of the +stirrups and acted as if he were about to dismount. “Do you know who +you are talking to?” said he.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I do,” replied David, “and that's just the kind of a fellow I +am.”</p> + +<p>Lester looked sharply at the ragged youth before him and then put his +feet back into the stirrups again and settled himself firmly in the +saddle. He felt safer there. “I'll be even with you for that,” said +he. “You shan't catch any quail in these woods this winter. I'll +break up every trap I find and I'll make the rest of the fellows do +the same.”</p> + +<p>Lester gave emphasis to his words by shaking his riding-whip at +David, and then wheeled his horse and rode away.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt4">CHAPTER IV.<br> + +MORE BAD NEWS.</a></h3> + +<p>David's feelings, as he stood there in the road, gazing after the +retreating horseman, were by no means of the most pleasant nature. He +was naturally a cheerful, light-hearted boy, and he would not look on +the dark side of things if he could help it. But he couldn't help it +now. Here was more trouble. If he had been disposed to give up in +despair when he found that his brother was working against him, he +had more reason to be discouraged when he learned that a new enemy +had suddenly appeared, and from a most unexpected quarter, too. That +was the way he looked at the matter at first; but after a little +reflection, he felt more like defying Dan and Lester both. What +business had either of them to interfere with his arrangements, and +say that he should not earn an honest dollar to give his mother, if +he could? None whatever, and he would succeed in spite of them. +He would get that grocery bill off his hands the first thing, and +when he was square with the world, he would go to work in earnest and +outwit all his foes, no matter how numerous or how smart they might +be. He would tell Don all about it and be governed by his advice.</p> + +<p>Having come to this determination, David once more, turned his face +toward the General's house. A few minutes' rapid walking brought him +to the barn and there he found the boy he wanted to see. The brothers +had just returned from a short ride—Don was not yet strong enough to +stand his usual amount of exercise—and having turned the ponies over +to the hostler, were on the point of starting for the house, when +David came in.</p> + +<p>“Halloo, Dave!” exclaimed Don, who was always the first to greet him. +“Traps all built?”</p> + +<p>“Not yet,” answered David, trying to look as cheerful as usual.</p> + +<p>“You have plenty of nails and timber, I suppose. If not come straight +to us. It will never do to let this thing fall through for want of a +little capital to go on,” said Don, who was as much interested in +David's success as though he expected to share in the profits of the +enterprise.</p> + +<p>“I have everything I want in the way of nails and boards,” replied +David, “but I—you know—may I see you just a minute, Don?”</p> + +<p>“Of course you may, or two or three minutes if you wish. Come on, +Bert. I have no secrets from my brother, <i>now</i>,” said Don with a +laugh. “I kept one thing secret from him and got myself into trouble +by it. If I had told him of it perhaps he would have made me behave +myself. Now what is it?” he added, when the three had drawn up in one +corner of the barn, out of earshot of the hostler.</p> + +<p>David was silent. He had made up his mind just what he wanted to say +to Don, but Lester Brigham's sudden appearance and the threats he had +made had scattered all his ideas, and he could not utter a word.</p> + +<p>“Speak up,” said Bert encouragingly. “You need not hesitate to talk +freely to us. But what's the matter with you? You look as though you +were troubled about something.”</p> + +<p>“I am troubled about a good many things,” said David, speaking now +after a desperate effort. “In the first place, there are two fellows +here who say I shan't trap any birds.”</p> + +<p>“Who are they?” demanded Don, surprised and indignant.</p> + +<p>“My brother Dan is one of them.”</p> + +<p>“Whew!” whistled Don, opening his eyes and looking at Bert.</p> + +<p>“I didn't want him to know anything about it,” continued David, “for +I was certain that he would make me trouble; but he found it out by +listening while I was talking about it, and wanted to join in with +me. I told him I didn't want him, and he said I shouldn't catch any +birds.”</p> + +<p>“Did he say what he would do to prevent it?” asked Bert.</p> + +<p>“O, it's easy enough to tell what he will do,” exclaimed Don. “He'll +steal or break the traps and kill the quails. There are plenty of +ways in which he can trouble us, if he makes up his mind to it.”</p> + +<p>“Who is the other?” asked Bert.</p> + +<p>“Lester Brigham.”</p> + +<p>Don whistled again, and then looked angry.</p> + +<p>“When did you see him, and what did he have to say about it?” he +asked. “Has he any reason to hold a grudge against you?”</p> + +<p>“I didn't know that he had until I met him in the road this morning. +He says he won't have me trapping quails and sending them off North, +because it will make them scarce here. He says he is going to get up +a Sportsman's Club among the fellows, and then he will keep +pot-hunters like me where we belong.”</p> + +<p>“Oho!” exclaimed Bert. “It seems to me that he is taking a good deal +upon himself.”</p> + +<p>“That is what he has done ever since he has been here, and that's why +there are so many boys in the settlement who don't like him,” said +Don. “But he mustn't meddle with this business. He can't come down +here into a country that is almost a wilderness and manage matters as +they do up North. Father told me the other day that in some states +they have laws to protect game, and it is right that they should +have, for there are so many hunters that if they were not restrained +they would kill all the birds and animals in a single season. The +most of the hunters live in the city, and when they get out with +their guns they crack away at everything they see; and if they happen +to kill a doe with a fawn at her side, or a quail with a brood of +chicks, it makes no difference to them. Sportsman's Clubs are of some +<i>use</i> there, but we have no need of them in this country.”</p> + +<p>“He wants the quails left here, so that he can shoot them over his +dog,” continued David.</p> + +<p>“O, he does! When is he going to begin? He has been here more than a +year, and nobody has ever heard of his killing a quail yet. He must +keep his fingers out of this pie. We can't put up with any +interference from him. Any more bad news?” added Don, seeing that +David's face had not yet wholly cleared up.</p> + +<p>“Yes, there is,” replied the latter, speaking rapidly, for fear that +his courage might desert him again. “Just after you left me this +morning, Silas Jones rode up and dunned me for eight dollars that +father owes him.”</p> + +<p>“Why, you have nothing to do with that,” said Bert.</p> + +<p>“Nothing whatever,” chimed in Don. “You tell Mr. Jones that if he +wants his money he had better hunt up your father and ask him for it. +You don't owe him anything, do you?”</p> + +<p>“No, but he says that if I don't settle that bill, he'll never let me +have a thing at his store again unless I have the money in my hand to +pay for it. I haven't a cent of my own, and I thought if you could +let me have the ten dollars you promised me for breaking the pointer, +I should be much obliged to you.”</p> + +<p>“If I would do what?” asked Don, in amazement.</p> + +<p>“Why, David,” said Bert, “the money was all paid to you in less than +twenty-four hours after the dog was placed in your keeping.”</p> + +<p>“Paid to me?” gasped David.</p> + +<p>“Well, no, not to you, but to your order.”</p> + +<p>“To my order!” repeated the boy, who began to think he was dreaming.</p> + +<p>“Yes, to your order,” said Don. “We left the pointer in your hands at +noon, while you were at dinner. In less than an hour afterward, Dan +came over and said that you wanted five dollars to buy a dress for +your mother, and Bert gave him the money. The next forenoon your +father met me at the landing and told me you wanted the other five to +buy some medicine for your mother, who was ill with the ague, and I +gave it to him, and I just know I made a mess of it,” added Don, +bringing his hands together with a loud slap.</p> + +<p>It was plain from the looks of David's face that he had. The boy +listened with eyes wide open, his under jaw dropping down and his +face growing pale, as the duplicity of which his father and brother +had been guilty was gradually made plain to him, and when at last his +mind grasped the full import of Don's words, he covered his face with +his hands and cried aloud. Don and Bert looked at him in surprise, +and then turned and looked at each other. They who had never wanted +for the necessities, and who had never but once, and that was during +the war, lacked the luxuries of life, could not understand why his +grief should be so overwhelming; but they could understand that they +had been deceived, and even the gentle-spirited Bert was indignant +over it. The impulsive Don could scarcely restrain himself. He walked +angrily up and down the floor, thrashing his boots with his +riding-whip and cracking it in the air so viciously that the ponies +danced about in their stalls.</p> + +<p>“Dave,” said Bert, at length, “are we to understand that your father +and brother came to us and got that money without any authority from +you?”</p> + +<p>“That's just what they did,” sobbed David.</p> + +<p>“And you never saw a cent of it?”</p> + +<p>“Not one cent, or mother either.”</p> + +<p>“Well, what of it?” exclaimed Don. “Brace up and be a man, Dave. A +ten-dollar bill is not an everlasting fortune.”</p> + +<p>“I know it isn't much to you, but it is a good deal to me. You don't +know what the loss of it means. It means corn-bread and butter-milk +for breakfast, dinner and supper.”</p> + +<p>“Well, what of that?” said Don, again. “I have eaten more than one +dinner at the Gayoso House, in Memphis—and it is one of the best +hotels in the country—when corn-bread and butter-milk were down in +the bill of fare as part of the dessert.”</p> + +<p>“Well, if all the folks who stop at that hotel had to live on it, as +we do, they would call for something else,” replied David. “How am I +to settle Silas Jones's bill, I'd like to know?”</p> + +<p>“Never mind Silas Jones's bill. If he says anything more to you about +it, tell him that you don't owe him a cent.”</p> + +<p>“And how am I to send my quails away? That man said the charges must +be paid.”</p> + +<p>“Ah! that's a more serious matter,” said Don, placing his hands on +his hips, and looking down at the floor.</p> + +<p>“It is all serious to me,” said David, brushing the tears from his +eyes, “but I'll work through somehow. I'll go home now and think +about it, and if I don't earn that money in spite of all my bad luck, +it will not be because I don't try.”</p> + +<p>“That's the way to talk,” said Don, giving David an encouraging slap +on the back. “That's the sort of spirit I like. Bert and I will see +you again, perhaps this afternoon. In the meantime we'll talk the +matter over, and if we three fellows are not smart enough to beat the +two who are opposing us, we'll know the reason why.”</p> + +<p>David hurried out of the barn, in order to hide his tears, which +every instant threatened to break forth afresh, and Don, turning to +the hostler, ordered him to put the saddles on the ponies again. +“Father is down in the field,” said he, to his brother, “and it may +be two or three hours before he will come to the house. I can't wait +so long, so we'll ride down there and talk the matter over with him. +He hasn't forgotten that he was a boy once himself, and he will tell +us just what we ought to do.”</p> + +<p>The ponies were led out again in a few minutes, and Bert, having +assisted his brother into the saddle, mounted his own nag, and the +two rode down the lane toward the field. Of course they could talk +about only one thing, and that was the ill-luck that seemed to meet +their friend David at every turn. The longer Bert thought and talked +of the trick that had been played upon himself and his brother, the +more indignant he became; while Don, having had time to recover a +little of his usual good nature, was more disposed to laugh over it. +He declared that it was the sharpest piece of business he had ever +heard of, and wondered greatly that Godfrey and Dan, whom he had +always believed to be as stupid as so many blocks, should have +suddenly exhibited so much shrewdness. Bert declared that it was a +wicked swindle; and the earnestness with which he denounced the whole +proceeding made Don laugh louder than ever. Of course the latter did +not forget that the trick which so highly amused him, had been the +means of placing David in a very unpleasant situation, but still he +did not think much about that, for he believed that his father would +be able to make some suggestions, which, if acted upon, would +straighten things out in short order.</p> + +<p>“Well, Don, how does it seem, to find yourself in the saddle again? +You appear to enjoy the exercise, but Bert doesn't. He looks as +though he had lost his last friend.”</p> + +<p>This was the way General Gordon greeted his boys, when they rode up +beside the stump on which he was seated, superintending the negroes +who were at work in the field. Bert brightened up at once, but +replied that he thought he had good cause to look down-hearted, and +with this introduction he went on and told David's story just as the +latter had told it to him and his brother. The General listened +good-naturedly, as he always did to anything his boys had to tell +him, and when Bert ceased speaking, he pulled off a piece of the +stump and began to whittle it with his knife. The boys waited for him +to say something, but as he did not, Bert continued:</p> + +<p>“We came down here to ask you what we ought to do about it, and we +want particularly to know your opinion concerning the trick Dan and +his father played on us.”</p> + +<p>“That is easily given,” replied the General. “My opinion is that +Master Don is just ten dollars out of pocket.”</p> + +<p>“You don't mean that I must pay it over again?” exclaimed Don.</p> + +<p>“No, I don't mean that, because you haven't paid it at all.”</p> + +<p>“Why, father, I——”</p> + +<p>“I understand. Dan made a demand upon Bert, and Bert borrowed five +dollars of his mother and gave it to him. Godfrey came to you for the +other five, and you gave it to him. David has not yet been paid for +breaking the pointer.”</p> + +<p>“No, sir; but we supposed that his father and brother had authority +to ask us for the money.”</p> + +<p>“You had no right to suppose anything of the kind. You ought to have +paid the money into David's own hands, or else satisfied yourselves +that he wanted it paid to some one else. Among business men it is +customary, in such cases, to send a written order. You must pay +David, and this time be sure that he gets the money.”</p> + +<p>“Whew!” whistled Don, who was very much surprised by this decision. +“That will make a big hole in the money I was saving for Christmas; +but David needs it more than I do, and besides it belongs to him. +What shall we do to Godfrey and Dan? They obtained those ten dollars +under false pretences, did they not?”</p> + +<p>“I don't know whether a lawyer could make a case out of that or not,” +said the General, with a laugh. “I am afraid he couldn't, so you will +have to stand the loss. Perhaps you will learn something by it.”</p> + +<p>“I am quite sure that I have learned something already,” replied Don. +“But now about Dan and Lester. How are we going to keep them from +interfering with David?”</p> + +<p>“Why, it seems to me that I could hide my traps where they would +never think of looking for them, and where I would be sure to catch +quails, too. If I thought I couldn't, I would set them all on this +plantation, and any one who troubled them would render himself liable +for trespass.”</p> + +<p>“Aha!” exclaimed Don, who caught the idea at once.</p> + +<p>“But, in order to throw Dan off the scent entirely, you might have +David come up to our shop every day and build his traps there. He +will find all the tools he wants, and those shingles we tore off that +old corn-crib will answer his purpose better than new ones, because +they are old and weather-beaten, and look just like the wood in the +forest. When I was a boy, I never had any luck in catching birds in +bright new traps. When the birds are caught, he can put them into one +of those unoccupied negro cabins and lock them up until he is ready +to send them off.”</p> + +<p>“That's the very idea!” cried Don, gleefully. “We knew that if there +was any way out of the difficulty, you would be sure to see it.”</p> + +<p>The General bowed in acknowledgment of the compliment, and the +brothers turned their horses about and rode away. When they reached +the barn Don was willing to confess that he was very tired. Riding on +horseback is hard work for one who is stiff in every joint and lame +all over; but Don could not think of going into the house and taking +a rest. He had been a close prisoner there for a whole week, and now +that he had taken a breath of fresh air and stirred his sluggish +blood with a little exhilarating exercise, he could not bear to go +back to his sofa again. He proposed that they should leave their +ponies at the barn and go up to David's in the canoe. They would take +their guns with them, he said, and after they had paid David his +money, they would row a short distance up the bayou, and perhaps they +might be fortunate enough to knock over a duck or two for the next +day's dinner.</p> + +<p>Bert, of course, agreed to the proposition, and went into the shop +after the oars belonging to the canoe, while Don went into the house +again after the guns. When he came out again he had a breech-loader +on each shoulder and David's ten dollars in his pocket. Paying that +bill twice did make a big hole in his Christmas money, for it took +just half of it.</p> + +<p>The brothers walked along the garden path that ran toward the lake, +and when Don, who was leading the way, stepped upon the jetty he +missed something at once. The canoe was gone. They had not been near +the jetty for a week, and the last time they were there the boat was +all right. It could not have got away without help, for it was firmly +tied to a ring in the jetty by the chain, which served as a painter, +and even if that had become loosened the canoe would have remained +near its moorings, for there was no current in the lake to carry it +from the shore. Beyond a doubt, it had been stolen. Don would not +have felt the loss more keenly if the thief had taken his fine +sail-boat. The canoe was almost as old as he was, and in it he and +Bert had taken their first ride on the lake and captured their first +wounded duck.</p> + +<p>“It's gone,” said Don, after he and Bert had looked all around the +lake as far as their eyes could reach, “and that's all there is of +it. But we'll not give up our trip. We'll go in the sail-boat.”</p> + +<p>The sail-boat had been dismantled, and the masts, sails, rudder and +everything else belonging to her had been stored in the shop under +cover. While Bert was gone after the oars, Don drew the boat up to +the jetty, and having stowed the guns away in the stow-sheets, he got +in himself and took another survey of the lake to make sure that the +canoe was nowhere in sight. It was hard to give it up as lost.</p> + +<p>Bert came back in a few minutes, and having shipped the oars shoved +off and pulled down the lake. A quarter of an hour afterward they +landed on the beach in front of Godfrey's cabin. They found David +wandering listlessly about in the back yard with his hands in his +pockets; and when he came up to the fence in response to their call, +they saw that he had been crying again.</p> + +<p>“David,” exclaimed Don, putting his hand into his pocket, “we've got +news for you that will make you wear a different looking face when +you hear it. After you went home, we rode down to see father, and he +told us—Eh!” cried Don, turning quickly toward his brother, who just +then gave his arm a sly pinch.</p> + +<p>“Let me tell it,” said Bert. “We'd like to see you at our house this +evening about five o'clock; can you come?”</p> + +<p>“I reckon I can,” answered David. “Was that the good news you wanted +to tell me?”</p> + +<p>“No—I believe—yes, it was,” said Don, who received another fearful +pinch on the arm and saw his brother looking at him in a very +significant way. “You come up, anyhow.”</p> + +<p>“We've got some work for you to do up there,” said Bert. “It will not +pay you much at first, but perhaps you can make something out of it +by-and-by. It will keep you busy for two or three weeks, perhaps +longer. Will you come?”</p> + +<p>David replied that he would, and turned away with an expression of +surprise and disappointment on his face. The eager, almost excited +manner in which Don greeted him, led him to hope that he had +something very pleasant and encouraging to tell, and somehow he +couldn't help thinking that his visitors had not said just what they +intended to say when they first came up to the fence.</p> + +<p>“What in the name of sense and Tom Walker was the matter with you, +Bert?” demanded Don, as soon as the two were out of David's hearing. +“My arm is all black and blue, I know!”</p> + +<p>“I didn't want you to say too much,” was Bert's reply, “and I didn't +know any other way to stop your talking. There was a listener close +by.”</p> + +<p>“A listener! Who was it?”</p> + +<p>“David's brother. Just as you began speaking I happened to look +toward the cabin, and saw through the cracks between the logs that +the window on the other side was open. Close to one of those cracks, +and directly in line with the window, was a head. I knew it was Dan's +head the moment I saw it.”</p> + +<p>“Aha!” exclaimed Don. “He had his trouble for his pains this time, +hadn't he? Or, rather, he had the trouble and I had the pain,” he +added, rubbing his arm.</p> + +<p>Bert laughed and said he thought that was about the way the matter +stood.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt5">CHAPTER V.<br> + +DAN IS ASTONISHED.</a></h3> + +<p>Many times during his life had David had good reason to be +discouraged, but he had never been so strongly tempted to give up +trying altogether and settle down into a professional vagabond, as he +was when he left General Gordon's barn and turned his face toward +home. He had relied upon Don to show him a way out of his trouble, +but his friend had not helped him at all; he had only made matters +worse by telling him more bad news. Nothing seemed to go right with +him. There was Dan, who never did anything, and yet he was better off +in the world and seemed to be just as happy as David, who was always +striving to better his condition and continually on the lookout for a +chance to earn a dollar or two. Why should he not stop work and let +things take their own course, as his brother did? He reached home +while he was revolving this question in his mind, and the first +person he saw when he climbed the fence and walked toward the +shingle-pile to resume work upon his traps, was his brother Dan.</p> + +<p>“Whar you been an' what you been a doin' of?” demanded the latter, as +if he had a right to know.</p> + +<p>“I've been over to Don's house,” answered David; “and while I was +there I found out that you and father borrowed my ten dollars.”</p> + +<p>“'Tain't so nuther,” cried Dan, trying to look surprised and +indignant.</p> + +<p>“I believe everything Don and Bert tell me. They have never lied to +me and you have.”</p> + +<p>“Whoop!” yelled Dan, jumping up and knocking his heels together.</p> + +<p>“I mean every word of it,” said David, firmly. “You have got me into +a tight scrape, but I'll work out of it somehow. And let me tell you +one thing, Dan; you'll never have a chance to steal any more of my +money.”</p> + +<p>“Then why don't you divide it like a feller had oughter do?” asked +Dan, angrily.</p> + +<p>“Why don't you divide with mother and me when you have some?”</p> + +<p>“Kase I work hard for it an' it b'longs to me; that's why.” And +knowing by his past experience that he could not hold his own in an +argument with his brother, Dan turned about and went into the house.</p> + +<p>David worked faithfully at his traps, paying no further heed to his +brother's movements. He tried to keep his mind on what he was doing, +but now and then the recollection of the heavy loss he had sustained +would come back to him with overwhelming force and the tears would +start to his eyes in spite of all he could do to prevent it. Then he +would throw down his hammer and wander about with his hands in his +pockets, wondering what was the use of trying to do anything or be +anybody while things were working so strongly against him.</p> + +<p>It was during one of these idle periods that Don and Bert came up. +David's hopes arose immediately when he caught sight of Don's smiling +face, for he was sure that he was about to hear something +encouraging. Indeed, Don's first words confirmed this impression; but +it turned out that they had come there simply to offer him work that +would keep him busy for two or three weeks. Of course David wanted +work, but just then he wanted money more. He wanted to pay that +grocery bill, so that he could look Silas Jones in the face the next +time he met him.</p> + +<p>When the brothers got into their boat and rowed away, David went back +to his traps, while Dan, who had been disappointed in his hopes of +hearing some private conversation between the visitors and his +brother, shouldered his rifle and disappeared in the woods.</p> + +<p>David worked away industriously until the sun told him that it was +nearly four o'clock, and then he put on his coat and started off to +keep his appointment with Don and Bert. He found them waiting for him +at the General's barn, and he was not a little surprised when they +seized him by the arms and pulled him into the carpenter-shop, the +door of which they were careful to close and lock behind them.</p> + +<p>“Now I know we can talk without danger of being overheard,” exclaimed +Don. “We've got lots to tell you; but in the first place,” he added, +opening his pocket-book, “there's your money.”</p> + +<p>The expression of joy and surprise that came upon David's face as he +hesitatingly, almost reluctantly, took the crisp, new bill that was +held toward him, amply repaid Don for the loss of the pleasure he had +expected to derive in spending the money for Christmas presents.</p> + +<p>“Why, I understood you to say that father and Dan had drawn this +money,” said he, as soon as he could speak.</p> + +<p>“So they did, but my father says the loss is mine and not yours.”</p> + +<p>David drew a long breath. He understood the matter now. “It isn't +fair that you should pay it twice,” said he.</p> + +<p>“I haven't paid it twice; that is, I haven't paid you at all. It's +all right, David, you may depend upon it. They'll never fool us +again. If I should ever have any more of your money, nobody could get +it except yourself.”</p> + +<p>“Or mother,” added David.</p> + +<p>“O, of course. I wouldn't be afraid to trust her.”</p> + +<p>“I was in hopes that you would have a good deal of my money in your +hands some day,” continued David. “I was going to ask you to keep my +hundred and fifty dollars for me; but I don't know now whether I +shall ever get it or not.”</p> + +<p>“Of course you'll get it,” exclaimed Bert. “You are not going to give +up the idea of trapping the quails, are you?”</p> + +<p>“No, but I don't know that I shall make anything at it, for Dan and +Lester can break up my traps faster than I can make them.”</p> + +<p>“Well, they'll not break up a single one of your traps, because——”</p> + +<p>Here Don began and hurriedly repeated the conversation which he and +Bert had had with their father a few hours before. As David listened +the look of trouble his face had worn all that day gradually faded +away, and the old happy smile took its place. His confidence in his +friends had not been misplaced; Dan and Lester Brigham were to be +outwitted after all.</p> + +<p>The traps and the “figure fours” with which they were to be set, +could be built there in the shop, Don said. There were tools and a +bench and everything else needful close at hand, so that the work +could be done in half the time that David had expected to devote to +it. As fast as the traps were completed they were to be set in +General Gordon's fields. They would be safe there and Dan Evans or +Lester Brigham or anybody else who came near them, would be likely to +get himself into trouble. The negroes were always at work in the +fields in the daytime, and if they were told to keep their eyes open +and report any outsiders who might be seen prowling about the fences, +they would be sure to do it. The best course David could pursue would +be to say nothing more about trapping the quails. Let Dan believe +that he had become discouraged and given up the enterprise. If he +wanted to know what it was that took his brother over to General +Gordon's house so regularly, David could tell him that he was doing +some work there, which would be the truth; and besides it would be +all Dan had any right to know.</p> + +<p>As fast as the birds were caught, they could be locked up in one of +the empty negro cabins; and any one who found out that they were +there and tried to steal them, would run the risk of being caught by +Don's hounds. It was a splendid plan, taken altogether, and David's +eyes fairly glistened while it was unfolded to him. He thanked the +brothers over and over again for their kindness and the interest they +took in his success, and might have kept on thanking them if Don had +not interrupted him with—</p> + +<p>“O, that's all understood. Now, before you begin work on those traps +we want you to help us one day. We've had a good deal of excitement +and some good luck since we last saw you. We have recovered my canoe, +which somebody stole from me, and we have found out that there is a +bear living on Bruin's Island.”</p> + +<p>“He must be a monster, too, for such growls I never heard before,” +said Bert.</p> + +<p>“Didn't you see him?” asked David.</p> + +<p>“No. We landed to explore the island, and while we were going through +the cane he growled at us, and we took the hint and left. We didn't +have a single load of heavy shot with us. We're going up there +to-morrow, and we want you to go with us. We'll go fixed for him, +too. We'll have a couple of good dogs with us; I'll take my rifle; +Bert will take father's heavy gun; and we'd like to have you take +your single-barrel. If he gets a bullet and three loads of buckshot +in his head, he'll not growl at us any more. If we don't get a chance +to shoot him, we'll build a trap and catch him alive the next time he +comes to the island. Will you go?”</p> + +<p>Of course David would go. He would have gone anywhere that Don told +him to go. He promised to be at the barn at an early hour the next +morning, and then showed a desire to leave the shop; so Don unlocked +the door, and David hurried out and turned his face toward the +landing. He had money now, and that grocery bill should not trouble +him any longer.</p> + +<p>“If there ever was a lucky boy in the world I am the one,” thought +David, whose spirits were elevated in the same ratio in which they +had before been depressed. “I'll earn my hundred and fifty dollars +now, and mother shall have her nice things in spite of Dan and +Lester. It isn't every fellow who has such friends as Don and Bert +Gordon. But I shall have a hard time of it, anyhow. Dan will be so +mad when he finds out that he can't ruin me, that he will do +something desperate.”</p> + +<p>David, however, did not waste much time in thinking of the troubles +that might come in the future. He preferred to think about pleasanter +things. He was so wholly engrossed with his plans that it seemed to +him that he was not more than five minutes in reaching the landing. +There was no one in the street, and nothing there worth looking at, +except General Gordon's white horse, which was hitched to a post in +front of Silas Jones's store. As David approached, the General +himself came out, accompanied by the grocer, who was as polite and +attentive to his rich customers as he was indifferent to the poor +ones.</p> + +<p>“Ah, David!” exclaimed the General, extending his hand; “how are +times now? Business looking up any?”</p> + +<p>“Y-yes, sir,” stammered the boy, who could scarcely speak at all. He +was not abashed by the rich man's presence, for he had learned to +expect a friendly nod or a cordial grasp of the hand every time he +met him; but he was very much astonished by the greeting which Silas +Jones extended to him. No sooner had the General released David's +hand than it was seized by the grocer, who appeared to be as glad to +see him as though he knew that the boy had come there to buy a bill +of goods worth hundreds of dollars.</p> + +<p>“It never does any good to give away to our gloomy feelings,” said +the General. “There are many times when things don't go just as we +would like to have them, but the day always follows the night, and a +little perseverance sometimes works wonders.”</p> + +<p>David understood what the General meant, but it was plain that the +grocer did not, for he looked both bewildered and surprised. He bowed +to his rich customer, as he rode off, and then, turning to David, +conducted him into the store with a great deal of ceremony.</p> + +<p>“Mr. Jones,” said David, who began to think that the grocer must have +taken leave of his senses, “I have come here to settle father's +bill.”</p> + +<p>“O, that's all right,” was the smiling reply. “It isn't fair that I +should hold you responsible for that debt, and I have concluded that +I will not do it. Your father will pay me some time, perhaps, and if +he doesn't, I'll let it go. The loss of it won't break me. Can I do +anything for you this evening?”</p> + +<p>David was more astonished than ever. Was this the man who had spoken +so harshly to him no longer ago than that very morning? What had +happened to work so great a change in him? It was the General's visit +that did it. When Don and Bert left their father, after holding that +short consultation with him in the field, the latter took a few +minutes to think the matter over, and when his hands had finished +their work, he mounted his horse and rode down to the landing, to +have a talk with Mr. Jones. What passed between them no one ever +knew, but it was noticed that from that day forward, whenever David +came into the store to trade, he was treated with as much respect as +he would have been had he been known to have his pockets full of +money.</p> + +<p>“Want anything in my line this evening?” continued the grocer, +rubbing his hands; “a hat or a pair of shoes and stockings for +yourself, a nice warm dress for mother, or——”</p> + +<p>“O, I want a good many things,” replied David, “but I shall have only +two dollars left after your bill is paid, and that must keep us in +groceries for at least a month—perhaps longer.”</p> + +<p>To David's great amazement, the merchant replied: “Your credit is +good for six months. As for your father's debt, I wouldn't let you +pay it if you were made of money. Better take home some tea, coffee +and sugar with you, hadn't you? It is always a good plan to replenish +before you get entirely out, you know.”</p> + +<p>“O, we were out long ago,” said David, who could not help smiling at +the mistake Silas made in supposing that tea, coffee and sugar +appeared on his mother's table every day. “We haven't had any in our +house for almost a month.”</p> + +<p>“Is that so?” exclaimed the grocer, “Then I'll put up some for you, +and lend you a basket to carry it home in.”</p> + +<p>David leaned upon the counter and began a little problem in mental +arithmetic, with the view of ascertaining how much of his money it +would take to keep his mother supplied with the luxuries the grocer +had mentioned for one month, and how much he would have left to +invest in clothing for her; but before the problem was solved the +grocer had placed three neat packages, good-sized ones, too, on the +counter, and was looking for a basket to put them in.</p> + +<p>“Now, then,” said he, briskly, “what next? A dress for mother or a +pair of shoes for yourself? The mornings are getting to be pretty +cold now, and you can't run around barefooted much longer. Ah, Dan! +how do you do?”</p> + +<p>David looked up and was surprised to see his brother standing by his +side. He was surprised, too, to notice that the grocer greeted him +almost as cordially as he had greeted himself but a few minutes +before. David was not glad that he was there, for the expression on +Dan's face told him that he had seen and heard more than he had any +business to know. David made haste to finish his trading after that, +and when he had purchased a dress and a pair of shoes for his mother, +and a pair of shoes and stockings for himself, he handed out his +ten-dollar bill in payment. Dan's eyes seemed ready to start from +their sockets at the sight of it.</p> + +<p>“Never mind that, now,” said the grocer, pushing it back. “Perhaps +you will need it some day and I can wait six months, if you are not +ready to settle up before.”</p> + +<p>Dan's eyes opened still wider, and when his brother, after thanking +the grocer for his kindness and confidence, gathered up his purchases +and left the store, he followed slowly after him, so wholly lost in +wonder that he never recollected that he had six dollars in his own +pocket, and that he had come there to spend the best part of five of +it. He walked along at a little distance behind his brother, looking +thoughtfully at the ground all the while, as if he were revolving +some perplexing question in his mind, and then quickened his pace to +overtake him.</p> + +<p>“Le' me carry some of them things,” said he, as he came up with +David.</p> + +<p>“No, I thank you,” replied the latter, who knew that Dan never would +have offered to help him, if he had not hoped to gain something by +it. “I can get along very well by myself. The load is not a heavy +one.”</p> + +<p>“You're an amazin' lucky feller, Davy,” continued Dan. “What you been +a doin' to Silas, to make him speak so kind to us poor folks?”</p> + +<p>“I haven't done anything to him. I don't know how to account for it, +any more than you do.”</p> + +<p>“What's the matter, now? Forgot something?” asked Dan, as his brother +suddenly stopped and looked toward the landing, as if he had half a +mind to turn around and go back there.</p> + +<p>Yes, David had forgotten something, and it was very important too, he +thought. He knew that Dan was always on the lookout for a chance to +make a penny without work, and David was afraid that he might be +tempted to repeat the trick which he and his father had played upon +Don and Bert with so much success.</p> + +<p>It would be a very easy matter for Dan to make up some plausible +story to tell the grocer, and perhaps on the strength of his +brother's almost unlimited credit, he might be able to obtain a few +little articles of which he stood in need. David had never thought to +put Silas on his guard.</p> + +<p>“I'll hold them things fur you, if you want to run back thar,” said +Dan, reaching out his hand for the basket.</p> + +<p>“No, I'll let it go until the next time I come down,” answered David. +“A day or two will not make much difference.”</p> + +<p>“Whar did you get them ten dollars, any how?” asked Dan, as the two +once more turned their faces homeward.</p> + +<p>“That's the money you tried to cheat me out of,” replied his brother. +“Don says the loss was his and not mine.”</p> + +<p>“Did he give you ten dollars more?” exclaimed Dan.</p> + +<p>“Not ten dollars more, for this is the first he has given me. You and +father got what I ought to have had.”</p> + +<p>“An' you never spent none on it, did you? I seen Silas shove it back +to you.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, I've got it safe in my pocket. I'm going to keep it, too.”</p> + +<p>“Wal, I'll bet a hoss you don't,” was Dan's mental reflection. “I'd +oughter have some on it, an' if you don't give it to me without my +axin' you, I'll have it all. I'm the man of the house now, an' it's +the properest thing that I should have the handlin' of all the money +that comes in.”</p> + +<p>Of course Dan was much too smart to say this aloud. He knew that any +threats from him would put his brother on his guard, and then he +might whistle for the ten dollars. He said no more, and the two +walked along in silence until they came to General Gordon's barn. +Just as David was going into it, he met Lester Brigham riding out of +it. Lester scowled down at him, but David did not scowl back. He was +quite willing to forget that they had ever had any difficulty and to +be friendly with Lester, if the latter wanted him to be. It is +probable, however, that he would have had different feelings, if he +had known what it was that brought Lester over to Don's house.</p> + +<p>David, as we have said, turned into the barn, and Dan, who had more +than his share of curiosity, would have given almost anything he +possessed to know what business he had there; but he could not go in +to see, for he dared not face Don and Bert after what he had done, so +he kept on toward home.</p> + +<p>David deposited his basket and bundles on the steps that led to the +loft, and making his way around the north wing of the house, knocked +at the door, which was presently opened by Bert. David asked if Don +was in, and receiving an affirmative reply, was ushered into the +library, where his friend, wearied with his day's exercise, was +taking his ease on the sofa, which had been drawn up in front of a +cheerful wood fire. David declined to accept the chair which Bert +placed for him, and opened his business at once.</p> + +<p>“Don,” said he, “would you be willing to take that money you gave me +and keep it until I call for it?”</p> + +<p>“Of course I would,” replied Don, readily. “You haven't paid that +grocery bill, then? Well, I wouldn't either. You are not responsible +for it.”</p> + +<p>“I offered to pay it, but Mr. Jones wouldn't take the money. He says +my credit is good for six months.”</p> + +<p>“Why, what has come over him all of a sudden?” said Don, who did not +know that his father had had an interview with Silas that very day.</p> + +<p>“I wish I knew. There's the money, and you won't let anybody have it, +except mother or me, will you?”</p> + +<p>“You may be sure that I will take good care of it this time. Don't +forget that bear hunt, tomorrow.”</p> + +<p>“No. I'll be on hand bright and early. Good-by.”</p> + +<p>David hurried out, and picking up the basket and bundles he had left +in the barn, started for home. When he got there, he was surprised to +see that Dan was at work. He had pulled off his coat, rolled up his +sleeves and with a frow and mallet in his hands, was busy splitting +out shingles. David said nothing to him, but went into the house to +put away the tea, coffee and sugar and place the articles he had +bought for his mother in a conspicuous position, so that she would be +sure to see them, the moment she entered the door. While he was thus +engaged, Dan came in smiling, and trying to look good-natured. David +was on his guard at once.</p> + +<p>“I'll tell you what I've made up my mind to do by you, Davy,” said +Dan, “an' when you hear what it is, if you don't say I'm the best +brother you ever had, I want to know what's the reason why. I ain't +goin' agin you like I told you I was.”</p> + +<p>“I am very glad to hear it,” said David.</p> + +<p>“No, I ain't. I'm goin' to be pardners with you, an' I'm goin' to +give you half the money we make outen them quail. I'll give you half +what I've got hid away, too.”</p> + +<p>“I have no claim upon that,” replied David. “It belongs to Don +Gordon, and if you are honest you'll give him every cent of it.”</p> + +<p>“I can't do it,” said Dan. “Kase why, I give pap three an' a half of +it, an' spent six bits myself.”</p> + +<p>“Then give him what you have, and tell him that you will hand him the +rest as soon as you can earn it.”</p> + +<p>“Not by no means, I won't,” said Dan, quickly. “Ten dollars ain't +nothing to him.”</p> + +<p>“That makes no difference. It is his, and he ought to have it.”</p> + +<p>“Wal, I'll tell you what I'll do: I'll pay him outen them fifty +dollars we're goin' to get fur them quail. An', Davy, if you'll give +me the money you've got in your pocket, I'll hide it with mine whar +nobody can't find it, and then it'll be safe.”</p> + +<p>“It is safe now.”</p> + +<p>“But if I go halves with you, you had oughter go halves with me. +Let's go out to them traps agin, and we kin talk it over while we're +workin'.”</p> + +<p>“I am not going to do anything more with those traps.”</p> + +<p>“You hain't give it up, have you? You ain't goin' to let them fifty +dollars slip through your fingers, be you?”</p> + +<p>“What encouragement have I to do anything after what you said this +morning? I have made other arrangements. I am going to work over at +the General's.”</p> + +<p>David expected that his brother would be very angry when he heard +this, but if he was, he did not show it. He looked steadily at David +for a moment and then turned and walked around the corner of the +cabin out of sight.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt6">CHAPTER VI.<br> + +BRUIN'S ISLAND.</a></h3> + +<p>“That's a purty way he's got of doin' business, I do think. He's a +trifle the meanest feller I ever seed, Dave is, an' if I don't pay +him fur it afore he's a great many weeks older, I'll just play myself +out a tryin'. If me an' him works together we kin get them fifty +dollars as easy as fallin' off a log; but he can't arn 'em by +hisself, an' he shan't, nuther.”</p> + +<p>This was the way Dan Evans talked to himself, as he trudged through +the woods with his rifle on his shoulder, after his unsuccessful +attempt to overhear what passed between his brother and Don and Bert +Gordon; or, rather, after his failure to find out what it was that +brought Don and Bert to the cabin. He <i>did</i> overhear what passed +between them, but he did not learn anything by it. Of course that +made him angry. A good many things had happened that day to make him +angry, and he had gone off in the woods by himself to think and plan +vengeance.</p> + +<p>“Bein' the man of the house I've got more right to them fifty dollars +nor Dave has,” thought Dan, “an' if he don't give me half of 'em, he +shan't see a cent of 'em hisself. Wouldn't I look nice loafin' around +in these yere clothes while Dave was dressed up like a gentleman an' +takin' his ease? I'll bust up them traps of his'n faster'n he kin +make 'em. I'll show him that I'm the boss of this house now that +pap's away, no matter if them Gordon fellers is a backin' on him up. +I've larned a heap by listenin'. I heard Dave tell the ole woman that +he's goin' to make three dollars a dozen outen them quail. I didn't +larn nothing this arternoon, howsomever. Them fellers must a seed me +lookin' through the cracks, kase they didn't tell him what they was +agoin' to tell him when they fust come up to the fence.”</p> + +<p>Dan walked about for an hour or more, talking in this way to himself. +The squirrels frisked and barked all around him, but he did not seem +to hear them. He was so busy thinking over his troubles that he +scarcely knew where he was going, until at last he found himself +standing on the banks of a sluggish bayou that ran through the swamp. +The stream was wide and deep, and near the middle of it and opposite +the spot where Dan stood, was a little island thickly covered with +briers and cane. It was known among the settlers as Bruin's Island. +Dan knew the place well. Many a fine string of goggle-eyes had he +caught at the foot of the huge sycamore which grew at the lower end +of the island, and leaned over the water until its long branches +almost touched the trees on the main shore, and it was here that he +had trapped his first beaver. More than that, the island had been a +place of refuge for his father during the war. He retreated to it on +the night the levee was blown up by the Union soldiers, and spent the +most of his time there until all danger of capture was past.</p> + +<p>When Dan appeared upon the bank of the bayou a dark object, which was +crouching at the water's edge near the foot of the sycamore, suddenly +sprang up and glided into the bushes out of sight. Its movements were +quick and noiseless, but still they did not escape the notice of Dan, +who dropped on the instant and hid behind a fallen log that happened +to be close at hand. He did not have time to take a good look at the +object, but he saw enough of it to frighten him thoroughly. He thrust +his cocked rifle cautiously over the log, directing the muzzle toward +the sycamore, but his hand was unsteady and his face was as white as +a sheet.</p> + +<p>“Looked to me like a man,” thought Dan, trembling in every limb, “but +in course it couldn't be; so it's one of them haunts what lives in +the General's lane.”</p> + +<p>Dan kept his gaze directed across the bayou, and could scarcely +restrain himself from jumping up and taking to his heels when he saw +a head, covered with a torn and faded hat, raised slowly and +cautiously above the leaning trunk of the sycamore. It remained +motionless for a moment and Dan's eyes were sharp enough to see that +there was a face below the hat—a tanned and weather-beaten face, the +lower portion of which was concealed by thick, bushy whiskers. As Dan +looked his eyes began to dilate, his mouth came open, and the butt of +his rifle was gradually lowered until the muzzle pointed toward the +clouds. He was sure he saw something familiar about the face, but the +sight of it was most unexpected, and so was the sound of the voice +which reached his ears a moment later.</p> + +<p>“Dannie!” came the hail, in subdued tones, as if the speaker were +afraid of being overheard by some one besides the boy whom he was +addressing. + +<p>“Pap!” cried Dan.</p> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/image02.jpg" width="726" height="537" +alt="Dan Recognizes his Father."></div> + +<p>As he spoke he arose from his concealment, and the man on the other +side of the bayou—Dan was pretty certain now that it was a +man—stepped out into view, disclosing the well-known form and +features of Godfrey Evans. Dan could hardly believe his eyes, and +even Godfrey seemed a little doubtful.</p> + +<p>“Is that you, Dannie?” asked the latter.</p> + +<p>“You're just a shoutin',” was the reply.</p> + +<p>“Nobody ain't thar with you, I reckon,” said Godfrey.</p> + +<p>“No, I'm all by myself. But be you sartin that's you, pap?”</p> + +<p>“In course I am, an' I've been a waitin' an' a watchin' fur yer. I'll +bring you over. You're an ongrateful an' ondutiful boy to leave your +poor ole pap, what's fit the Yankees an' worked so hard to bring you +up like a gentleman's son had oughter be brung up, out here in the +cane so long all by hisself.”</p> + +<p>“Why, pap, I didn't know you was here,” said Dan.</p> + +<p>Godfrey walked briskly along the shore until he reached a little +thicket of bushes into which he plunged out of sight. He appeared +again almost immediately, dragging behind him a small lead-colored +canoe which Dan recognized the moment he saw it. It was Don Gordon's +canoe, the one he used to pick up his dead and wounded ducks when he +was shooting over his decoys. It was a beautiful little craft, and +Dan had often wished that he could call it his own. It was one thing +that made him hate Don and Bert so cordially, and he had often told +himself that when he was ready to carry out the threats he had so +often made, that canoe should be one of the first things to suffer. +The brothers took altogether too much pleasure in it, and he wouldn't +have them rowing about the lake enjoying themselves while he was +obliged to stay ashore. The sight of it satisfied him that the man on +the opposite bank was his father, and nobody else. If he had been a +“haunt” he would not have needed a canoe to carry him across the +bayou.</p> + +<p>Having placed the canoe in the water Godfrey went back into the cane +after the oars—the little craft was provided with rowlocks and +propelled by oars instead of paddles—and in a few seconds more he +was on Dan's side of the bayou. The moment the canoe touched the bank +he sprang out, and if one might judge by the cordial manner in which +father and son greeted each other, they were glad to meet again.</p> + +<p>“I didn't never expect to feel your grip no more, pap,” said Dan, who +was the first to speak, “an' I'm ridikilis proud to see you with this +yere dug-out. How came you by it, and whar did you git it?”</p> + +<p>“I jest took it an' welcome,” answered Godfrey. “I wasn't goin' to +swim over to the island every time I wanted to go there, was I?”</p> + +<p>“In course not. I'm scandalous glad you tuk it; an' now I'll have a +ride in it, an' no thanks to Don Gordon nuther. Been a livin' here +ever since you've been gone?” added Dan, as he stepped into the boat +and picked up the oars.</p> + +<p>“Yes, an' I've been a lookin' fur you every day. Seems to me you +might a knowed where to find me, kase here's whar I hung out when the +Yanks was in the country. Hear anything about me, in the settlement?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, lots. Silas Jones has done been to Dave fur them eight dollars +you owe him.”</p> + +<p>“Much good may they do him, when he gets 'em,” said Godfrey, snapping +his fingers in the air.</p> + +<p>“Dave's goin' to pay the bill,” added Dan. “I done heard him say so.”</p> + +<p>“The ongrateful an' ondutiful scamp!” exclaimed Godfrey. “If he's got +that much money, why don't he give it to me, like he had oughter do? +I need it more'n Silas does. Hear anything else, Dannie?”</p> + +<p>“Yes; General Gordon says, why don't you come home an' go 'have +yourself? Nobody wouldn't pester you.”</p> + +<p>“Does you see anything green in these yere eyes?” asked Godfrey, +looking steadily at Dan. “That would do to tell some folks, but a man +what's fit the Yanks ain't so easy fooled. I'm safe here, an' here +I'll stay, till——Hear anything else, Dannie—anything 'bout them +two city chaps, Clarence an' Marsh Gordon?”</p> + +<p>“O, they've gone home long ago.”</p> + +<p>“You didn't hear nothing about them gettin' into a furse afore they +went, did you?”</p> + +<p>“Course I have. Everybody knows that you an' Clarence thought Don was +ole Jordan an' shet him up in the tater-hole.”</p> + +<p>“An' sarved him right, too,” exclaimed Godfrey. “I reckon he's well +paid fur cheatin' me outen that chance of making eighty thousand +dollars. I heard Clarence was robbed afore he went away,” added +Godfrey, at the same time turning away his head and looking at Dan +out of the corner of his eyes.</p> + +<p>“I didn't hear nothing about that,” said Dan.</p> + +<p>Godfrey drew a long breath of relief. Ever since he took up his abode +on the island he had been torturing himself with the belief that the +robbery of which he was guilty was the talk of the settlement, and +that he would be arrested for at if he should ever show himself at +the landing again. He breathed much easier to know that his fears on +this score were groundless.</p> + +<p>“Hear anything else, Dannie?” asked Godfrey, and his voice was so +cheerful and animated that the boy looked at him in amazement. +“What's Dave an' the ole woman doin'?”</p> + +<p>“That thar Dave is goin' to git rich, dog-gone it,” replied Dan, in +great disgust. “He got a letter from some feller up North this +mornin' tellin' him if he would trap fifty dozen live quail fur him, +he'd pay him so't he could make three dollars a dozen on 'em. I seed +Don give him the letter, an' I heard 'em a talkin' and a laughin' +about it.”</p> + +<p>“That's what makes me 'spise them Gordons so,” said Godfrey, slapping +the side of the canoe with his open hand. “They're all the time a +boostin' Dave, an' me and you could starve fur all they keer. Now +jump out, an' we'll go up to my house an' talk about it. We'll leave +the boat here, so't it will be handy when you want to go back.”</p> + +<p>As Godfrey spoke the bow of the canoe ran deep into the soft mud +which formed the beach on that side of the island, and the father and +son sprang out. Godfrey led the way along a narrow, winding path +which ran through the cane, and after a few minutes walking ushered +Dan into an open space in the centre of the island. Here stood the +little bark lean-to that he called his house. The cane had been +cleared away from a spot about fifteen feet square, and piled up +around the outside, so that it looked like a little breastwork.</p> + +<p>The lean-to was not a very imposing structure—Godfrey would much +rather sit in the sun and smoke his pipe then expend any of his +strength in providing for his comfort—but it was large enough to +shelter one man, and with a few more pieces of bark on the roof and a +roaring fire in front, it might have been made a very pleasant and +inviting camp. Just now, however, it looked cheerless enough. There +was a little armful of leaves under the roof of the lean-to and there +was a block of wood beside the fire-place, the position of which was +pointed out by a bed of ashes and cinders. The leaves served for a +bed and the block of wood for a chair; and they were all the +“furniture” that was to be seen about the camp. But Godfrey was very +well satisfied with his surroundings and Dan was delighted with them. +It must be splendid, he thought, to live there all by one's self with +nothing to worry over and no work to do. It was not even necessary +that Godfrey should chop wood for the fire, for the upper end of the +island was covered with broken logs and branches, and five minutes' +work every morning would suffice to provide him with all the fuel he +would be likely to burn during the day.</p> + +<p>“What a nice place you've got here, pap!” said Dan, when he had taken +a hurried survey of the camp.</p> + +<p>“I reckon it's about right,” replied Godfrey. “I had this fur a +hidin' place while the Yanks was a scoutin' about through the +country, an' I come here now kase nobody won't think of lookin' fur +me so nigh the settlement. An' they won't stumble onto me afore I +know it, nuther. They can't git to me if they come afoot kase the +bayou'll stop 'em; an' I never heard of nobody coming up here in a +boat. Nothing bothers me 'ceptin' a bar. He comes over every night +to feed on the beech-nuts an' acorns, an' some night he'll come fur +the last time. I'll jest knock him over, and then I'll have meat +enough to last me a month. I build my fire and do my cookin' at +night, so't nobody can't see the smoke, an' that's what frightened +the bar away afore I could shoot him.”</p> + +<p>“I've a notion to come here an' live with you, pap,” said Dan.</p> + +<p>“'Twon't be safe,” replied his father, quickly. “If you're missin' +from home folks might begin to hunt fur us, an' that's somethin' I +don't want 'em to do. 'Sides you must stay in the settlement an' help +me. I shall need things from the store now an' then, an' as I can't +go and git 'em myself, you'll have to git 'em fur me. But what was +you sayin' about Dave?” asked Godfrey, throwing himself down on one +of the piles of cane and motioning to Dan to occupy the block of +wood.</p> + +<p>“I was a sayin' that he's a little the meanest feller I ever seed,” +replied Dan, “an' don't you say so too, pap? Kase why, he's goin' to +git fifty dollars fur them quail, an' he's goin' to give the money +all to the ole woman.”</p> + +<p>“An' leave me to freeze an' starve out here in the cane?” exclaimed +Godfrey, with a great show of indignation. “Not by no means he won't. +If he don't mind what he's about we'll take the hul on it, Dan, me +an' you will.”</p> + +<p>“<i>He</i> won't get none on it, you kin bet high on that,” said Dan. “I +told him I was goin' agin him, an' so I am. I'll bust his traps as +fast as I kin find 'em, an' I won't do nothin' but hunt fur 'em, day +an' night.”</p> + +<p>“Now, haint you got no sense at all?” cried his father, so fiercely +that Dan jumped up and turned his face toward the path, as if he were +on the point of taking to his heels.</p> + +<p>“Wal, I wanted to go pardners with him an' he wouldn't le' me,” +protested Dan.</p> + +<p>“What's the odds? Set down thar an' listen while somebody what knows +somethin' talks to you. What odds does it make to you if he won't go +pardners with you?”</p> + +<p>“Kase I want some of the money; that's the odds it makes to me.”</p> + +<p>“Wal, you kin have it, an' you needn't do no work, nuther. I'm Dave's +pap an' your'n too, an' knows what's best fur all of us. You jest +keep still an' let Dave go on an' ketch the birds; an' when he's +ketched 'em an' got the money in his pocket, then I'll tell you what +else to do. Le' me see: fifty dozen birds at three dollars a dozen! +That's—that's jest——”</p> + +<p>Godfrey straightened up, locked his fingers together, rested his +elbows on his knees and looked down at the pile of ashes in the +fire-place.</p> + +<p>“It's a heap of money, the fust thing you know,” said Dan. “It's +fifty dollars. Dave told me so.”</p> + +<p>“Fifty gran'mothers!” exclaimed Godfrey. “Dave done said that jest to +make a fule of you. It would be fifty dollars if he got only a dollar +a dozen. If he got two it would be a hundred dollars, an' if he got +three, it would be——”</p> + +<p>Godfrey stopped, believing that he must have made a mistake +somewhere, and stared at Dan as if he were utterly bewildered. Dan +returned the stare with interest. “A hundred dollars!” he repeated, +slowly. “That thar Dave of our'n goin' to make a hundred dollars all +by hisself! Some on it's mine.”</p> + +<p>“It's more'n that, Dannie,” said Godfrey, who, as soon as he could +settle his mind to the task, went over his calculations again, adding +the astounding statement—</p> + +<p>“An' if he gets three dollars a dozen, he'll get a hundred an' fifty +dollars for the lot.”</p> + +<p>Dan's astonishment was so great that for a few seconds he could not +speak, and even his father looked puzzled and amazed. He was certain +that he had made no mistake in his mental arithmetic this time, and +the magnitude of David's prospective earnings fairly staggered him. +It made him angry to think of it.</p> + +<p>“The idee of that triflin' leetle Dave's makin' so much money,” he +exclaimed, in great disgust; “an' here's me, who has worked an' +slaved fur a hul lifetime, an' I've got jest twenty dollars.”</p> + +<p>“Eh?” cried Dan.</p> + +<p>Godfrey was frightened at what he had said, but he could not recall +it without exciting Dan's suspicions; so he put on a bold face and +continued:—</p> + +<p>“Yes, I've got that much, an' I worked hard fur it, too. But a +hundred an' fifty dollars! We must have that when it's 'arned, +Dannie.”</p> + +<p>“The hul on it?”</p> + +<p>“Every cent. I'm Dave's pap, an' the law gives me the right to his +'arnin's, an' yours, too, until you's both twenty-one years ole. Now, +Dannie, I've done a power of hard thinkin' since I've been here on +this island, an' I've got some idees in my head that will make you +look wild when you hear 'em. I didn't know jest how to carry 'em out +afore, but I do now. These yere hundred an' fifty dollars will keep +us movin' till we kin find them eighty thousand.”</p> + +<p>“Be you goin' to look fur them agin, pap?”</p> + +<p>“No, I hain't, but you be.”</p> + +<p>“Not much, I ain't,” replied Dan, emphatically.</p> + +<p>“Who's to do it, then?” demanded his father. “I can't, kase I'm +afeared to go into the settlement even at night. You hain't goin' to +give up the money, be you? Then what'll become of your circus-hoss, +an' your painted boats, an' your fine guns what break in two in the +middle?”</p> + +<p>“I don't keer,” answered Dan, doggedly. “I wouldn't go into that +tater-patch alone, arter dark; if I knowed it was chuck full of +yaller gold an' silver pieces.”</p> + +<p>The savage scowl that settled on Godfrey's face, as he listened to +these words, brought Dan to his feet again in great haste. The man +was fully as angry as he looked, and it is possible he might have +said or done something not altogether to Dan's liking, had it not +been for an unlooked-for interruption that occurred just then. +Godfrey had raised his hand in the air to give emphasis to some +remark he was about to make, when he was checked by a slight +splashing in the water, accompanied by the measured clatter of oars, +as they were moved back and forth in the row-locks. This was followed +by a clear, ringing laugh, which Godfrey and his son could have +recognized anywhere, and a cheery voice said:—</p> + +<p>“I'm getting tired. It is time for me to stop and rest when I begin +to catch crabs.”</p> + +<p>There was a boat in the bayou, and Don and Bert Gordon were in it. +They were so close at hand, too, that flight was impossible.</p> + +<p>“I don't think there's much difference between riding on horseback +and rowing in a boat, as far as the work is concerned,” said the same +voice. “I've done about all I can do to-day. There don't seem to be +any ducks in the bayou; so we'll stop here and take a breathing spell +before we go back.”</p> + +<p>“Is thar any place in the wide world a feller could crawl into +without bein' pestered by them two oneasy chaps?” whispered Dan, +jumping up from his block of wood and looking all around, as if he +were seeking a way of escape.</p> + +<p>“Not a word out of you,” replied Godfrey, shaking his fist at his +son.</p> + +<p>Following Godfrey's example, Dan threw himself behind one of the +piles of cane, and the two held their breath and listened.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt7">CHAPTER VII.<br> + +WHAT HAPPENED THERE.</a></h3> + +<p>“You're not going to get out, are you, Don?” asked Bert, and as he +was not more than four or five rods away, every word he uttered was +distinctly heard by the two listeners in the cane.</p> + +<p>“I want to stretch my legs a little,” was Don's reply. “Come on, and +let's explore the island. You know it used to be a famous bear's den, +don't you?”</p> + +<p>“I should think I ought to know it, having heard father tell the +story of the animal's capture a dozen times or more. He must have +been a monster: he was so large and heavy that it was all a span of +mules could do to drag him from the shore of the lake, where he was +taken out of the boat, up to the house.”</p> + +<p>“And didn't he make things lively before he was killed, though?” said +Don. “He destroyed nine dogs and wounded two men. I'd like to take +part in a hunt like that.”</p> + +<p>“Well, I wouldn't. It looks gloomy in the cane, doesn't it? What +would we do if we should find a bear in there?”</p> + +<p>“I don't know,” answered Don, with a laugh. “Our guns are loaded with +small shot, and they would hardly penetrate a bear's thick skin. If +he should come at us, I'd be a goner, sure, for I am so stiff I +couldn't run to save my life. But I don't think we'll find——Halloo! +Bert, just look here!”</p> + +<p>A chorus of exclamations followed, and Godfrey and Dan looked at each +other and scowled fiercely.</p> + +<p>“That's my canoe,” said Don, and they heard the oars rattle as he +stepped into it.</p> + +<p>“There's no doubt about that,” said Bert, in surprised and delighted +tones; “but how came it here?”</p> + +<p>“That's the question. The fellow who stole it took it up the bayou +and then turned it loose, having no further use for it, or else it +got away from him and drifted down here.”</p> + +<p>“Who knows but the thief brought it here himself, and that he is on +the island now, hidden in the cane?” said Bert, lowering his voice, +but still speaking quite loud enough to make himself heard by Godfrey +and Dan.</p> + +<p>“I hardly think that can be possible,” replied Don. “You see the bow +of the canoe was caught on this root; and that makes me think it was +brought down by the current and lodged here.”</p> + +<p>Godfrey and Dan looked at each other again. They had taken no pains +to secure the boat when they left it, and the current had moved it +from its place on the bank and was carrying it toward the lake, when +it caught on the root where it was discovered by its lawful owner.</p> + +<p>“I am glad to get it again,” said Don, “for I don't know what we +should have done without it. It is just the thing to chase crippled +ducks with. If I could see the man who stole it, I'd give him a piece +of my mind, I tell you.”</p> + +<p>After that there was a pause in the conversation and the rattling of +a chain told Godfrey and Dan that the canoe was being fastened to the +stern of the boat in which the brothers had come up the bayou. Then +there was more conversation in a subdued tone of voice, and presently +a commotion in the cane indicated that Don and Bert were working +their way slowly toward the camp. Dan began to tremble and turn +white, and his father looked as though he would have been glad to run +if he had only known where to go.</p> + +<p>“Halloo!” exclaimed Bert, suddenly, “here we are. Come this way, Don. +I've found a path.”</p> + +<p>“A path!” repeated his brother. “What should make a path through this +cane?”</p> + +<p>“I don't know, I am sure. What's this? Can you tell a bear track when +you see it?”</p> + +<p>“Of course I can,” answered Don, and the listeners heard him pushing +his way through the cane toward the path in which his brother stood. +“But I don't call this a bear track,” he added, after a moment's +pause, during which he was closely examining the footprint his +brother pointed out to him. “A barefooted man or boy has been along +here, and that track was made not more than ten minutes ago. And, +Bert,” he continued, in a lower tone, “you were right about that boat +after all. Come on, now, and if the thief is here we'll have a look +at him.”</p> + +<p>“Pap,” whispered Dan, hurriedly, “they're comin' sure's you're +livin'. Le's slip around to the other side of the island, easy like, +and steal their boats afore they know what is goin' on.”</p> + +<p>“We couldn't do it,” replied his father, in the same cautious +whisper. “They'd be sure to see us. I'll fix 'em when they come nigh +enough. I'd like to shoot 'em both, to pay 'em for findin' my hidin' +place.”</p> + +<p>“Don't do that, pap,” said Dan, in great alarm. “Here they come, +an'—— Laws a massy? What's that?”</p> + +<p>As Dan uttered these words, a deep, hoarse, growl, so suddenly and +fiercely uttered, that it almost made his hair stand on end, sounded +close at his side. Don and Bert heard it, and they were as badly +frightened as Dan was.</p> + +<p>“What was that, Don?” asked Bert, in an excited whisper. “You heard +it, didn't you?”</p> + +<p>“I should think so,” was Don's reply, and the words were followed by +the clicking of the locks of his gun.</p> + +<p>After that came a long pause. Don and Bert waited for the warning +growl to be repeated, and stooping down, tried to peer through the +cane in front of them, in the hope of obtaining a view of the animal, +which had been disturbed by their approach, while Dan, crouching low +in his place of concealment, looked first at his father and then +glanced timidly about, as if in momentary expectation of seeing +something frightful. He could hardly bring himself to believe that +the noise, which so greatly terrified him, had been made by his +father, but such was the fact.</p> + +<p>If there was a person in the world, Godfrey did not want to meet face +to face, that person was Don Gordon; and when he first became aware +that the boy was close at hand, and that he was about to explore the +island, he was greatly alarmed and utterly at a loss how to avoid +him. If Don saw him there, of course he would tell of it, and that +would set the officers of the law on his track (no evidence that +could be produced was strong enough to convince Godfrey, that he had +nothing to fear from the officers of the law) and compel him to look +for a new hiding-place. The conversation he overheard between the +brothers, regarding the capture of the bear, which had so long held +possession of the island, brought a bright idea into his mind, and he +acted upon it at the right time, too. It was the only thing that +saved him from discovery. Don was not afraid of a man, and if he had +known that Godfrey was hidden in the cane a few feet in advance of +him, he would have walked straight up to him, and accused him of +stealing his boat; but he had no desire to face a wild animal alone +and unaided, and he was in no condition to do it, either. We say +alone and unaided, because Bert would have been of no assistance to +him. Bert was a famous shot with his double-barrel, and no boy in the +settlement could show more game, after a day spent among the +waterfowl, than he could; but he was too timid and excitable to be of +any use to one placed in a situation of danger. Even the sight of a +deer dashing through the woods, or the whirr of a flock of quails as +they unexpectedly arose from the bushes at his feet, would set him to +shaking so violently that he could not shoot.</p> + +<p>“What do you suppose it was, Don?” asked Bert, and Godfrey did not +fail to notice that his voice trembled when he spoke. “Was it a wild +cat or a panther?”</p> + +<p>“O, no,” replied Don. “One of those animals wouldn't warn us. He'd be +down on us before we knew he was about. I wish I had my rifle and the +free use of my legs. I'd never leave the island until I had one good +pop at him.”</p> + +<p>A slight rustling in the cane told the listeners that Don was again +advancing slowly along the path. Dan was afraid that he had made up +his mind to risk a shot with his double-barrel, and so was Godfrey, +who uttered another growl, louder and fiercer than the first, and +rattled the cane with his hands. That was too much even for Don's +courage; and Bert was frightened almost out of his senses.</p> + +<p>“Look out, Don! Look out!” he exclaimed. “He is coming!”</p> + +<p>“Let him come,” replied Don, retreating backward along the path.</p> + +<p>“Run! run!” entreated Bert.</p> + +<p>“That's quite impossible. I'm doing the best I can now. If he shows +himself I'll fill his head full of number six shot.”</p> + +<p>Godfrey continued to growl and rattle the cane at intervals, but +there was no need of it, for Don was quite as anxious to reach his +boat and leave the island as Godfrey and Dan were to have him do so. +He retreated along the path with all the speed he could command, +holding himself ready to make as desperate a fight as he could if +circumstances should render it necessary, and presently a rattling of +oars and a splashing in the water told the listeners that he and his +brother were pushing off and making their way down the bayou. In +order to satisfy himself on this point, Godfrey crawled over the pile +of cane, behind which he had been concealed and moved quickly, but +noiselessly along the path, closely followed by Dan. On reaching the +edge of the cane they looked down the stream and saw the brothers +twenty rods away in their boat, Bert tugging at the oars as if his +life depended on his exertions. The danger of discovery was over for +the present, but how were Dan and his father to leave the island now +without swimming? Don had taken his canoe away with him.</p> + +<p>“If I could have my way with them two fellers they'd never trouble +nobody else,” exclaimed Godfrey, shaking his fist at the departing +boat. “Whar be I goin' to hide now, I'd like to know?”</p> + +<p>“Stay here,” replied Dan, “an' if they come back to pester you, growl +'em off 'n the island like you done this time.”</p> + +<p>“An' git a bullet into me fur my pains?” returned his father. “No, +sar. Don'll be up here agin in the mornin', sartin, an' he'll have +his rifle with him, too; but I won't be here to stand afore it, kase +I've seed him shoot too ofter. He kin jest beat the hind sights off'n +you, any day in the week.”</p> + +<p>“Whoop!” cried Dan, jumping up and knocking his heels together.</p> + +<p>“I don't see what bring them two oneasy chaps up here, nohow,” said +Godfrey, taking no notice of the boy's threatening attitude. “I never +knowed them or anybody else to come up the bayou in a small boat +afore, 'ceptin' when that bar was killed here. That was an amazin' +smart trick of mine, Dannie. Howsomever, we hain't got no more time +to talk. I'm goin' to give you five dollars, Dannie, an' I want you +to go to the landin' an' spend it fur me. Get me a pair of +shoes—number 'levens, you know—an' two pair stockin's, an' spend +the heft of the rest fur tobacker. Then when it comes dark, I want +you to get that canoe agin, an' bring it up here with the things you +buy at the store.”</p> + +<p>“How am I goin' to git the canoe?”</p> + +<p>“Take it an' welcome, like I did.”</p> + +<p>Dan shrugged his shoulders, and his father, believing from the +expression on his face that he was about to refuse to undertake the +task, made haste to add:—</p> + +<p>“An' when you come, Dannie, I'll tell you how we're goin' to work it +to git them hundred and fifty dollars that Dave's goin' to 'arn by +trappin' them birds fur that feller up North. I have a right to it, +kase I'm his pap: an' when I get it, I'll give you half—that is, if +you do right by me while I'm hidin' here. I'll give you half that +bar'l, too, when we find it. Then you kin have your circus hoss an' +all your other nice things, can't you?” added Godfrey, playfully +poking his son in the ribs.</p> + +<p>Dan's face relaxed a little, but his father's affected enthusiasm was +not as contagious now as it was when the subject of the buried +treasure was first brought up for discussion. Godfrey had no +intention of renewing his efforts to find the barrel—he could not +have been hired to go into that potato-patch after what had happened +there—but it was well enough, he thought, to hold it up to Dan as an +inducement. Besides, if he could get the boy interested in the matter +again, and induce him to prosecute the search, and Dan should, by any +accident, stumble upon the barrel, so much the better for himself. +The great desire of his life would be attained. He would be rich, and +that, too, without work.</p> + +<p>“Why can't you steal the canoe yourself?” asked Dan.</p> + +<p>“Kase I've got to pack up an' get ready to leave here; that's why. +It'll take me from now till the time you come back to get all my +traps together.”</p> + +<p>Dan hurriedly made a mental inventory of the valuables his father +possessed and which he had seen in the camp, and the result showed +one rifle, one powder-horn and one bullet-pouch. All Godfrey had +besides he carried on his back. It certainly would not take him three +or four hours to gather these few articles together.</p> + +<p>“Pap's mighty 'feared that he'll do something he can make somebody +else do fur him,” thought the boy. “But he needn't think he's goin' +to get me into a furse. I ain't agoin' to steal no canoe fur nobody.”</p> + +<p>“An' since it's you,” added Godfrey, seeing that Dan did not readily +fall in with his plans, “I'll give you a dollar of my hard-'arned +money for doin' the job.”</p> + +<p>“Wal, now that sounds like business,” exclaimed Dan, brightening up. +“Whar's the money, an' how am I goin' to get off'n the island?”</p> + +<p>“The money's safe, and I'll bring it to you in a minute,” replied +Godfrey. “You stay here till I come back. As fur gettin' acrosst the +bayou, that's easy done. Thar's plenty of drift wood at the upper end +of the island, an' you kin get on a log an' pole yourself over. When +you get home, Dannie, make friends with Dave the fust thing you do, +an' tell him you was only foolin' when you said you was goin' agin +him. Help him every way you kin, an' when he gits the money we'll +show our hands.”</p> + +<p>So saying, Godfrey walked down the path out of sight. After a few +minutes' absence, he came back and handed Dan the money of which he +had spoken, a five-dollar bill to be expended for himself at the +store, and a one-dollar bill to pay Dan for stealing the canoe. When +Dan had put them both carefully away in his pocket, he went back to +the camp after his rifle, and then followed his father through the +cane toward the upper end of the island. They found an abundance of +drift wood there, and from it selected two small logs of nearly the +same size and length. By fastening these together with green withes, +a raft was made, which was sufficiently buoyant to carry Dan in +safety to the main land. When it was completed, the boy swung his +rifle over his shoulder by a piece of stout twine he happened to have +in his pocket, and taking the pole his father handed him, pushed off +into the stream.</p> + +<p>Poling the raft was harder work than rowing the canoe, and Dan's +progress was necessarily slow; but he accomplished the journey at +last, and after waving his hand to his father, disappeared in the +bushes. He took a straight course for the landing and after a little +more than an hour's rapid walking, found himself in Silas Jones's +store. He was greatly surprised at something he saw when he got +there, and so bewildered by it that he forgot all about the money he +had in his pocket, and the stockings, shoes and tobacco of which his +father stood so much in need. There was David making the most +extravagant purchases, and there was Silas bowing and smiling and +acting as politely to him as he ever did to his richest customers. If +Dan was astonished at this, he was still more astonished, when David +threw down a ten-dollar bill and the grocer pushed it back to him +with the remark, that his credit was good for six months. Dan could +not imagine how David had managed to obtain possession of so much +money, and when he found out, as he did when he and his brother were +on their way home, he straightway went to work to think up some plan +by which he might get it into his own hands. This problem and a +bright idea, which suddenly suggested itself to him, occupied his +mind during the walk; and shortly after parting from his brother at +General Gordon's barn, Dan hit upon a second idea, which made his +usually gloomy face brighten wonderfully while he thought about it.</p> + +<p>Dan's first duty was to rectify his mistake of the morning, and make +his brother understand that he had repented of the determination he +had made to work against him, and that he was going to do all he +could to assist him. He tried to do this, as we know, but did not +succeed, for to his great surprise and sorrow David announced that he +was not going to waste any more time in building traps for Dan to +break up, and this led the latter to believe that nothing more was to +be done toward catching the quails. He walked slowly around the +cabin, after a short interview with his brother, and the first thing +he saw on which to vent his rage was Don's pointer, which came +frisking out of his kennel and wagging his tail by way of greeting, +only to be sent yelping back again by a vicious kick from Dan's foot.</p> + +<p>“I'm jest a hundred an' fifty dollars outen pocket an' so is pap,” +soliloquized Dan, almost ready to cry with vexation when he thought +of the magnificent prize which had slipped through his fingers. “A +hundred an' fifty dollars! My circus hoss an' fine gun an' straw hat +an' shiny boots is all up a holler stump, dog-gone my buttons, an' +that thar's jest what's the matter of me. An' what makes it wusser +is, I lost 'em by bein' a fule,” added Dan, stamping his bare feet +furiously upon the ground.</p> + +<p>Just then a lively, cheerful whistle sounded from the inside of the +cabin where David was busy arranging his purchases. Things were +taking a turn for the better with him now, and he whistled for the +same reason that a bird sings—because he was happy.</p> + +<p>“If I could only think up some way to make that thar mean Dave feel +as bad as I do, how quick I'd jump at it! I wish pap was here. He'd +tell me how. He's as jolly as a mud-turtle on a dry log on a sunshiny +day, Dave is, while I—— Whoop!” yelled Dan, jumping up and striking +his heels together in his rage. “Howsomever, I'll have them ten +dollars afore I take a wink of sleep this blessed night——”</p> + +<p>Here Dan stopped and looked steadily at the pointer for a few +minutes. Then he slapped his knee with his open hand, thrust both +arms up to the elbows in his pockets and walked up and down the yard, +smiling and shaking his head as if he were thinking about something +that afforded him the greatest satisfaction.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt8">CHAPTER VIII.<br> + +DOGS IN THE MANGER.</a></h3> + +<p>David would not have been as happy as he was if he had known all that +was going on in the settlement. As it happened, his father and +brother were not the only ones he had to fear. These two had an eye +on the money he expected to earn by trapping the quails, and for +that reason they were not disposed to interfere with him until his +work was all done and he had reaped the reward of it; but there +were two others who had suddenly made up their minds that it was +unsportsmanlike to trap birds and that it should not be done if they +could prevent it. They were Lester Brigham and his particular friend +and crony—almost the only one he had in the settlement, in fact—Bob +Owens.</p> + +<p>Bob lived about two miles from General Gordon's, and might have made +one of the select little company of fellows with whom Don and Bert +delighted to associate, if he had been so inclined. But he was much +like Dan Evans in a good many respects, and had been guilty of so +many mean actions that he had driven almost all his friends away from +him. He rode over to the General's about twice each week, and while +he was there he was treated as civilly and kindly as every other +visitor was: but the brothers never returned his visits, and would +have been much better satisfied if Bob had stayed at home.</p> + +<p>These two boys, Lester and Bob, were determined that David should not +earn the hundred and fifty dollars if they could help it, and they +knew that by annoying him in every possible way, they would annoy +Don and Bert, too: and that was really what they wanted to do. What +reason had they for wishing to annoy Don and Bert? No good reason. +Did you ever see a youth who was popular among his fellows, and who +was liked by almost everybody, both old and young, who did not have +at least one enemy in some sneaking boy, who would gladly injure him +by every means in his power? Lester and Bob were jealous of Don and +Bert, that was the secret of the matter; and more than that, they +were disappointed applicants for the very contract which Don had +secured for David.</p> + +<p>Bob regularly borrowed and read the “<i>Rod and Gun</i>,” and when his eye +fell upon the advertisement calling for fifty dozen live quails, he +thought he saw a chance to make a goodly sum of pocket money, and +hurried off to lay the matter before his friend Lester, proposing +that they should go into partnership and divide the profits. Of +course Lester entered heartily into the scheme. He knew nothing about +building and setting traps, but Bob did, and when they had discussed +the matter and calculated their chances for success, they told each +other that in two weeks' time the required number of birds would be +on their way up the river. That very day Bob addressed a letter to +the advertiser, and as soon as it was sent off he and Lester went to +work on the traps.</p> + +<p>It is hardly necessary to say that they lived in a fever of +excitement and suspense after that, and anxiously awaited an answer +from the gentleman who wanted the quails. The mail was brought in by +the carrier from the county seat, on Wednesday and Friday afternoons, +and Bob and Lester made it a point to be on hand when the letters +were distributed. One Wednesday, about two weeks after the letter +applying for the order was mailed, Bob went down to the post-office +alone, and the first person he met there was Bert Gordon. They leaned +against the counter and talked while the mail was being put into the +boxes, and when the pigeon-hole was opened, the postmaster handed +each of them a good-sized bundle of letters and papers, which +they began to stow away in their pockets, glancing hastily at the +addresses as they did so. It happened that each of them found a +letter in his bundle, which attracted his attention, and, as if moved +by a common impulse, they walked toward opposite ends of the counter +to read them.</p> + +<p>The letter Bert found was addressed to Don; but he was pretty certain +he could tell where it came from, and knowing that his brother +wouldn't care—there were no secrets between them, now—he opened and +read it. He was entirely satisfied with its contents, but the other +boy was not so well satisfied with the contents of his. When Bert +picked up his riding-whip and turned to leave the store, he saw Bob +leaning against the counter, mechanically folding his letter, while +his eyes were fastened upon the floor, at which he was scowling +savagely.</p> + +<p>“What's the matter?” asked Bert. “No bad news, I hope.”</p> + +<p>“Well, it is bad news,” replied Bob, so snappishly, that Bert was +sorry that he had spoken to him at all. “You see, I found an +advertisement in one of your father's papers, asking for live quails. +I wrote to the man that I could furnish them, and I have just +received an answer from him, stating that he has already sent +the order to another party, and one who lives in my immediate +neighborhood. What's the matter with you?” exclaimed Bob, as Bert +broke out into a cheery laugh.</p> + +<p>“When did you write to him?” asked Bert.</p> + +<p>“On the very day I borrowed the paper.”</p> + +<p>“Well, Don was just three days ahead of you. I've got the order in my +pocket.”</p> + +<p>“What do you and Don want to go into the trapping business for?” +asked Bob, with ill-concealed disgust. “You don't need the money.”</p> + +<p>“Neither do you,” replied Bert.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I do. I intended to buy a new shot-gun with it. I am almost the +only decent fellow in the settlement who doesn't own a breech-loader. +I have racked my brain for months, to think up some way to earn money +enough to get one, and when I am just about to accomplish my object, +you and Don have to jump up and rob me of the chance. The man tells +me that he would be glad to give me the contract, if he hadn't given +it to you. I've a good notion to slap you over.”</p> + +<p>“It isn't for us,” replied Bert. “It is for Dave Evans; and I think +you will acknowledge that he needs the money if anybody does.”</p> + +<p>“Dave Evans!” sneered Bob.</p> + +<p>“Yes; and he needs clothes and food more than you need a new +shot-gun.”</p> + +<p>“I guess I know what I want and how much I want it,” retorted Bob. +“I'm to be shoved aside to give place to that lazy ragamuffin, am I? +If I don't make you wish that you had kept your nose out of my +business, I'm a Dutchman.”</p> + +<p>Bert did not wait to hear all of this speech. Seeing that Bob was +getting angrier every minute, and that his rage was likely to get the +better of him, he drew on his gloves, mounted his pony and set out +for home. Bob followed a quarter of a mile or so in his rear, and +once or twice he whipped up his horse and closed in on Bert as if he +had made up his mind to carry out his threat of slapping him over. +But every time he did so a sturdy, broad-shouldered figure, with a +face that looked wonderfully like Don Gordon's, seemed to come +between him and the unconscious object of his pursuit, and then +Bob would rein in his horse and let Bert get farther ahead of him. +Presently Bob came to a road running at right angles with the one +he was following, and there he stopped, for he saw Lester Brigham +approaching at a full gallop. The latter was by his side in a few +seconds, and his first question was:—</p> + +<p>“Been to the post-office?”</p> + +<p>“I have, and there's the letter on which I built so many hopes,” +replied Bob, handing out the document which he had crumpled into a +little round ball. “We were too late. The order has been given to +that meddlesome fellow, Don.”</p> + +<p>Lester looked first at his companion, then at Bert, who was now +almost out of sight, and began to gather up his reins.</p> + +<p>“You'd better not do it, unless you want to feel the weight of his +brother's arm,” said Bob, who seemed to read the thoughts that were +passing through Lester's mind. “I gave him a good going-over, and +told him I had a notion to knock him down.”</p> + +<p>“Why didn't you do it?” exclaimed Lester. “I'd have backed you +against Don or anybody else.”</p> + +<p>“Haw! haw!” laughed Bob. “I shall want <i>good</i> backing before I +willingly raise a row in that quarter, I tell you.”</p> + +<p>“What do you mean by that?” demanded Lester.</p> + +<p>“O, I was just joking, of course. But what's to be done about this +business? Don got the contract for Dave Evans, and I want to know if +we are to be kicked out of the way to make room for him.”</p> + +<p>Lester did not reply at once. He did not feel very highly flattered +by the low estimate Bob seemed to put upon him as a “backer” in case +of trouble with Don Gordon, and while he was trying to make up his +mind whether he ought to let it pass or get sulky over it, he was +unfolding and smoothing out the letter he held in his hand. When he +had made himself master of its contents, he said:—</p> + +<p>“You come over and stay with me to-night, and we'll put our heads +together and see what we can make of this. I must go down to the +store now, and I'll meet you here in half an hour. That will give +you time enough to go home and speak to your folks.”</p> + +<p>Bob spent the night at Lester's house, and it was during the long +conversation they had before they went to sleep, that they made up +their minds that it was a mean piece of business to trap quails, and +that nobody but a miserable pot-hunter would do it. They adopted the +dog-in-the-manger policy at once. If they could not trap the birds, +nobody should; and that was about all they could decide on just then.</p> + +<p>The next morning after breakfast they mounted their horses and rode +in company, until they came to the lane that led to Bob's home and +there they parted, Lester directing his course down the main road +toward the cabin in which David Evans lived. He met David in the +road, as we know, and laid down the law to him in pretty strong +language; but strange enough the latter could not be coaxed or +frightened into promising that he would give up his chance of +earning a hundred and fifty dollars.</p> + +<p>Lester was in a towering passion when he rode away after his +conversation with David. Lashing his horse into a run, he turned into +the first road he came to, and after a two-mile gallop, drew rein in +front of the double log-house in which Bob Owens lived. There was an +empty wagon-shed on the opposite side of the road, and there he found +Bob, standing with his hands in his pockets, and gazing ruefully +at the pile of traps upon which he and Lester had worked so +industriously, and which he had hoped would bring them in a nice +little sum of spending money.</p> + +<p>“Well, did you see him?” asked Bob, as his friend rode up to the shed +and swung himself out of the saddle.</p> + +<p>“I did,” was the reply, “and he was as defiant as you please. He was +downright insolent.”</p> + +<p>“These white trash are as impudent as the niggers,” said Bob, “and no +one who has the least respect for himself will have anything to do +with them. I used to think that Don Gordon was something of an +aristocrat, but now I know better.”</p> + +<p>“I wish I had given him a good cowhiding,” continued Lester, who did +not think it worth while to state that he had been on the point of +attempting that very thing, but had thought better of it when he saw +how resolutely David stood his ground. “But never mind. We'll get +even with him. We'll touch his pocket, and that will hurt him worse +than a whipping. It will hurt the Gordons, too.”</p> + +<p>“Then he wouldn't promise to give up the idea of catching them +quails? I am sorry, for if we could only frighten him off the track, +we would write to that man up North telling him that the party with +whom he made his contract wasn't able to fill it, but we could catch +all the birds he wants in two weeks.”</p> + +<p>“That's a good idea—a splendid idea!” exclaimed Lester; “and perhaps +we'll do it any how, if the plan I have thought of doesn't prove +successful.”</p> + +<p>Lester then went on to repeat the conversation he had had with David, +as nearly as he could recall it, and wound up by saying:—</p> + +<p>“I told him that we were going to start a Sportsman's Club among the +fellows, and that after we got fairly going, our first hard work +should be to break up this practice of trapping birds. Of course that +wasn't true—I just happened to think of it while I was talking to +him—but why can't we make it true? If all the boys will join in with +us, I'd like to see him do any trapping this winter.”</p> + +<p>“But who can we get to go in with us?”</p> + +<p>“We'll ask Don and Bert the first thing.”</p> + +<p>“Nary time,” exclaimed Bob, quickly. “If they are the sort you're +going to get to join your club, you may just count me out. I don't +like them.”</p> + +<p>“You like them just as well as I do; but we have an object to gain, +and we mustn't allow our personal feelings to stand in our way.”</p> + +<p>“Do you suppose Don would join such a club after getting Dave the +job?”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps he would. He likes to be first in everything, doesn't he?”</p> + +<p>“I should say so,” replied Bob, in great disgust. “I never saw a +fellow try to shove himself ahead as that Don Gordon does.”</p> + +<p>“Well, we'll flatter him by offering to make him President of the +club; and we'll promise to make Bert Vice or Secretary.”</p> + +<p>“I'll not vote for either of them.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, you will. We want to get them on our side; for if they promise +to go in with us every boy in the settlement will do the same.”</p> + +<p>“That's what makes me so mad every time I think of those Gordons,” +exclaimed Bob, spitefully throwing down a stick which he had been +cutting with his knife. “Every fellow about here, except you and me, +is ready to hang on to their coat tails and do just what they do. One +would think by the way they act that they belonged to some royal +family. They don't notice me at all. They've had a crowd of boys +in that shooting-box of theirs every spring and fall since I can +remember, and I have never had an invitation to go there yet. They +take along a nigger to cook for them, and have a high old time +shooting over their decoys; but the first thing they know they'll +find that shanty missing some fine morning. I'll set fire to it.”</p> + +<p>“Don't say that out loud,” said Lester, quickly, at the same time +extending his hand to his companion, as if to show that what he had +said met his own views exactly. “Don't so much as hint it to a living +person. We'll give them a chance to make friends with us if they want +to, and if they don't, let them take the consequences. But we can +talk about that some other time. What do you say to getting up a +Sportsman's Club?”</p> + +<p>Bob did not know what to say, for he had never heard of such a thing +until he became acquainted with Lester. The latter explained the +objects of such organizations as well as he could, and after some +debate they crossed over to the house, intending to go into Bob's +room and draw up a constitution for the government of the proposed +society. On the way Bob suddenly thought of something.</p> + +<p>“You and I want to earn this money, don't we?” said he. “That's what +we're working for, isn't it? Well, now, if we put a stop to trapping, +how are we going to do it?”</p> + +<p>“This is the way we're going to do it: we'll drive Dave Evans off the +track first. When that is done, we'll tell that man up North that we +are the only one's here who can fill his order. Then we'll go quietly +to work and catch our birds, saying nothing to nobody about it, and +when we have trapped all we want, we'll ship them off.”</p> + +<p>“But somebody will see us when we are putting them on the boat.”</p> + +<p>“No matter for that. The mischief will be done, and we'll see how Don +and Dave will help themselves. We can afford to be indifferent to +them when we have seventy-five dollars apiece in our pockets, can't +we?”</p> + +<p>“Lester, you're a brick!” exclaimed Bob. “I never could have thought +up such a plot. I'll have my gun after all.”</p> + +<p>“Of course you will.”</p> + +<p>“And what will become of the club?”</p> + +<p>“We don't care what becomes of it. Having served our purpose, it can +go to smash and welcome. Now will you vote for Don and Bert?”</p> + +<p>“I'll be only too glad to get the chance. But you'll have to manage +the thing, Lester.”</p> + +<p>“I'll do that. All I ask of you is to talk the matter up among the +boys, that is, if Don and Bert agree to join us, and put in your vote +when the time comes.”</p> + +<p>The two friends spent the best part of the day in Bob's room, drawing +up the constitution that was to govern their society. Lester, who did +all the writing, had never seen a document of the kind, and having +nothing to guide him he made rather poor work of it. He had read a +few extracts from game laws, and remembered that Greek and Latin +names were used therein. He could recall some of these names, and he +put them in as they occurred to him, and talked about them so glibly, +and appeared to be so thoroughly posted in natural history that +Bob was greatly astonished. Of course there was a clause in the +instrument prohibiting pot-hunting and the snaring of birds, and that +was as strong as language could make it. The work being done at last +to the satisfaction of both the boys, Lester mounted his horse and +galloped away in the direction of Don Gordon's home.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt9">CHAPTER IX.<br> + +NATURAL HISTORY.</a></h3> + +<p>Lester Brigham was not at all intimate with Don and Bert. The +brothers, as in duty bound, called upon him when he first arrived in +the settlement, and a few days afterward Lester rode over and took +dinner with them; and that was the last of their visiting. The boys +could see nothing to admire in one another. Don and Bert were a +little too “high-toned;” in other words, they were young gentlemen, +and such fellows did not suit Lester, who preferred to associate with +Bob Owens and a few others like him. Lester had been a leader among +his city schoolmates, and he expected to occupy the same position +among the boys about Rochdale; but before he had been many weeks in +the settlement he found that there were some fellows there who knew +just as much as he did, who rode horses and wore clothes as good as +his own, and who had some very decided opinions and were in the habit +of thinking for themselves. They wouldn't “cotton” to him even if he +was from the city, and so Lester made friends with those whom he +regarded as his inferiors in every way.</p> + +<p>Lester was not at all pleased with the task he had set himself on +this particular day. He never felt easy in Don's presence and Bert's, +and nothing but the hope of compelling David to give up his contract +and thus leave the way clear for Bob and himself, would have induced +him to call upon them. He rode slowly in order to postpone the +interview as long as he could, but the General's barn was reached at +last, and the hostler, who came forward to take his nag, told him +that Don and Bert had just gone into the house. The latter opened the +door in response to his knock, and Lester knew by the way he looked +at him that he was very much surprised to see him. But he welcomed +him very cordially, and conducted him into the library, where Don was +lying upon the sofa.</p> + +<p>“That night in the potato cellar was a serious matter for you, wasn't +it?” said the visitor, after the greeting was over and he had seated +himself in the chair which Bert placed in front of the fire. “Haven't +you been able to take any exercise at all yet?”</p> + +<p>“O, yes; I've been out all day. I've had almost too much exercise, +and that is what puts me here on the sofa.”</p> + +<p>“We've had some excitement, too,” added Bert.</p> + +<p>“Yes. We went up the bayou to see if the ducks had begun to come in +any yet, and we found a bear on Bruin's Island.”</p> + +<p>“Did you shoot him?”</p> + +<p>“No. He gave us notice to clear out and we were only too glad to do +so. Such growls <i>I</i> never heard before.”</p> + +<p>“One's nerves do shake a little under such circumstances, that is, if +he is not accustomed to shooting large game,” said Lester, loftily. +“You ought to have had me there. Perhaps I'll go up some day and pay +my respects to him.”</p> + +<p>Don, who thought this a splendid opportunity to test Lester's +courage, was on the very point of telling him that he and Bert were +going up there the next day to see if they could find the animal, and +that they would be glad to have his assistance; but on second thought +he concluded that he would say nothing about it. He expected to have +some sport as well as some excitement during the trip, and he didn't +want his day's enjoyment spoiled by any such fellow as Lester +Brigham.</p> + +<p>“I came over to see you two boys on business,” continued the visitor, +drawing an official envelope from his pocket. “We talk of getting up +a Sportsman's Club here in the settlement: will you join it?”</p> + +<p>“Who are talking of getting it up, and what is the object of it?” +asked Don.</p> + +<p>“All the boys are talking of it. One object is to bring the young +sportsmen of the neighborhood into more intimate relations, and +another is to protect the game. Perhaps I can give you no better idea +of the proposed organization than by reading this constitution, which +will be acted upon by the club at its first meeting.”</p> + +<p>As Lester said this he looked from one to the other of the brothers, +and receiving a nod from each which signified that they were ready to +listen, he drew out the document of which he had spoken, and +proceeded to read it in his best style. He glanced at his auditors +occasionally while he was reading the paper, and when he came to a +certain paragraph, the one upon which he and Bob had expended the +most time and thought, he told himself that he had certainly made an +impression, for Bert looked bewildered and Don straightened up, drew +a note-book from his pocket and began making entries therein with a +lead-pencil. The paragraph read as follows:</p> + +<p>“The great object of the club being to put down pot-hunters and +poachers, and stop the practice, which is so common, of trapping game +and shipping it out of the country, it is hereby</p> + +<p>“<i>Resolved</i>, that on and after the date of the adoption of this +constitution, it shall be unlawful for any person to take by +trapping, at any season of the year, or on any lands, whether private +in their own occupation, public or waste, any of the game animals and +birds hereinafter described, to wit: pheasant (<i>T. Scolopax</i>); +partridge (<i>Picus Imperialis</i>); rabbit (<i>Ortyx Virgiana</i>); and red +deer (<i>Canis Lupus</i>). The penalty for disobedience shall be a fine of +ten dollars for the first offence, twenty for the second, thirty for +the third, and so on; the fines to be sued and recovered before any +justice of the peace in the county, and to be divided in equal parts +between the informer and the poor; and in default of payment the +offender shall be imprisoned for ten days in the county jail.”</p> + +<p>When the document was finished, Don asked him to read this clause +over again. He complied with the request, and as he folded the paper +very deliberately waited for his auditors to say a word of +commendation; but as they didn't do it, he said it himself.</p> + +<p>“Now, I drew up that instrument, and I think it is just about right,” +said he, complacently. “It is nothing but the truth, if I do say it +myself, that there is not another fellow in the settlement who could +have done it. Of course it will be open to amendments, but I don't +see how or where it could be improved. It covers all the ground, +doesn't it?'</p> + +<p>“It covers a good deal, and especially the article you read twice,” +replied Don. “But I can't join such an organization as that. I'm a +pot-hunter myself. I never went hunting yet, without I intended to +shoot something for the table.”</p> + +<p>“But you are not a poacher.”</p> + +<p>“I don't know about that. I hunt in every field and piece of woods I +find, no matter who owns them.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps I had better change that,” said Lester, after thinking a +moment, “and say market-shooters instead of pot-hunters.”</p> + +<p>“There are no such things as market-shooters in the county.”</p> + +<p>“But there are market-trappers,” said Lester. “There are persons +here, who are catching quails and shipping them out of the state.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, there is one who thinks of going into the business, and I got +him the job. It wouldn't look very well for me to turn around now and +tell him that he must not do it.”</p> + +<p>“You could say to him that you have had reason to change your mind +lately, and that you know it isn't right to do such things.”</p> + +<p>“But I haven't changed my mind.”</p> + +<p>“You ought to. The first thing you know there will be no birds for +you and me to shoot.”</p> + +<p>“I'll risk that. You may trap two hundred dozen if you want to, and +send them out of the county, and when you have done it, I will go out +any morning with my pointer and shoot birds enough for breakfast. +I'll leave more in the fields, too, than you can bag in six months,” +added Don, and Bert saw the point he was trying to make, if Lester +did not. “Besides, what right have I to tell Dave what he shall do +and what he shall not do? He'd laugh at me.”</p> + +<p>“Well, he wouldn't do it more than once. A few days in the calaboose +would bring him to his senses.”</p> + +<p>“Who would put him there?”</p> + +<p>“The club would.”</p> + +<p>“Where's the club's authority for such a proceeding?”</p> + +<p>Lester lifted the constitution and tapped it with his forefinger by +way of reply.</p> + +<p>“I think I had better have nothing to do with it,” said Don, who +could scarcely refrain from laughing outright.</p> + +<p>“We intend to make you our president,” said Lester.</p> + +<p>“I am obliged to you,” replied Don, but still he did not take any +more interest in the Sportsman's Club than he had done before. He did +not snap up the bait thus thrown out, as Lester hoped he would. He +was not to be bought, even by the promise of office. Lester saw that, +and arose to take his leave.</p> + +<p>“Well, think it over,” said he. “Sleep on it for a few nights, and if +at any time you decide to go in with us, just let me know. Good +evening!”</p> + +<p>“I'll do so,” answered Don. “Good evening!”</p> + +<p>Lester bowed himself out of the room and Bert accompanied him to the +door. The first question the latter asked when he came back was:—</p> + +<p>“Is there a beast or a bird in the world whose Latin name is +canis-lupus?”</p> + +<p>Don threw himself back upon the sofa and laughed until the room rang +again. “Is there a beast or a bird in the world whose English name is +dog-wolf?” he asked, as soon as he could speak. “I did give Lester +credit for a little common sense and a little knowledge, but I +declare he possesses neither. It beats the world how he has got +things mixed. Just listen to this,” added Don, consulting his +note-book. “He speaks of a pheasant and calls it <i>T. Scolopax</i>. Now +<i>Scolopax</i> is a snipe. He probably meant ruffed grouse, and should +have called it <i>Tetrao Umbellus</i>. He speaks of a partridge when he +means quail, or more properly Bob White, there being no quails on +this side the Atlantic——”</p> + +<p>“Why do people call them quails then?” asked Bert.</p> + +<p>“The name was given to them by our forefathers, because they +resembled the European quail. There is no pheasant in America either; +but our grouse looked like one, and so they gave it that name, Lester +calls a quail <i>Pious Imperialis</i>. Now that's an imperial +woodpecker—that big black fellow with a red topknot that we +sometimes see when we are hunting. He used to be called +cock-of-the-woods, but the name was twisted around until it became +woodcock, and some people believe that he is the gamey little bird we +so much delight to shoot and eat. But they belong to different +orders, one being a climber and the other a wader. Lester speaks of a +rabbit, not knowing that there is no such thing as a wild rabbit in +our country, and calls it <i>Ortyx Virgiana</i>, when he should have +called it <i>Lepus Virginianus</i>, the name he uses being the one by +which our quail is known to ornithologists. A deer, which he calls a +dog-wolf, is <i>Cervus Virginianus</i>. O, he's a naturalist as well as a +sportsman,” shouted Don, as he laid back upon the sofa and laughed +until his sides ached.</p> + +<p>“Then he didn't get one of the names right?”</p> + +<p>“Not a single one. After all, his ignorance on these points is not so +astonishing, for everybody is liable to make mistakes; but that any +boy living in this day and age should imagine that, by simply getting +up a club and adopting a constitution, he could imprison or fine +another boy because he didn't do just to suit him, is too ridiculous +to be believed. That particular paragraph was probably copied after +some old game law Lester read years ago; but he ought to know that +before a sportsman's club, or any other organization, can have +authority to prosecute persons for trapping birds and sending them +away, there must first be a law passed prohibiting such trapping and +sending away; and there's no such law in this state. It doesn't seem +possible that he could have been in earnest.”</p> + +<p>But Lester was in earnest for all that—so very much in earnest that +he was willing to run a great risk in order to punish Don for +refusing to join his society. Of course he was angry. He and Bob had +felt sure of obtaining the contract, had laid many plans for the +spending of the money after it was earned, and it was very provoking +to find that their scheme had been defeated, and that they were to be +pushed aside for the sake of such a fellow as David Evans. Lester was +sorry now that he had not given David a good thrashing when he met +him in the road that morning, and told himself that he would do it +the very next time he put eyes on him and risk the consequences. The +thought had scarcely passed through his mind when the opportunity was +presented. He met David coming along the road in company with his +brother Dan. David did not seem to remember that any sharp words had +passed between Lester and himself, for he looked as cheerful and +smiling as usual, and, following the custom of the country, bowed to +the horseman as he rode past. Lester did not return the bow, and +neither did he dismount to give David the promised thrashing. He was +afraid to attempt it; but, coward-like, he had to take vengeance upon +something, and so he hit his horse a savage cut with his riding-whip.</p> + +<p>“Dave can afford to be polite and good-natured,” thought Lester, as +he went flying down the road. “He is rejoicing over his success and +my failure; but if he only knew it, this thing isn't settled yet. +I'll write to that man to-night, telling him, that the parties to +whom he gave the contract can't catch the birds, and then Bob and I +will go to work and make it true. If we don't earn that money, nobody +shall. As for those stuck-up Gordons—I'll show them how I'll get +even with them.”</p> + +<p>The spirited animal on which he was mounted made short work of the +two miles that lay between Don's home and Bob's, and in a few minutes +Lester dismounted in front of the wagon-shed, where his crony was +waiting for him.</p> + +<p>“I've had no luck at all,” said he, in reply to Bob's inquiring look. +“I might as well have stayed at home. Don says he can't join a club +of this kind, because, having got David the job of trapping the +quails, he can't go back on him. He says he's a poacher and +pot-hunter himself; and what surprised me was, he did not seem to be +at all ashamed of it.”</p> + +<p>“Of course he wasn't ashamed,” said Bob. “He thinks that everything +he and his pale-faced brother do is just right. Did he say anything +about what passed between Bert and myself at the post-office?”</p> + +<p>“Not a word.”</p> + +<p>“I was afraid he would,” said Bob, drawing a long breath of relief, +“for he knows that you and I are friends.”</p> + +<p>Yes, Don knew that, but there were two good reasons why he had not +spoken to Lester about Bob's threat of slapping Bert over. In the +first place, he was not aware that Bob had made any such threat. Bert +was one of the few boys we have met, who did not believe in telling +everything he knew. Do you know such a boy among your companions? If +you do, you know one whom nobody is afraid to trust. Bert wanted to +live in peace, and thought it a good plan to quell disturbances, +instead of helping them along. He knew that if he told his brother +what had happened in the post-office, there would be a fight, the +very first time Don and Bob met, and Bert didn't believe in fighting. +But even if Don had known all about it, he would not have said +anything to Lester. He would have waited until he met Bob, and then +he would have used some pretty strong arguments, and driven them home +by the aid of his fist. How much trouble might be avoided, if there +were a few more boys like Bert Gordon in the world!</p> + +<p>“I am not sorry I went down there,” continued Lester, “for I had the +satisfaction of showing those conceited fellows that there are some +boys in the settlement besides themselves who know a thing or two. I +read the constitution to them, and it would have made you laugh to +see them open their eyes. Bert was so astonished that he couldn't say +a word, and Don never took his gaze off my face while I was reading. +When I got through he asked me to read that clause with the Latin and +Greek in it over again, so that he could copy the names in his +note-book. He'll learn them by heart, and use them some time in +conversation and so get the reputation of being a very smart and a +very learned boy. If he does it in your presence, I want you to let +folks know that he is showing off on the strength of <i>my</i> brains. I +don't suppose the ignoramus ever knew before——”</p> + +<p>“Well, who cares whether he did or not?” exclaimed Bob, impatiently. +“That's a matter that doesn't interest me. Is Dave Evans going to +make that hundred and fifty dollars and cheat me out of a new +shot-gun? That's what I want to know!”</p> + +<p>“Of course he isn't,” replied Lester. “We can't stop him by the aid +of the Sportsman's Club, and so we will stop him ourselves without +the aid of anybody. Let him go to work and set his traps, and we'll +see how many birds he will take out of them. We'll rob every one we +can find and keep the quail ourselves. In that way we may be able to +make up the fifty dozen without setting any of our own traps. We'll +write to that man, as you suggested, and when Dave finds he can't +catch any birds, he'll get discouraged and leave us a clear field. +But first I want to touch up Don and Bert Gordon a little to pay them +for the way they treated me this evening. That shooting-box shall be +laid in ashes this very night. I expected an invitation to shoot +there last spring, but I didn't get it, and now I am determined that +they shall never ask anybody there. What do you say?”</p> + +<p>“I say, I'm your man,” replied Bob.</p> + +<p>And so the thing was settled. Lester put his horse in the barn, went +in to supper, which was announced in a few minutes (Bob found +opportunity before he sat down to the table to purloin a box of +matches, which he put carefully away in his pocket), and when the +meal was over, the two boys went back to the wagon-shed, where they +sat and talked until it began to grow dark. Then Bob brought a couple +of paddles out of the corner of the wagon-shed, handed one to his +companion, and the two walked slowly down the road. When they were +out of sight of the house they climbed the fence, and directed their +course across the fields toward the head of the lake. Then they +quickened their pace. They had much to do, and they wanted to finish +their work and return to the house before their absence was +discovered.</p> + +<p>Half an hour's rapid walking brought them to the road just below +General Gordon's barn. The next thing was to make their way along the +foot of the garden until they reached the jetty, and that was an +undertaking that was not wholly free from danger. Don Gordon's hounds +were noted watch-dogs, and any prowlers they discovered were pretty +certain to be severely treated. But there was no flinching on the +part of the two boys. Bob led the way almost on his hands and knees, +stopping now and then to listen, and finally brought his companion to +the place where the boats were moored. There was only one of them +available, however, for the canoe, which they had intended to take, +was secured to a tree by a heavy padlock.</p> + +<p>“Did you ever hear of such luck?” whispered Bob.</p> + +<p>“Couldn't we paddle the other up there?” asked Lester, feeling of the +chain with which the sail-boat was fastened to the wharf, to make +sure that it was not locked.</p> + +<p>“O, yes; but why is this canoe locked up? That's what bothers me. +Perhaps Don suspects something and is on the watch.”</p> + +<p>“Who cares if he is?” exclaimed Lester. “I've come too far to back +out now. I wouldn't do it if Don and all his friends stood in my +way.”</p> + +<p>“All right. If you are not afraid, I am not. Be careful when you cast +off that chain. You know that sound travels a long way on a still +night like this.”</p> + +<p>Lester was careful, and the boat was pushed off and got under way so +noiselessly that a person standing on the bank would not have known +that there was anything going on. Bob, who knew just where the +shooting-box was located, sat in the stern and did the steering, at +the same time assisting Lester in paddling. The heavy boat moved +easily through the water, and before another half hour had passed +they were at their journey's end.</p> + +<p>“Hold up now,” whispered Bob, “and let's make sure that everything +is all right before we touch the shore.”</p> + +<p>Lester drew in his paddle and listened. He heard a whistling in the +air, as a solitary duck flew swiftly up the lake, and that was the +only sound that broke the stillness. The trees on the shore loomed up +darkly against the sky, and presented the appearance of a solid wall +of ebony. Lester could not see anything that looked like a +shooting-box, but Bob knew it was there, and when he had listened +long enough to satisfy himself that there was nobody in it or about +it, he brought the bow of the boat around and paddled toward the +shore.</p> + +<p>“Which way is it from here?” asked Lester, when the two had +disembarked. “I can't see anything.”</p> + +<p>“Hold fast to my coat-tail,” replied Bob, “and I'll show it to you +in a minute.”</p> + +<p>Lester being thus taken in tow was safely conducted up the bank. +Presently he heard a door unlatched and opened, a match was struck +and he found himself inside the shooting-box. He could scarcely have +been more surprised if he had found himself inside a little palace. +The shooting-box was not a shanty, as he expected to find it, but a +conveniently-arranged and neatly-constructed house. He borrowed a few +matches of Bob and proceeded to take a thorough survey of it. “Don +must have spent a good deal of time in fixing this up,” said he.</p> + +<p>“He certainly has,” replied Bob, “and he handles tools like a born +carpenter, too. I suppose this is a nice place to get away to when +the fellows are here shooting over their decoys. Joe Packard says so, +at any rate. They have mattresses and bed clothes in the bunks, a +carpet and rugs on the floor, camp chairs and stools enough for the +whole party, and they sit here of evenings and crack hickory-nuts +and tell stories and have boss times.”</p> + +<p>“It's almost a pity to break up their fun.”</p> + +<p>“It's a greater pity that Don should take money out of our pockets +and put it into those of that beggar, Dave Evans,” answered Bob, +spitefully.</p> + +<p>“That's so,” said Lester, who grew angry every time he thought of it. +“Set her agoing!”</p> + +<p>That was a matter of no difficulty. There was an abundance of dry +fuel and kindling wood in the little closet under the chimney, and +some of the latter was quickly whittled into shavings by the aid of +Bob's pocket knife, Lester standing by and burning matches to light +him at his work. More kindling wood was placed upon the shavings, +dry stove wood was piled upon the top of this, then the slats in +the bunks, the table and every other movable thing in the cabin +that would burn was thrown on, and Bob took a match in his hand +and extended another to his companion.</p> + +<p>“You light one side and I'll light the other,” said he. “Then you +can't say I did it, and I can't say you did it!”</p> + +<p>The matches blazed up on opposite sides at the same instant. The +flames made rapid progress, and by the time the boys had closed the +door and got into the boat, they were roaring and crackling at a +great rate. They quickly shoved off and laid out all their strength +on the paddles, but before they could reach the jetty the flames +burst through the roof of the shooting-box, and the lake was lighted +up for a quarter of a mile around. But no one saw it, and Lester and +his companion put the boat back where they found it, made their way +across the road into the fields, without alarming the hounds, and +started for home on a keen run, no one being the wiser for what +they had done.</p> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/image03.jpg" width="727" height="535" +alt="The Burning of the Shooting-Box."></div> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt10">CHAPTER X.<br> + +A BEAR HUNT.</a></h3> + +<p>“I'll jest do it, an' it's the luckiest thing in the world that I +thought of it. That will make me wuth—” here he stopped and counted +his fingers—“twenty-two dollars and two bits, anyhow. Then my +clothes, an' stockings, an' shoes, an' all the powder an' lead I want +this winter, won't cost me nothing; so I shall be rich fur all that +thar mean Dave is workin' so hard agin me.”</p> + +<p>It was Dan Evans who talked thus to himself, and he was standing +behind the cabin, with his hands in his pockets, and looking at Don's +pointer, just as he was the last time we saw him. He was so very much +delighted with certain plans he had determined upon that that he +did not dare meet his brother again just then, for fear that the +expression of joy and triumph which he knew his face wore would +attract David's notice and put him on his guard. So he remained in +the rear of the cabin with his thoughts for company, until his mother +came home. The dress David had purchased for her, and which he had +placed in the most conspicuous position he could find, was the first +thing that attracted her attention as she entered the door. Dan heard +her exclamation of joyful surprise, and listened with all his ears in +the hope of overhearing some of the conversation that passed between +her and David; but it was carried on in a low tone of voice, and Dan +was no wiser when it was concluded than he was before. He knew, +however, by the ejaculations that now and then fell from his mother's +lips that David was telling her something which greatly interested +her, and Dan would have given almost anything to know what it was. He +heard his mother laugh a little occasionally, and that brought the +scowl back to his face again. He could not bear to know that any one +about that house was happy.</p> + +<p>When supper was over, and David had done the chores and assisted +in clearing away the dishes, he and his mother seated themselves +in front of the fireplace and prepared to pass the evening in +conversation, as they always did, while Dan threw himself upon the +“shake-down” on which he and his brother slept, and in a few minutes +began snoring lustily. He was not asleep, however. His ears were +open, and so were his eyes the most of the time. He saw everything +that was done and heard all that passed between his mother and +David, but not a word did he hear that interested him. David had +already given his mother a history of the events of the day. She +knew what his plans were and approved them.</p> + +<p>When nine o'clock came David took possession of the other half of the +“shake-down” and prepared to go to sleep. He deposited his clothes at +the head of the bed, as usual, and Dan, through his half-closed eyes, +saw that he threw them down in a careless sort of way, as though +there was nothing of value in them.</p> + +<p>“But he can't fool me so easy,” thought Dan. “Not by no means. Thar's +ten dollars somewhar in them thar dry goods, unless he give 'em to +the ole woman when she fust come hum, an' they'll be mine afore +mornin'. He wouldn't go snacks with me, like a feller had oughter do, +an' now I'll have 'em all!”</p> + +<p>In an hour from that time everybody in the cabin appeared to be +asleep. Mrs. Evans certainly was and David seemed to be, for he lay +with his eyes closed, and breathed long and heavily. Dan took a good +look at him—the blazing fire on the hearth made the cabin almost as +light as day—and then reaching out his hand drew David's clothes +toward him. He searched all the pockets carefully, but there was +nothing in them except a pocket-knife with two broken blades, and +that was not what Dan was looking for. Muttering something under his +breath Dan turned all the pockets inside out and then felt of the +lining of the coat; but as nothing rewarded his search he tossed the +clothes back upon the floor, and cautiously slipped his hand under +his brother's pillow. As he did so David suddenly raised himself +upright in bed, and seizing the pillow, lifted it from its place.</p> + +<p>“If you want to look under there, why don't you say so?” he asked.</p> + +<p>Almost any other boy would have been overcome with shame and +mortification, but Dan was not easily abashed, and although he felt +a little crestfallen, his face did not show it.</p> + +<p>“It isn't there you see, don't you?” said David.</p> + +<p>“What isn't thar?” growled Dan.</p> + +<p>“Why, the ten-dollar bill you saw me have at the landing. It isn't +in my clothes either, or anywhere about the house.”</p> + +<p>“I wasn't lookin' fur it,” returned Dan.</p> + +<p>“I'll tell you where it is, if you want to know,” continued David. +“It is safe in Don Gordon's pocket-book, and you can't get it out of +there. I told you that you'd never have another chance to steal any +of my money, and I think you will believe it now. Good-night, and +pleasant dreams to you; that is, if you can sleep after such a +performance.”</p> + +<p>Dan could sleep, and he did, too, after he got over his rage, but +his night's rest did not seem to refresh him much, for he was cross +and sullen the next morning, and ate his breakfast without saying a +word to anybody. David was as bright as a lark; and after he had +assisted his mother in her household duties, he took down his rusty +old single-barrel from the pegs over the fireplace, slung on his +powder-horn and shot-pouch, and when his mother was ready to go, he +accompanied her down the road toward General Gordon's, leaving Dan +sitting on the bench, moody and thoughtful.</p> + +<p>“They don't take no more notice of me nor if I was a yaller dog or a +crooked stick,” growled Dan, when he found himself alone. “I'll pay +'em fur it by kickin' up a wusser row nor pap done 'bout that thar +bar'l, an' I shan't be long a doin' of it nuther!”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Evans and David separated at the forks of the road, the former +directing her course toward the house of the neighbor by whom she was +employed, and David hurrying on toward General Gordon's. When he +reached the head of the lake he heard a loud shout; and looking in +the direction from which it came, he saw Don and Bert standing on the +wharf beckoning to him. David ran across the garden to join the +brothers, and found that they were all ready to start on the hunt +they had planned the day before. A well-filled basket, which David +knew contained a substantial lunch, stood on the wharf, and near it +lay the General's heavy double-barrel gun, which Bert had borrowed +for the occasion, knowing that it would throw buck-shot with more +force than his light bird gun. Bert was unfastening the canoe, and +Don stood close by, with his trusty rifle in one hand and an axe in +the other. Two other axes lay near the lunch basket, and a couple of +Don's best hounds stood as close to the edge of the wharf as they +could get, wagging their tails vigorously and whining with +impatience.</p> + +<p>These hounds were large and powerful animals, and their courage +had been tested in more than one desperate bear fight. If they had +been with their master when he visited the island the day before, +something disagreeable might have happened. Godfrey Evans could not +have driven them away by imitating the growl of a wild animal. They +welcomed the newcomer with their bugle-like notes, and were answered +by a chorus of angry yelps from the rest of the pack, which had been +shut up in the barn and were to be left behind.</p> + +<p>“Now, I call this rather a formidable expedition,” said Don, as David +came up. “If that bear is there to-day I wouldn't take a dollar for +my chance of shooting him. One bullet and three loads of buckshot +will be more than he can carry away with him. Here are the axes to +build the trap with, if we don't find him on the island; there's a +bag of corn for bait, an auger to bore the holes and the pins with +which to fasten the logs together. Bert and I worked in the shop last +night until ten o'clock, making those pins. I think we have +everything we wan't, so we'll be off.”</p> + +<p>The canoe having been hauled alongside the wharf, and the articles +which Don had enumerated being packed away in it, the hounds jumped +in and curled themselves up in the bow, David took his place at +the oars and the brothers found comfortable seats in the stern. +Altogether it was a heavy load the little boat had to carry, and +she was so deep in the water that her gunwales were scarcely three +inches above the surface; but there were never any heavy seas to be +encountered in that little lake, and so there was no danger to be +apprehended.</p> + +<p>David sent the canoe rapidly along, and presently it entered the +bayou that led to Bruin's Island. As it approached Godfrey Evans's +cabin Dan arose from the bench on which he was seated in front of the +door, and ran hastily around the corner of the building. He did not +mean that Don and Bert should see him again, even at a distance, if +he could help it. He remained concealed until the canoe was out of +sight, and then came back to his bench again.</p> + +<p>While on the way up the bayou the young hunters stopped once, long +enough to pick up a brace of ducks which Bert killed out of a flock +that arose from the water just in advance of them, and at the end of +an hour came within sight of the leaning sycamore which pointed out +the position of Bruin's Island. There was no one to be seen, but that +was no proof that the island was deserted. There was some one there +whom the three boys did not expect to see or hear of very soon, and +that was Godfrey Evans. He was waiting for Dan to come with the canoe +and the tobacco and other articles he had been instructed to purchase +at the store. He had watched for him until long after midnight, then +retreated to his bed of leaves under the lean-to for a short nap, +and at the first peep of day he was again at his post behind the +sycamore. To his great relief he saw the boat coming at last, but his +joy was of short duration, for a second look showed him that Dan was +not in it.</p> + +<p>The canoe came nearer to the island with every stroke of the oars, +and presently one of Don's hounds started to his feet, snuffed the +air eagerly for a moment and uttered a deep-toned bay. Godfrey ducked +his head on the instant and crawled swiftly away from the sycamore on +his hands and knees. He was careful to keep the tree between himself +and those in the boat until he reached the cane, and then he arose to +his feet and worked his way toward his camp with all possible haste.</p> + +<p>“Them two oneasy chaps has come back agin, just as I thought they +would,” said he to himself, “and our Dave's with 'em. Don's got his +rifle now and his dogs, too, so't thar ain't no use tryin' to scare +him this time. I must hunt a new hidin'-place now.”</p> + +<p>Godfrey stopped in his camp just long enough to seize his rifle and +ammunition; after which he plunged into the cane again and ran toward +the head of the island. The muddy beach was thickly covered with +drift-wood, and behind a convenient pile of branches and logs Godfrey +crouched down and waited to see what was going to happen.</p> + +<p>The actions of Don's hounds made the young hunters almost as nervous +as they made Godfrey Evans. David stopped tugging at the oars and +looked over his shoulder; Bert caught up his father's double-barrel +and hastily loaded it with two cartridges containing buckshot; while +Don, after bringing the canoe broadside to the island, dropped the +paddle with which he was steering, and picked up his rifle.</p> + +<p>“He's there yet,” said Bert. “The hounds have scented him already.”</p> + +<p>“It looks like it,” replied Don. “Well, we came here to find him, and +if he drives us away to-day he'll have to fight to do it. Dave, you'd +better load up—Bert has plenty of loose buckshot in his pocket—and +mind you now, fellows, don't get excited and shoot the dogs. I'd +rather let the bear go than have one of them hurt.”</p> + +<p>While David was loading his single-barrel—his hands trembled a +little, and it took him longer than usual to do it—Don and Bert sat +with their guns across their knees, closely watching the island, +while the hounds stood in the bow snuffing the air. They caught some +taint upon the breeze, that was evident, for the long hair on the +back of their necks stood erect and now and then they growled +savagely.</p> + +<p>When David had driven home a good-sized charge of buckshot and placed +a cap upon his gun, he leaned the weapon against the thwart upon +which he was sitting and picked up the oars. Don dropped his paddle +into the water, and the canoe moved around the foot of the island and +along the beach, until it reached a point opposite the place where +Bert had found the path the day before. Then it was turned toward the +bank, and the moment the bow grounded, the hounds sprang out. The +boys followed with all haste, and Bert, as he stepped ashore, drew +the canoe half way out of the water, so that the current could not +carry her down the stream.</p> + +<p>“Now, we'll send the dogs in to drive him out,” said Don, “and if +they can push him fast enough to make him take to a tree, he's our +bear; but if he takes to the water and swims to the mainland, we +shall lose him. We don't care for that, however. He'll be sure to +come back, and when he does he'll find a trap waiting for him. We'll +see as much sport in catching him alive as we would in shooting him. +Hunt 'em up, there!” he added, waving his hand along the path.</p> + +<p>The hounds, baying fierce and loud at every jump, went tearing +through the cane, followed by the boys, who moved in single file, Don +leading the way. A very few minutes sufficed to bring them to the +cleared spot in which Godfrey's camp was located, and there they +found the hounds running about showing every sign of anger and +excitement.</p> + +<p>“They're on a warm trail,” said Don, looking first into each corner +of the cleared space and then up into the trees over his head. “The +game has just left here. This is somebody's old camp, and the bear +has taken possession of it. No doubt he slept in that shanty. Hunt +'em up, there!”</p> + +<p>The hounds followed Godfrey's trail through the camp, and diving into +the cane on the opposite side were quickly out of sight. The boys +followed, and presently stood panting and almost breathless beside +the drift-wood where the hounds were running about close to the +water's edge, now and then looking toward the opposite shore and +baying loudly. But Godfrey was safely out of their reach. Seizing the +opportunity when the hunters and dogs were hidden from view in the +cane, he stepped into the water and struck out for the mainland. He +had hardly time to climb the bank and conceal himself in the bushes +before Don's hounds were running about on the very spot where he had +been hidden but a few minutes before. Why was it that the hounds +followed his trail as they would have followed that of a bear or +deer? Simply because they scented him before they reached the island, +and because Godfrey took so much pains to keep out of their way. Had +he stood out in plain view while the boat was approaching, the hounds +would have paid no attention to him.</p> + +<p>“Well, he's gone,” said Bert, and the deep sigh that escaped his lips +as he uttered the words would have led one to believe that he was +glad of it, “and now comes the hard work. It's an all-day's job to +build that trap.”</p> + +<p>“It would be if we had to cut down the trees and trim off the +branches,” replied David; “but there is some timber in this +drift-wood that will answer our purpose as well as any we could get +ourselves. Where are you going to build the trap, Don?”</p> + +<p>“In there where his den is would be the best place, wouldn't it? Now +let's go after the axes; and while you and Bert are cutting the logs, +I'll unload the boat and open a road through the cane, so that we can +haul our timber in without any difficulty.”</p> + +<p>The work being thus divided rapid progress was made. By the time Don +had unloaded the boat and cut a path leading from Godfrey's camp to +the upper end of the island, Bert and David had selected and notched +all the logs that were needed for the trap. Then a stout rope, which +Don had been thoughtful enough to put into the boat, was brought into +requisition, and the work of hauling in the logs began. As fast as +they were placed in position, Don fastened them down with the pins he +and his brother had made the night before, and when lunch time came, +a neat log cabin about six feet square was standing in front of +Godfrey's lean-to. With a little “chinking” and the addition of a +door and perhaps a window, it would have made a much more comfortable +place of abode than the miserable bark structure which Godfrey had so +long occupied.</p> + +<p>Their hard work had given the boys glorious appetites, and they did +full justice to the good things Mrs. Gordon had put up for them. Don +said their lunch might have been much improved by the addition of one +of the ducks Bert had shot that morning, but their time was much too +precious to be wasted in cooking. The hardest part of their task was +yet to be done, and that was to build a movable roof for their cabin. +Don, who had received explicit instructions from his father the night +before, superintended this work, and by the middle of the afternoon +the trap was completed and set, ready for the bear's reception.</p> + +<p>It looked, as we have said, like a little log cabin with a flat roof. +One end of the roof rested on the rear wall of the trap, while the +other was raised in the air, leaving an opening sufficiently large to +admit of the entrance of any bear that was likely to come that way. +The roof was held in this position by a stout lever, which rested +across the limb of a convenient tree. A rope led from the other end +of the lever, down through a hole in the roof, to the trigger, to +which the bait—an ear of corn—was attached. The bear was expected +to crawl through the opening and seize the ear of corn; and in so +doing, he would spring the trigger, release the lever and the roof +would fall down and fasten him in the pen. When all the finishing +touches had been put on, the boys leaned on their axes and admired +their work.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt11">CHAPTER XI.<br> + +TRAPPING QUAILS.</a></h3> + +<p>“Now, I call that a pretty good job for a first attempt,” said Don; +“and considering the work we have had to do, it hasn't taken us a +great while either. I wish I dare crawl in there and set it off, just +to be sure that it will work all right.”</p> + +<p>“But that wouldn't be a very bright proceeding,” replied Bert. “We +could never get you out. You would be as securely confined as you +were when you were tied up in the potato-cellar.”</p> + +<p>Don was well aware of that fact. The roof was made of logs as heavy +as they could manage with their united strength, and there were other +logs placed upon it in such a position that when the roof fell, their +weight would assist in holding it down. All these precautions were +necessary, for a bear can exert tremendous strength if he once makes +up his mind to do it; and David had repeatedly declared that if they +should chance to capture an animal as large as the one that had been +killed on that very island years before, the pen would not prove half +strong enough to hold him. But it was quite strong enough to hold Don +if he got into it, and the only way his companions could have +released him would have been by cutting the roof in pieces with their +axes.</p> + +<p>The work was all done now, and the boys were ready to start for home. +While Bert and David were gathering up the tools and stowing them +away in the canoe, Don scattered a few ears of corn around, so that +the bear would be sure to find them the next time he visited the +island, and threw a dozen or so more into the trap close about the +trigger. The rest of the corn he hung up out of reach on a sapling +which he knew was too small for the bear to climb.</p> + +<p>Assisted by the current the canoe made good time down the bayou. Bert +and David lay back in the stern-sheets and said they were tired, +while Don, who was seated at the oars, declared that his day's work +had relieved his stiff joints, and that he began to feel like himself +again. He was fresh enough to assist in building another trap without +an hour's rest; and in order to work off a little of his surplus +energy, he thought when he reached home he would take a turn through +the fields in company with his pointer, and see if he could bag +quails enough for his next morning's breakfast. Bert said he would go +with him, for he wanted to see the pointer work.</p> + +<p>In about three quarters of an hour the canoe entered the lake and +drew up to the bank in front of Godfrey's cabin. David sprang out, +and after placing his gun upon the bench in front of the door, went +behind the building to unchain the pointer. He was gone a long +time—so long that Don and Bert, who were sitting in the canoe +waiting for him, began to grow impatient—and when he came back he +did not bring the pointer with him. He brought instead a chain and a +collar. His face told the brothers that he had made a most unwelcome +discovery.</p> + +<p>“Where's the dog?” asked Bert.</p> + +<p>“I don't know,” answered David, looking up and down the road. “He +must have slipped the collar over his head and gone off; but I never +knew him to do it before.”</p> + +<p>“Well, you needn't look so sober about it,” said Don. “He isn't far +away. I'll warrant I can bring him back.”</p> + +<p>Don set up a whistle that could have been heard for half a mile. +Indeed it was heard and recognised at a greater distance than that. +An answering yelp came from the direction of his father's house, +but it was not given by the dog Don wanted to see just then. It was +uttered by one of the hounds which had been shut up in the barn when +Don went away that morning, and afterward released by the hostler. +The others answered in chorus, and half a dozen fleet animals were +seen coming down the road at the top of their speed. But the pointer +was not with them.</p> + +<p>“It's likely we shall find him at the house,” said Bert, who wanted +to say something encouraging for David's benefit.</p> + +<p>“I don't doubt it,” returned Don. “If he's there, Dave, we'll take a +short hunt with him and bring him down in the morning.”</p> + +<p>“If you don't care I'll go up with you,” said David, “It would be a +great relief to me to know that he is safe.”</p> + +<p>“All right. Jump aboard.”</p> + +<p>David got into the canoe again and Don pulled up the lake toward the +wharf. When they reached it the boat was made fast to the tree again, +and the three boys started for the house. Don at once began making +inquiries concerning his pointer, but no one had seen him, and his +loud and continued whistling brought only the hounds, which snuffed +at the guns and yelped and jumped about as if trying to make their +master understand that they were there, and ready for anything he +might want them to do.</p> + +<p>“Never mind,” said Don, who did not seem to feel half as bad as David +did; “dogs of his breed never stray far away, and he'll be at your +house or ours before morning, you may depend upon it. Good-by now, +and don't forget to be on hand at an early hour. We must set to work +upon those traps without any more delay.”</p> + +<p>David reluctantly turned his face toward home, and Don and Bert +went into the house. “I didn't tell him just what I think about the +matter, for he feels badly enough already,” said Don, when he and his +brother were in their room, dressing for supper. “There's an awful +thief about here, and it wouldn't surprise me at all to know that the +pointer has gone where our canoe went.”</p> + +<p>“Do you know that that thought has been in my mind all the while?” +returned Bert. “Who is the thief?”</p> + +<p>“I give it up. If he lives about here he's foolish to steal my dog, +for he never can use him in hunting. There isn't a man or boy in the +settlement but would recognise him the moment he saw him.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps he was stolen in the hope that a reward would be offered for +his return,” suggested Bert.</p> + +<p>“Well, there's something in that. But after all,” added Don, a few +minutes later, “there isn't so much in it, for how could the thief +return the dog without making himself known? Still I hope it is +so—that is, if the dog was stolen—for rather than lose him, I'll +give ten dollars to anybody who will bring him back to me, and ask no +questions. If I have to do that it will ruin me, for it will take my +last cent.”</p> + +<p>The ringing of the supper bell put a stop to their conversation for +the time being, but it was resumed as soon as the family were +gathered about the table. Various explanations were offered for the +pointer's absence, and when that matter had been talked over, the +events of the day were brought up for discussion. Bert acted as +spokesman, and when he told how the hounds had driven the bear from +his den and forced him to swim the bayou, Don was surprised to see +that his father smiled as if he did not quite believe it. “It's the +truth, every word of it,” said Don, almost indignantly.</p> + +<p>“O, I don't doubt that you found something on the island and drove it +off,” replied the General, “but I don't think it was a bear.”</p> + +<p>“What was it?” asked Don.</p> + +<p>“It was something you will not be likely to catch in your trap. It +was Godfrey Evans.”</p> + +<p>Don dropped his knife and fork, and settled back in his chair. “We +saw tracks in the mud that did not look to me like bear tracks, +that's a fact,” said he. “If that was Godfrey, he's the one who stole +our canoe.”</p> + +<p>“Then we have had all our trouble for nothing,” said Bert.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps not,” replied his father. “The island has been much +frequented by bears ever since I can remember, and it may be that +your labor will be rewarded in a day or two. It might be well for you +to watch your trap at any rate. If you should happen to catch a young +bear, that you could bring home alive, Silas Jones would give you +twenty dollars for it. That would be a big addition to David's little +capital, for of course you wouldn't want any of the money.”</p> + +<p>“Of course not. All we want is the fun of catching the bear.”</p> + +<p>Don and Bert were up the next morning before the sun, as they always +were, and as soon as they were dressed, they went out to the shop and +found David there busy with his traps. He knew where the key was +kept, under the door-step, and at the first peep of day he had let +himself in and gone to work. Of course the first questions that were +asked and answered were in regard to the missing pointer, but no one +had seen or heard anything of him. David seemed to take the loss very +much to heart. The animal was a valuable one, and he felt that he was +in some degree responsible for his safe-keeping.</p> + +<p>Three pairs of willing hands made light work, and by two o'clock in +the afternoon a dozen traps were completed and ready for setting. The +boys then stopped long enough to take a hasty lunch, which they ate +in the shop, in order to save time, and after that one of the mules +was hitched to a wagon and brought before the door. The traps, a +basket containing the “figure fours,” with which they were to be +set, a bag of corn for bait, an axe, with which to clear away the +underbrush, and a spade to dig the trenches, having been packed away +in the vehicle, the boys got in and drove off. They directed their +course along the fence, which ran around the plantation, and wherever +they found a clump of bushes or a little thicket of briers and cane, +there they stopped long enough to set one of their traps.</p> + +<p>The traps were made of slats split from oak boards, and were a little +less than four feet square and a little more than a foot in height. +In the top was a slide covering a hole large enough to admit one's +arm, and it was through this hole that the captured birds were to be +taken out. The undergrowth was first cut away with the axe and the +trap put down in the clear space, a narrow board being placed under +two sides of it, to give it a solid foundation. A trench just large +enough to admit a single quail was dug under each of these boards, +one end of the trench being on the outside of the trap and the other +on the inside. A small ear of corn was tied firmly to the trigger, +the trap set with the “figure four,” a few kernels were scattered +about in the immediate neighborhood, and the trap was ready for the +first flock of quails that might come that way. When they came, they +would, of course, find the corn, and while they were eating it they +would be sure to find the trap. One or more of them would go in and +spring it by pecking at the ear that was tied to the trigger, and the +others, no matter if there were a hundred in the flock, would all go +in to him through the trenches before spoken of. After they had eaten +the corn, they would look <i>up</i> instead of down for a way of escape, +and, although the trenches at which they came in were still open to +them, they would not know enough to make use of them. If the trap was +once sprung, the capture of the entire flock was certain, provided +those outside were not frightened away before they had time to go in +to their imprisoned companions.</p> + +<p>In two hours' time the traps had all been set and the boys were at +home again. They had done a good day's work, but they wanted to do +a better; so as soon as the mule was unharnessed and the wagon put +under the shed where it belonged, they set to work in the shop again, +and before dark a large coop, which would just fit into the wagon +box, was completed. This was to be used to bring home the captured +quails. After that one of the unoccupied negro cabins was selected to +confine the birds in until the required number had been trapped. It +received a thorough sweeping, the floor was covered with clean sand, +and the broken window was boarded up so that the captives could not +escape. When this was done David started for home, and Don and Bert +went into the house to get ready for supper.</p> + +<p>The next day was spent much as the preceding one had been spent. At +eleven o'clock seven more traps were ready for the field. Then the +mule and wagon were brought into use again, and the new traps were +distributed along the fence. When the boys came back they took time +to eat lunch, after which the coop was put into the wagon, and they +set out to visit the traps they had set the day before.</p> + +<p>“There's nothing here,” said Bert, as he drew rein in front of the +thicket in which the first trap was located. He could not see the +trap, but his ears told him all he wanted to know. If there had been +any quails in it they would have uttered their notes of alarm as soon +as they heard the wagon coming.</p> + +<p>“No, there's nothing here!” said Don, after listening a moment. “I'll +scatter a little more corn about and make sure that the trap is all +right.”</p> + +<p>He got out of the wagon as he spoke, and while he was working his way +into the thicket he flushed a blue-jay, which flew into a tree close +by and scolded him with all its might. Don shied a stick at it and +kept on to the trap. It was down, and there was something in it which +fluttered its wings against the bars and made the most frantic +efforts to escape. Don knew it was not a quail, so he did not stop to +see what it was. He threw back the slide, thrust his hand into the +opening and when he clutched the bird received a severe bite from it. +“I have half a mind to wring your little neck for you,” thought Don, +as he brought the fluttering captive, a beautiful red-bird, into +view. “Not because you have bitten me, but because you will make it +your business to come here and spring this trap every day. Red-birds +and blue-jays are perfect nuisances when a fellow is trapping, and I +wouldn't blame Dave for shooting every one he sees.”</p> + +<p>But Don did not injure the bird. He was a sportsman, and never made +war on game of this sort. He tossed the captive into the air and it +flew away out of sight.</p> + +<p>Having set the trap again and scattered a little more corn about to +replace that which had been picked up by the birds, Don went back to +the wagon and Bert drove on down the field. They found the second +trap thrown, and the marks of little teeth on the ear of corn that +was tied to the trigger showed that a ground squirrel had been at +work. The third trap was also sprung, and the shrill, piping notes of +alarm which came to their ears when Bert stopped the wagon, told them +that they had made their first capture. Jumping quickly out of the +wagon the boys made their way into the bushes, and when they came +within sight of the trap they found that it was so full that the +little prisoners had scarcely room to turn about.</p> + +<p>“Here's the first instalment of your hundred and fifty dollars, +Dave,” cried Don. “We've got more than a dozen, I know!”</p> + +<p>Having stopped up the ends of the trenches so that the quails could +not escape, Don thrust his arm through the opening in the top of the +trap and began passing out the birds to his brother and David, who +carried them to the wagon and put them into the coop. He counted them +as he took them out, and found that there were nearer two dozen than +one, twenty being the exact number. One, however, escaped from Bert, +who, through fear of injuring it, handled it too tenderly.</p> + +<p>“Never mind,” said Don, when his brother told him of the loss. “He'll +go off and join some other flock, so we are bound to catch him +anyhow. I call this a good beginning, don't you, Dave? It looks now +as though you were going to earn your money in spite of Lester and +Dan.”</p> + +<p>After re-setting the trap the boys got into the wagon and drove on. +They found some of their traps just as they had left them; a few had +been thrown by ground squirrels or red-birds; and from the others +they took enough quails to make their day's catch amount to a little +over four dozen. These were all safely transferred to the cabin, the +mule was unharnessed and the young trappers, greatly encouraged by +their success, replenished the fire in the shop, for the day was raw +and chilly, and went to work to build more traps.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt12">CHAPTER XII.<br> + +WHERE THE POINTER WAS.</a></h3> + +<p>“Yes, sar, I'm goin' to raise a furse here now, an' I won't be long +about it, nuther. They think I don't amount to nothin' in this yere +house, but I'll show 'em that I do. Pap bein' away, I had oughter be +the man of the family, an' that leetle Dave shan't crowd me outen the +place, nuther. When he comes back to-night his eyes'll stick out so't +a feller could hang his hat onto 'em. You hear me?”</p> + +<p>This was the way Dan Evans talked to himself, as he sat on the bench +in front of the door, gazing after his mother and David, as they +walked down the road toward General Gordon's. He was greatly enraged +over his failure to steal his brother's ten dollars, and really +thought David had been guilty of a mean piece of business in putting +his money where it would be safe.</p> + +<p>“He hain't went off with that thar shootin'-iron on his shoulder fur +nothin',” thought Dan. “He's goin' huntin' with them Gordon fellers, +and he'll have a nice time an' get somethin' good to eat, while I +must go without my dinner, dog-gone it, kase thar hain't nobody here +to cook it fur me. They don't take half so much notice of me as they +would if I was a pinter dog!”</p> + +<p>Dan sat on the bench for half an hour or more, now and then looking +down the road as if he were waiting for something, and all the while +his mind was occupied with such thoughts as these. At last the sight +of Don Gordon's canoe, which suddenly appeared in the lake, brought +him to his feet and sent him behind the cabin in great haste. It did +more. It recalled to him the fact that his father had told him to +steal that same canoe and bring it to Bruin's Island, together with +several necessary articles that were to be purchased at Silas Jones's +store. Dan had not once thought of this since he saw David at the +landing with ten dollars in his hand, and heard the grocer tell him +that his credit was good for six months; but he thought of it the +moment he saw the canoe with the hounds curled up in the bow. His +eyes were sharp enough to see that Don carried his rifle in his +hands, and that a heavy shot-gun, which Dan knew belonged to General +Gordon, leaned over Bert's shoulder. Godfrey's prediction was about +to be fulfilled. Don was going back to the island to shoot the bear +which had frightened him and his brother the day before. The thought +made Dan almost frantic. He jumped up and knocked his heels together, +slapped his hands, dashed his hat upon the ground and made other +demonstrations indicative of a very perturbed state of mind.</p> + +<p>“Pap's in fur it now, an' so am I,” said he, in an excited whisper. +“He'll get his jacket wet swimmin' the bayou to get away from them +fellers, if they give him the chance, an' I'll get mine dusted with a +hickory, kase I didn't fetch that canoe up thar. I jest wish I knowed +what to do.”</p> + +<p>Dan, almost ready to cry with vexation and alarm, watched the canoe +until it turned into the bayou and passed out of his sight, and then +went back to the bench and sat down to think about this new +difficulty in which he found himself, and to find a way out of it if +he could. His father would be compelled to hunt up a new hiding-place +now—there was no way to prevent that—and in order to leave the +island he would probably be forced to swim the bayou, for he would +have no time to build a raft. That would, of course, make him angry, +and he never could breathe easily again until he had taken +satisfaction out of somebody. That somebody Dan knew was certain to +be himself, unless—</p> + +<p>“I'll fix him,” thought the boy, his face clearing up, as a bright +idea came into his mind. “I'll take him the pinter. I was goin' to +hide him in the woods somewhar, but pap kin take keer on him as well +as not. Don'll pay a dollar or two to get him back, an' I'll give the +ole man half. But fust, I must go down to the landin' an' buy them +shoes an' tobacker; an' while I'm thar, I'll jest say a good word +to Silas fur myself. I'm a nobody about this yere house, am I? Dave +wouldn't give me them ten dollars to keep fur him, an' now I'll take +somethin' outen his pocket without sayin' a word to him.”</p> + +<p>Dan shook his head in a very wise and knowing manner, and went into +the house after his rifle. He did not take it because he expected to +find any game while he was on the way to the landing, but because he +had fallen into the habit of carrying it with him everywhere he went +and felt lonely without it.</p> + +<p>Knowing that Don and Bert were not at home, Dan did not go around +through the fields to avoid the General's barn, as he usually did, +but boldly followed the road. There were a few idle men hanging about +the store, as there almost always were, but none of them appeared to +be doing any trading, and the grocer was ready to attend to Dan's +wants at once. The boy bought the articles his father wanted, and +having pocketed his change, cleared his throat, preparatory to saying +a good word for himself.</p> + +<p>“Mr. Jones, if you please, sar, Dave done sent me down here this +mornin' to ax you would you give me somethin' fur myself, if you +please, sar—some shoes an' sich like.”</p> + +<p>“Certainly,” replied the grocer, readily, and Dan was surprised to +see that he held out his hand as if he expected to receive something.</p> + +<p>“I hain't got no money,” said Dan.</p> + +<p>“That makes no difference. I don't want any money from David.”</p> + +<p>“Then I'll take a pair of them amazin' fine lookin' shoes of +your'n—number nines, please, sar.”</p> + +<p>“All right. Hand out the order.”</p> + +<p>“Sar!” exclaimed Dan, opening his eyes.</p> + +<p>“Why, if David doesn't come here himself and tell me to give you the +things, he must send a written order.”</p> + +<p>“Dave, he done told me to git 'em,” faltered Dan.</p> + +<p>“I don't doubt it; but in order to have things straight, you go home +and get an order for such things as you want and I'll give them to +you.”</p> + +<p>Dan gathered the articles which he had purchased for his father under +one arm, took his rifle under the other, backed slowly away from the +counter and went out of the store. He wasn't quite so smart as he +thought he was. His shoes and stockings, and the ammunition for his +rifle, which he thought he was going to get for nothing, were likely +to cost him something after all. It was an easy matter to cheat +confiding fellows like Don and Bert, who were much more familiar with +Greek than they were with the way business was conducted, but it was +not so easy to deceive a man like Silas Jones. Dan was surprised +and disappointed, and of course as angry as he could be. He walked +rapidly along the road with his bundles, under his arm and his rifle +on his shoulder, and it was not until he reached home and had sunned +himself for a few minutes on the bench in front of the door, that he +cooled down so that he could think the matter over. But he could +think to no purpose even then; and after resting a few minutes +longer, he arose and went into the cabin.</p> + +<p>He walked straight to the “shake-down” which he and his brother +occupied, and drew from under the head of it a piece of rope he had +placed there the night before. With this in his hand he came out +again, and after looking up and down the road, to make sure that +there was no one in sight, he went around the building to the kennel +where Don's pointer was confined. The animal came out to meet him, +and Dan did not send him back with a kick, as he usually did. He took +off his collar, and having tied the rope about his neck, buckled the +collar again and threw it on the ground, hoping in this way to give +David the impression that his charge had liberated himself. He then +led the dog to the high rail fence which surrounded the lot, assisted +him to climb over it, and left him there in the bushes, while he +returned to the bench after his rifle and bundles. These secured, he +climbed the fence himself, picked up the rope and hurried into the +woods, the pointer trotting along contentedly by his side.</p> + +<p>Dan thought he knew just where to go to find his father. The latter +would, of course, be on the lookout for his son, and it was +reasonable to suppose that he would remain somewhere in the vicinity +of the island; so Dan followed the course of the bayou, taking care +to keep so far away from it that he would not be discovered by any +one who might chance to be passing in a boat, and when he had +approached close enough to the island to hear the voices of the young +hunters and the sound of their axes, he tied the pointer to a tree, +deposited his bundles on the ground near by, and with his rifle for +a companion crept through the bushes to see what they were doing.</p> + +<p>There was no one in sight when he first reached the bank of the +bayou, but in a few minutes Bert and David came out of the cane with +a rope in their hands. There were several logs scattered about the +beach, and David made the rope fast to one of them and he and Bert +dragged it into the cane. While Dan was wondering what they were +going to do with the log a twig snapped near him, and he turned +quickly to find his father almost within reach of him.</p> + +<p>“Halloo, pap!” said Dan, jumping to his feet and backing into the +bushes.</p> + +<p>“Whar's the tobacker?” demanded Godfrey, in a subdued tone of voice.</p> + +<p>“I've got it. You ain't mad, be you, pap?”</p> + +<p>“I ain't so scandalous mad now, but if I could have got my fingers +into your collar about the time I was a shiverin' in my wet clothes, +I'd a played 'Far'well to the Star Spangled Banner' on your back with +a good hickory, I bet you!”</p> + +<p>“'Kase if you be mad 'tain't my fault,” continued Dan. “I tried my +level best to steal the canoe, but couldn't do it. It was locked up +tighter'n a brick. I tried to get ten dollars fur you too, pap, but I +couldn't do that nuther; so I brung Don Gordon's pinter along. Swum +the bayou, I reckon, didn't you?”</p> + +<p>“I didn't walk acrosst, did I? In course I swum it.”</p> + +<p>“Your clothes ain't wet!”</p> + +<p>“No, 'kase I went back in the woods an' built a fire an' dried 'em. +Le's go back thar now, so't we kin talk. We don't want them fellers +to hear us.”</p> + +<p>“What be they doin' over thar, anyhow?” asked Dan.</p> + +<p>“They're buildin' a bar trap, looks like. They'll be sartin to ketch +one too, 'kase thar's a bar comes thar a'most every night. If I had a +boat they wouldn't get much good of him arter they do ketch him.”</p> + +<p>Dan handed his rifle to his father and went back after the pointer +and his bundles; and when he came up again Godfrey led the way toward +his temporary camp. He was gloomy and sullen, and there was an +expression on his face which Dan did not like to see there, for it +made him fear that a storm was brewing. But after they had been a few +minutes in the camp, and Godfrey had filled his pipe and smoked a +whiff or two, the scowl faded away and Dan began to breathe easier.</p> + +<p>“I've put you in the way to make a dollar, pap,” said he, as soon +as the soothing effects of the tobacco began to be perceptible. “If +you'll take that pinter an' keep him till I call fur him, I'll give +you half of what Don pays me to get him back.”</p> + +<p>“I seed you bringin' the dog an' I knowed what you was up to,” +replied his father. “But Don don't get him back fur no dollar, I tell +you. That animile is wuth fifty dollars anyhow, an' if Don wants him +agin he'll have to plank down five dollars.”</p> + +<p>“Whew!” whistled Dan. “We're gettin' rich, ain't we? Now, pap, thar's +your shoes an' stockin's, an' thar's the change Silas give me. You +kin put it with what you've got left of your twenty dollars, an' +when——O, laws!”</p> + +<p>Dan jumped to his feet, opened his mouth and eyes and looked at his +father in the greatest astonishment. Something he had said seemed to +produce a wonderful effect upon Godfrey. His pipe dropped from his +lips, the color all left his face and after sitting silent and +motionless for a moment, he gave utterance to a loud yell, sprang to +his feet and strode about the camp as if he were almost beside +himself.</p> + +<p>“What's the matter of you, pap?” Dan ventured to inquire, as soon as +he could find his tongue.</p> + +<p>“I hain't got no money at all no more!” Godfrey almost shouted. +“That's what's the matter of me. It's over thar on the island whar +them fellers is!”</p> + +<p>“No!” gasped Dan.</p> + +<p>“But I say, yes, it is too!” exclaimed Godfrey. “You see,” he added, +controlling himself with a great effort, “when I fust seed them +fellers comin' up the bayou the sun was kinder shinin' on the water, +an' it blinded me so't I thought it was you. I was jest goin' to +speak, when I seed thar was three fellers in the boat; an' afore I +could ax myself what that meant, one of the hounds that Don had with +him set up a yelp. I knowed that meant business, an' it skeared me +so't I didn't think of nothin' only how to get off'n that thar island +without bein' diskivered. I got off all right, but I left my money in +that thar holler log, an' I never thought of it till this blessed +minute.”</p> + +<p>“Mebbe they won't find it,” said Dan.</p> + +<p>“Wal, that's a comfortin' thought,” returned his father, sighing +heavily, as he picked up his pipe, “but luck's agin me. It allers is. +Other folks can get along smooth an' easy, but I can toil an' slave +an' slave an' toil till—jest look at me,” added Godfrey, rising to +his feet again and turning slowly about, so that Dan could have a +fair view of him. “Ain't this a purty fix fur a man to be in who +owned niggers an' cotton, by the acre only a little while ago? That's +jest what makes me 'spise them Gordons.”</p> + +<p>“An' that's what makes me 'spise that Dave of our'n,” exclaimed Dan. +“He's gettin' richer every day. He's got ten dollars in greenback +money now, an' I done heard Silas Jones tell him that his credit was +good at the store for six months.”</p> + +<p>Godfrey opened his eyes when he heard this, and so interested was he +in the story Dan had to tell that he forgot his troubles for the time +being. He seated himself again, and while he was refilling his pipe +Dan gave him a history of what had happened at the store, and told +how David had come by the ten dollars. He also described the manner +in which he had tried to obtain possession of it, and told how he had +failed in his attempt to induce Silas to give him a pair of shoes on +the strength of David's credit. This led to a long discussion between +the father and son, during which various plans were laid and one or +two things determined upon which will probably be revealed in due +time. Dan paid strict attention to all his father said, but he was +glad when the interview was over. Godfrey was almost beside himself +with fury. Having been unfortunate himself he was enraged to learn +that anybody else was prosperous; and when he heard of David's good +luck he looked and acted so savagely that Dan began to fear for his +own personal safety. He started for home as soon as he could find an +excuse for so doing, and it was not until he was out of sight and +hearing of his father's camp that he began to breathe easily.</p> + +<p>Dan did not go directly home. He was in no hurry to meet his brother, +for he was afraid the latter might have something to say to him about +the pointer. He roamed through the woods, and having shot a few +squirrels, built a fire and roasted and ate them. He stayed in his +camp until the sun went down and it began to grow dark, and then +shouldered his rifle and reluctantly turned his face toward the +cabin. He did not find his brother there, but he came in shortly +afterward, and then Dan found that he had been borrowing trouble, for +David never said a word to him about the pointer. He told his mother +of the loss, and of course she sympathized with him, and offered +every explanation except the right one. The thief opened his eyes and +looked surprised while they were talking, but neither of them paid +any attention to him; and Dan, muttering angrily to himself that he +was nothing more than a crooked stick about that house any way, +undressed and went to bed.</p> + +<p>Dan passed the next day in his usual idle and shiftless manner. He +saw David go up to General Gordon's, and would have been glad to know +what sort of work he was doing up there, and how much he was to +receive for it. He did not find out that day, but he did the next, +and the discovery made him feel like a new boy.</p> + +<p>Growing tired of staying by himself, Dan thought he would go down to +the landing, hoping that he would find a shooting-match going on +there, or that a steamer would come in, bringing a stranger or two +for him to stare at. The weather was raw and chilly, too, and Dan's +bare feet were blue with the cold. He must have a pair of shoes and +stockings; and since he couldn't get them in any other way, a portion +of the money he had hidden in that hollow log in the woods must be +brought into use. Dan took out the necessary amount, and groaned +when he looked at the small sum he had left.</p> + +<p>As soon as the sun had warmed the air a little, Dan shouldered his +rifle and set out. He did not follow the road, as he did before, for +that would take him past the General's barn, and Don and Bert were at +home now. He went around through the fields; and it was while he was +sitting on a log near General Gordon's fence, watching the only +squirrel he had seen since leaving home, that he accidentally learned +what it was that took David over to Don's house so regularly every +morning, and kept him there all day. He first heard the creaking of +wheels and the sound of voices, and they came from the General's +field, which was not more than twenty feet distant, and which was +concealed from his view by the thick bushes that lined the fence. Dan +recognised the voices, and his first impulse was to jump up and take +to his heels. His next was to stay where he was until the wagon +passed by, and this he did; for he was in an excellent hiding-place +and no one could have found him without taking pains to look for him.</p> + +<p>The wagon came nearer, the voices grew louder, and presently Dan +heard the shrill notes of a quail directly in front of him and just +on the other side of the fence. He paid no attention to the sound +until the wagon was brought to a stand-still in front of the thicket, +and somebody, after working his way into the bushes, called out in a +cheery voice:</p> + +<p>“Here's the first instalment of your hundred and fifty dollars, +David!”</p> + +<p>These words made Dan so excited that he almost betrayed his presence +by letting his rifle fall out of his hands. He cautiously raised +himself to a standing position on the log, and looking through the +tops of the bushes, listened intently to catch every word that was +said.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt13">CHAPTER XIII.<br> + +TEN DOLLARS REWARD.</a></h3> + +<p>When the quails had been taken out of the trap and put into the coop, +the wagon drove on, and Dan sat down on his log to think about what +he had just heard, and to wait until the coast was clear, so that he +could resume his walk toward the landing. He had learned two things. +One was that his brother had not given up the idea of trapping the +quails, as he had supposed, and the other was that there was somebody +besides himself whom David had reason to fear.</p> + +<p>“Looks now as though you were goin' to 'arn your money in spite of +Dan and Lester,” thought the listener, recalling the last words he +had heard Don utter. “That must be that Brigham boy up to that big +white house. What's he got to say 'bout it, I'd like to know? I'll +jest keep an eye on him. He don't want to let me ketch him foolin' +round them traps, 'kase I'll make him think war times has come back +sure enough. Now that I've got another chance to 'arn a share in them +hundred and fifty dollars, nobody shan't take it away from me.”</p> + +<p>Dan was as good as his word. He kept a sharp watch over David's +interests, and perhaps we shall see that he was the means of +defeating a certain plan, which, if it had been carried into +execution, would have worked a great injury to the boy trapper.</p> + +<p>The wagon having passed on out of hearing, Dan shouldered his rifle +and started toward the landing. While he was skulking through the +woods at the lower end of the field, he stopped in a fence corner +long enough to see David and his two friends transfer another +good-sized catch from one of the traps to the coop in the wagon. The +sight encouraged him greatly. If David's good luck would only +continue for just one week, the fifty dozen birds would certainly be +captured, and Dan would stand a chance of making a small fortune. It +was not so very small either in his estimation. His share would be +seventy-five dollars—his father had told him so—and that would make +a larger pile of greenbacks than Dan had ever seen at one time in his +life. With it he was sure he could buy a new gun as fine as the one +Don Gordon owned (he would not have believed it if any one had told +him that that little breech-loader cost a hundred and twenty-five +dollars in gold), a jointed fish-pole, and some good clothes to wear +to church; and when he had purchased all these nice things, he hoped +to have enough left to buy a circus-horse like Don's, and perhaps a +sail-boat also. Godfrey, for reasons of his own, had held out these +grand ideas to him during one of their interviews, and Dan, being +unable to figure the matter out for himself, believed all his father +told him.</p> + +<p>Having seen the second catch put into the coop, Dan started toward +the landing again. It was mail day, and consequently there was a +larger number of loafers about the post-office than there usually +was. Among them were Lester Brigham and Bob Owens, who seemed to be +very much interested in something that was fastened to the +bulletin-board in the store. Having nothing better to do just then +Dan walked up behind them, and looking over their shoulders spelled +out with much difficulty the following—</p> + +<blockquote> +<p>“NOTICE.</p> + +<p>“<i>Ten Dollars Reward</i>.</p> + +<p>“Strayed or stolen, my black-and-white pointer, <i>Dandy</i>. I will pay +the above reward for his safe return, and ask no questions; or I will +give <i>Five Dollars</i> for any information that will lead to his +recovery.</p> + +<p>“DONALD GORDON.”</p> +</blockquote> + +<p>“I am glad he has lost him, and I hope he will never see him again,” +said Bob, spitefully. “If I knew where he was, I wouldn't tell him +for five times five dollars.”</p> + +<p>“What does he want him back for, anyhow?” said Lester. “Don is +assisting in shipping quails out of the country, and the first thing +he knows the dog will be of no use to him.”</p> + +<p>Dan did not waste five minutes in loafing about the store after that. +Here was something he had been waiting for ever since he stole the +pointer. The owner had offered a heavy reward for his safe return—it +was twice as much as Godfrey said they ought to have—and the next +thing to be settled was, how to obtain the money, without facing Don +Gordon. This was a question over which Dan had often bothered his few +brains, but without finding any way of answering it. Something must +be determined upon now, however, for there was a nice little sum of +money at stake.</p> + +<p>Dan made all haste to do his trading, and taking his stockings and +shoes under his arm, set out for home, avoiding the road, as he +always did when Don and Bert were about, and skulking around through +the woods and fields. When he reached the cabin, he seated himself +upon the bench beside the door, and there he remained building +air-castles until four o'clock in the afternoon. Then he began to +bestir himself, and David, who came home that night before his mother +did, was surprised to find a roaring fire on the hearth, a pile of +wood large enough to last all the evening beside it, and in a pan +upon the table a half a dozen squirrels, dressed and ready for the +frying-pan.</p> + +<p>“What in the world is up now?” thought David. “Dan's got an axe to +grind, for he never does such things, unless he intends to make +something by it.”</p> + +<p>“Halloo, Davy!” exclaimed Dan, cheerfully. “I thought mebbe you'd be +cold when you come hum, so I built up a fire to warm you. Jest look +at them thar squirrels, will you? Every one on 'em was shot through +the head. Can you beat that?”</p> + +<p>“No,” answered David. “It can't be beaten.”</p> + +<p>“If we had a few quail now, we'd have a bully supper, wouldn't we?” +continued Dan. “You don't seem to shoot no more quail lately, do you, +Davy?”</p> + +<p>“O, I can't hunt them without a dog to tell me where they are.”</p> + +<p>“Hain't you never heard nothin' from that pinter pup at all?”</p> + +<p>“Not a word.”</p> + +<p>“I'm sorry. I wish I knowed whar he was, so't I could fetch him hack. +I'm scandalous mad at myself fur takin' that money from you an' Don, +an' if I had ten dollars I'd give 'em back to-night; but I hain't got +'em, an' so I'm goin' to try an' find his dog fur him.”</p> + +<p>“He'll be very glad to get him,” said David, who knew very well that +his brother had some other reason for taking this sudden interest in +the pointer.</p> + +<p>“I want to act decent now, like a gentleman had oughter act,” Dan +went on; “an' if I do what I can fur Don, do you reckon he'll call it +squar'?”</p> + +<p>“I don't know. You must talk to him about that.”</p> + +<p>“But I ain't agoin' to face him 'till I know how he feels towards me, +I bet you. I don't know whar the dog is, more'n the man in the moon; +but I'm kinder scentin' round, when I hain't got no work to do, an' +if I should happen to find him, would you take him to Don fur me?”</p> + +<p>“Of course I would, and be very glad to do it.”</p> + +<p>“Then I'll do what I kin, an' if I do say it myself, I kin find him +if anybody kin. I kin afford to spend all my time lookin' fur him, +kase I was down to the landin' to-day, an' I seed a notice stuck up +thar sayin' that Don'll give ten dollars fur him an' ax no questions. +What's the matter of you?” demanded Dan, as David turned quickly +about and walked toward the door. “Hain't goin' off mad, be you?”</p> + +<p>“I don't know what to make of you, Dan,” replied David. “A little +while ago you gave me to understand that the reason why you wanted to +bring the dog back to Don, was because you wanted to make everything +square between you and him; and now you say you want to do it because +Don has offered a reward for him.”</p> + +<p>“An' I told you the gospel truth both times,” exclaimed Dan. “That +thar animile is wuth every cent of fifty dollars; an' if I bring him +back, it'll be that much in Don's pocket an' ten dollars in mine. I +kin afford to work fur that, can't I?”</p> + +<p>“Very well,” said David. “If you will produce the dog, safe and +sound, I'll take him to his master for you, and bring back the reward +if he gives it to me.”</p> + +<p>This interview had a perceptible effect upon both the boys. It took +away all Dan's industry, and all David's peace of mind. The former +had gained his point. He had made his brother promise to take Dandy +to his owner and bring back the reward, and that was happiness for +one day. He didn't chop any more wood or take any more interest in +the supper. He seated himself on the bench again and resumed the +agreeable occupation in which he had spent the most of the +afternoon—that of building air-castles.</p> + +<p>David walked up and down the floor, with his hands in his pockets, +thinking busily. He told himself over and over again that if it were +not for his mother, he would not care if he should never see his home +again. He was cheerful and happy when he was away from it, but it +almost always happened that as soon as he crossed the threshold +something transpired to make him miserable and gloomy. His +conversation with Dan had confirmed a suspicion that had been lurking +in his mind ever since the pointer disappeared. He had all the while +held to the belief that Dan knew where the dog was, and Dan might as +well have confessed it, for his face and his actions constantly +betrayed him. David believed, too, that his father had not left the +country, as a good many people in the settlement seemed to think, but +that he was hiding in the woods somewhere in the immediate +neighborhood. Of this he had received proof that was almost positive. +He knew, if Don and Bert did not, that it was something besides a +bear they had driven off Bruin's Island, on the day they went up the +bayou with the hounds. He had seen footprints in the mud that were +made by a barefooted man; and more than that, having been the first +to come out of the cane when the dogs led the way toward the head of +the island, he had caught a glimpse of something, as it was +disappearing in the bushes on the main shore, which looked +wonderfully like the tattered hickory shirt his father had worn the +last time he saw him. This discovery, taken in connection with Dan's +behavior, led David to believe that his father and brother were often +in communication with each other; and when the pointer disappeared, +he promptly settled it in his own mind that Godfrey and Dan were to +blame for it. He was as certain now that Dan had had a finger in the +business as he would have been if he had seen him going off with the +dog; and he resolved that as soon as the next day dawned, he would +take pains to find out whether or not he was correct in supposing +that his father was Dan's accomplice.</p> + +<p>“Father hid on Bruin's Island while the Yankees were raiding through +here,” thought David. “When we drove him off, thinking he was a bear, +of course he had to hunt a new hiding-place, and it is possible that +he is now camping close about there on the main shore. If I can find +his camp, I'll take a good look at it. If I don't see the pointer +there, well and good; I shall be very glad of it. But if he is there, +I must get hold of him somehow. Don has been swindled out of enough +money by the black sheep of our family, and he shan't lose any more +by them if I can help it.”</p> + +<p>As this thought passed through David's mind, an expression of +determination settled on his face, which did not fail to attract the +notice of Dan, who just then happened to look into the cabin to see +what his brother was doing.</p> + +<p>“What you lookin' that ar way fur?” demanded Dan. “Ain't puttin' up a +job on me, be you?”</p> + +<p>David replied that he was not.</p> + +<p>“You'll take the pinter to Don an' fetch me back the ten dollars, +honor bright?” continued Dan.</p> + +<p>“That is what I promised to do, isn't it?” asked David in reply. “But +if I can help it you will never have the dog in your possession +again,” he added, mentally. “I didn't promise that I wouldn't head +you off if I could.”</p> + +<p>“An' you won't answer no questions? Don said in that notice that he +wouldn't ax none.”</p> + +<p>“Then of course I shall not answer any. You needn't be afraid. I +shan't mention your name.”</p> + +<p>“Kase if you're thinkin' of puttin' up a job on me, Davy,” said Dan, +shaking his finger at his brother, “you won't never see that pinter +ag'in so long as you live. Keep still now. Here comes the ole woman.”</p> + +<p>Dan settled back on the bench again, and David took his hands out of +his pockets long enough to throw a fresh log of wood on the fire—not +because it was needed, but for the reason that he wanted to hide his +face from his mother for a minute or two until he could call to it a +more cheerful expression than the one it was then wearing. He had +never said a word to his mother about his suspicions regarding his +father and Dan, for he wanted to talk to her about nothing but +pleasant and agreeable things. She had enough to trouble her already.</p> + +<p>David had everybody in the cabin up at an earlier hour than usual the +next morning, and after eating a very hasty breakfast, he took his +gun under his arm, bade his mother good-by and disappeared down the +road that led to General Gordon's. Dan sat on the bench and watched +him as long as he remained in sight.</p> + +<p>“It's a heap easier to have a feller to 'arn your money fur you nor +it is to 'arn it yourself,” thought Dan. “Here's Dave a toilin' an' a +slavin' fur them hundred an' fifty dollars, an' when he gets 'em, +they'll go plump into pap's pocket an' mine, an' he'll never see no +good of 'em at all. I'll have ten dollars in my pocket this very +night. It's 'most too frosty to go slashin' round through the bushes +now, so I'll wait till the sun gets a little higher, then I'll go +arter that pinter.”</p> + +<p>David kept on down the road, until he was out of sight of the cabin, +and then he climbed the fence and plunged into a dense thicket of +briers, through which he made his way with great difficulty, +following nearly the same path that Clarence Gordon followed on the +morning he went through there to release his cousin Don from the +potato-cellar. Reaching the woods at last, he took a straight course +for Bruin's Island, and half an hour's rapid walking brought him +within sight of it.</p> + +<p>David's first care was to satisfy himself that it was a man and not a +bear that Don's hounds had driven off the island; and in order to set +all his doubts on this point at rest, he looked for the footprints +which the man or animal must have made when he left the water and +climbed the bank. David found the tracks after a few minutes' search, +and a single glance at them confirmed his suspicions. They were made +by a barefooted man, and that man must have been Godfrey Evans, for +there was no one else in the settlement, that he knew of, who was so +very anxious to escape observation that he was willing to swim a +bayou on a cold day.</p> + +<p>“I was right,” said David to himself, feeling grieved and mortified +when he remembered that his father had been hunted like a wild +animal. “He is somewhere about here, and if I find him, I shall find +the pointer with him. There he is now!”</p> + +<p>The sharp crack of a rifle rang through the woods at that moment, and +David scrambled up the bank and hurried away in the direction from +which it sounded. He knew it was his father's gun (those who are +experienced in such matters will tell you that there is as much +difference in the reports of rifles as there is in the sound of the +human voice), even before he received the proof that came a moment +later. Scarcely had the report died away when he heard an impatient +yelp just in front of him, and that he also recognised. It was +uttered by Dandy. Godfrey was probably out hunting for his breakfast, +and the pointer, excited by the report of the gun, was complaining +because he was tied up in the camp and left behind. This was the way +David explained the situation to himself, and the sequel proved that +he was right.</p> + +<p>After running through the bushes for a short distance, David came +within sight of a little cloud of smoke, which ascended from a hollow +just in advance of him. A few steps more brought him within sight of +the camp, and the first object his eyes rested upon was Don Gordon's +pointer, which was tied to a sapling near a little bark lean-to, +something like the one Godfrey occupied while he was living on the +island. The animal, hearing his approach, advanced to meet him as far +as the length of his rope would allow, and stood wagging his tail +with every demonstration of joy.</p> + +<p>“I've saved Don ten dollars,” thought David, as he pulled out his +knife and cut the rope, “and I have kept Dan and father from playing +a most contemptible trick upon one who would be a good friend to +them, if they would only let him.”</p> + +<p>David had taken no pains to approach his father's camp without being +discovered. He knew he was in the right, and he intended to be open +and above board in everything he did. He expected to meet his father +face to face, and he was ready to use every argument he could think +of to induce him to surrender the pointer, that is, if the animal +should be found in his possession. If arguments and entreaties +failed, he was prepared to use other means, although he knew that by +so doing he would bring certain punishment upon himself. Very +fortunately, however, he chanced to reach the camp during his +father's absence, and all he had to do was to liberate the pointer +and go home with him.</p> + +<p>“I'm glad it happened just as it did,” thought David, drawing a long +breath of relief; “I don't want to get into trouble with father, for +I have seen him angry too many times. If he should catch me here now +I believe he'd half kill me.”</p> + +<p>“Halloo, Dannie! What brung you up here so 'arly, an' whar be you +goin' with the dog?”</p> + +<p>David's heart seemed to stop beating, and his old single-barrel grew +so heavy that he could scarcely sustain its weight. His first impulse +was to take to his heels, but the unexpected sound of the familiar +voice seemed to have deprived him of all power of motion. He did +manage, however, to turn his head and look in the direction from +which the voice sounded, and saw his father standing a little way +off, with his rifle on his shoulder and a squirrel in his hand.</p> + +<p>“Dave!” exclaimed the latter, so surprised that he could scarcely +speak.</p> + +<p>“Yes, it's Dave,” replied the boy, who saw that the battle for which +he had prepared himself was likely to come off after all.</p> + +<p>“What business you got up here, an' how come you by that pinter pup?” +demanded Godfrey.</p> + +<p>“My business up here was to get the dog. I found him in your camp, +and I cut him loose because I have a better right to him than you +have.”</p> + +<p>“Wal, we'll see 'bout that thar,” returned Godfrey, throwing down his +squirrel and leaning his rifle against the nearest tree. David's face +grew pale, for he knew what was coming now. His father's next move +would be to reach for a hickory.</p> + +<p>“Who told you I was up here?” demanded Godfrey, and David's +uneasiness increased when he saw that his father was running his eyes +over the bushes nearest him. He was picking out a good stout switch.</p> + +<p>“No one told me,” answered David.</p> + +<p>“Then how did you know whar I was?”</p> + +<p>“I was up here with Don and Bert on the day you swam the bayou, and I +saw you just after you had climbed the bank and were dodging into the +bushes.”</p> + +<p>“Don't you think you was a very grateful an' dutiful' son to hunt +your poor ole pap outen a good hidin'-place an' make him take to the +water like a hounded deer, in this cold weather too, an' my rheumatiz +so bad?” asked Godfrey, angrily. “Who told you the pinter was here?”</p> + +<p>“Nobody. I just guessed at it.”</p> + +<p>“Wal, what be you goin' to do with him, now you got him?”</p> + +<p>“I'm going to take him back to his master and save him ten dollars.”</p> + +<p>“Ten dollars!” repeated Godfrey. “Is that what he's goin' to give to +get him back? Now, Dave,” and here Godfrey pulled out the +hunting-knife which he always carried in a sheath attached to his +bullet-pouch, and cut down the switch he had selected, “you jest take +that thar pinter dog back whar you got him an' tie him up thar; you +hear me?”</p> + +<p>“I do, but I'll hold fast to the dog. You and Dan have swindled Don +out of enough money already; and now I'll tell you what's a fact——”</p> + +<p>David did not finish the sentence. He saw his father dash his hat +upon the ground, and knowing what was coming, he faced about and took +to his heels.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt14">CHAPTER XIV.<br> + +SOME DISCOVERIES.</a></h3> + +<p>David would have been glad to reason with his father, but he had not +been allowed the opportunity, and now it was too late to find one. +His first thought was of the pointer. Giving the animal a hasty kick, +to start him on his way home, David sought to save himself by flight, +although he had little hope of success. Everybody said he was a swift +runner for a boy of his age, and he did his best now, but fast as he +went, Godfrey gained at every step. David heard his heavy footfalls +growing louder and more distinct, and once or twice he lost all +heart, and was on the point of stopping and surrendering at +discretion. But he knew that the beating he would receive would be a +most severe one, and he was sure he did not deserve it, and that his +father had no business to give it to him. This thought lent him +wings, and a few more jumps brought him to the bayou.</p> + +<p>“I've got you now!” cried Godfrey, and David heard the switch whistle +through the air, as his pursuer made an effort to reach him with it.</p> + +<p>Godfrey thought the bayou would offer an effectual check to David's +flight, but the boy himself looked upon it as his only means of +escape. He ran straight to the bank, which at this point arose almost +perpendicularly from the water to the height of at least twenty feet, +and just as Godfrey was stretching forth his hand to seize him by the +collar, he disappeared. His pursuer tried to stop himself, but so +rapid was his flight that he made one or two involuntary steps, and +it was only by catching hold of a friendly bush that he saved himself +from following David over the bluff.</p> + +<p>“Dog-gone my buttons!” thought Godfrey, gazing in astonishment at the +bubbles on the surface of the water, which marked the spot where +David had gone down. “Who'd a thought he would a jumped into the +Bayou sooner nor take a leetle trouncin'? He's gettin' to be a +powerful bad boy, Dave is, an' I had oughter be to hum every day to +keep him straight. Come back here!” he shouted, as the fugitive's +head suddenly bobbed up out of the water. “If you'll ketch the pinter +fur me an' promise to say nothin' to nobody, I'll let you off this +time.”</p> + +<p>David could not say a word in reply. He felt as if every drop of +blood in his body had been turned into ice. He wiped the water from +his eyes, glanced over his shoulder, to make sure that his father had +not followed him into the bayou, and struck out for the opposite +bank. Godfrey coaxed, promised and threatened to no purpose. David +would not come back, and neither would he make any answer. He held as +straight across the bayou as the current would permit, and when he +reached the shore, he climbed out and disappeared in the bushes.</p> + +<p>“He's gone,” thought Godfrey, throwing away his switch and slowly +retracing his steps toward the camp, “an' here's more trouble for me. +The pinter's gone too, an' that takes money outen my pocket an' puts +it into the pockets of them pizen Gordons. Dave'll tell everything he +knows as soon as he gets hum, an' that'll bring the constable up here +arter me. I must go furder back in the cane, but I won't go outen the +settlement, an' nobody shan't drive me out nuther, till I get my +hands onto them hundred an' fifty dollars. Then nobody won't ever +hear of me ag'in—Dan nor none of 'em. It's jest a trifle comfortin' +to know that that thar mean Dave can't do no more shootin'; he lost +his gun.”</p> + +<p>Yes, David's faithful friend and companion was gone. It slipped from +his grasp as he struck the water, and was now lying at the bottom of +the bayou. He felt the loss as keenly as Don Gordon would have felt +the loss of his fine breech-loader.</p> + +<p>David thought he had never before been so nearly frozen as he was +when he struck the opposite bank of the bayou; but a few minutes' +vigorous exercise put his blood in circulation again, and then he +began to feel more comfortable. He followed the bayou until he +reached the lake, and then he plunged into the water again, and swam +across to the other shore. It was cold work, but he had no boat, and +so there was nothing else he could do. He was a very forlorn-looking +object indeed, when he reached the cabin. Dan, who was still sunning +himself on the bench, must have thought so, for when his brother +first appeared in sight, he jumped up and stared at him as if he +could not quite make up his mind whether the approaching object was +David Evans, or one of the dreaded haunts that lived in the General's +lane. He could not wholly satisfy himself on this point until he had +made some inquiries. “Is that you your own self, Davy?” he asked, +holding himself ready to take to his heels in case a satisfactory +answer was not promptly returned.</p> + +<p>David replied that it was.</p> + +<p>“What's the matter of you, an' whar you been?” continued Dan. “Whar's +your gun?”</p> + +<p>“I have swam the bayou twice, and I have been taking a walk in the +woods. My gun is in the water near the foot of Bruin's Island.”</p> + +<p>Dan opened his eyes and was about to propound a multitude of +questions, when something that came around the corner of the cabin +just then checked him. It was Don Gordon's pointer. He had found his +way to the cabin and taken quiet possession of his bed in the kennel, +and Dan was none the wiser for it until that moment. Hearing the +sound of David's voice, the dog came out to meet him, and the two +appeared to be overjoyed to see each other again. Dan opened his eyes +wider than ever, and backed toward his seat on the bench without +saying a word.</p> + +<p>“I found him right where you left him, Dan,” said David, who thought +it high time his brother should know that some of his mean acts were +being brought to light. “I've got him again, you see, and you'll +never have another chance to steal him.”</p> + +<p>“What have you got, an' whar did I leave him?” Dan managed to ask at +last.</p> + +<p>“O, I wouldn't try to play off innocent, if I were you. I know all +about it; and I want to tell you now that you had better turn over a +new leaf and be quick about it, too. Mother says that if folks don't +grow better every day, they grow worse, and I can see that it is true +in your case and father's. You are both going down hill, and the +first thing you know you'll do something that will get you in the +calaboose. Three months ago neither one of you would have been guilty +of stealing.”</p> + +<p>“Whoop!” yelled Dan, jumping up and knocking his heels together.</p> + +<p>“I don't want to go back on either one of you,” continued David, “and +neither do I want to tell mother how bad you are; but I'll do it +sooner than let you swindle Don Gordon or anybody else. Why don't you +go to work?”</p> + +<p>“Kase I've got jest as much right to set around an' do nothin' as +other folks has,” answered Dan, who had had time to recover himself +in some measure. “That's jest why!”</p> + +<p>“Mother and I don't sit around and do nothing.”</p> + +<p>“No, but them Gordons does.”</p> + +<p>“No, they don't. They all work, Don and Bert as well as the rest.”</p> + +<p>“If I hadn't seed them ridin' round so much on them circus hosses an' +sailin' in them painted boats of their'n, mebbe I'd be willin' to +b'lieve that,” said Dan. “They don't work, nuther. They don't do +nothin', but have good times. They've got good clothes an' nice +things, an' I've got jest as much right to 'em as they have.”</p> + +<p>“Those ideas will get you into trouble some day,” replied David, +earnestly. “If you want nice things go to work and earn them; that's +the way to get them.”</p> + +<p>While this conversation was going on, David was pulling off his wet +clothes and putting on his best suit, the one he wore on Sundays. It +was not just such a suit as the most of us would like to go to church +in, but it was whole and neat, and David looked like another boy in +it. He kept the pointer in the house with him all the while, for fear +that his brother might attempt to steal him again; but Dan was too +much astonished at the turn affairs were taking, and too badly +frightened, to make any more efforts to win the ten dollars reward. +He sat on the bench, with his eyes fastened thoughtfully on the +ground, and saw David come out with the pointer and lead him down the +road toward General Gordon's, without saying a word.</p> + +<p>When David reached the barn he walked straight through it to the +shop, and there he found Don and Bert, busy at work building more +traps. They were surprised to see him dressed in his best, and still +more surprised, and delighted too, when the pointer bounded in and +fawned upon them.</p> + +<p>“Father said that the offer of a reward would bring him if anything +would,” exclaimed Don, as he wound his arms around the animal's neck +and hugged him as he might have hugged a brother he had not seen for +a long time.</p> + +<p>“Yes, the reward did it,” replied David, and that was true. If Dan +had not seen the notice in the post-office, he never would have had +that conversation with David, and consequently the latter would not +have known where to go to find the pointer.</p> + +<p>“We all thought he was stolen,” continued Don. “I am glad you are the +one to bring him back, for I would rather give you the ten dollars +than give it to anybody else.”</p> + +<p>“I don't want the money,” said David, “and I won't take it.”</p> + +<p>“You can't help yourself. Where did you find him?”</p> + +<p>“Didn't you promise that you wouldn't ask any questions?” asked +David, with a smile.</p> + +<p>“Well——yes, I did,” answered Don, somewhat astonished. “But I made +that promise just to let the thief see that he would run no risk in +returning the dog. I can question you, can't I?”</p> + +<p>“I'd rather you wouldn't.”</p> + +<p>Don uttered a long-drawn whistle and looked at Bert to see what he +thought about it; but the blank expression on the latter's face +showed that he was altogether in the dark.</p> + +<p>“Well, let it go,” said Don, picking up his hammer again. “I've got +the dog back and with that I'll be satisfied. You'll take him home +with you tonight, of course?”</p> + +<p>“No, I think not. I am afraid to take him there.”</p> + +<p>“Then leave him here,” said Don, who now began to think that he knew +pretty nearly what had been going on. “He'll be safe with us, and you +can find him when you want him. He isn't broken yet.”</p> + +<p>“I know it, but I can't do any more for him. I shall have to give you +back your ten dollars.”</p> + +<p>“I'll not take it. A bargain is a bargain. I want my dog broken, and +you need the money to send off your quails with.”</p> + +<p>“I know it,” said David again; “but I can't shoot any more birds over +him. I have no gun.”</p> + +<p>“Where is it?”</p> + +<p>“At the bottom of the bayou.”</p> + +<p>The brothers grew more and more astonished the longer they talked +with David, and Don told himself that there had been some queer +doings in the settlement that morning. His interest and curiosity +were thoroughly aroused, but he did not ask any more questions, for +he knew that David could not explain matters without exposing one or +more members of his own family. He turned the conversation into a +new channel by saying suddenly:</p> + +<p>“Bert and I made the rounds of the traps this morning, and took out a +hundred and fifty birds. What do you say to that?”</p> + +<p>Under almost any other circumstances David would have had a good deal +to say about it; but just now he seemed to have lost all interest in +his business. It would have been hard for any boy to wear a merry +smile and keep up a light heart after such a scene as David had +passed through that morning. He could not banish it from his memory. +His father was hiding in the woods, because he was afraid to show his +face among his neighbors again; he was a receiver of stolen property +and his brother Dan was a thief, and the remembrance of these facts +was enough to depress the most buoyant spirits. David wanted to do +something to bring his father and brother to their senses, and induce +them to become decent, respected members of the community, but he +did not know how to set about it, and there was no one of whom he +could ask advice. He never talked to his mother about the family +difficulties now. She had more than her share of trouble, and David +always tried to talk about cheerful things when he was in her +presence.</p> + +<p>“Doesn't it cheer you up any to know that your business is +prospering?” exclaimed Bert. “Then we will tell you something else. +How would you like to be mail carrier? How would you like to put +thirty dollars in your pocket every month?”</p> + +<p>“That is more money than I shall be able to earn for long years to +come,” replied David.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps not. Father told us this morning that the old mail carrier +is going to give up his route, his contract having expired, and +he thinks he can get you appointed in his place. He's been to see +Colonel Packard, and Silas Jones, and all the rest of the prominent +men in the settlement, and they have promised to give you all their +influence and to go on your bond.”</p> + +<p>“What does that mean?” asked David, who now began to show some +interest in the matter.</p> + +<p>“Why, there are certain legal forms to go through with, which father +explained, but which I don't pretend to understand,” said Bert. “You +must promise to attend to your business——”</p> + +<p>“O, I'll do that,” exclaimed David.</p> + +<p>“Of course you will,” said Don, “but that will not satisfy the +authorities in Washington. They don't know you, and even if they did +it would make no difference. The law must be complied with, and you +must give bonds for the faithful performance of your duty. But that +needn't trouble you; father will attend to it. He says your chances +are good, for you are the only one on the track so far.”</p> + +<p>This was the first time David knew that there was anybody on the +track. He was greatly astonished and delighted, and his attempts to +express his gratitude for the General's kindness and thoughtfulness +were awkward enough. Thirty dollars was a large sum of money in his +eyes. His earnings would amount to three hundred and sixty dollars +a year, and couldn't he and his mother live nicely on that and save +something for a rainy day besides? If he could get the contract, and +his father and Dan would only abandon their lazy, worthless mode of +life and go to work, how happy they would all be!</p> + +<p>“What's the matter?” asked Don, for David's face became clouded again +when he thought of his father and Dan.</p> + +<p>“There's a good deal the matter,” replied David, “but it is nothing I +can help.”</p> + +<p>“You don't act like yourself at all to-day,” continued Don. “Suppose +you go home and take a rest. Don't brood over your troubles, whatever +they are. Let them go, if you can't help them. Think about pleasant +things, and to-morrow you will come up here, feeling like a new boy. +Bert and I will set the traps we have made this morning, and then +we'll go up and take a look at our bear trap.”</p> + +<p>David thought it would be a good plan to follow this advice, so he +closed the door of the shop to keep the pointer from following him, +and started for home.</p> + +<p>“Well,” said Bert, as he picked up his knife and resumed work upon +the figure four he was making, “Dave has seen his father!”</p> + +<p>“And had trouble with him, too,” added Don.</p> + +<p>“It was about the pointer,” said Bert.</p> + +<p>“My idea exactly. Godfrey is hiding somewhere in the cane; Dan wanted +to make a little more money without work, so he stole the pointer +and gave him to his father to keep until I offered a reward for him. +David found it out, and to save me from being swindled, he recovered +the pointer and got himself into difficulty by it.”</p> + +<p>The boys, who were merely guessing at all this, would have been +surprised to know that their surmises were all correct. David and his +troubles, and his manful efforts to better his condition in spite of +his adverse circumstances, afforded them topics of conversation while +they were at work; and when the figure four, on which Bert was +employed, was completed, the mule was harnessed to the wagon, and the +boys drove off to set the half a dozen new traps they had built that +morning. It was twelve o'clock when they returned, and they found +lunch waiting for them. When they had done ample justice to it, they +began making hasty preparations for their visit to the island, and a +quarter of an hour more saw them well on their way up the bayou.</p> + +<p>They found to their great delight that the ducks were beginning to +come in now, and Don was kept busy rowing from one side of the bayou +to the other to pick up the dead and wounded birds that Bert brought +out of the numerous flocks which took wing as they approached. After +a dozen fine fat mallards had been brought to bag, Bert declared +that it was a sin to shoot any more, and took his place at the oars, +while Don sat in the stern and steered.</p> + +<p>“These ducks tell us that it is time to go to our shooting-box,” said +the latter. “We always wait until they begin to come in before we +make up our party, you know.”</p> + +<p>“We ought to go over there and fix up a bit first,” said Bert. “If we +don't find anything in our trap, let's go over there and see how +things look. We have had some splendid times in that little +shooting-box, haven't we?”</p> + +<p>They certainly had, and they found much pleasure in living them over +again in imagination. While they were talking about the many happy +hours they had spent there, they reached Bruin's Island, and Don +brought the canoe around and ran the bow upon the beach. The hounds +jumped out, and running about with their noses close to the ground, +began to show the same signs of excitement that they had exhibited +on the day of their first visit to the island. The boys knew more +now than they did then, and consequently were not in such haste to +declare that it was a bear the dogs scented. It might be Godfrey +Evans; and that he or somebody else had been there since they left +was very evident. Their trap had been sprung by the aid of a long +pole, which was still fast under the heavy roof; the lever and rope +had been carried away; and the bag of corn which Don had hung upon +the sapling had also disappeared. Don was provoked, and laid up in +his mind a few sharp words, to be addressed to Godfrey on the +subject, should they ever happen to meet again; but he had very +little to say. The boys had been thoughtful enough to bring an axe, a +piece of rope and another small bag of corn with them, and, although +they had no assurance that their labor would not be wasted, they set +the trap again and started for home.</p> + +<p>“If Godfrey did that,” said Don, “he must have swam the bayou, unless +he has a boat hidden away in the bushes somewhere, which is not +likely. If it was summer now, he would probably spring that trap +every day, just to keep us from catching that bear; but the weather +is getting frosty, and he'll not relish many more cold baths. I don't +think he will trouble us that way any more.”</p> + +<p>When they reached the mouth of the bayou, Bert, who was steering, +directed the canoe across the lake, toward the point on which the +shooting-box was located. During a pause in the conversation, he +looked toward the place where it ought to be, but could see nothing +of it. “What's the matter?” asked his brother, who saw that there +was something wrong.</p> + +<p>“That's Long Point, isn't it?” asked Bert, in reply. “It certainly +is, but where's the house?”</p> + +<p>“You haven't been there in almost six months, and perhaps you have +forgotten where it is,” said Don, with a laugh.</p> + +<p>“No, I haven't. It stood close beside a big shell-bark, didn't it? +Well, there's the tree; now show me the shooting-box?”</p> + +<p>Don faced about on his seat, expecting to point the building out to +his brother at once, and was a good deal surprised when he found that +he could not see it himself. There was the tree, sure enough, but the +spot which the shooting-box ought to have occupied, was vacant. After +running his eyes all along the shore, to satisfy himself that he had +made no mistake as to the locality, Don picked up the oars again, and +with a few more strokes brought the canoe to the bank. All there was +left of the shooting-box they could have carried away in their arms. +Even the stove had not escaped destruction. The chimney had fallen +upon it and it was completely ruined.</p> + +<p>“Godfrey means to put a stop to all our fun if he can, doesn't he?” +said Bert, who thought that a man who would steal a canoe and spring +a trap, would be guilty of any meanness.</p> + +<p>“Let's go home,” was Don's reply. “We'll have another shooting-box +here some day, Bert, and it will beat the old one all to pieces.”</p> + +<p>The boys thought they had had hard luck that day, and so did their +father, when he had heard their story; but they came very near having +worse luck that night, and they never knew anything about it until +several days afterward. The General found it out the next morning. +He went to the fields at an early hour, as he always did, to set his +negroes at work, and was met by the hostler, who had an exciting +piece of news to communicate. “Misser Gordon,” said he, “Misser Don's +hound dogs done treed two fellers down dar in de quarter. Dey's been +dar all de blessed night top o' dat ar house; yes, sar, dat's what +dey says, sar!”</p> + +<p>The General replied that if the two fellows had come there for the +purpose of stealing, he was glad of it, and said he would go and take +a look at them. When he saw them, perhaps he would know where the +contents of his smoke-house had been going lately. He rode down to +the quarters as soon as his horse was brought out, and when he came +within sight of the cabin in which the boys kept their captured +quails, he saw two persons sitting astride of the ridge-pole and +Don's hounds gathered about the building, keeping guard over them. +The General could scarcely believe his eyes, although when he came to +recall several little things which Don and Bert had told him, he was +not so very much surprised after all. The persons whom the hounds had +forced to take refuge on the roof of the cabin were boys; and as soon +as the General was near enough to them to distinguish their features, +he saw that they were Lester Brigham and Bob Owens.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt15">CHAPTER XV.<br> + +BOB'S ASPIRATIONS.</a></h3> + +<p>“I think it my duty to inform you that the parties to whom you have +given your order for fifty dozen live quails will certainly +disappoint you. They did not seek the contract for themselves, but +for another person, who knows nothing whatever about trapping, and +who is much too indolent to put forth the necessary exertion if he +did. You will get no birds from him. If, after waiting a reasonable +time—I should think two weeks would be long enough—you become +satisfied of this fact, I shall be happy to receive your order, and +will guarantee you satisfaction.”</p> + +<p>This was a rough copy of the letter Lester drew up to send to the +advertiser in the “<i>Rod and Gun</i>,” on the evening of the day on which +he held that interview with Don and Bert, when the former refused to +join his sportsman's club. He read it to Bob in his best style and +was astonished when his friend declared that it wouldn't do at all. +“You seem to forget that I am working for a new shot-gun,” said Bob. +“The language isn't half strong enough.”</p> + +<p>“You can't improve it anywhere,” replied Lester, who was rather proud +of the production. “Do you want me to abuse Don and the rest? That +would be poor policy, for the man would say right away that we were +jealous of them and trying to injure them. I have told him that he +will get no birds from David, and if he does, it will be our fault.”</p> + +<p>Bob could not see the force of this reasoning. There was so much at +stake that it was necessary they should do everything in their power +to secure the contract, and he was sure it would help matters if a +few hard words were added respecting Don and David. So they were put +in, and the letter was copied and dropped into the post-office.</p> + +<p>After that Lester took up his abode with Bob Owens. According to an +agreement made between them, Bob went through the ceremony of sending +a note to Lester by a negro boy, inviting him to come over and spend +a week with him, bringing his horse and gun, and they would have a +fine time shooting turkeys and driving the ridges for deer. This +arrangement enabled the two conspirators to be together day and +night. They intended to pass the most of their time in riding about +through the woods, and if a deer or turkey happened to come in their +way and they should be fortunate enough to shoot it, so much the +better; but if the game kept out of their sight they would not spend +any precious moments in looking for it. Their object was to devote +themselves exclusively to destroying all David's chances for earning +the hundred and fifty dollars. They would watch him closely, and when +they found out where his traps were set, they would visit them daily, +and steal every quail they found in them.</p> + +<p>During the first few days the boys spent together they found out two +things: one was that there was a pile of traps in the yard behind +Godfrey Evans's cabin, and that they were never touched except when +the family happened to be in want of kindling wood. The other was, +that David left home bright and early every morning and went straight +to General Gordon's. What he did after he got there they could not +find out. They would always wait an hour or two to see if he came +out again, and then they would grow tired of doing nothing, and spend +the rest of the day searching the woods and brier-patches in the +neighborhood of the cabin, in the hope of finding some of David's +traps. But they never found a single one, for the reason that they +were all set on the General's plantation, and the boys never thought +of looking there for them.</p> + +<p>“It's my opinion,” said Lester, one day, when the two were seated at +a camp-fire in the woods, broiling a brace of squirrels which Bob had +shot, “that David has given it up as a bad job and left the way clear +for us.”</p> + +<p>“Hurrah!” shouted Bob.</p> + +<p>“Well—yes; but I'd hurrah louder if he had only set a dozen or two +traps and given us a chance to rob them. If he'd done that, we might +have had a hundred birds on hand now. The best thing we can do is to +set our own traps and catch the quails as fast as we can. We'll keep +an eye on David all the same, however.”</p> + +<p>This programme was duly carried out—that is, they spent the rest of +the day in setting their traps, but they did not devote any more time +to watching David's movements. Two incidents happened within a few +hours that suggested new ideas to them, and made them sure that at +last they had the game in their own hands. They had built a good many +traps, and having no mule and wagon at their command, as Don Gordon +had, it took them all the rest of the day to set them, so that it was +dark by the time they reached home. They found the family at supper +and listening with great interest and attention to something Mr. +Owens was saying.</p> + +<p>Mr. Owens was like Godfrey Evans in two respects. His ideas ran just +as far ahead of his income as Godfrey's did, and he hated those who +were better off in the world than himself. Especially did he dislike +General Gordon. The latter was looked up to by all the best people as +the leading man in the community, and that was something Mr. Owens +could not endure. He wanted that honor himself; and because he could +not have it, he made it a point to oppose and injure the General in +every possible way.</p> + +<p>“What do you think Gordon is trying to do now?” Mr. Owens asked, just +as the boys came in and took their seats at the table. “Gardner's +mail contract has run out, and as he doesn't intend to put in another +bid, that meddlesome Silas Jones asked the General who would be a +good man to take his place; and Gordon hadn't any more sense than to +recommend Dave Evans.”</p> + +<p>“Well, of all the things I ever heard of!” exclaimed Bob.</p> + +<p>“That's what I thought,” continued Mr. Owens. “I heard them talking +about it at the post-office. Gordon was as busy as a candidate on +election day. He was going around speaking to all the men about it, +and asking them if they would lend their influence to secure the +contract for David, and, although I put myself in his way two or +three times, he never said a word to <i>me</i>. I suppose he thought my +influence didn't amount to anything one way or the other, but perhaps +he'll see his mistake some day.”</p> + +<p>“What's the pay, father?” asked Bob.</p> + +<p>“Thirty dollars a month was Gardner's bid, and he rode the route only +twice each week. But he had to go rain or shine. How would you like +it, Bob?”</p> + +<p>“The best in the world!” exclaimed the boy, eagerly. “Three hundred +and sixty dollars a year! Couldn't I sport just as fine a hunting and +fishing rig as anybody? Can't you get it for me, father?”</p> + +<p>“I was thinking about it on the way home, and I made up my mind that +I could try. Gordon thinks he holds the whole state of Mississippi +under his thumb, but he hasn't got me there.”</p> + +<p>“Nor my father, either,” said Lester. “He'll help you, Mr. Owens.”</p> + +<p>“I was counting on him. When I send in the application, I'll have to +send a bond for a few hundred dollars with it.”</p> + +<p>“Father will go on it, if I ask him, and I will, for I'll do anything +to help Bob and beat that beggar, Dave Evans.”</p> + +<p>The conversation continued for an hour or more in this strain, and +when the boys had heard David and all his friends soundly abused, and +Bob had provided for the spending of every cent of the money he would +earn during the first year he rode the route, if his father succeeded +in obtaining the appointment for him, he and Lester went out to +attend to their horses and talk the matter over by themselves. Bob +was in ecstacies; and while he was counting off on his fingers the +various articles he intended to purchase with his wages, Lester +suddenly laid his hand on his arm.</p> + +<p>“What's that?” said he, in a suppressed whisper.</p> + +<p>Bob looked in the direction indicated by his companion, and saw a +dark figure creeping stealthily along the fence. His actions plainly +showed that he had no business there, and, as if moved by a common +impulse, the two boys dropped to the ground and waited to see what +he was going to do.</p> + +<p>“It's some thieving nigger,” whispered Bob. “If he lays a hand on +anything we'll jump up and catch him.”</p> + +<p>“Hadn't I better go into the house and call your father?” asked +Lester.</p> + +<p>“O, no; you and I can manage him. Do you see those fence pickets over +there? Well, we'll sneak up and get one apiece, and then if he +attempts any resistance, we shall be ready for him.”</p> + +<p>The pickets, of which Bob spoke, were piled about twenty yards nearer +to the barn than the boys then were, and they succeeded in creeping +up to them and arming themselves without attracting the notice of +the prowler. The latter followed the fence until he reached a point +opposite the spot where the barn, corn-cribs and other out-buildings +were located, and there he stopped to survey the ground before him. +Having made sure that there was no one in sight, he moved quickly +toward the smokehouse and tried the door.</p> + +<p>“I don't think you'll make much there, my friend,” whispered Bob. +“That door is locked.”</p> + +<p>The prowler found it so, and after a few ineffectual attempts to +force it open by pushing with his shoulder against it, he faced about +and disappeared in the barn. While the boys were trying to make up +their minds whether or not they ought to run up and corner him there, +he came out again, and he did not come empty-handed either. He +carried a bag of meal on his shoulder—the one Mr. Owens had put in +the barn that morning for the use of his horses—and in his hand +something that looked like a stick of stove-wood; but it was in +reality a strong iron strap, which he had found in the barn and which +he intended to use to force an entrance into the smokehouse. He +deposited his bag of meal upon the ground, set to work upon the hasp +with his lever and in a few minutes more the door swung open.</p> + +<p>“Now is our time,” whispered Bob, as the robber disappeared in the +smoke-house. “Stand by me and we'll have a prisoner when we go back +to the house.”</p> + +<p>Lester would have been very glad indeed to have had some excuse for +remaining in his place of concealment, and allowing his companion to +go on and capture the robber alone; but he could not think of any, +and when Bob jumped up and ran toward the smoke-house, Lester +followed him, taking care, however, to regulate his pace so that his +friend could keep about ten or fifteen feet in advance of him. Bob, +who was in earnest and not in the least alarmed, moved with noiseless +footsteps, while Lester, preferring to let the robber escape rather +than face him with no better weapon than a fence picket in his hand, +made all the noise he conveniently could, hoping that the man would +take the alarm and run out of the smoke-house before they could reach +it. But the thief was so busily engaged that he did not hear their +approach, and never dreamed of danger until the boys halted in front +of the door and ordered him to come out and give himself up. We ought +rather to say that Bob halted in front of the door and boldly stood +his ground there, while Lester took care to shelter himself behind +the building, and showed only the top of his cap to the robber.</p> + +<p>“We've got you now, you rascal!” exclaimed Bob, bringing his club +against the side of the smokehouse with a sounding whack. “Come out +and surrender yourself, or we'll come in and take you out.”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” chimed in Lester, in a trembling voice, at the same time +hitting the building a very feeble blow with his fence picket. “Come +out, and be quick about it. There are a dozen of us here, enough to +make——”</p> + +<p>Lester finished the sentence with a prolonged shriek of terror, for +just then something that seemed to move with the speed and power of +a lightning express train, dashed out of the intense darkness which +concealed all objects in the interior of the smoke-house, and Lester +received a glancing blow on the shoulder that floored him on the +instant. While the latter was calling upon the robber to surrender, +Bob heard a slight rustling in the smoke-house, and knowing very well +what it meant, he jumped back out of the door-way, and raised his +club in readiness to strike; but the thief was out and gone before he +could think twice. The instant the robber landed on his feet outside +the door, he turned toward the place where he had left his bag of +meal and happened to come into collision with Lester, who went down +with a jar that made him think every bone in his body was broken. It +was a minute or two before he could collect his scattered wits and +raise himself to his feet, and then he found that he was alone. Bob +was scudding across the field in pursuit of the robber, who carried +a side of bacon on one shoulder and the bag of meal on the other; +but burdened as he was he ran quite fast enough to distance Bob, who +presently came back to the smoke-house, panting and almost exhausted.</p> + +<p>“Is he gone?” asked Lester, who was groping about on the ground in +search of his club.</p> + +<p>“I should say he was,” Bob managed to reply. “He ran like a deer. He +knocked you flatter than a pancake, didn't he?”</p> + +<p>“He didn't hurt me as badly as I hurt him,” said Lester. “Did you +hear my club ring on his head?”</p> + +<p>“No, but I heard you yell. You didn't strike him.”</p> + +<p>“What's the reason I didn't? I did, too, but it must have been a +glancing blow, for if I had hit him fairly, I should have knocked him +flatter than he knocked me. I yelled just to frighten him.”</p> + +<p>“I guess you succeeded, for I never saw a man run as he did. He got +away, and he took the meal and bacon with him. They'll not do him any +good, however, for he'll be in the calaboose by this time to-morrow, +if there are men enough in the settlement to find him. I know him.”</p> + +<p>“You do? Who was he?”</p> + +<p>“Godfrey Evans. He's been hiding in the cane ever since he and +Clarence Gordon got into that scrape, and no one has ever troubled +him. But somebody will trouble him now. I'll tell my father of it +the first thing. I wonder how Dave will feel when he sees his father +arrested and packed off to jail?”</p> + +<p>“I wouldn't do anything of the kind, if I were you,” said Lester.</p> + +<p>“You wouldn't?” cried Bob, greatly astonished. “Well, I won't let +this chance to be revenged on Dave slip by unimproved, now I tell +you.”</p> + +<p>“We can take revenge in a better way than that. We've got just as +good a hold on him now as we want, and we'll make him promise that +he will make no effort to catch those quails.”</p> + +<p>“O, I am no longer interested in that quail business,” said Bob, +loftily. “I'd rather have three hundred and sixty dollars than +seventy-five.”</p> + +<p>“But you must remember that you haven't been appointed mail carrier +yet, so you are by no means sure of your three hundred and sixty +dollars. And even if you were, it would be worth your while to earn +the seventy-five dollars, if you could, for that amount of money +isn't to be found on every bush.”</p> + +<p>Lester went on to tell his friend of a bright idea that had just then +occurred to him, and before he had fully explained how the events of +the night could be made to benefit them, he had won Bob over to his +way of thinking. The latter promised that he would say nothing to his +father about the theft of which Godfrey had been guilty, until he and +Lester had first told David of it and noted the effect it had upon +him. If they could work upon his feelings sufficiently to induce him +to give up the idea of trapping the quails, well and good. Godfrey +might have the meal and bacon, and welcome. But if David was still +obstinate and refused to listen to reason, they would punish him by +putting the officers of the law on his father's track.</p> + +<p>“It is a splendid plan and it will work, I know it will,” +exclaimed Bob, in great glee. “It will be some time before my +appointment—those folks in Washington move very slowly—and while I +am waiting for it, I may as well make seventy-five dollars. I can get +my shot-gun with it, and spend my three hundred and sixty for the +other things I need.”</p> + +<p>Bob slept but little that night for excitement, and dreaming about +the glorious things that might be in store for him, kept him awake. +He and Lester were up long before the sun, and as soon as they had +eaten breakfast, they mounted their horses and rode off in the +direction of Godfrey Evans's house. Early as it was when they arrived +there, they found the cabin deserted by all save Dan, who sat on the +bench by the door. David was hastening through the woods toward his +father's camp, intent on finding the pointer, and Mrs. Evans had gone +to her daily labor.</p> + +<p>“He's just went over to the General's house, Dave has,” said Dan, in +reply to a question from Lester; and he thought he told the truth, +for we know that David went in that direction on purpose to mislead +his brother. “Yes, he's went up thar, an' 'tain't no ways likely that +he'll be to hum afore dark.”</p> + +<p>The visitors turned their horses about and rode away, and as soon as +they were out of sight of the cabin, they struck into the woods to +make one more effort to find David's traps, if he had set any. But, +as usual, they met with no success, and Lester again gave it as his +opinion, that David had no intention of trying to trap the quails. +Bob thought so too; but in less than half an hour, they received +positive proof that they were mistaken. They were riding around the +rear of one of the General's fields, on their way home, when they +happened to cast their eyes through the bushes that lined the fence, +and saw something that surprised them greatly, and caused them to +draw rein at once. There was a wagon in the field, and Don and Bert +Gordon were passing back and forth between it and a little thicket of +bushes and briers that stood a short distance away. They left the +wagon with empty hands, and when they came back, they brought their +arms full of something, which they stowed away in a box. While Lester +and Bob were looking at them, a small, dark object suddenly arose +from the box and came toward them, passing swiftly over their heads +and disappearing in the woods.</p> + +<p>“That's a quail!” exclaimed Bob. “It escaped from Don's hands.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir, and we have made a discovery,” said Lester. “Dave Evans +hasn't given up trapping the quails after all. He's catching them +every day, and Don and Bert are helping him.”</p> + +<p>“It's just like them,” replied Bob, in great disgust. “They're always +poking their noses into other people's business. But I don't feel as +badly over it as I did a short time ago.”</p> + +<p>“I know what you are counting on. You are as sure of that mail +carrier's berth as you would be if you were to ride the route for the +first time to-day; but if you should happen to slip up on it, you'd +be glad to have the seventy-five dollars to fall back on.”</p> + +<p>“O, I am willing to work for it,” replied Bob, quickly, “not only +because I want it myself, but because I don't want Dave Evans to have +it. What's to be done?”</p> + +<p>“That trap must have been as full as it could hold,” said Lester, +thoughtfully. “They have made five or six trips between the wagon and +that clump of bushes since we have been here. We know where one of +the traps is set now, and that will guide us in finding the rest. +When we do find them, we'll carry out our plan of robbing them every +day. They must have trapped some birds before, and if we watch them +when they go home we can find out where they keep them. What do you +say to that?”</p> + +<p>Bob replied that he was willing, and so the two dismounted, and +having hitched their horses, set themselves to watch the wagon. They +followed it at a respectful distance, as it made the rounds of the +traps (they did not know that they also were followed by somebody, +who kept a sharp eye on all their movements), and Bob grew angry +every time he saw more quails added to those already in the coop.</p> + +<p>“Those fellows are always lucky,” he growled. “I'll warrant that if +we visit those traps we set yesterday, we'll not find a single bird +in them. Don and Bert are hauling them in by dozens.”</p> + +<p>“So much the better for us,” returned his companion. “Every quail +they catch makes it just so much easier for us to earn seventy-five +dollars apiece.”</p> + +<p>Bob, feeling somewhat mollified by this view of the case, turned his +attention to Don and his brother, who, having visited all their traps +by this time, climbed into the wagon and drove toward home.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt16">CHAPTER XVI.<br> + +DON'S HOUNDS TREE SOMETHING.</a></h3> + +<p>Lester and his companion followed the wagon at a safe distance and +saw it driven to the negro quarters, which were located about half +a mile below the General's house. It stopped in front of one of the +cabins, and Don and Bert began the work of transferring the quails +from the coop to the building in which they were to remain until they +were sent up the river. Bob and Lester counted the number of trips +they made between the wagon and the door of the cabin, and made a +rough estimate of the number of birds they had caught that morning.</p> + +<p>“They've got at least a hundred,” said Lester, when the wagon was +driven toward the house, “and that is just one-sixth of the number +they want. At that rate that beggar Dave will be rich in a week +more.”</p> + +<p>“Not if we can help it!” exclaimed Bob, angrily. “That cabin will +burn as well as the shooting-box did!”</p> + +<p>“But we don't want to do too much of that sort of work,” answered +Lester. “We may get the settlement aroused, and that wouldn't suit +us. I'd rather steal the birds, wouldn't you?”</p> + +<p>Bob replied that he would, but hinted that if they attempted it they +might have a bigger job on their hands than they had bargained for. +In the first place, there were Don's hounds.</p> + +<p>“But we braved them once—that was on the night we borrowed Don's +boat to go up and burn his shooting-box—and we are not afraid to +do it again,” said Lester. “We didn't alarm them then.”</p> + +<p>Bob acknowledged the fact, but said he was afraid they might not be +so lucky the next time. And even if they succeeded in breaking into +the cabin without arousing the dogs, how were they to carry away a +hundred live quails? The only thing they could do would be to put +them in bags, and it was probable that half of them would die for +want of air before they could get them home. They would be obliged to +make two or three trips to the cabin in order to secure them all, and +each time they would run the risk of being discovered by the hounds.</p> + +<p>While the two friends were talking these matters over, they were +walking slowly toward the place where they had left their horses. +Having mounted, they started for home again, and the very first +person they saw when they rode out of the woods into the road was +David Evans, who had just been up to the shop to restore the pointer +to his owner.</p> + +<p>“There he is!” said Bob, in a low whisper. “He is dressed up in his +best, too.”</p> + +<p>“Best!” sneered Lester. “Why, I wouldn't be seen at work in the +fields in such clothes as those!”</p> + +<p>“Nor in any other, I guess. They are the best he can afford,” said +Bob, who had some soft spots in his heart, if he was a bad boy, “and +I don't believe in making fun of him.”</p> + +<p>“You believe in cheating him out of a nice little sum of money +though, if you can,” retorted Lester.</p> + +<p>“No, I don't. I am working to keep him from cheating <i>me</i> out of it. +If he will keep his place among the niggers, where fellows of his +stamp belong, I'll be the last one to say or do anything against him; +but when he tries to shove himself up among white folks, and swindle +me out of a new shot-gun and get appointed mail carrier over my head, +it's something I won't stand. Say, Dave,” he added, drawing rein, as +the subject of his remarks approached, “can you spare us just about +two minutes for a little private conversation?”</p> + +<p>“I reckon,” replied David. “Have you joined that sportsman's club, +and are you going to prosecute me for being a pot-hunter?”</p> + +<p>“Lester has already told you what we are going to do about that, and +you may rest assured that we shall <i>do</i> it,” answered Bob, sharply. +“What we say, we always stand to. What we want to talk to you about +now is this: We know, as well as you do, that your father is hiding +out here in the cane, and that he dare not show himself in the +settlement for fear he will be arrested. You wouldn't like to see +him sent to jail, would you?”</p> + +<p>“I know what you mean,” replied David. “My father may have been +foolish, but he has done nothing that the law can touch him for.”</p> + +<p>When he said this he was thinking of Clarence Gordon and the barrel +with the eighty thousand dollars in it. He did not know that Godfrey +was guilty of highway robbery, and he forgot that he had also +committed an assault upon Don, and that he had received and cared for +stolen property, knowing it to be stolen.</p> + +<p>“Hasn't he, though!” cried Bob. “He got into my father's smoke-house +last night and stole some meal and bacon. He forced a lock to do it, +too. The law can touch him for that, can't it?”</p> + +<p>David leaned against the fence and looked at the two boys without +speaking. He did not doubt Bob's story. He had been expecting to hear +of such things for a long time. He had told himself more than once +that when his father grew tired of living on squirrels, somebody's +smoke-house and corn-crib would be sure to suffer. Godfrey was +getting worse every day, and something told David that he would yet +perform an act that would set every man in the settlement on his +track.</p> + +<p>“We can send him to prison,” continued Bob. “You would not like that, +of course, and you can prevent it if you feel like it. Lester and I +are the only ones who know that he robbed my father last night, and +we will keep it to ourselves on one condition.”</p> + +<p>“I know what it is,” said David. “You want me to promise that I will +trap no more quails. Perhaps you want the money yourselves.”</p> + +<p>“That's the very idea,” said Lester.</p> + +<p>“It isn't the money we care about,” exclaimed Bob, quickly. “We've +set out to put down this business of trapping birds and shipping them +out of the country, and we're going to do it. You think that because +Don and Bert are backing you up, you can do just as you please; but +we'll show you that they don't run this settlement. You're getting +above your business, Dave, and it is high time you were taught a +lesson you will remember the longest day you live. What do you say? +Will you trap any more quails?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, I will,” replied David, without an instant's hesitation.</p> + +<p>“Don't forget that we can put the constable on your father's track +to-morrow morning,” said Bob, his voice trembling with rage.</p> + +<p>“I wasn't thinking of my father. He has made his bed and he must lie +in it. I was thinking of my mother. She must have something to eat +and wear this winter, and how is she to get it, if I give up this +chance of making a little money?”</p> + +<p>“Just listen to you, now!” Bob almost shouted. “One would think to +hear you talk that you are used to handling greenbacks by the bushel. +You are a pretty looking ragamuffin to call a hundred and fifty +dollars 'a little money,' are you not? It's more than your old +shantee and all you've got in it are worth. Go on!” he yelled, +shaking his riding whip at David, as the latter hurried down the road +toward home. “I'll send you word when to come down to the landing and +see your father go off to jail.”</p> + +<p>“I never saw such independence exhibited by a fellow in his +circumstances,” said Lester, as he and Bob rode away together. “One +would think he was worth a million dollars.”</p> + +<p>“He thinks he will soon be worth a hundred and fifty, and that's what +ails him,” answered Bob, whose face was pale with fury. “But there's +many a slip 'twixt the cup and the lip, as he will find before he is +many days older. I'll tell my father to-night what Godfrey Evans did, +and as soon as it grows dark we'll go down to that cabin and carry +off all the birds we can catch. The rest we will liberate.”</p> + +<p>A part of this programme was duly carried out. As soon as they +reached home Bob told his father what had happened the night before, +and was a good deal surprised as well as disgusted, because Mr. Owens +did not grow very angry, and declare that Godfrey should be punished +to the full extent of the law.</p> + +<p>“A bag of meal and a side of bacon are hardly worth making a fuss +about,” said Bob's father. “I will put a new lock on the smoke-house. +But how does it come that you boys did not tell me of this at once?”</p> + +<p>“Because we wanted to make something out of it,” replied Bob. “If it +hadn't been for Dave, Lester and I would have pocketed a nice little +sum of spending money; but he's gone and got the job of trapping the +quails, or rather that meddlesome Don Gordon got it for him, and, not +satisfied with that, he has the cheek to run against me when I am +trying to be appointed mail carrier.”</p> + +<p>“Well,” said Mr. Owens.</p> + +<p>“Well,” repeated Bob, “I told him his father was a thief, and I could +prove it, but I would say nothing about it if he would agree not to +trap any more quails. If he had done that, I should have brought up +this matter of carrying the mail, and made him promise to leave me a +clear field there, too; but he wouldn't listen to anything.”</p> + +<p>“I am glad you told me this,” said Mr. Owens, after thinking a +moment, “and it is just as well that you did not say anything to +David about the mail. No one knows that I am going to put in a bid +for the contract, and I don't want it known; so be careful what you +say. Gordon will never get that mail route for David, for the +authorities will think twice before appointing the son of a thief +to so responsible a situation.”</p> + +<p>“But are you going to do nothing to Godfrey?”</p> + +<p>“I'll keep him in mind, and if it becomes necessary I'll put the +constable after him, and tell him that the more fuss he makes in +capturing him, the better it will suit me.”</p> + +<p>The first thing the two boys did after they had eaten their dinner, +was to fit up one of the unoccupied negro cabins for the reception of +the birds they intended to steal that night. There were a good many +holes to be patched in the roof where the shingles had been blown +off, and numerous others to be boarded up in the walls where the +chinking had fallen out, and the afternoon was half gone before their +work was done. They still had time to visit their traps, but all the +birds they took out of them could have been counted on the fingers of +one hand. Bob looked at them a moment, then thought of the big box +full he had seen Don and Bert take home that morning, and grew very +angry over his ill luck. He proposed to wring the necks of the +captives and have them served up for breakfast the next morning, but +Lester would not consent. Every one helped, he said, and these five +birds, added to the forty or fifty they were to steal that night, +would make a good start toward the fifty dozen they wanted.</p> + +<p>After the boys had eaten supper, they secured four meal bags, which +they hid away in a fence corner, so that they could find them again +when they wanted them, and then adjourned to the wagon-shed to lay +their plans for the night's campaign. Of course their expedition +could not be undertaken until everybody about the General's +plantation was abed and asleep. That would not be before ten or +twelve o'clock—the negroes kept late hours since they gained their +freedom, Bob said—and they dared not go to sleep for fear that they +would not awake again before morning. They hardly knew what to do +with themselves until bed time came. They spent an hour in talking +over their plans, then went into the house and played checkers, and +were glad indeed when the hour for retiring arrived. They made a show +of going to bed, but they removed nothing but their boots, which they +slammed down on the floor with more noise than usual. They heard the +clock in the kitchen strike every hour, and when it struck twelve +they began to bestir themselves.</p> + +<p>Bob's room being located on the first floor, in one of the wings of +the house, it was a matter of no difficulty for him and his companion +to leave it without arousing any of the family. All they had to do +was to open one of the windows, drop to the ground, pull on their +boots and be off; and this they did in about the same time that it +takes to tell it. They picked up their meal bags as they passed along +the fence, and in half an hour more were inside General Gordon's +fence, and moving cautiously along the lane that led toward the negro +quarters. A few steps brought them into the midst of the cabins, +which were as dark and silent as though they had been deserted. Some +of them were deserted, while others were occupied by the field hands. +The one in which the quails were confined stood on the outskirts of +the quarters, and Bob, who had taken particular pains to mark the +building, so that he would know it again, had no difficulty in +finding it. It was the only cabin that was provided with a covered +porch; and that same porch, or rather the posts which supported the +roof, came very handy to the young prowlers a few minutes later. They +walked around the building two or three times to make sure that there +was no one near it, and then Bob cautiously mounted the steps and +tried the door. The patter of little feet and the shrill notes of +alarm that sounded from the inside told him that he had aroused the +prisoners.</p> + +<p>“Just listen to that,” whispered Lester, greatly amazed. “The cabin +must be full of them.”</p> + +<p>“We'll soon know how many there are,” answered Bob. “I'd give +something if I could see Don Gordon's face when he comes down here in +the morning.”</p> + +<p>As Bob spoke, he opened one of the meal bags and drew from it the +iron strap, which Godfrey Evans had used in prying open the door of +the smoke-house two nights before. Lester struck a match on his coat +sleeve, and when it blazed up, so that Bob could see how to work, he +placed the strap between the hasp and the door, and exerted all his +strength in the effort to draw out the staple with which it was +confined. But that staple was put there to stay. It was made by the +plantation blacksmith under Don's personal supervision, and as it was +long enough to be clinched on the inside of the door, Bob made no +progress whatever in his efforts to force an entrance.</p> + +<p>“We can do nothing here,” said he, after he had pulled and pushed +until the inside of his hands seemed to be on fire. “We must try the +window.”</p> + +<p>“But that is so high you can't reach it,” said Lester.</p> + +<p>“Not from the ground, I know. You will have to hold me up.”</p> + +<p>Descending from the porch with noiseless footsteps, the boys passed +around to the rear of the cabin, and when Lester had stationed +himself under the window, Bob quickly mounted to his shoulders. He +examined the window as well as he could in the dark, and began to +grow discouraged. It was boarded up with two-inch planks, and they +were held in their places by the largest spikes Don could find at Mr. +Jones's store. Bob pushed his lever under one of the planks, but when +he laid out his strength upon it, Lester rocked about in so alarming +a manner, that Bob lost his balance, and to save himself from +falling, jumped to the ground.</p> + +<p>“We might as well go home,” said he, rubbing his elbow, which, owing +to Lester's unsteadiness, he had scratched pretty severely on the +rough planks. “If we only had a bundle of straw we'd start a +bonfire.”</p> + +<p>“It's a pity to go home and leave all these birds here,” replied +Lester. “Let's get up on the roof and tear off some of the shingles. +We can climb up by those posts that support the roof of the porch.”</p> + +<p>“O, it is easy enough to get up there, but what good will it do to +tear off the shingles? We couldn't get the birds out unless one of +us went down after them, and it wouldn't be me, I tell you!”</p> + +<p>“We'll not try to get the birds at all. We'll leave the holes open +so that they can escape. Wouldn't that be better than allowing them +to stay here for Dave Evans to make money out of?”</p> + +<p>“I should say it would,” exclaimed Bob, who always grew angry +whenever anything was said about David's chances of making money. +“But we'll first make one more effort to get the birds ourselves. +Hold me up again and don't wobble about as you did before.”</p> + +<p>In a few seconds more Bob was again perched upon his companion's +shoulders, and this time he was sure that his efforts would be +crowned with success. The planks were fastened to the window casing, +which, on one side, was too badly decayed to hold the spikes. He +started some of them with the first pull he made at his lever, and, +encouraged by his progress, was about to prepare for a greater +effort, when Lester uttered an exclamation of alarm and jumped from +under him.</p> + +<p>“Great Moses!” exclaimed Bob, who came to the ground with fearful +violence. “Do you want to kill a fellow?”</p> + +<p>“No,” said Lester, whose voice trembled so that it was almost +inaudible. “There's somebody coming!”</p> + +<p>Before Bob could ask any more questions, a loud, shrill whistle, +which sounded only a little distance away, rang through the quarters, +followed almost immediately by the impatient yelp of a hound. The +young prowlers were frightened almost out of their senses. Before +they could make up their minds what ought to be done, a voice +shouted:</p> + +<p>“Here they be! Take 'em, fellers! Take 'em down!”</p> + +<p>Another impatient yelp and the rush of feet on the hard road told the +boys that Don Gordon's hounds were coming. This aroused them, and +showed them the necessity of making an effort to escape. It was +useless to run; the only place of safety was the roof of the cabin, +and they made the most frantic efforts to reach it. They darted +quickly around the corner of the building, sprang upon the porch and +squirmed up the posts with the agility of monkeys. But with all their +haste they did not have a second to spare. They had scarcely left the +porch before the hounds bounded up the steps and a pair of gleaming +jaws came together with a snap close to Lester's foot, which he drew +out of the way just in time to escape being caught. Panting and +almost breathless with terror the two boys crept cautiously up the +roof—the moss-covered shingles were so slippery that it was all they +could do to keep from sliding off among the hounds—and seating +themselves on the ridge-pole looked at each other and at the savage +brutes from which they had so narrowly escaped. Then they looked all +around to find the person who had set the dogs upon them, but could +see nothing of him.</p> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/image04.jpg" width="724" height="531" +alt="Treed by Don Gordon's Hounds."></div> + +<p>“Where has he gone, I wonder?” said Lester, who was the first to +speak.</p> + +<p>“Haven't the least idea,” replied Bob.</p> + +<p>“Who was it?”</p> + +<p>“Don't know that, either. It didn't sound to me like Don's voice, +but it sounded like his whistle, and if it was him, I wish he'd come +and call the dogs off. I am willing to give up now, Lester. Luck is +always on his side, and if he will let us go home without making any +fuss about it, I'll promise to leave him alone in future.”</p> + +<p>Lester could not find fault with his companion for losing his courage +and talking in this strain, for he was frightened half to death +himself, and he would have made all sorts of promises if he could +only have climbed down from that roof and sneaked off to bed without +being seen by anybody. Don did not show himself, although they called +his name as loudly as they dared, and neither did the hounds grow +tired and go away, as Lester hoped they would. They were much too +well trained for that. It not unfrequently happened while Don and +Bert were hunting 'coons and 'possums at night, that the game took +refuge in a tree much too large to be cut down in any reasonable +time by such choppers as they were. In that case Don would order the +hounds to watch the tree, and he and Bert would go home, knowing that +when daylight came they would find the dogs still on duty and the +game closely guarded. The animals seemed to be perfectly satisfied +when they found that Lester and Bob had taken refuge on the top of +the cabin. They walked around the building two or three times, as if +to make sure that there was no way of escape, and then laid down on +the ground and prepared to take matters very easily until their +master should come out to them in the morning. When Bob saw that, +he lost all heart.</p> + +<p>“If we never were in a scrape before, we're in one now,” said he. “We +may as well make up our minds to stay here all night.”</p> + +<p>“O, we can't do that,” replied Lester, greatly alarmed. “Some one +will certainly see us.”</p> + +<p>“Of course they will. How can we help it?”</p> + +<p>“I should never dare show my face in the settlement again, if this +night's work should become known,” continued Lester, who was almost +ready to cry with vexation. “It would ruin me completely, and you, +too. Don and Bert would ask no better fun than to spread it all over, +and your chances of carrying the mail would be knocked higher than a +kite. Let's pull off some of these shingles and throw them at the +dogs. Perhaps we can drive them away.”</p> + +<p>“You don't know them as well as I do. They'll not drive worth a cent. +We're here, and here we must stay until somebody comes and calls them +away. We'll hail the first nigger we see in the morning, and perhaps +we can hire him to help us and keep his mouth shut.”</p> + +<p>This was poor consolation for Lester, but it was the best Bob had to +offer. Things turned out just as he said they would. They sat there +on the ridge pole for more than four hours, Lester racking his brain, +in the hope of conjuring up some plan for driving the dogs away, and +Bob grumbling lustily over the ill luck which met him at every turn.</p> + +<p>At last, when they had grown so cold that they could scarcely talk, +and Lester began to be really afraid that he should freeze to death, +the gray streaks of dawn appeared in the east. Shortly afterward the +door of the nearest cabin opened, and a negro came out and stood on +the steps, stretching his arms and yawning.</p> + +<p>“It's the luckiest thing that ever happened to us,” said Bob, +speaking only after a great effort. “That's the hostler. He knows me +and will help us if anybody will. Say, Sam,” he added, raising his +voice. “Sam!”</p> + +<p>“Who dar?” asked the negro, looking all around, as if he could not +make up his mind where the voice came from. “Who's dat callin' Sam?”</p> + +<p>“It's me. Here I am, up here on top of this cabin,” replied Bob, +slapping the shingles with his open hand to show the negro where he +was.</p> + +<p>“Wal, if dat ain't de beatenest thing!” exclaimed Sam. “What you two +gemmen doin' up dar?”</p> + +<p>“O, we were coming through here last night, taking a short cut +through the fields, you know, and the dogs discovered us and drove us +up here.”</p> + +<p>“I thought I heerd 'em fursin,” said Sam; “but I thought mebbe they'd +done cotch a 'coon.”</p> + +<p>“Well, call 'em off and let us go home,” exclaimed Lester, +impatiently.</p> + +<p>“Dat's impossible, dat is. Dem dar dogs don't keer no mo' fur us +black uns dan nuffin, dem dogs don't. Can't call 'em off, kase why, +dey won't mind us. Have to go arter some of de white folks, suah!”</p> + +<p>“Go on and get somebody, then, and be quick about it,” said Bob, +desperately. “And, Sam, if you can find Bert send him down. We want +to see him particularly, and it will save us walking up to the +house.”</p> + +<p>The negro went back into his cabin, but came out again a few minutes +later and started up the road toward the house.</p> + +<h3 class="chapheader"><a name="bt17">CHAPTER XVII.<br> + +CONCLUSION.</a></h3> + +<p>Bob and his companion were so utterly disheartened, and so nearly +overcome with the cold, that they no longer looked upon exposure as +the worst thing that could happen to them. They had made up their +minds that it could not be avoided, and told themselves that the +sooner it was over and they were allowed to leave their airy perch +the sooner they would breathe easily again. They could not talk now. +They could only sit and gaze in the direction in which the hostler +had disappeared, and wait for somebody to come and call off the dogs. +Bob hoped <i>that</i> somebody would be Bert. He was a simple-minded +little fellow, and might be persuaded to believe the story that Bob +had told the hostler. But Bert did not come to their relief; it was +his father. When Bob saw him he wished most heartily that the roof +would open and let him down out of sight.</p> + +<p>“Why, boys, what is the meaning of this?” asked the General, as soon +as he came within speaking distance.</p> + +<p>“It means that we have been up here since midnight and are nearly +frozen,” replied Bob, trying to smile and looking as innocent as a +guilty boy could. “We were out 'coon-hunting in the river bottoms and +came through your fields, because that was the nearest way home; but +the dogs saw us and drove us up here.”</p> + +<p>The General had but to use his eyes to find all the evidence he +needed to prove this story false. The meal bags, in which the boys +expected to carry away the stolen quails, were lying on the ground +in plain sight, one of them having fallen in such a position that +the owner's name, which was painted on it in large black letters, +was plainly visible. More than that, under one of the planks which +protected the window, was the iron lever with which Bob had tried to +force an entrance into the cabin. He left it sticking there when he +fell off Lester's shoulders.</p> + +<p>“Well, you may come down now,” said the General. “The hounds will not +trouble you.”</p> + +<p>It was easy enough to say come down, but it was not so easy to do it, +as the boys found when they began working their way over the frosty +roof. The shingles were as slippery as glass, and their hands seemed +to have lost all their strength; but they reached the ground without +any mishap, and were about to hurry away as fast as their cramped +legs would carry them, when the General asked:</p> + +<p>“Hadn't you better go up to the house and get warm?”</p> + +<p>“O, no, thank you, sir,” replied Bob. “We'll go directly home. Our +folks will wonder what has become of us.”</p> + +<p>“Are these your bags?”</p> + +<p>“No, sir,” replied Bob, promptly. “One doesn't usually carry meal +bags to bring home 'coons in.”</p> + +<p>“I am aware of that fact,” said the General, “but couldn't they be +used to carry quails in? These bags have you father's name on them, +and you had better come and get them.”</p> + +<p>These words were uttered in a tone of command, and Bob thought it +best to obey. He snatched up the bags, and with Lester by his side +made his way down the lane with all possible haste. When they were +safe in the road, Bob drew a long breath and remarked:</p> + +<p>“That's the end of that scrape.”</p> + +<p>“I don't see it,” returned Lester. “It is only the beginning of it. +Everybody in the settlement will know it before night.”</p> + +<p>“Who cares if they do?” cried Bob, who began to feel like himself, +now that he was on solid ground once more. “They can't prove that +we went there to steal the quails, and we'll not confess it.”</p> + +<p>“No, sir,” replied Lester, emphatically. “You're a sharp one, Bob, to +make up such a plausible story on the spur of the moment, but I know +the General did not believe a word of it.”</p> + +<p>“So do I, but what's the odds? Let's see him prove that I didn't tell +him the truth. Now the next thing is something else; we must make up +a story to tell my folks when we get home.”</p> + +<p>“Can't we run back to the house and go to bed before any of the +family are up?”</p> + +<p>“I am afraid to try it. A better plan would be to go back in the +woods and build a fire and get warm. Then we'll go home, and if +anybody asks us where we have been, we'll say we couldn't sleep, +and so we got up and went 'coon-hunting.”</p> + +<p>“I wish we had one or two 'coons to back up the story,” said Lester.</p> + +<p>“O, that wouldn't help us any. People often go hunting and return +empty-handed, you know.”</p> + +<p>Leaving Bob and his friend to get out of their difficulties as best +they can, we will go back to Godfrey's cabin and see what the two +boys who live there are doing. The day of rest, which Don said would +work such wonders in David, did not seem to be of much benefit to him +after all. He had been somewhat encouraged by Bert's cheering words +and the knowledge that influential friends were working for him, and, +like Bob Owens, he had indulged in some rosy dreams of the future; +but that short interview with the young horsemen who met him in the +road below the General's house, reminded him that he had active +enemies, who would not hesitate to injure him by every means in their +power. He thought about his father all day, and wondered if there +was anything he could do that would bring him back home where he +belonged, and make a respectable man of him. He had ample leisure to +turn this problem over in his mind, for he was alone the most of the +day. As soon as he reached the cabin, Dan, who acted as if he did not +want to be in his brother's company, shouldered his rifle and went +off by himself; and it was while he was roaming through the woods +that he made a discovery which did much to bring about some of the +events we have already described.</p> + +<p>Dan felt so mean and sneaking that he did not want to see anybody, if +he could help it; and when he accidentally encountered Bob Owens and +Lester Brigham in the woods, he darted into the bushes and concealed +himself. He watched them while they were watching Don and Bert, +and when he saw them hitch their horses and creep along the fence +in pursuit of the wagon, he suddenly recalled some scraps of a +conversation he had overheard a few days before. He knew that Lester +was working against David, and believing from his stealthy movements +and Bob's that there was mischief afoot, he followed them with the +determination of putting in a word, and perhaps a blow, if he found +that David's interests were in jeopardy. He saw every move the two +boys made. He was lying in the bushes not more than fifty yards from +them, while they were watching Don and Bert put the captured quails +into the cabin, and when they went back to the place where they had +left their horses, they passed so close to him that he caught some of +their conversation. When they were out of sight and hearing Dan arose +and sat down on the nearest log to make up his mind what he was going +to do about it.</p> + +<p>“I'll bet a hoss you don't steal them quail nor set fire to the +cabin, nuther,” said he, to himself. “Thar's a heap of birds in +thar—seems to me that they had oughter ketched 'most as many as they +want by this time—an' they shan't be pestered; kase if they be, +what'll become of my shar' of them hundred an' fifty dollars? It'll +be up a holler stump, whar I thought it had gone long ago!”</p> + +<p>Dan knew that if Lester and his friend had any designs upon the cabin +and the quails that were in it, they would not attempt to carry them +out before night; but the fear that something might happen if he went +home again troubled him greatly, and he resolved that he would not +lose sight of the cabin for a few hours at least. He did not know +what he would do to Lester and Bob if he caught them in the act of +trying to steal the quails; that was a point on which he could not +make up his mind until something happened to suggest an idea to him. +While he was sitting in his place of concealment, thinking busily, he +heard a rustling in the bushes and looked up to see one of Don's +hounds approaching.</p> + +<p>In the days gone by, before Dan became such a rascal as he was now, +he had often accompanied Don and Bert on their 'coon and 'possum +hunting expeditions, and the old dogs in the pack were almost as well +acquainted with him as they were with their master. Bose recognised +him at once, and appeared to be glad to see him.</p> + +<p>“I want you to stay here with me till it comes dark, ole feller,” +said Dan, patting the animal's head. (He never kicked the hounds, as +he did the pointer. He knew better.) “If them fellers comes we'll +make things lively fur 'em. You hear me?”</p> + +<p>Dan waited almost twelve hours before he had an opportunity to carry +out the plan he had so suddenly formed. When he became tired of +sitting still and began to feel the cravings of appetite, he went +into the woods and shot four squirrels which Bose treed for him. +These he roasted over a fire and divided with his four-footed friend. +When it began to grow dark he went back to his hiding-place, where he +remained until he thought it time to take up a new position. This was +by the side of the road, and a short distance from the big gate, +which opened into the lane leading to the negro quarters. There Dan +lay for almost four hours, stretched out behind a log, with the hound +by his side. He saw several negroes pass in and out of the gate, and, +although some of them walked by within ten feet of him, no one saw +him, and the well-trained hound never betrayed his presence by so +much as a whimper.</p> + +<p>Finally, to Dan's great relief, the lights in the General's house +were put out, then a door or two was slammed loudly in the quarters, +and after that all was still. Dan had grown tired of watching and +must have fallen asleep, for he knew nothing more until a low growl +from the hound aroused him. He was wide awake in an instant, and +having quieted the animal by placing his hand on his neck, he looked +all around to see what it was that had disturbed him. He heard +footsteps in the field on the opposite side of the road, and +presently two figures appeared and clambered over the fence. They +crossed to the gate, which they opened and closed very carefully and +went down the lane.</p> + +<p>“Them's our fellers, Bose,” whispered Dan, who was highly excited. +“They've got bags slung over their shoulders, an' they think they're +goin' to play smash stealin' them birds of our'n; but me and you will +see how many they'll get, won't we?”</p> + +<p>As soon as Bob and Lester were out of hearing Dan arose, and holding +the hound firmly by the neck with one hand he opened the gate with +the other, and moved noiselessly down the lane toward the quarters. +His plan was to make sure that Bob and his friend had come there to +force an entrance into the cabin in which the quails were confined, +and if he found that that was their object, he would make a pretence +of setting Bose upon them. He did not intend to do so in reality, for +he knew the dog too well. The animal always did serious work when +he began to use his teeth, and Dan didn't want either of the young +thieves killed or maimed. He knew that if he could excite the hound +and induce him to give tongue, the rest of the pack would be on the +ground in two minutes' time; and as they were all young dogs (Carlo +was shut up in the barn every night to do guard duty there), they +would not be likely to take hold of the boys, if left to themselves. +They would not permit them to escape, either. They would surround +them and keep them there until morning, and that was what Dan wanted. +He could not afford to watch the cabin every night, and he thought it +would be a good plan to give Bob and his friend a lesson they would +not forget.</p> + +<p>That the prowlers had come there to force an entrance into the cabin, +was quickly made plain to even Dan's dull comprehension. He saw them +try the door, and then go around to the other side of the building +and attempt to pry off the planks that covered the window. Dan heard +something crack as Bob laid out his strength on the lever he was +using, and believing that the thieves were on the point of +accomplishing their object, he uttered a loud whistle to let the rest +of the pack know that they were wanted, and shouted:</p> + +<p>“Here they be! Take 'em, fellers! Take 'em down!”</p> + +<p>Bose, who had been growing more and more impatient every moment, was +quite ready to obey. Uttering a loud yelp, which was almost +immediately answered by the rest of the pack, he raised himself upon +his hind legs, and struggled so furiously to escape that Dan was +obliged to drop his rifle and seize him with both hands. But when the +brute was thoroughly aroused, it was hard to restrain him. The thick, +loose skin on the back of his neck did not afford Dan a very good +hold, and almost before he knew it, Bose slipped from his grasp, and +bounded toward the cabin. At the same instant, a chorus of loud bays +sounding close at hand announced that the rest of the pack were +coming at the top of their speed. Bob and Lester had never before +been in so much danger as they were at that moment.</p> + +<p>Dan, who began to fear that the plan he had adopted for protecting +the quails was about to result in a terrible tragedy, was very badly +frightened. He stood for a few seconds as if he had been deprived of +all power of action, and then caught up his rifle and took to his +heels. He ran as if the pack were after him instead of Bob and +Lester, and never slackened his pace until he was out of hearing of +their angry voices. He crept home like a thief and got into bed +without arousing either David or his mother. But he could not sleep. +He was haunted by the fear that something dreadful had happened down +there in the quarters, and that there would be a great uproar in the +settlement the next morning. He felt that he could never be himself +again until he knew the worst, so a little while before daylight he +put on his clothes, slipped quietly out of the cabin and bent his +steps toward the big gate near which he had been concealed the night +before. By the time he reached it there, was light enough for him to +distinguish objects at a considerable distance, and we can imagine +how greatly relieved he was when he discovered Bob and Lester perched +upon the ridge pole of the cabin. At first, he thought his eyes were +deceiving him, but a second look told him that there was no mistake +about it. He would have been glad to know if either of them had been +injured by the hounds before they got there, but that was something +he could not find out just then. They had not been torn in pieces, as +he feared, and that was a great comfort to him.</p> + +<p>“They never had a closer shave, that thar is sartin,” thought Dan, as +he turned about and trudged toward home. “I wonder what pap would say +if he knowed what a smart trick I played onto 'em! I wish I could go +an' tell him, but I am a'most afeared, kase he must be jest a bilin' +over with madness. He's lost the pinter—I reckon Dave must have +stole him, kase I don't see how else he could have got him—an' I +don't keer to go nigh him ag'in, till I kin kinder quiet his feelin's +by tellin' him some good news 'bout them hundred an' fifty dollars.”</p> + +<p>The events of this night were the last of any interest that +transpired in the settlement for more than two weeks. Affairs seemed +to take a turn for the better now, and the boy trapper and his two +friends were left to carry out their plans without any opposition. +Bob and Lester kept out of sight altogether; but they need not have +been so careful to do that, for the General was the only one who was +the wiser for what they had done, and he never said a word about it +to anybody. They could not even muster up energy enough to go out of +nights to rob David's traps; and perhaps it was just as well that +they did not attempt it, for they might have run against Dan Evans in +the dark. The latter spent very little time at home now. He was +sometimes absent for two days and nights, and David and his mother +did not know what to make of it. He had built a camp near the field +in which the traps were set, and there he lived by himself, +subsisting upon the squirrels and wild turkeys that fell to his +rifle.</p> + +<p>Things went on smoothly for a week, and during this time David and +his friends were as busy as they could be. Quails were more abundant +than they had ever known them to be before. They seemed to flock into +the General's fields on purpose to be caught, and before many days +had passed, it became necessary to fit up another cabin for the +reception of the prisoners. In the meantime the General's timber and +nails were used up rapidly. The boys had the hardest part of their +work to do now, and that was to build a sufficient number of coops to +hold all the birds. Silas Jones said that the Emma Deane was expected +down every day, and Don declared that the birds must be shipped on +her when she came back from New Orleans, if it took every man and +woman on the plantation to get them ready. She came at last, and Don +was at the landing to meet her. He held a short interview with her +captain and Silas Jones, who was freight agent as well as express +agent and post-master, and when it was ended he jumped on his pony +and rode homeward as if his life depended upon the speed he made. +When he arrived within sight of the field where the traps were set, +he saw his brother and David coming in with another wagon load of +birds.</p> + +<p>“How many this morning?” asked Don.</p> + +<p>“We have enough now to make fifty-five dozen altogether,” replied +Bert.</p> + +<p>“Hurrah for our side!” cried Don. “We'll ship them all. Some may die +on the way, you know, and that man must have the number he advertised +for. Captain Morgan will stop and get the birds when he comes back. +He will see them shipped on the railroad at Cairo, and all we have to +do is to be sure that the game is at the landing in time.”</p> + +<p>“Did he say how much it would cost to send them off?” asked David.</p> + +<p>“No. He will put in his bill when he comes down again. He carries +freight by the hundred, you know. He will pay the railroad charges, +too, and add that to his own bill.”</p> + +<p>“But what shall I do if both bills amount to more than ten dollars?” +asked David, with some anxiety.</p> + +<p>Don did not seem to hear the question, for he paid no attention to +it. The truth was he had arranged matters so that David would not be +required to use any of his ten dollars. Silas Jones was to foot all +the bills and pay himself out of David's money when it was forwarded +to him by the agent at S——, the place where the quails were going. +But Don couldn't stop to explain this just now. He told his brother +and David to make haste and put the quails into the cabin; and when +that was done and they came into the shop, he set them at work on the +coops. There was much yet to be done, but they had ample time to do +it in, with more than a day to spare. When the next Wednesday night +arrived fifty-five dozen quails, boxed and marked ready for shipment, +were at the landing, waiting to begin the journey to their new home +in the North, and Don carried in his pocket a letter addressed to the +advertiser, which Captain Morgan was to mail at Cairo.</p> + +<p>The boys camped at the landing that night to keep guard over their +property. They pitched a little tent on the bank, built a roaring +fire in front of it, and in company with Fred and Joe Packard, who +came down to stay with them, passed the hours very pleasantly. The +Emma Deane came up the next afternoon, and when the freight had been +carried aboard and she backed out into the stream again, David drew +a long breath, expressive of the deepest satisfaction. His task was +done, and he hoped in a few days more to reap the reward of his +labor.</p> + +<p>The boys felt like resting now. They had worked long and faithfully, +and they were all relieved to know that their time was their own. Don +and Bert paid daily visits to their bear trap, hunted wild turkeys +and drove the ridges for deer, while David stayed at home and made +himself useful there, until he began to think it time to hear from +somebody, and then he took to hanging about the post-office as +persistently as ever his father had done. Finally, his anxiety was +relieved by the arrival of the first letter that had ever been +addressed to himself. He tore it open with eager hands, and read +that the quails had been received in good order, and that the money, +amounting to one hundred and ninety-two dollars and fifty cents, had +been paid over to the agent from whom they were received. David could +hardly believe it. The man had paid him for the extra five dozen +birds; he was to receive forty-two dollars more than he expected; +and there had been no freight charges deducted. David could not +understand that, and there was no one of whom he could ask an +explanation, for Don and Bert had gone over to Coldwater that +morning, and were not to be back for a week. He had a long talk with +his mother about it that night, and when he went to bed never closed +his eyes in slumber. Every succeeding day found him at the landing +waiting for his money, and so little did he know about business that +he could not imagine who was to give it to him.</p> + +<p>At last the Emma Deane came down again. David stood around with the +rest and watched her while she was putting off her freight, and +having seen her back out into the stream, was about to start for +home, when Silas Jones came up and tapped him on the shoulder.</p> + +<p>“Don't go away,” said he. “I want to see you.” David waited an hour +before Silas was ready to tell him what he wanted of him. By that +time the most of the hangers-on had dispersed; and when the last +customer finished his trading, Silas stepped behind his desk and +opened his safe.</p> + +<p>“There it is,” said he, slapping a package of greenbacks on the desk +and then holding it up to David's view. “How do you like the looks of +it?”</p> + +<p>David's eyes opened to their widest extent. He had never seen so +large a package of money before. He looked hastily about the store to +see if Dan was anywhere in sight, and was greatly relieved to find +that he was not. There were three, or four men standing by, and they +appeared to be enjoying David's astonishment.</p> + +<p>“Is—is it mine, Mr. Jones?” he managed to ask.</p> + +<p>“Some of it is, and some of it is mine. There are a hundred and +ninety-two dollars and a half here, and twenty-eight of it belongs to +me. Freight bills, you know. The coops you put those birds in were as +heavy as lead. If you had put less timber in them your expenses would +not have been so heavy.”</p> + +<p>“Don thought it best to have them strong, so that they would not be +broken in handling,” said David.</p> + +<p>“That was all right. Now let me see,” added Silas, consulting his +books; “fifty-five dozen live quails at three fifty per dozen—one +ninety-two, fifty; less twenty-eight, leaves one sixty-four, fifty. +Just step around here and sign this receipt.”</p> + +<p>David obeyed like one in a dream. He put his name to the receipt, +and, scarcely knowing what he was about, thrust the package of money +which Silas handed him into his pocket and walked out of the store.</p> + +<p>“There goes the proudest boy in the United States,” said the grocer.</p> + +<p>Yes, David was proud, but he was grateful, too. He was indebted to +Don and Bert for his good fortune, and he was sorry that he could do +nothing but thank them when they came home. He went straight to the +cabin, and to his great surprise and joy found his mother there. She +was alone in the house, but David, profiting by his past experience, +made a thorough examination of the premises before he said a word to +her. Having thus made sure that Dan was not about, he pulled out his +package of greenbacks and laid it in his mother's lap.</p> + +<p>There was joy in the cabin that day. If David had never before +realized that it is worth while to keep trying, no matter how hard +one's luck may be, he realized it now. We will leave him in the full +enjoyment of his success, promising to bring him to the notice of the +reader again at no distant day, in the concluding volume of this +series, which will be entitled THE MAIL CARRIER.</p> + +<p><b>THE END.</b><p> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Boy Trapper, by Harry Castlemon + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BOY TRAPPER *** + +***** This file should be named 18076-h.htm or 18076-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/1/8/0/7/18076/ + +Produced by Alan Johns and Andrew Sly + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** + + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/18076-h/images/image01.jpg b/18076-h/images/image01.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..db77fb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/18076-h/images/image01.jpg diff --git a/18076-h/images/image02.jpg b/18076-h/images/image02.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..00701d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/18076-h/images/image02.jpg diff --git a/18076-h/images/image03.jpg b/18076-h/images/image03.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3742125 --- /dev/null +++ b/18076-h/images/image03.jpg diff --git a/18076-h/images/image04.jpg b/18076-h/images/image04.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d16ac55 --- /dev/null +++ b/18076-h/images/image04.jpg diff --git a/18076.txt b/18076.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..de19a61 --- /dev/null +++ b/18076.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7167 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Boy Trapper, by Harry Castlemon + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Boy Trapper + +Author: Harry Castlemon + +Release Date: March 29, 2006 [EBook #18076] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BOY TRAPPER *** + + + + +Produced by Alan Johns and Andrew Sly + + + + + + +[Illustration: Dave meets Lester Brigham.] + + +Boy Trapper Series + +THE + +BOY TRAPPER. + +By HARRY CASTLEMON, + +AUTHOR OF "THE FRANK NELSON SERIES," "THE SPORTSMAN'S CLUB SERIES," +"GUNBOAT SERIES," &C. + +PHILADELPHIA +HENRY T. COATES & CO. + + + + +FAMOUS CASTLEMON BOOKS. + +Gunboat Series. By Harry Castlemon. 6 vols. 12mo. + Frank the Young Naturalist. + Frank on a Gunboat. + Frank in the Woods. + Frank before Vicksburg. + Frank on the Lower Mississippi. + Frank on the Prairie. + +Rocky Mountain Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth. + Frank among the Rancheros. + Frank at Don Carlos' Ranch. + Frank in the Mountains. + +Sportsman's Club Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth. + The Sportsman's Club in the Saddle. + The Sportsman's Club Afloat. + The Sportsman's Club among the Trappers. + +Frank Nelson Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth. + Snowed Up. + Frank in the Forecastle. + The Boy Traders. + +Boy Trapper Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth. + The Buried Treasure. + The Boy Trapper. + The Mail-Carrier. + +Roughing It Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth. + George in Camp. + George at the Wheel. + George at the Fort. + +Rod and Gun Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth. + Don Gordon's Shooting Box. + Rod and Gun Club. + The Young Wild Fowlers. + +Go-Ahead Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth. + Tom Newcombe. + Go-Ahead. + No Moss. + +Forest and Stream Series. By Harry Castlemon. 3 vols. 12mo. Cloth. + Joe Wayring. + Snagged and Sunk. + Steel Horse. + +War Series. By Harry Castlemon. 5 vols. 12mo. Cloth. + True to his Colors. + Rodney the Partisan. + Rodney the Overseer. + Marcy the Blockade-Runner. + Marcy the Refugee. + +Other Volumes in Preparation. + + + + +Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1878, by PORTER & +COATES, in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. + + + +CONTENTS + + I. A GLANCE AT THE PAST + II. DAVID'S VISITORS + III. AN OFFER OF PARTNERSHIP + IV. MORE BAD NEWS + V. DAN IS ASTONISHED + VI. BRUIN'S ISLAND + VII. WHAT HAPPENED THERE + VIII. DOGS IN THE MANGER + IX. NATURAL HISTORY + X. A BEAR HUNT + XI. TRAPPING QUAILS + XII. WHERE THE POINTER WAS + XIII. TEN DOLLARS REWARD + XIV. SOME DISCOVERIES + XV. BOB'S ASPIRATIONS + XVI. DON'S HOUNDS TREE SOMETHING + XVII. CONCLUSION + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +A GLANCE AT THE PAST. + + +"Don't worry about it, mother. It is nothing we can help." + +"It seems to me that I might have helped it. If I had gone to General +Gordon when your father first spoke about that barrel with the eighty +thousand dollars in it, and told him the whole story, things might +have turned out differently. But in spite of all he said, I did not +suppose that he was in earnest." + +"Neither did I. That any man in his sober senses should think of such +a thing! Why, mother, if there had been so much money buried in that +potato-patch, the General would have known it, and don't you suppose +he would have found it if he'd had to plough the field up ten feet +deep? Of course he would." + +"But just think of the disgrace that has been brought upon us." + +"Father is the only one who has done anything to be ashamed of, and +he made matters worse by running away. If he would come home and +attend to his business, no one would say a word to him. The General +told me so this morning." + +"I am afraid you couldn't make your father believe it." + +"Perhaps not, but if I knew where to find him I should try." + +It was David Evans who spoke last. He and his mother were talking +over the strange incidents that had happened in the settlement during +the last few days, and which we have attempted to describe in the +preceding volume of this series. The events were brought about by a +very foolish notion which Godfrey Evans, David's father, suddenly got +into his head. + +During our late war it was the custom of the people living in the +South to conceal their valuables when they heard of the approach of +the Union army. They were also careful to take the same precautions +to save their property when it became known that the rebel guerillas +were near at hand; for these worthies were oftentimes but little +better than organized bands of robbers, and the people stood as much +in fear of them as they did of the Federals. These valuables, +consisting for the most part of money, jewelry and silverware, were +sometimes hidden in cellars, in hollow logs in the woods and in +barns; but more frequently they were buried in the ground. The work +of hiding them was sometimes performed by the planters themselves, if +they happened to be at home, but it was generally intrusted to old +and faithful servants in whom their owners had every confidence. It +not unfrequently happened that these old and faithful servants proved +themselves utterly unworthy of the trust reposed in them. Sometimes +they told the raiding soldiers where the property was concealed, and +at others they ran away without telling even their masters where the +valuables were hidden. General Gordon's old servant, Jordan, was one +of this stamp. He went off with the Union forces, who raided that +part of Mississippi, and before he went he told a rebel soldier, +Godfrey Evans, who happened to be at home on a furlough, and who was +skulking in the woods to avoid capture, that he had just buried a +barrel containing eighty thousand dollars in gold and silver in his +master's potato-patch, and that none of the family knew where it was. + +This Godfrey Evans had been well off in the world at one time. He had +property to the amount of fifteen thousand dollars; but, like many +others, he lost it all during the war, and returned home after the +surrender of General Lee to find himself a poor man. His comfortable +house had been burned over the heads of his wife and children, who +were now living in a rude hut which some kind-hearted neighbors had +hastily erected; his negroes, who had made his money for him, were +all gone; his cattle had been slaughtered by both rebel and Union +troops, and his mules and horses carried off; his fine drove of hogs, +which ran loose in the woods, and upon which he relied to furnish his +year's supply of bacon, had wandered away and become wild; and +Godfrey had nothing but his rifle and his two hands with which to +begin the world anew. But it was hard to go back and begin again +where he had begun forty years ago. The bare thought of it was enough +to discourage Godfrey, who declared that he wouldn't do it, and made +his words good by becoming a roving vagabond. He spent the most of +his time at the landing, watching the steamers as they came in, and +the rest in wandering listlessly about the woods, shooting just game +enough to keep him in powder, lead and tobacco. His sole companion +and friend was his son Daniel, who, being a chip of the old block, +faithfully imitated his father's lazy, useless mode of life. Mrs. +Evans and the younger son, David, were the only members of the family +who worked. They never lost an opportunity to turn an honest penny, +and there were times when Godfrey and Dan would have gone supperless +to bed if it had not been for these two faithful toilers. + +Godfrey disliked this aimless, joyless existence as much as he +disliked work, and even Dan at times longed for something better. +They both wanted to be rich. Godfrey wanted to see his fine +plantation, which was now abandoned to briers and cane, cultivated as +it used to be; while it was Dan's ambition to have two or three +painted boats in the lake, to have a pointer following at his heels, +and to do his shooting with a double-barrel gun that "broke in two in +the middle." He wanted to take his morning's exercise on a spotted +pony--a circus horse, he called it; and to wear a broadcloth suit, +a Panama hat and patent leather boots, when he went to church on +Sundays. Don and Bert Gordon had all these aids to happiness, and +they were the jolliest fellows he had ever seen--always laughing, +singing or whistling. Dan thought he would be happy too, if he could +only have so many fine things to call his own, but he could see no +way to get them, and that made him angry. He hated Don and Bert so +heartily that he could never look at them without wishing that some +evil might befall them. He threatened to steal their horses, shoot +their dogs, sink their boats, and do a host of other desperate +things, believing that in this way he could render the two happy +brothers as miserable as he was himself. + +Godfrey and Dan lived in a most unenviable frame of mind for a year +or more, and then the former one day happened to think of the barrel +which old Jordan had told him was hidden in the potato-patch. He +spoke of it while the family were at dinner, and announced that he +and Dan would begin the work of unearthing the BURIED TREASURE that +very night. If they didn't find it the first time they tried, they +would go the next night; and they would keep on digging until they +obtained possession of it, if they had to dig up the whole state of +Mississippi. Dan almost went wild over the news. He and his father +spent a few minutes in building air-castles, and then Godfrey, who +felt as rich as though he already had the money in his possession, +hurried down to the landing, entered the store there and called for a +plug of tobacco, which the merchant refused to give him until he +showed that he had twenty-five cents to pay for it. + +Although Dan and his father had great expectations, which they +believed would very soon be realized, they did not neglect to pay +attention to small matters, and to pick up any stray dollars that +chanced to fall in their way. David was a famous dog-breaker, and Don +Gordon had offered him ten dollars to train a pointer for him. The +offer was made in the presence of Dan and his father, and the former +at once laid his plans to obtain possession of a portion of the +money. While the two were on their way to the landing, where a +shooting-match was to be held that afternoon, Dan stopped at General +Gordon's barn, and having borrowed a shovel, with which to dig up the +buried treasure, he went to the house, where he found Bert reading a +book. He told him that David had sent him there after five dollars, +as he wished to buy a new dress for his mother, and Bert, although +he was well aware that, according to the agreement his brother had +made with David, the money was not to be paid until the pointer +was thoroughly broken for the field, advanced him the amount he +requested. Arriving at the landing, Dan got the bill changed for +notes of smaller denomination, and, while he was picking up his +money, was surprised by his father, who was greatly amazed to see his +son with such a roll of greenbacks in his hand. Knowing that Dan +was too lazy to work--too much of a gentleman was the way Godfrey +expressed it--he could not imagine where the money came from, and Dan +refused to enlighten him on this point, fearing that if he did his +father would go straight to Don Gordon and ask for the rest of the +ten dollars. Godfrey urged and commanded to no purpose, and was +obliged to be satisfied with the loan of a dollar, which he promised +to return with heavy interest as soon as the barrel was found. He +paid seventy-five cents of it for the privilege of entering as one +of the contestants in the shooting-match, and the rest he used in +purchasing the plug of tobacco for which the grocer had refused +to credit him. He won nothing during the match, while Dan, to his +father's great disgust, came in for one of the first prizes--a fine +quarter of beef. + +When the shooting-match was over, the father and son returned to the +little hovel they called home. Dan at once put the mule into the cart +and started back to the landing to bring home his quarter of beef; +while Godfrey, by pretending to fall asleep on the bench in front of +the cabin, was able to carry out a little stratagem that suddenly +suggested itself to him. He knew that Dan was a thrifty lad in spite +of his laziness, and that he believed in laying by something for +a rainy day. He was never out of ammunition for his rifle, but he +always took care to keep his little stock hidden away, so that his +father could not find it. By watching him on this particular day, +Godfrey was lucky enough to find out where the boy's hiding-place +was. He went to it as soon as Dan drove away in the cart, and found +there a goodly supply of powder, lead and caps, and also three +dollars and twenty-five cents in money; all of which he put into his +pocket. + +Dan came back from the landing in due time, and his father, who had +been calculating on having a good supper that night, was astonished +to find that the beef had been sold. He was enraged at first, but +when he learned that Dan had received three dollars and a half for +it, he was quieted at once, and a happy thought came into his mind. +He sent Dan into the woods to shoot some squirrels for supper, and +while the boy was gone he went to the hiding-place and put back the +ammunition and money just as he found them, believing that when Dan +returned he would put the three dollars and a half there too. Nor was +he mistaken. The boy presently came back with squirrels enough for +supper, and as soon as he thought he could do so without being seen +by any one, he went to his storehouse, and having made sure that the +property he had already hidden there was safe, he added to it the sum +he had received for the quarter of beef, and went away happy. His +father was happy too for he had seen the whole operation. + +Godfrey was too tired to dig for the buried treasure that night, so +Dan went to bed as soon as it was fairly dark. His father waited +until he was soundly asleep, and then went to the storehouse and took +out all it contained. Dan's rage when he discovered his loss the next +morning was something to wonder at. He knew where his property was, +and he demanded its immediate return, threatening in case of refusal, +to tell General Gordon about the barrel in the potato-field. This +frightened Godfrey, who gave up the contents of his pockets, but not +until he had forced Dan to tell him where he obtained the money he +had seen in his hands at the landing the day before. He was +astonished when he learned that it came from Bert Gordon, and set his +wits at work to conjure up some plan, by which he might obtain +possession of the rest. He went over to the General's at once, and +there learned that Don and Bert had gone down to the landing with +their father, where they were awaiting the arrival of two cousins, +whom they were expecting from the North. Godfrey followed them there +with all haste, sought an interview with Don, and by telling him some +plausible story, induced him to advance the other five dollars. +Godfrey hoped in this way to get the start of Dan and enjoy his +ill-gotten gains all by himself, but Dan was there and saw it all, +and his father, alarmed by the look he saw on his face, divided the +money with him. Of course David knew nothing of this. He was saving +those ten dollars for his mother. He did not expect to spend a cent +of it on himself; and how he first learned of his loss and what was +done about it, perhaps we shall see as our story progresses. + +The two young gentlemen, Clarence and Marshall Gordon, for whom Don +and Bert were waiting, and who landed from the steamer, Emma Deane, +that morning, had been sent away from the city by their father, in +order that they might be out of the way of temptation; but, as it +happened, one of them ran directly into it. Clarence, the older, was +anything but a model boy. He was much addicted to ale and cigars, and +thought of nothing in the world so much as money. He was a +spendthrift, and, like Godfrey Evans, had a great desire to be rich, +but he never thought of working and saving in order to gain the +wished-for end. This good old-fashioned and safe way was too long and +tedious for him, and he was constantly on the lookout for a short +road to wealth and consequent happiness. Before he had been +twenty-four hours under his uncle's roof, he thought he had +discovered it, and this was the way it came about: + +Clarence and his brother arrived at the General's house in the +forenoon, and before night came, the former wished most heartily that +he had stayed at home. He was lonely and utterly disgusted with the +quiet of the country, and the old-fashioned, prosy way his two +cousins had of enjoying themselves. Music, horseback-riding, hunting, +fishing and visiting made up the round of their amusements, and +Clarence could see no fun in such things. As soon as it grew dark he +slipped out of the house, and leaning over a fence that ran between +the barnyard and a potato-patch, lighted a cigar and settled into a +comfortable position to enjoy it. He had not been there many minutes, +before he was startled by the stealthy approach of two persons, a man +and a boy, who stopped a short distance from him and began digging +with a shovel. Clarence listened to the words which the man uttered +for the encouragement of the boy, who was doing the work, and was +amazed to learn that there was a fortune hidden in that field, and +that these two had come there to dig it up. In his eagerness and +excitement Clarence leaned half way over the fence, puffing +vigorously at his cigar all the while. The little round ball of fire +glowing through the darkness caught the eye of the boy, who showed it +to his companion, and the two, frightened almost out of their senses, +took to their heels, leaving the eavesdropper lost in wonder. + +Clarence was almost overwhelmed by the discovery he had just made. It +was an opportunity too good to be lost, and he at once resolved that +if there were eighty thousand dollars buried in that field, he must +have a share of the money when it was brought to light. In order to +bring this about, he must find out who this man and boy were. He had +a very slight cue to guide him, but he followed it up so skillfully +that by noon of the next day he knew as much about the eighty +thousand dollars as Godfrey did, and had formed a partnership with +that worthy, Dan being dropped as a useless encumbrance. They met, +according to agreement, as soon as it grew dark. It happened that +there was one who witnessed their interview, and heard all that +passed between them, and that was Don Gordon, who had just returned +from the landing, whither he had been to mail a letter to his cousin. +Not finding the hostler about when he came back, Don attended to his +pony himself, and was about to shut up the barn for the night, when +he discovered what he supposed to be a thief prowling about. The +lighted end of a cigar glowed through the darkness a moment later, +and then Don saw that the prowler was his cousin Clarence. Greatly +amused at his mistake, he was about to make his presence known, when +it occurred to him that since Clarence had taken so much pains to get +out of sight of the family, in order that he might enjoy his cigar, +perhaps he would not like it if Don caught him in the act; so Don +remained in his place of concealment, heard every word that was said +when Godfrey came up, saw both of them get over the fence in the +potato-patch, and followed and watched them while they were digging +for the barrel. + +Now, Don was one of the most inveterate practical jokers in the +world, and the most accomplished one we ever saw. Godfrey had +received more than one proof of his skill. He had been tripped up +when there was no one near him; his hat had been knocked off his head +by invisible hands, and he had seen horrid great things with eyes of +fire staring at him from fence-corners, until he had become fully +satisfied that the General's lane was haunted, and he would go a mile +around through the fields before he would pass through it after +nightfall. Here was another opportunity to frighten him, and Don knew +just how to do it. Before he went to sleep that night, he had thought +of something that beat all the other tricks he had heard of far out +of sight. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +DAVID'S VISITORS. + + +The trouble began the very next morning. While Godfrey was sitting on +the bench in front of his cabin, deeply engrossed with his own +thoughts, Dan came rushing up with a face full of terror, and +conveyed to him the startling intelligence that a "haunt"--a Northern +boy would have called it a ghost--had been seen at General Gordon's +barn. It looked exactly like old Jordan, the negro, who had buried +the treasure in the potato-patch; but of course it couldn't be old +Jordan, for he had never been heard of since he ran away with the +Yankees, and everybody believed him to be dead. Godfrey listened in +great amazement to his son's story, and, to satisfy himself of the +truth of it, went up to the barn, with his rifle for company. He had +not been there many minutes before he received convincing proof that +Dan had told the truth, for he saw the object with his own eyes--a +feeble old negro, dressed in a white plantation suit, and wearing a +battered plug hat, who limped along in plain view of him, and finally +disappeared, no one could tell how or when. That was enough for +Godfrey. He started for home at the top of his speed, and scarcely +dared to venture out of doors that night. He had an appointment with +Clarence Gordon at dark, but he would not have passed that barn in +his present state of mind, if he had known that he could make twice +eighty thousand dollars by it. + +Bright and early the next morning, Clarence came down to see why he +had not kept his promise, and talked to him in such a way that +Godfrey finally agreed to meet him that night, the boy promising to +protect him from anything in the shape of a ghost that might cross +their path. He kept his appointment this time, but he was sorry +enough for it afterward, for the first object on which his eyes +rested, when he and his companion reached the potato-field, was old +Jordan, digging away as if he too were in search of the buried +treasure. Godfrey would have taken to his heels at once, but +Clarence, who did not believe in "haunts," walked up and seized the +negro by the arm. After much argument, Godfrey was induced to do the +same, and then his fears all vanished, for it was a veritable human +being that he took hold of and not a spirit, as he feared it was. He +declared, too, that the interloper was the missing Jordan, beyond a +doubt, and that he had come there to steal the money he had buried in +that same field years before. The negro was commanded to point out +the spot where the treasure was hidden, but nothing could be learned +from the old fellow. He would not speak at all, until Godfrey +threatened to punch him in the ribs with his shovel, and then he +denied all knowledge of the barrel. Upon hearing this, Clarence and +his companion seized him by the arms, dragged him across the field, +over the fence and down the road to Godfrey's potato-cellar, where he +was tied to a stanchion with a plough-line and left with the +assurance that he should never see daylight again until he told where +the fortune was to be found. + +Godfrey was stirring the next morning before it was fairly light, and +the first sound that fell on his ears caused him to start and tremble +with terror. He listened until it was repeated, and then started post +haste for General Gordon's house. When he reached it, he found the +whole plantation in an uproar. Don was missing and a search was being +instituted. Clarence came out about this time, and Godfrey told him a +most astounding piece of news. It wasn't old Jordan at all whom they +had captured the night before, it was Don Gordon. Godfrey was sure of +it, for he had heard him whistle as nobody in the world except Don +Gordon could whistle. As soon as Clarence recovered from his +amazement and terror, he mounted Don's pony and set out for the +potato-cellar to see for himself. When he reached it, he found that +the prisoner had already been liberated by somebody (it was Bert, who +was guided to his place of confinement by Don's loud and continued +whistling) and was no doubt on the way home by that time. What was +Clarence to do? Of course he could not go back to the plantation and +face his relatives after what he had done, and there was no other +house in the settlement open to him. Just then he heard the whistle +of a steamer coming up the river, and that settled the matter for +him. He would go home. He jumped on the pony and was riding post +haste toward the landing when he was waylaid by Godfrey Evans, who +robbed him of twenty dollars, all the money he had in the world. As +soon as he was released, Clarence made his way to the landing on +foot, reaching it just in time to secure passage on the Emma Deane, +pawned his watch for money enough to pay his way home, and finally +reached his father's house in safety, only to be packed off to sea on +the school-ship, where he remains to this day. + +Don Gordon reached home with his brother's assistance, and has been a +close prisoner there ever since, not yet having recovered from the +effects of his night in the potato-cellar. Godfrey Evans is hiding in +the swamp somewhere, fearing that if he comes home he will be +arrested for three offences--robbing Clarence, assaulting Don, and +trying to steal the eighty thousand dollars, which he still firmly +believes to be hidden in the potato-patch. A week has passed since +the occurrence of the events which we have so rapidly reviewed, and +now that you are acquainted with them, we are prepared to resume our +story. + +"And if your father doesn't come back, how are we to live this +winter?" asked Mrs. Evans, continuing the conversation which we have +so long interrupted. "How is _he_ to live?" + +"His living will trouble him more than ours will trouble us," replied +David, who, knowing that he was his mother's main dependence now, +tried hard to keep up a brave heart. "It will be cold out there in +the swamp pretty soon. I saw a flock of wild geese in the lake this +morning, and that is a sure sign that winter is close at hand. Father +had no coat on when he went away, and he was barefooted, too. And as +for _our_ living, mother, who's kept you in clothes and coffee, sugar +and tea, for the last year?" + +"You have, David. I don't know what I should do without you. You are +a great comfort to me." + +"And I'm never going to be anything else, mother. I never made you +cry, did I? I ain't going to, either. I can take care of you, and I +will, too. If I can't get work to do, I can hunt and trap small game, +you know; and if I only had a rifle, I am sure I could kill at least +one deer every week. That, reckoning venison worth six cents a pound, +would bring us in about thirty dollars a month. Who says we couldn't +live and save money on that?" + +"But you don't own a rifle," said his mother, smiling at the boy's +enthusiasm. + +"Well, that's so," said David, sadly. "But," he added, his face +brightening, "I shall have ten dollars coming to me as soon as Don +Gordon's pointer is field-broken, and you shall have every cent of +it. Besides, you haven't forgotten that I'm going to get a hundred +and fifty dollars for trapping quail for that man up North, have +you?" + +"Have you heard from him yet?" + +David was obliged to confess that he had not. + +"He may have made a bargain with some one else before Don's letter +reached him," continued Mrs. Evans. "You know this is not the only +country in which quails are to be found, and neither are you the only +one who would be glad to make a hundred and fifty dollars by trapping +them." + +"I know it, mother; but even if I can't get that job, I can get some +other that will bring us in money," said David, who was determined to +look on the bright side of things. "I'll earn another ten-dollar bill +before the one I get from Don Gordon is gone, you may depend upon +it." + +With this assurance the boy kissed his mother and hurried out of the +door, and Mrs. Evans, after clearing away the remnants of their +frugal breakfast, also went out to begin her daily toil at the house +of a neighbor. David made his way around the cabin, and was met by +Don's pointer, which, coming as close to him as the length of his +chain would permit, waited for the friendly word and caress that the +boy never failed to bestow when he passed the kennel in which the +animal was confined. The greeting he extended to his four-footed +friend was a short one this morning, for David had other matters on +his mind. He confidently expected that a few days more would bring +him the wished-for order from the man who had advertised for the +quails, and when it came he wanted to be ready to go to work without +the loss of an hour; so he was spending all his spare time in +building traps. He had four completed already, and just as he had got +boards enough split out for the fifth, he heard the clatter of +horses' hoofs on the road and looked up to see Bert Gordon and his +brother ride up to the fence. + +"Why, Don, I am glad to see you out again," exclaimed David, dropping +his hammer and hurrying forward to greet his friend. + +"Thank you," replied Don, accepting David's proffered hand. "I assure +you I am glad to be out again, too. It's a fearful bore to be tied up +in the house for a whole week, but I was bound to come down here this +morning, if I had to come in the carriage, for I have news for you," +added Don, putting his hand into the breast-pocket of his coat. + +"Has it come?" asked David, in a voice that trembled with excitement. + +"It certainly has. It was addressed to me, you know, and so Bert +opened it. The man says, he wants fifty dozen live quails +immediately, and--but there it is, read it for yourself." + +Don produced the letter, and David took it with a very unsteady hand. +A hundred and fifty dollars was a fortune in his eyes, a larger one +too than he had hoped to earn for some years to come. He opened the +letter and one glance at it showed him that the money was his, if he +could only capture the required number of birds. They were to be +trapped at once, the sooner the better, put into boxes, which were to +be marked C. O. D. and forwarded, charges paid, to the address at the +bottom of the letter. + +"Cod," repeated David, whose opportunities for learning how business +was transacted had been very limited, "does he mean codfish?" Don and +Bert laughed heartily. + +"No," said the former, as soon as he could speak. "C. O. D. means +'collect on delivery.'" + +"O," said David, in a tone of voice which showed that he did not yet +fully understand. + +"It is nothing to be ashamed of," said Bert; "we didn't know what the +letters meant until father told us." + +"That's so," said Don; "how is a fellow to know a thing he has never +had a chance to learn? Now when the birds are caught, you put so many +of them in a box and on each box you mark the value of its contents. +You send a notice of shipment to the man, and he will know when to +look for the birds. When they arrive he pays the amount of your bill +to the express agent, and the agent forwards it to you. You run no +risk whatever, for the man can't get the quails until your bill is +paid." + +"Now I'll tell you what we'll do," said Bert, who saw by the +expression on David's face that his brother had not made matters much +clearer by his explanation, "you go to work and catch the quails, and +when you have made up the required number, we'll help you ship them +off." + +"That's the idea," said Don. "We'll do anything we can for you." + +"Thank you," answered David, who felt as if a tremendous +responsibility had been removed from his shoulders. + +"I'll write to the man to-day, informing him that you will go to work +at once," added Don. "I don't suppose you could tell, even within a +week or two, of the time it will take you to fill the order, could +you?" + +"I shouldn't like to make a guess," said David. "The birds rove +around so that a fellow can't tell anything about them. They are +plenty now, but next week there may not be half a dozen flocks to be +found." + +"Then I will write to him that the best you can say is, that you will +lose no time. How does the pointer come on?" + +"Finely," said David. "He works better than half the old dogs now. +He's smart, I tell you." + +"He takes after his owner, you see. I hope to get firmly on my feet +next week, and if I do, I want to try him. Good-by." + +"Now, there are two friends worth having," thought David, gazing +almost lovingly after the brothers, as they rode away. "I don't +wonder that everybody likes them. A hundred and fifty dollars! Whew! +won't mother have some nice, warm clothes this winter, and won't she +have everything else she wants, too?" + +The boy did not see how he could possibly keep his good fortune to +himself until his mother came home that night. His first impulse was +to go over to the neighbor's house, and tell her all about it, but he +was restrained by the thought that that would be a waste of time. He +could make one trap in the hour and a half that it would take him to +go and return, and the sooner his traps were all completed, the +sooner he could get to work. His next thought was that he would let +the traps rest for that day, go down to the landing, purchase some +nice present for his mother and surprise her with it when she came +home. Of course he had no money to pay for it, but what did that +matter? Silas Jones was always willing to trust anybody whom he knew +to be reliable, and when he learned that his customer would have a +hundred and fifty dollars of his own in a few weeks, he would surely +let him have a warm dress or a pair of shoes. When his money came he +would get his mother something fine to wear to church; and, while he +was about it, wouldn't it be a good plan for him to send to Memphis +for a nice hunting outfit and a few dozen steel traps? Like his +father, when he first thought of the barrel with the eighty thousand +dollars in it, David looked upon himself as rich already; and if he +had attempted to carry out all the grand ideas that were continually +suggesting themselves to him, it was probable that his hundred and +fifty dollars would be gone before he had earned them. + +"Halloo, there!" shouted a voice. + +David looked up and saw another horseman standing beside the +fence--Silas Jones, who kept the store at the landing, and the very +man of whom he had been thinking but a moment before. + +"Come here, David," continued Silas. "I am out collecting bills, and +I thought I would ride around and see if you have heard anything of +that respected father of yours during the last few days." + +"No, sir; we haven't," answered David, hanging his head. + +"Well, I suppose you know that he owes me eight dollars, don't you?" +said Silas. + +"I knew he owed you something, but I didn't think it was as much as +that," replied David, opening his eyes. In his estimation, eight +dollars was a debt of some magnitude. + +"That's the amount, as sure as you live, and if I had charged him as +much as I charge others, it would have been more. I made a little +reduction to him, because I knew that he didn't own more of this +world's goods than the law allows. What is to be done about it? Am I +to lose my money because he has run away?" + +"O, no," said David, quickly. "I'll pay it, and be glad to do so. We +may want groceries some time, you know, when we have no money to pay +for them." + +"That's the way to talk. Pay up promptly and your credit will always +be good." + +"All I ask of you," continued David, "is that you will wait about a +month longer, until----" + +"Can't do it; can't possibly do it," exclaimed Silas, shaking his +head and waving his hands up and down in the air. "Must have money +to-day. My creditors are pushing me, and I must push everybody whose +name is on my books." + +"But my name isn't on your books." + +"Your father's is, and if you have any honor about you, you will see +the debt paid." + +"That's what I mean to do, but I can't pay it now." + +"Can't wait a single day," said Silas. "If the money isn't +forthcoming at once, you can't get a single thing at my store from +this time forward, unless you have the cash to plank right down on +the counter." + +"I have always paid you for everything I have bought of you," said +David, with some spirit. + +"I know it; but your father hasn't, and if you want me to show you +any favors, you will pay that debt to-day. You have always been +called an honest boy, and if you want to keep that reputation, you +had better be doing something." + +So saying, Silas wheeled his horse and rode away, leaving David lost +in wonder. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +AN OFFER OF PARTNERSHIP. + + +This was the first time David had ever heard that a son could be held +responsible for debts contracted by his father. At first he did not +believe it; but Silas seemed to think it could be done, and he was a +business man and ought to know what he was talking about. The truth +of the matter was, that Silas Jones was a hard one to deal with. He +wanted every cent that was due him and more too, if he could get it. +It made no difference how poor his customers were, he always found +means to make them pay the bills they contracted at his store. The +eight dollars that Godfrey owed him looked almost as large in his +eyes as it did in David's. He could not bear to lose it, and he did +not care what tricks he resorted to to get it. When he rode away he +took all David's peace of mind with him, "Wasn't it lucky that I +didn't go down to his store and ask him to trust me for a dress for +mother?" thought the boy; as he picked up his hammer and resumed work +upon his trap. "He would have refused me sure. Now there is only one +way I can pay that debt, and that is to ask Don Gordon for the ten +dollars he promised to give me for breaking his pointer. That's +something I don't like, for the money isn't fairly earned yet, but I +don't see what else I can do. Mother must have something to eat, and +the only way I can get it is by making a friend of Silas by paying +him this debt father owes him. I don't care for myself, and as for +Dan--let him look out for number one. That's what he makes me do." + +While David was soliloquising in this way he heard a footstep near +him, and looking up saw his brother Dan, whose appearance and actions +surprised him not a little. His face wore a smile instead of the +usual scowl, he had no coat on, his sleeves were rolled up, and he +carried a frow in one hand (a frow is a sharp instrument used for +splitting out shingles), and a heavy mallet in the other. He really +looked as if he had made up his mind to go to work, and David could +not imagine what had happened to put such an idea into his head. He +stopped on the way to speak to the pointer and give him a friendly +pat, and that was another thing that surprised his brother. Dan would +have acted more like himself if he had given the animal a kick. + +"He's up to something," thought David. "He wouldn't act that way if +he wasn't. I shouldn't wonder if he wants part of that money I am +going to get from Don Gordon, but he needn't waste his breath in +asking for it. Every cent of it goes into mother's hands." + +"Halloo, Davy!" said Dan, cheerfully. "I thought mebbe you wouldn't +care if I should come out and lend you a hand. I hain't got nothing +much to do this morning." + +David made no reply. He was waiting to hear what object his brother +had in view in offering his assistance, and he knew it would all be +made plain to him in a few minutes. + +"You got a heap of traps to build, hain't you?" continued Dan. "When +be you goin' to set 'em?" + +"I am going to set some of them to-night," was David's reply. + +"Fifty dozen is a heap of birds, ain't it?" said Dan. + +"How do you happen to know anything about it?" demanded David, who +was greatly astonished. + +"I heerd you an' Don talkin' about it." + +"Where were you at the time?" + +"O, I was around," answered Dan, who did not care to confess that he +had intentionally played the part of eavesdropper. + +David was silent, for he wanted to think about it. Here was another +piece of ill luck. His experience had taught him that if he wished to +make his enterprise successful, he must keep it from the knowledge of +his father and Dan. If they found out that he expected to earn so +much money, they would insist on a division of the spoils, and if +their demand was not complied with, there would be trouble in the +cabin. He had no fear of his father now, but here was Dan, who was an +unpleasant fellow to have about when he was crossed, and he seemed to +know all about it. There were troublous times ahead; David was sure +of that. + +"What does that feller up North want with so many quails, anyhow?" +asked Dan, as he placed one of the oak blocks upon its end and began +splitting off a shingle with the frow. "He can't eat 'em all by +hisself." + +"No, he wants to turn them loose and let them run," replied David, +with as much good nature as he could assume. "You see they had an +awful hard winter up there last year, and the quails were all killed +off." + +"Wall, what does the fule want to let 'em go fur, arter he's bought +'em?" + +"Why, he wants to stock the country. He belongs to a Sportsman's Club +up there. He and his friends will have a law passed keeping folks +from shooting them for two or three years, and then there'll be just +as many birds as there were before." + +"Is that the way them rich fellers does?" + +"That's what Don says." + +"It's mighty nice to be rich, ain't it, Davy; to have all the money +you want to spend, a nice hoss to ride, one of them guns what breaks +in two in the middle to do your shootin' with, an' shiny boots an' a +straw hat to wear to church! I wish me an' pap had found that thar +bar'l with the eighty thousand dollars into it. I wouldn't be wearin' +no sich clothes as these yere." + +"That's all humbug," exclaimed David. "The silver things that old +Jordan buried, the spoons, knives and dishes, were all dug up again +and are in use now every day. General Gordon never had eighty +thousand dollars in gold and silver." + +"Don't you b'lieve no sich story as that ar," replied Dan, with a +knowing shake of his head. + +"That's what the Gordons say, anyhow." + +"In course they do; an' they say it kase they don't want nobody +diggin' arter that thar bar'l. They wants to find it theirselves. How +much be you goin' to get fur these quail, Davy? As much as +twenty-five dollars, mebbe thirty, won't you?" + +This question showed that Dan didn't know all about the matter, and +David took courage. "Yes, all of that," he replied. + +"More, I reckon mebbe, won't ye?" + +"I think so." + +"You won't get fifty, will you?" said Dan, opening his eyes. + +"I hope I shall." + +"Whew!" whistled Dan. He threw down his frow and mallet and seated +himself on the pile of shingles, with an air which said very plainly, +that with such an amount of money in prospect there was no need that +any more work should be done. "That's a fortin, Davy. It's an amazin' +lot fur poor folks like us, an' I can't somehow git it through my +head that we're goin' to git so much. But if we do get it, Davy, +we'll have some high old times when it comes, me an' you." + +"You and me!" exclaimed David. + +"Sartin; I want some good clothes an' so do you. 'Twon't be enough to +get us a hoss apiece. I _do_ wish I had a circus hoss like Don +Gordon's, but we kin get some better shootin' irons, me an' you kin, +an' mebbe we can git a boat to hunt ducks in, an' some of them +fish-poles what breaks all in pieces an' you carry 'em under your +arm. An', Davy, mebbe we'll have a leetle left to get something fur +the ole woman." + +"For mother! I rather think she'll get something," said David, in a +tone of voice that made his brother look up in surprise. "She'll get +it all, every cent of it." + +"Not by no means she won't," exclaimed Dan, striking his open palm +with his clenched hand. "No, sir, not by a long shot. You kin give +her your shar', if you're fule enough to do it, but mine I'll keep +fur myself. I'll bet you on that." + +"_Your_ share?" + +"In course." + +"I didn't know that you had any share in this business." + +"Whoop!" yelled Dan. + +He dashed his hat upon the ground, jumped up and knocked his heels +together, coming down with his feet spread out and his clenched hands +hanging by his side, as if he were waiting for an attack from his +brother. + +"No, sir," said David, quietly but firmly, "this is my own business. +If you want money, go to work and earn it for yourself. You've got +six dollars and six bits hidden away somewhere that you never offered +to share with me or mother either." + +"I know it, kase it is my own. I worked hard fur it too." + +"I don't know how, or when you got it," answered David, who little +dreamed that his brother had more ready money than that, and that the +most of it rightfully belonged to himself, "and I have never asked +you for any of it. The money I shall receive for these quails will be +mine, all mine." + +Dan uttered another wild Indian yell and once more went through the +process of preparing himself for a fight, leaping high into the air, +knocking his heels together, coming down with his feet spread out and +his hands clenched, and when he was fairly settled on the ground +again, he exclaimed: + +"Dave, does you want me to wallop you?" + +"No, I don't," was the reply; "but if you do you won't keep me from +doing what I please with my own money." + +"But it won't be your own when you get it. I'm older nor you be, an' +now that pap's away I'm the man of the house, I want you to know, an' +it's the properest thing that I should have the handlin' of all the +money that comes into the family. If you don't go 'have yourself it's +likely you won't tech a cent of them fifty dollars when it comes. If +you don't go to crossin' me, I'll give you your shar' an' I'll take +mine; an' we'll get some nice things like Don and Bert Gordon has +got." + +"But how does it come that you will have any share in it? That's what +I can't understand." + +"Why, I kalkerlate to help you set the traps an' take out the quail +when they're ketched, an' do a heap of sich hard work." + +"I intend to do all that myself, and it isn't work either. It's +nothing but fun." + +"But I'll have a shar' in it anyhow," said Dan, with a grin, which +showed that he felt sure of his position, "kase look at the boards +I've split out fur you." + +David laughed outright. "How many of them are there?" said he. "Five; +and I could have split them out in less than half the time you took +to do it, and made better boards besides. I can't use these at all." + +"Dave," said Dan, solemnly, as he picked up the frow and mallet, "I +see you're bound to go agin me." + +"No, I am not, and I don't want you to go against me, either." + +"Yes, you be. You're goin' to cheat me outen my shar' of them fifty +dollars, ain't you now?" + +"You will have no share in the money. It will all belong to me, and I +shall give it to mother." + +"Then, Dave, not a quail do you ketch in these yere fields so long as +you hold to them idees. Don't you furget it, nuther." + +"What do you mean?" asked David, in alarm. "What are you going to +do?" + +"I don't make no threatenings. I only say you can't ketch no birds so +long as you go agin me, an' that's jest what I mean. If you come to +me some day an' say, 'I wus wrong, Dannie, an' now I'm goin' to act +decent, like a brother had oughter do,' I'll give you my hand an' do +what I can to help you. You've got a big job afore you, an' you can't +by no means do it alone. You'd oughter have somebody to help you, an' +thar's a heap of hard work in me, the fust thing you know." + +"That's so," thought David, running his eyes over his brother's +stalwart figure; "but I guess it will stay there." + +"We can make them fifty dollars easy, if we pull together; but you +can't make 'em by yourself, an' you shan't, nuther. You hear me?" + +As Dan said this he disappeared around the corner of the cabin, +leaving his brother standing silent and thoughtful. He came out again +in a few minutes with his rifle on his shoulder, and without saying +another word to David or even looking toward him, climbed over the +fence and went into the woods. When he was out of sight, David sat +down on one of his traps and went off into a brown study. He was in a +bad scrape, that was plain; and the longer he thought about it, the +darker the prospect seemed to grow. He had his choice between two +courses of action: he must either take Dan into partnership, divide +the money with him when it was earned, and permit himself to be +browbeaten and driven about as if he were little better than a dog; +or he must make an enemy of him by asserting his rights. Which of the +two was the more disagreeable and likely to lead to the most +unpleasant consequences, he could not determine. If Dan were accepted +as a partner, he would insist on handling all the money, and in that +case Mrs. Evans would probably see not a single cent of it; for Dan +did not care who suffered so long as his own wishes were gratified. +If he stuck to the resolution he had already formed, and went ahead +on his own responsibility, Dan would smash his traps whenever he +happened to find them (he was always roaming about in the woods, and +there was hardly a square rod of ground in the neighborhood that he +did not pass over in the course of a week), and liberate or wring the +necks of the birds that might chance to be in them. He never could +capture so many quails if Dan was resolved to work against him, and +neither could he make his enterprise successful if he allowed him an +interest in it. David did not know what to do. + +"I might as well give it up," said he to himself, after a few +minutes' reflection. "I'll go up and tell Don that I can't fill the +order; and while I am about it, I might as well ask him for that +money. Perhaps, if I pay father's debt, Silas Jones will give us +what we need until I can find something to do." + +With this thought in his mind, David arose and went into the cabin. +He put on the tattered garment he called a coat, exchanged his +dilapidated hat for another that had not seen quite so hard service, +and bent his steps toward General Gordon's house. While he was +hurrying along, thinking about his troubles and the coming interview +with Don Gordon, and wondering how he could word his request so that +his friend would not feel hard toward him for asking for his money +before it had been earned, he was almost ridden down by a horseman, +who came galloping furiously along the road, and who was close upon +him before David knew there was any one near. + +"Get out of the way, there!" shouted the rider. "Are you blind, that +you run right under a fellow's horse that way?" + +David sprang quickly to one side, and the horseman drew up his nag +with a jerk and looked down at him. It was Lester Brigham, one of the +neighborhood boys of whom we have never before had occasion to speak. +He was comparatively a new resident in that country. He had been +there only about a year, but during that time he had made himself +heartily detested by almost all the boys about Rochdale. Of course he +had his cronies--every fellow has; but all the best youngsters, like +Don and Bert Gordon and Fred and Joe Packard, would have little to do +with him. He had lived in the North until the close of the war, and +then his father removed to Mississippi, purchased the plantation +adjoining General Gordon's, and began the cultivation of cotton. + +Mr. Brigham was said to be the richest man in that county, and Lester +had more fine things than all the rest of the boys about there put +together. He took particular pride in his splendid hunting and +fishing outfit, and it was coveted by almost every boy who had seen +it. He had four guns--all breech-loaders; a beautiful little +fowling-piece for such small game as quails and snipes; a larger one +for ducks and geese; a light squirrel rifle, something like the one +Clarence Gordon owned; and a heavier weapon, which he called his deer +gun, and which carried a ball as large as the end of one's thumb. He +had two jointed fish-poles--one a light, split bamboo, such as is +used in fly-fishing, and the other a stout lancewood, for such heavy +fish as black bass and pike. + +If there was any faith to be put in the stories he told, Lester was a +hunter and fisherman who had few equals. Before he came to the South, +it was his custom, he said, to spend a portion of every winter in the +woods in the northern part of Michigan, and many a deer and bear had +fallen to his rifle there. He could catch trout and black bass where +other fellows would not think of looking for them, and as for quails, +it was no trouble at all for him to make a double shot and bag both +the birds every time. There were boys in the neighborhood who doubted +this. Game of all kinds was abundant, and Lester was given every +opportunity to exhibit the skill of which he boasted so loudly, but +he was never in the humor to do it. He seldom went hunting, and when +he did he always went alone, and no one ever knew how much game he +brought home. + +"Your name is Evans, isn't it?" demanded Lester. + +David replied that it was. + +"Are you the fellow who intends to trap fifty dozen quail in this +county, and send them up North?" + +"I am," answered David. + +"Well, I just rode down here on purpose to tell you that such work as +that will not be allowed." + +"Who will not allow it?" + +"I will not, for one, and my father for another." + +"What have you to say about it?" asked David, who did not like the +insolent tone assumed by the young horseman. "Do the birds belong to +you?" + +"They are as much mine as they are yours, and if you have a right to +trap them and ship them off, I have a right to say that you shan't do +it." + +"Why not? What harm will it do?" + +"It will do just this much harm: it will make the birds scarce about +here, and there are no more than we want to shoot ourselves. O, you +needn't laugh about it, I mean just what I say; and if you don't +promise that you will let the quail alone, you will see trouble. I am +going to get up a Sportsman's Club among the fellows, and then we'll +keep such poachers and pot-hunters as you where you belong. No one +objects to your shooting the birds over a dog--that's the way to +shoot them; but you shan't trap them and send them out of the +country. Will you promise that you will give up the idea?" + +"No, I won't," answered David. + +"Then you'll find yourself in the hands of the law, the first thing +you know," exclaimed Lester, angrily. "We won't stand any such work. +Don Gordon ought to be ashamed of himself for what he has done. He's +the meanest----" + +"Hold on, there!" interrupted David, with more spirit than he had yet +exhibited. "You don't want to say anything hard about Don while I am +around. He's a friend of mine, and I won't hear anybody abuse him. +He's the best fellow in the settlement, and so is his brother; and +any one who talks against him is just the opposite." + +Lester seemed very much astonished at this bold language. He glared +down at David for a moment and then slipping his right hand through +the loop on the handle of his riding-whip, pulled his feet out of the +stirrups and acted as if he were about to dismount. "Do you know who +you are talking to?" said he. + +"Yes, I do," replied David, "and that's just the kind of a fellow I +am." + +Lester looked sharply at the ragged youth before him and then put his +feet back into the stirrups again and settled himself firmly in the +saddle. He felt safer there. "I'll be even with you for that," said +he. "You shan't catch any quail in these woods this winter. I'll +break up every trap I find and I'll make the rest of the fellows do +the same." + +Lester gave emphasis to his words by shaking his riding-whip at +David, and then wheeled his horse and rode away. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +MORE BAD NEWS. + + +David's feelings, as he stood there in the road, gazing after the +retreating horseman, were by no means of the most pleasant nature. He +was naturally a cheerful, light-hearted boy, and he would not look on +the dark side of things if he could help it. But he couldn't help it +now. Here was more trouble. If he had been disposed to give up in +despair when he found that his brother was working against him, he +had more reason to be discouraged when he learned that a new enemy +had suddenly appeared, and from a most unexpected quarter, too. That +was the way he looked at the matter at first; but after a little +reflection, he felt more like defying Dan and Lester both. What +business had either of them to interfere with his arrangements, and +say that he should not earn an honest dollar to give his mother, if +he could? None whatever, and he would succeed in spite of them. +He would get that grocery bill off his hands the first thing, and +when he was square with the world, he would go to work in earnest and +outwit all his foes, no matter how numerous or how smart they might +be. He would tell Don all about it and be governed by his advice. + +Having come to this determination, David once more, turned his face +toward the General's house. A few minutes' rapid walking brought him +to the barn and there he found the boy he wanted to see. The brothers +had just returned from a short ride--Don was not yet strong enough to +stand his usual amount of exercise--and having turned the ponies over +to the hostler, were on the point of starting for the house, when +David came in. + +"Halloo, Dave!" exclaimed Don, who was always the first to greet him. +"Traps all built?" + +"Not yet," answered David, trying to look as cheerful as usual. + +"You have plenty of nails and timber, I suppose. If not come straight +to us. It will never do to let this thing fall through for want of a +little capital to go on," said Don, who was as much interested in +David's success as though he expected to share in the profits of the +enterprise. + +"I have everything I want in the way of nails and boards," replied +David, "but I--you know--may I see you just a minute, Don?" + +"Of course you may, or two or three minutes if you wish. Come on, +Bert. I have no secrets from my brother, _now_," said Don with a +laugh. "I kept one thing secret from him and got myself into trouble +by it. If I had told him of it perhaps he would have made me behave +myself. Now what is it?" he added, when the three had drawn up in one +corner of the barn, out of earshot of the hostler. + +David was silent. He had made up his mind just what he wanted to say +to Don, but Lester Brigham's sudden appearance and the threats he had +made had scattered all his ideas, and he could not utter a word. + +"Speak up," said Bert encouragingly. "You need not hesitate to talk +freely to us. But what's the matter with you? You look as though you +were troubled about something." + +"I am troubled about a good many things," said David, speaking now +after a desperate effort. "In the first place, there are two fellows +here who say I shan't trap any birds." + +"Who are they?" demanded Don, surprised and indignant. + +"My brother Dan is one of them." + +"Whew!" whistled Don, opening his eyes and looking at Bert. + +"I didn't want him to know anything about it," continued David, "for +I was certain that he would make me trouble; but he found it out by +listening while I was talking about it, and wanted to join in with +me. I told him I didn't want him, and he said I shouldn't catch any +birds." + +"Did he say what he would do to prevent it?" asked Bert. + +"O, it's easy enough to tell what he will do," exclaimed Don. "He'll +steal or break the traps and kill the quails. There are plenty of +ways in which he can trouble us, if he makes up his mind to it." + +"Who is the other?" asked Bert. + +"Lester Brigham." + +Don whistled again, and then looked angry. + +"When did you see him, and what did he have to say about it?" he +asked. "Has he any reason to hold a grudge against you?" + +"I didn't know that he had until I met him in the road this morning. +He says he won't have me trapping quails and sending them off North, +because it will make them scarce here. He says he is going to get up +a Sportsman's Club among the fellows, and then he will keep +pot-hunters like me where we belong." + +"Oho!" exclaimed Bert. "It seems to me that he is taking a good deal +upon himself." + +"That is what he has done ever since he has been here, and that's why +there are so many boys in the settlement who don't like him," said +Don. "But he mustn't meddle with this business. He can't come down +here into a country that is almost a wilderness and manage matters as +they do up North. Father told me the other day that in some states +they have laws to protect game, and it is right that they should +have, for there are so many hunters that if they were not restrained +they would kill all the birds and animals in a single season. The +most of the hunters live in the city, and when they get out with +their guns they crack away at everything they see; and if they happen +to kill a doe with a fawn at her side, or a quail with a brood of +chicks, it makes no difference to them. Sportsman's Clubs are of some +_use_ there, but we have no need of them in this country." + +"He wants the quails left here, so that he can shoot them over his +dog," continued David. + +"O, he does! When is he going to begin? He has been here more than a +year, and nobody has ever heard of his killing a quail yet. He must +keep his fingers out of this pie. We can't put up with any +interference from him. Any more bad news?" added Don, seeing that +David's face had not yet wholly cleared up. + +"Yes, there is," replied the latter, speaking rapidly, for fear that +his courage might desert him again. "Just after you left me this +morning, Silas Jones rode up and dunned me for eight dollars that +father owes him." + +"Why, you have nothing to do with that," said Bert. + +"Nothing whatever," chimed in Don. "You tell Mr. Jones that if he +wants his money he had better hunt up your father and ask him for it. +You don't owe him anything, do you?" + +"No, but he says that if I don't settle that bill, he'll never let me +have a thing at his store again unless I have the money in my hand to +pay for it. I haven't a cent of my own, and I thought if you could +let me have the ten dollars you promised me for breaking the pointer, +I should be much obliged to you." + +"If I would do what?" asked Don, in amazement. + +"Why, David," said Bert, "the money was all paid to you in less than +twenty-four hours after the dog was placed in your keeping." + +"Paid to me?" gasped David. + +"Well, no, not to you, but to your order." + +"To my order!" repeated the boy, who began to think he was dreaming. + +"Yes, to your order," said Don. "We left the pointer in your hands at +noon, while you were at dinner. In less than an hour afterward, Dan +came over and said that you wanted five dollars to buy a dress for +your mother, and Bert gave him the money. The next forenoon your +father met me at the landing and told me you wanted the other five to +buy some medicine for your mother, who was ill with the ague, and I +gave it to him, and I just know I made a mess of it," added Don, +bringing his hands together with a loud slap. + +It was plain from the looks of David's face that he had. The boy +listened with eyes wide open, his under jaw dropping down and his +face growing pale, as the duplicity of which his father and brother +had been guilty was gradually made plain to him, and when at last his +mind grasped the full import of Don's words, he covered his face with +his hands and cried aloud. Don and Bert looked at him in surprise, +and then turned and looked at each other. They who had never wanted +for the necessities, and who had never but once, and that was during +the war, lacked the luxuries of life, could not understand why his +grief should be so overwhelming; but they could understand that they +had been deceived, and even the gentle-spirited Bert was indignant +over it. The impulsive Don could scarcely restrain himself. He walked +angrily up and down the floor, thrashing his boots with his +riding-whip and cracking it in the air so viciously that the ponies +danced about in their stalls. + +"Dave," said Bert, at length, "are we to understand that your father +and brother came to us and got that money without any authority from +you?" + +"That's just what they did," sobbed David. + +"And you never saw a cent of it?" + +"Not one cent, or mother either." + +"Well, what of it?" exclaimed Don. "Brace up and be a man, Dave. A +ten-dollar bill is not an everlasting fortune." + +"I know it isn't much to you, but it is a good deal to me. You don't +know what the loss of it means. It means corn-bread and butter-milk +for breakfast, dinner and supper." + +"Well, what of that?" said Don, again. "I have eaten more than one +dinner at the Gayoso House, in Memphis--and it is one of the best +hotels in the country--when corn-bread and butter-milk were down in +the bill of fare as part of the dessert." + +"Well, if all the folks who stop at that hotel had to live on it, as +we do, they would call for something else," replied David. "How am I +to settle Silas Jones's bill, I'd like to know?" + +"Never mind Silas Jones's bill. If he says anything more to you about +it, tell him that you don't owe him a cent." + +"And how am I to send my quails away? That man said the charges must +be paid." + +"Ah! that's a more serious matter," said Don, placing his hands on +his hips, and looking down at the floor. + +"It is all serious to me," said David, brushing the tears from his +eyes, "but I'll work through somehow. I'll go home now and think +about it, and if I don't earn that money in spite of all my bad luck, +it will not be because I don't try." + +"That's the way to talk," said Don, giving David an encouraging slap +on the back. "That's the sort of spirit I like. Bert and I will see +you again, perhaps this afternoon. In the meantime we'll talk the +matter over, and if we three fellows are not smart enough to beat the +two who are opposing us, we'll know the reason why." + +David hurried out of the barn, in order to hide his tears, which +every instant threatened to break forth afresh, and Don, turning to +the hostler, ordered him to put the saddles on the ponies again. +"Father is down in the field," said he, to his brother, "and it may +be two or three hours before he will come to the house. I can't wait +so long, so we'll ride down there and talk the matter over with him. +He hasn't forgotten that he was a boy once himself, and he will tell +us just what we ought to do." + +The ponies were led out again in a few minutes, and Bert, having +assisted his brother into the saddle, mounted his own nag, and the +two rode down the lane toward the field. Of course they could talk +about only one thing, and that was the ill-luck that seemed to meet +their friend David at every turn. The longer Bert thought and talked +of the trick that had been played upon himself and his brother, the +more indignant he became; while Don, having had time to recover a +little of his usual good nature, was more disposed to laugh over it. +He declared that it was the sharpest piece of business he had ever +heard of, and wondered greatly that Godfrey and Dan, whom he had +always believed to be as stupid as so many blocks, should have +suddenly exhibited so much shrewdness. Bert declared that it was a +wicked swindle; and the earnestness with which he denounced the whole +proceeding made Don laugh louder than ever. Of course the latter did +not forget that the trick which so highly amused him, had been the +means of placing David in a very unpleasant situation, but still he +did not think much about that, for he believed that his father would +be able to make some suggestions, which, if acted upon, would +straighten things out in short order. + +"Well, Don, how does it seem, to find yourself in the saddle again? +You appear to enjoy the exercise, but Bert doesn't. He looks as +though he had lost his last friend." + +This was the way General Gordon greeted his boys, when they rode up +beside the stump on which he was seated, superintending the negroes +who were at work in the field. Bert brightened up at once, but +replied that he thought he had good cause to look down-hearted, and +with this introduction he went on and told David's story just as the +latter had told it to him and his brother. The General listened +good-naturedly, as he always did to anything his boys had to tell +him, and when Bert ceased speaking, he pulled off a piece of the +stump and began to whittle it with his knife. The boys waited for him +to say something, but as he did not, Bert continued: + +"We came down here to ask you what we ought to do about it, and we +want particularly to know your opinion concerning the trick Dan and +his father played on us." + +"That is easily given," replied the General. "My opinion is that +Master Don is just ten dollars out of pocket." + +"You don't mean that I must pay it over again?" exclaimed Don. + +"No, I don't mean that, because you haven't paid it at all." + +"Why, father, I----" + +"I understand. Dan made a demand upon Bert, and Bert borrowed five +dollars of his mother and gave it to him. Godfrey came to you for the +other five, and you gave it to him. David has not yet been paid for +breaking the pointer." + +"No, sir; but we supposed that his father and brother had authority +to ask us for the money." + +"You had no right to suppose anything of the kind. You ought to have +paid the money into David's own hands, or else satisfied yourselves +that he wanted it paid to some one else. Among business men it is +customary, in such cases, to send a written order. You must pay +David, and this time be sure that he gets the money." + +"Whew!" whistled Don, who was very much surprised by this decision. +"That will make a big hole in the money I was saving for Christmas; +but David needs it more than I do, and besides it belongs to him. +What shall we do to Godfrey and Dan? They obtained those ten dollars +under false pretences, did they not?" + +"I don't know whether a lawyer could make a case out of that or not," +said the General, with a laugh. "I am afraid he couldn't, so you will +have to stand the loss. Perhaps you will learn something by it." + +"I am quite sure that I have learned something already," replied Don. +"But now about Dan and Lester. How are we going to keep them from +interfering with David?" + +"Why, it seems to me that I could hide my traps where they would +never think of looking for them, and where I would be sure to catch +quails, too. If I thought I couldn't, I would set them all on this +plantation, and any one who troubled them would render himself liable +for trespass." + +"Aha!" exclaimed Don, who caught the idea at once. + +"But, in order to throw Dan off the scent entirely, you might have +David come up to our shop every day and build his traps there. He +will find all the tools he wants, and those shingles we tore off that +old corn-crib will answer his purpose better than new ones, because +they are old and weather-beaten, and look just like the wood in the +forest. When I was a boy, I never had any luck in catching birds in +bright new traps. When the birds are caught, he can put them into one +of those unoccupied negro cabins and lock them up until he is ready +to send them off." + +"That's the very idea!" cried Don, gleefully. "We knew that if there +was any way out of the difficulty, you would be sure to see it." + +The General bowed in acknowledgment of the compliment, and the +brothers turned their horses about and rode away. When they reached +the barn Don was willing to confess that he was very tired. Riding on +horseback is hard work for one who is stiff in every joint and lame +all over; but Don could not think of going into the house and taking +a rest. He had been a close prisoner there for a whole week, and now +that he had taken a breath of fresh air and stirred his sluggish +blood with a little exhilarating exercise, he could not bear to go +back to his sofa again. He proposed that they should leave their +ponies at the barn and go up to David's in the canoe. They would take +their guns with them, he said, and after they had paid David his +money, they would row a short distance up the bayou, and perhaps they +might be fortunate enough to knock over a duck or two for the next +day's dinner. + +Bert, of course, agreed to the proposition, and went into the shop +after the oars belonging to the canoe, while Don went into the house +again after the guns. When he came out again he had a breech-loader +on each shoulder and David's ten dollars in his pocket. Paying that +bill twice did make a big hole in his Christmas money, for it took +just half of it. + +The brothers walked along the garden path that ran toward the lake, +and when Don, who was leading the way, stepped upon the jetty he +missed something at once. The canoe was gone. They had not been near +the jetty for a week, and the last time they were there the boat was +all right. It could not have got away without help, for it was firmly +tied to a ring in the jetty by the chain, which served as a painter, +and even if that had become loosened the canoe would have remained +near its moorings, for there was no current in the lake to carry it +from the shore. Beyond a doubt, it had been stolen. Don would not +have felt the loss more keenly if the thief had taken his fine +sail-boat. The canoe was almost as old as he was, and in it he and +Bert had taken their first ride on the lake and captured their first +wounded duck. + +"It's gone," said Don, after he and Bert had looked all around the +lake as far as their eyes could reach, "and that's all there is of +it. But we'll not give up our trip. We'll go in the sail-boat." + +The sail-boat had been dismantled, and the masts, sails, rudder and +everything else belonging to her had been stored in the shop under +cover. While Bert was gone after the oars, Don drew the boat up to +the jetty, and having stowed the guns away in the stow-sheets, he got +in himself and took another survey of the lake to make sure that the +canoe was nowhere in sight. It was hard to give it up as lost. + +Bert came back in a few minutes, and having shipped the oars shoved +off and pulled down the lake. A quarter of an hour afterward they +landed on the beach in front of Godfrey's cabin. They found David +wandering listlessly about in the back yard with his hands in his +pockets; and when he came up to the fence in response to their call, +they saw that he had been crying again. + +"David," exclaimed Don, putting his hand into his pocket, "we've got +news for you that will make you wear a different looking face when +you hear it. After you went home, we rode down to see father, and he +told us--Eh!" cried Don, turning quickly toward his brother, who just +then gave his arm a sly pinch. + +"Let me tell it," said Bert. "We'd like to see you at our house this +evening about five o'clock; can you come?" + +"I reckon I can," answered David. "Was that the good news you wanted +to tell me?" + +"No--I believe--yes, it was," said Don, who received another fearful +pinch on the arm and saw his brother looking at him in a very +significant way. "You come up, anyhow." + +"We've got some work for you to do up there," said Bert. "It will not +pay you much at first, but perhaps you can make something out of it +by-and-by. It will keep you busy for two or three weeks, perhaps +longer. Will you come?" + +David replied that he would, and turned away with an expression of +surprise and disappointment on his face. The eager, almost excited +manner in which Don greeted him, led him to hope that he had +something very pleasant and encouraging to tell, and somehow he +couldn't help thinking that his visitors had not said just what they +intended to say when they first came up to the fence. + +"What in the name of sense and Tom Walker was the matter with you, +Bert?" demanded Don, as soon as the two were out of David's hearing. +"My arm is all black and blue, I know!" + +"I didn't want you to say too much," was Bert's reply, "and I didn't +know any other way to stop your talking. There was a listener close +by." + +"A listener! Who was it?" + +"David's brother. Just as you began speaking I happened to look +toward the cabin, and saw through the cracks between the logs that +the window on the other side was open. Close to one of those cracks, +and directly in line with the window, was a head. I knew it was Dan's +head the moment I saw it." + +"Aha!" exclaimed Don. "He had his trouble for his pains this time, +hadn't he? Or, rather, he had the trouble and I had the pain," he +added, rubbing his arm. + +Bert laughed and said he thought that was about the way the matter +stood. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +DAN IS ASTONISHED. + + +Many times during his life had David had good reason to be +discouraged, but he had never been so strongly tempted to give up +trying altogether and settle down into a professional vagabond, as he +was when he left General Gordon's barn and turned his face toward +home. He had relied upon Don to show him a way out of his trouble, +but his friend had not helped him at all; he had only made matters +worse by telling him more bad news. Nothing seemed to go right with +him. There was Dan, who never did anything, and yet he was better off +in the world and seemed to be just as happy as David, who was always +striving to better his condition and continually on the lookout for a +chance to earn a dollar or two. Why should he not stop work and let +things take their own course, as his brother did? He reached home +while he was revolving this question in his mind, and the first +person he saw when he climbed the fence and walked toward the +shingle-pile to resume work upon his traps, was his brother Dan. + +"Whar you been an' what you been a doin' of?" demanded the latter, as +if he had a right to know. + +"I've been over to Don's house," answered David; "and while I was +there I found out that you and father borrowed my ten dollars." + +"'Tain't so nuther," cried Dan, trying to look surprised and +indignant. + +"I believe everything Don and Bert tell me. They have never lied to +me and you have." + +"Whoop!" yelled Dan, jumping up and knocking his heels together. + +"I mean every word of it," said David, firmly. "You have got me into +a tight scrape, but I'll work out of it somehow. And let me tell you +one thing, Dan; you'll never have a chance to steal any more of my +money." + +"Then why don't you divide it like a feller had oughter do?" asked +Dan, angrily. + +"Why don't you divide with mother and me when you have some?" + +"Kase I work hard for it an' it b'longs to me; that's why." And +knowing by his past experience that he could not hold his own in an +argument with his brother, Dan turned about and went into the house. + +David worked faithfully at his traps, paying no further heed to his +brother's movements. He tried to keep his mind on what he was doing, +but now and then the recollection of the heavy loss he had sustained +would come back to him with overwhelming force and the tears would +start to his eyes in spite of all he could do to prevent it. Then he +would throw down his hammer and wander about with his hands in his +pockets, wondering what was the use of trying to do anything or be +anybody while things were working so strongly against him. + +It was during one of these idle periods that Don and Bert came up. +David's hopes arose immediately when he caught sight of Don's smiling +face, for he was sure that he was about to hear something +encouraging. Indeed, Don's first words confirmed this impression; but +it turned out that they had come there simply to offer him work that +would keep him busy for two or three weeks. Of course David wanted +work, but just then he wanted money more. He wanted to pay that +grocery bill, so that he could look Silas Jones in the face the next +time he met him. + +When the brothers got into their boat and rowed away, David went back +to his traps, while Dan, who had been disappointed in his hopes of +hearing some private conversation between the visitors and his +brother, shouldered his rifle and disappeared in the woods. + +David worked away industriously until the sun told him that it was +nearly four o'clock, and then he put on his coat and started off to +keep his appointment with Don and Bert. He found them waiting for him +at the General's barn, and he was not a little surprised when they +seized him by the arms and pulled him into the carpenter-shop, the +door of which they were careful to close and lock behind them. + +"Now I know we can talk without danger of being overheard," exclaimed +Don. "We've got lots to tell you; but in the first place," he added, +opening his pocket-book, "there's your money." + +The expression of joy and surprise that came upon David's face as he +hesitatingly, almost reluctantly, took the crisp, new bill that was +held toward him, amply repaid Don for the loss of the pleasure he had +expected to derive in spending the money for Christmas presents. + +"Why, I understood you to say that father and Dan had drawn this +money," said he, as soon as he could speak. + +"So they did, but my father says the loss is mine and not yours." + +David drew a long breath. He understood the matter now. "It isn't +fair that you should pay it twice," said he. + +"I haven't paid it twice; that is, I haven't paid you at all. It's +all right, David, you may depend upon it. They'll never fool us +again. If I should ever have any more of your money, nobody could get +it except yourself." + +"Or mother," added David. + +"O, of course. I wouldn't be afraid to trust her." + +"I was in hopes that you would have a good deal of my money in your +hands some day," continued David. "I was going to ask you to keep my +hundred and fifty dollars for me; but I don't know now whether I +shall ever get it or not." + +"Of course you'll get it," exclaimed Bert. "You are not going to give +up the idea of trapping the quails, are you?" + +"No, but I don't know that I shall make anything at it, for Dan and +Lester can break up my traps faster than I can make them." + +"Well, they'll not break up a single one of your traps, because----" + +Here Don began and hurriedly repeated the conversation which he and +Bert had had with their father a few hours before. As David listened +the look of trouble his face had worn all that day gradually faded +away, and the old happy smile took its place. His confidence in his +friends had not been misplaced; Dan and Lester Brigham were to be +outwitted after all. + +The traps and the "figure fours" with which they were to be set, +could be built there in the shop, Don said. There were tools and a +bench and everything else needful close at hand, so that the work +could be done in half the time that David had expected to devote to +it. As fast as the traps were completed they were to be set in +General Gordon's fields. They would be safe there and Dan Evans or +Lester Brigham or anybody else who came near them, would be likely to +get himself into trouble. The negroes were always at work in the +fields in the daytime, and if they were told to keep their eyes open +and report any outsiders who might be seen prowling about the fences, +they would be sure to do it. The best course David could pursue would +be to say nothing more about trapping the quails. Let Dan believe +that he had become discouraged and given up the enterprise. If he +wanted to know what it was that took his brother over to General +Gordon's house so regularly, David could tell him that he was doing +some work there, which would be the truth; and besides it would be +all Dan had any right to know. + +As fast as the birds were caught, they could be locked up in one of +the empty negro cabins; and any one who found out that they were +there and tried to steal them, would run the risk of being caught by +Don's hounds. It was a splendid plan, taken altogether, and David's +eyes fairly glistened while it was unfolded to him. He thanked the +brothers over and over again for their kindness and the interest they +took in his success, and might have kept on thanking them if Don had +not interrupted him with-- + +"O, that's all understood. Now, before you begin work on those traps +we want you to help us one day. We've had a good deal of excitement +and some good luck since we last saw you. We have recovered my canoe, +which somebody stole from me, and we have found out that there is a +bear living on Bruin's Island." + +"He must be a monster, too, for such growls I never heard before," +said Bert. + +"Didn't you see him?" asked David. + +"No. We landed to explore the island, and while we were going through +the cane he growled at us, and we took the hint and left. We didn't +have a single load of heavy shot with us. We're going up there +to-morrow, and we want you to go with us. We'll go fixed for him, +too. We'll have a couple of good dogs with us; I'll take my rifle; +Bert will take father's heavy gun; and we'd like to have you take +your single-barrel. If he gets a bullet and three loads of buckshot +in his head, he'll not growl at us any more. If we don't get a chance +to shoot him, we'll build a trap and catch him alive the next time he +comes to the island. Will you go?" + +Of course David would go. He would have gone anywhere that Don told +him to go. He promised to be at the barn at an early hour the next +morning, and then showed a desire to leave the shop; so Don unlocked +the door, and David hurried out and turned his face toward the +landing. He had money now, and that grocery bill should not trouble +him any longer. + +"If there ever was a lucky boy in the world I am the one," thought +David, whose spirits were elevated in the same ratio in which they +had before been depressed. "I'll earn my hundred and fifty dollars +now, and mother shall have her nice things in spite of Dan and +Lester. It isn't every fellow who has such friends as Don and Bert +Gordon. But I shall have a hard time of it, anyhow. Dan will be so +mad when he finds out that he can't ruin me, that he will do +something desperate." + +David, however, did not waste much time in thinking of the troubles +that might come in the future. He preferred to think about pleasanter +things. He was so wholly engrossed with his plans that it seemed to +him that he was not more than five minutes in reaching the landing. +There was no one in the street, and nothing there worth looking at, +except General Gordon's white horse, which was hitched to a post in +front of Silas Jones's store. As David approached, the General +himself came out, accompanied by the grocer, who was as polite and +attentive to his rich customers as he was indifferent to the poor +ones. + +"Ah, David!" exclaimed the General, extending his hand; "how are +times now? Business looking up any?" + +"Y-yes, sir," stammered the boy, who could scarcely speak at all. He +was not abashed by the rich man's presence, for he had learned to +expect a friendly nod or a cordial grasp of the hand every time he +met him; but he was very much astonished by the greeting which Silas +Jones extended to him. No sooner had the General released David's +hand than it was seized by the grocer, who appeared to be as glad to +see him as though he knew that the boy had come there to buy a bill +of goods worth hundreds of dollars. + +"It never does any good to give away to our gloomy feelings," said +the General. "There are many times when things don't go just as we +would like to have them, but the day always follows the night, and a +little perseverance sometimes works wonders." + +David understood what the General meant, but it was plain that the +grocer did not, for he looked both bewildered and surprised. He bowed +to his rich customer, as he rode off, and then, turning to David, +conducted him into the store with a great deal of ceremony. + +"Mr. Jones," said David, who began to think that the grocer must have +taken leave of his senses, "I have come here to settle father's +bill." + +"O, that's all right," was the smiling reply. "It isn't fair that I +should hold you responsible for that debt, and I have concluded that +I will not do it. Your father will pay me some time, perhaps, and if +he doesn't, I'll let it go. The loss of it won't break me. Can I do +anything for you this evening?" + +David was more astonished than ever. Was this the man who had spoken +so harshly to him no longer ago than that very morning? What had +happened to work so great a change in him? It was the General's visit +that did it. When Don and Bert left their father, after holding that +short consultation with him in the field, the latter took a few +minutes to think the matter over, and when his hands had finished +their work, he mounted his horse and rode down to the landing, to +have a talk with Mr. Jones. What passed between them no one ever +knew, but it was noticed that from that day forward, whenever David +came into the store to trade, he was treated with as much respect as +he would have been had he been known to have his pockets full of +money. + +"Want anything in my line this evening?" continued the grocer, +rubbing his hands; "a hat or a pair of shoes and stockings for +yourself, a nice warm dress for mother, or----" + +"O, I want a good many things," replied David, "but I shall have only +two dollars left after your bill is paid, and that must keep us in +groceries for at least a month--perhaps longer." + +To David's great amazement, the merchant replied: "Your credit is +good for six months. As for your father's debt, I wouldn't let you +pay it if you were made of money. Better take home some tea, coffee +and sugar with you, hadn't you? It is always a good plan to replenish +before you get entirely out, you know." + +"O, we were out long ago," said David, who could not help smiling at +the mistake Silas made in supposing that tea, coffee and sugar +appeared on his mother's table every day. "We haven't had any in our +house for almost a month." + +"Is that so?" exclaimed the grocer, "Then I'll put up some for you, +and lend you a basket to carry it home in." + +David leaned upon the counter and began a little problem in mental +arithmetic, with the view of ascertaining how much of his money it +would take to keep his mother supplied with the luxuries the grocer +had mentioned for one month, and how much he would have left to +invest in clothing for her; but before the problem was solved the +grocer had placed three neat packages, good-sized ones, too, on the +counter, and was looking for a basket to put them in. + +"Now, then," said he, briskly, "what next? A dress for mother or a +pair of shoes for yourself? The mornings are getting to be pretty +cold now, and you can't run around barefooted much longer. Ah, Dan! +how do you do?" + +David looked up and was surprised to see his brother standing by his +side. He was surprised, too, to notice that the grocer greeted him +almost as cordially as he had greeted himself but a few minutes +before. David was not glad that he was there, for the expression on +Dan's face told him that he had seen and heard more than he had any +business to know. David made haste to finish his trading after that, +and when he had purchased a dress and a pair of shoes for his mother, +and a pair of shoes and stockings for himself, he handed out his +ten-dollar bill in payment. Dan's eyes seemed ready to start from +their sockets at the sight of it. + +"Never mind that, now," said the grocer, pushing it back. "Perhaps +you will need it some day and I can wait six months, if you are not +ready to settle up before." + +Dan's eyes opened still wider, and when his brother, after thanking +the grocer for his kindness and confidence, gathered up his purchases +and left the store, he followed slowly after him, so wholly lost in +wonder that he never recollected that he had six dollars in his own +pocket, and that he had come there to spend the best part of five of +it. He walked along at a little distance behind his brother, looking +thoughtfully at the ground all the while, as if he were revolving +some perplexing question in his mind, and then quickened his pace to +overtake him. + +"Le' me carry some of them things," said he, as he came up with +David. + +"No, I thank you," replied the latter, who knew that Dan never would +have offered to help him, if he had not hoped to gain something by +it. "I can get along very well by myself. The load is not a heavy +one." + +"You're an amazin' lucky feller, Davy," continued Dan. "What you been +a doin' to Silas, to make him speak so kind to us poor folks?" + +"I haven't done anything to him. I don't know how to account for it, +any more than you do." + +"What's the matter, now? Forgot something?" asked Dan, as his brother +suddenly stopped and looked toward the landing, as if he had half a +mind to turn around and go back there. + +Yes, David had forgotten something, and it was very important too, he +thought. He knew that Dan was always on the lookout for a chance to +make a penny without work, and David was afraid that he might be +tempted to repeat the trick which he and his father had played upon +Don and Bert with so much success. + +It would be a very easy matter for Dan to make up some plausible +story to tell the grocer, and perhaps on the strength of his +brother's almost unlimited credit, he might be able to obtain a few +little articles of which he stood in need. David had never thought to +put Silas on his guard. + +"I'll hold them things fur you, if you want to run back thar," said +Dan, reaching out his hand for the basket. + +"No, I'll let it go until the next time I come down," answered David. +"A day or two will not make much difference." + +"Whar did you get them ten dollars, any how?" asked Dan, as the two +once more turned their faces homeward. + +"That's the money you tried to cheat me out of," replied his brother. +"Don says the loss was his and not mine." + +"Did he give you ten dollars more?" exclaimed Dan. + +"Not ten dollars more, for this is the first he has given me. You and +father got what I ought to have had." + +"An' you never spent none on it, did you? I seen Silas shove it back +to you." + +"Yes, I've got it safe in my pocket. I'm going to keep it, too." + +"Wal, I'll bet a hoss you don't," was Dan's mental reflection. "I'd +oughter have some on it, an' if you don't give it to me without my +axin' you, I'll have it all. I'm the man of the house now, an' it's +the properest thing that I should have the handlin' of all the money +that comes in." + +Of course Dan was much too smart to say this aloud. He knew that any +threats from him would put his brother on his guard, and then he +might whistle for the ten dollars. He said no more, and the two +walked along in silence until they came to General Gordon's barn. +Just as David was going into it, he met Lester Brigham riding out of +it. Lester scowled down at him, but David did not scowl back. He was +quite willing to forget that they had ever had any difficulty and to +be friendly with Lester, if the latter wanted him to be. It is +probable, however, that he would have had different feelings, if he +had known what it was that brought Lester over to Don's house. + +David, as we have said, turned into the barn, and Dan, who had more +than his share of curiosity, would have given almost anything he +possessed to know what business he had there; but he could not go in +to see, for he dared not face Don and Bert after what he had done, so +he kept on toward home. + +David deposited his basket and bundles on the steps that led to the +loft, and making his way around the north wing of the house, knocked +at the door, which was presently opened by Bert. David asked if Don +was in, and receiving an affirmative reply, was ushered into the +library, where his friend, wearied with his day's exercise, was +taking his ease on the sofa, which had been drawn up in front of a +cheerful wood fire. David declined to accept the chair which Bert +placed for him, and opened his business at once. + +"Don," said he, "would you be willing to take that money you gave me +and keep it until I call for it?" + +"Of course I would," replied Don, readily. "You haven't paid that +grocery bill, then? Well, I wouldn't either. You are not responsible +for it." + +"I offered to pay it, but Mr. Jones wouldn't take the money. He says +my credit is good for six months." + +"Why, what has come over him all of a sudden?" said Don, who did not +know that his father had had an interview with Silas that very day. + +"I wish I knew. There's the money, and you won't let anybody have it, +except mother or me, will you?" + +"You may be sure that I will take good care of it this time. Don't +forget that bear hunt, tomorrow." + +"No. I'll be on hand bright and early. Good-by." + +David hurried out, and picking up the basket and bundles he had left +in the barn, started for home. When he got there, he was surprised to +see that Dan was at work. He had pulled off his coat, rolled up his +sleeves and with a frow and mallet in his hands, was busy splitting +out shingles. David said nothing to him, but went into the house to +put away the tea, coffee and sugar and place the articles he had +bought for his mother in a conspicuous position, so that she would be +sure to see them, the moment she entered the door. While he was thus +engaged, Dan came in smiling, and trying to look good-natured. David +was on his guard at once. + +"I'll tell you what I've made up my mind to do by you, Davy," said +Dan, "an' when you hear what it is, if you don't say I'm the best +brother you ever had, I want to know what's the reason why. I ain't +goin' agin you like I told you I was." + +"I am very glad to hear it," said David. + +"No, I ain't. I'm goin' to be pardners with you, an' I'm goin' to +give you half the money we make outen them quail. I'll give you half +what I've got hid away, too." + +"I have no claim upon that," replied David. "It belongs to Don +Gordon, and if you are honest you'll give him every cent of it." + +"I can't do it," said Dan. "Kase why, I give pap three an' a half of +it, an' spent six bits myself." + +"Then give him what you have, and tell him that you will hand him the +rest as soon as you can earn it." + +"Not by no means, I won't," said Dan, quickly. "Ten dollars ain't +nothing to him." + +"That makes no difference. It is his, and he ought to have it." + +"Wal, I'll tell you what I'll do: I'll pay him outen them fifty +dollars we're goin' to get fur them quail. An', Davy, if you'll give +me the money you've got in your pocket, I'll hide it with mine whar +nobody can't find it, and then it'll be safe." + +"It is safe now." + +"But if I go halves with you, you had oughter go halves with me. +Let's go out to them traps agin, and we kin talk it over while we're +workin'." + +"I am not going to do anything more with those traps." + +"You hain't give it up, have you? You ain't goin' to let them fifty +dollars slip through your fingers, be you?" + +"What encouragement have I to do anything after what you said this +morning? I have made other arrangements. I am going to work over at +the General's." + +David expected that his brother would be very angry when he heard +this, but if he was, he did not show it. He looked steadily at David +for a moment and then turned and walked around the corner of the +cabin out of sight. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +BRUIN'S ISLAND. + + +"That's a purty way he's got of doin' business, I do think. He's a +trifle the meanest feller I ever seed, Dave is, an' if I don't pay +him fur it afore he's a great many weeks older, I'll just play myself +out a tryin'. If me an' him works together we kin get them fifty +dollars as easy as fallin' off a log; but he can't arn 'em by +hisself, an' he shan't, nuther." + +This was the way Dan Evans talked to himself, as he trudged through +the woods with his rifle on his shoulder, after his unsuccessful +attempt to overhear what passed between his brother and Don and Bert +Gordon; or, rather, after his failure to find out what it was that +brought Don and Bert to the cabin. He _did_ overhear what passed +between them, but he did not learn anything by it. Of course that +made him angry. A good many things had happened that day to make him +angry, and he had gone off in the woods by himself to think and plan +vengeance. + +"Bein' the man of the house I've got more right to them fifty dollars +nor Dave has," thought Dan, "an' if he don't give me half of 'em, he +shan't see a cent of 'em hisself. Wouldn't I look nice loafin' around +in these yere clothes while Dave was dressed up like a gentleman an' +takin' his ease? I'll bust up them traps of his'n faster'n he kin +make 'em. I'll show him that I'm the boss of this house now that +pap's away, no matter if them Gordon fellers is a backin' on him up. +I've larned a heap by listenin'. I heard Dave tell the ole woman that +he's goin' to make three dollars a dozen outen them quail. I didn't +larn nothing this arternoon, howsomever. Them fellers must a seed me +lookin' through the cracks, kase they didn't tell him what they was +agoin' to tell him when they fust come up to the fence." + +Dan walked about for an hour or more, talking in this way to himself. +The squirrels frisked and barked all around him, but he did not seem +to hear them. He was so busy thinking over his troubles that he +scarcely knew where he was going, until at last he found himself +standing on the banks of a sluggish bayou that ran through the swamp. +The stream was wide and deep, and near the middle of it and opposite +the spot where Dan stood, was a little island thickly covered with +briers and cane. It was known among the settlers as Bruin's Island. +Dan knew the place well. Many a fine string of goggle-eyes had he +caught at the foot of the huge sycamore which grew at the lower end +of the island, and leaned over the water until its long branches +almost touched the trees on the main shore, and it was here that he +had trapped his first beaver. More than that, the island had been a +place of refuge for his father during the war. He retreated to it on +the night the levee was blown up by the Union soldiers, and spent the +most of his time there until all danger of capture was past. + +When Dan appeared upon the bank of the bayou a dark object, which was +crouching at the water's edge near the foot of the sycamore, suddenly +sprang up and glided into the bushes out of sight. Its movements were +quick and noiseless, but still they did not escape the notice of Dan, +who dropped on the instant and hid behind a fallen log that happened +to be close at hand. He did not have time to take a good look at the +object, but he saw enough of it to frighten him thoroughly. He thrust +his cocked rifle cautiously over the log, directing the muzzle toward +the sycamore, but his hand was unsteady and his face was as white as +a sheet. + +"Looked to me like a man," thought Dan, trembling in every limb, "but +in course it couldn't be; so it's one of them haunts what lives in +the General's lane." + +Dan kept his gaze directed across the bayou, and could scarcely +restrain himself from jumping up and taking to his heels when he saw +a head, covered with a torn and faded hat, raised slowly and +cautiously above the leaning trunk of the sycamore. It remained +motionless for a moment and Dan's eyes were sharp enough to see that +there was a face below the hat--a tanned and weather-beaten face, the +lower portion of which was concealed by thick, bushy whiskers. As Dan +looked his eyes began to dilate, his mouth came open, and the butt of +his rifle was gradually lowered until the muzzle pointed toward the +clouds. He was sure he saw something familiar about the face, but the +sight of it was most unexpected, and so was the sound of the voice +which reached his ears a moment later. + +"Dannie!" came the hail, in subdued tones, as if the speaker were +afraid of being overheard by some one besides the boy whom he was +addressing. + +"Pap!" cried Dan. + +[Illustration: Dan Recognizes his Father.] + +As he spoke he arose from his concealment, and the man on the other +side of the bayou--Dan was pretty certain now that it was a +man--stepped out into view, disclosing the well-known form and +features of Godfrey Evans. Dan could hardly believe his eyes, and +even Godfrey seemed a little doubtful. + +"Is that you, Dannie?" asked the latter. + +"You're just a shoutin'," was the reply. + +"Nobody ain't thar with you, I reckon," said Godfrey. + +"No, I'm all by myself. But be you sartin that's you, pap?" + +"In course I am, an' I've been a waitin' an' a watchin' fur yer. I'll +bring you over. You're an ongrateful an' ondutiful boy to leave your +poor ole pap, what's fit the Yankees an' worked so hard to bring you +up like a gentleman's son had oughter be brung up, out here in the +cane so long all by hisself." + +"Why, pap, I didn't know you was here," said Dan. + +Godfrey walked briskly along the shore until he reached a little +thicket of bushes into which he plunged out of sight. He appeared +again almost immediately, dragging behind him a small lead-colored +canoe which Dan recognized the moment he saw it. It was Don Gordon's +canoe, the one he used to pick up his dead and wounded ducks when he +was shooting over his decoys. It was a beautiful little craft, and +Dan had often wished that he could call it his own. It was one thing +that made him hate Don and Bert so cordially, and he had often told +himself that when he was ready to carry out the threats he had so +often made, that canoe should be one of the first things to suffer. +The brothers took altogether too much pleasure in it, and he wouldn't +have them rowing about the lake enjoying themselves while he was +obliged to stay ashore. The sight of it satisfied him that the man on +the opposite bank was his father, and nobody else. If he had been a +"haunt" he would not have needed a canoe to carry him across the +bayou. + +Having placed the canoe in the water Godfrey went back into the cane +after the oars--the little craft was provided with rowlocks and +propelled by oars instead of paddles--and in a few seconds more he +was on Dan's side of the bayou. The moment the canoe touched the bank +he sprang out, and if one might judge by the cordial manner in which +father and son greeted each other, they were glad to meet again. + +"I didn't never expect to feel your grip no more, pap," said Dan, who +was the first to speak, "an' I'm ridikilis proud to see you with this +yere dug-out. How came you by it, and whar did you git it?" + +"I jest took it an' welcome," answered Godfrey. "I wasn't goin' to +swim over to the island every time I wanted to go there, was I?" + +"In course not. I'm scandalous glad you tuk it; an' now I'll have a +ride in it, an' no thanks to Don Gordon nuther. Been a livin' here +ever since you've been gone?" added Dan, as he stepped into the boat +and picked up the oars. + +"Yes, an' I've been a lookin' fur you every day. Seems to me you +might a knowed where to find me, kase here's whar I hung out when the +Yanks was in the country. Hear anything about me, in the settlement?" + +"Yes, lots. Silas Jones has done been to Dave fur them eight dollars +you owe him." + +"Much good may they do him, when he gets 'em," said Godfrey, snapping +his fingers in the air. + +"Dave's goin' to pay the bill," added Dan. "I done heard him say so." + +"The ongrateful an' ondutiful scamp!" exclaimed Godfrey. "If he's got +that much money, why don't he give it to me, like he had oughter do? +I need it more'n Silas does. Hear anything else, Dannie?" + +"Yes; General Gordon says, why don't you come home an' go 'have +yourself? Nobody wouldn't pester you." + +"Does you see anything green in these yere eyes?" asked Godfrey, +looking steadily at Dan. "That would do to tell some folks, but a man +what's fit the Yanks ain't so easy fooled. I'm safe here, an' here +I'll stay, till----Hear anything else, Dannie--anything 'bout them +two city chaps, Clarence an' Marsh Gordon?" + +"O, they've gone home long ago." + +"You didn't hear nothing about them gettin' into a furse afore they +went, did you?" + +"Course I have. Everybody knows that you an' Clarence thought Don was +ole Jordan an' shet him up in the tater-hole." + +"An' sarved him right, too," exclaimed Godfrey. "I reckon he's well +paid fur cheatin' me outen that chance of making eighty thousand +dollars. I heard Clarence was robbed afore he went away," added +Godfrey, at the same time turning away his head and looking at Dan +out of the corner of his eyes. + +"I didn't hear nothing about that," said Dan. + +Godfrey drew a long breath of relief. Ever since he took up his abode +on the island he had been torturing himself with the belief that the +robbery of which he was guilty was the talk of the settlement, and +that he would be arrested for at if he should ever show himself at +the landing again. He breathed much easier to know that his fears on +this score were groundless. + +"Hear anything else, Dannie?" asked Godfrey, and his voice was so +cheerful and animated that the boy looked at him in amazement. +"What's Dave an' the ole woman doin'?" + +"That thar Dave is goin' to git rich, dog-gone it," replied Dan, in +great disgust. "He got a letter from some feller up North this +mornin' tellin' him if he would trap fifty dozen live quail fur him, +he'd pay him so't he could make three dollars a dozen on 'em. I seed +Don give him the letter, an' I heard 'em a talkin' and a laughin' +about it." + +"That's what makes me 'spise them Gordons so," said Godfrey, slapping +the side of the canoe with his open hand. "They're all the time a +boostin' Dave, an' me and you could starve fur all they keer. Now +jump out, an' we'll go up to my house an' talk about it. We'll leave +the boat here, so't it will be handy when you want to go back." + +As Godfrey spoke the bow of the canoe ran deep into the soft mud +which formed the beach on that side of the island, and the father and +son sprang out. Godfrey led the way along a narrow, winding path +which ran through the cane, and after a few minutes walking ushered +Dan into an open space in the centre of the island. Here stood the +little bark lean-to that he called his house. The cane had been +cleared away from a spot about fifteen feet square, and piled up +around the outside, so that it looked like a little breastwork. + +The lean-to was not a very imposing structure--Godfrey would much +rather sit in the sun and smoke his pipe then expend any of his +strength in providing for his comfort--but it was large enough to +shelter one man, and with a few more pieces of bark on the roof and a +roaring fire in front, it might have been made a very pleasant and +inviting camp. Just now, however, it looked cheerless enough. There +was a little armful of leaves under the roof of the lean-to and there +was a block of wood beside the fire-place, the position of which was +pointed out by a bed of ashes and cinders. The leaves served for a +bed and the block of wood for a chair; and they were all the +"furniture" that was to be seen about the camp. But Godfrey was very +well satisfied with his surroundings and Dan was delighted with them. +It must be splendid, he thought, to live there all by one's self with +nothing to worry over and no work to do. It was not even necessary +that Godfrey should chop wood for the fire, for the upper end of the +island was covered with broken logs and branches, and five minutes' +work every morning would suffice to provide him with all the fuel he +would be likely to burn during the day. + +"What a nice place you've got here, pap!" said Dan, when he had taken +a hurried survey of the camp. + +"I reckon it's about right," replied Godfrey. "I had this fur a +hidin' place while the Yanks was a scoutin' about through the +country, an' I come here now kase nobody won't think of lookin' fur +me so nigh the settlement. An' they won't stumble onto me afore I +know it, nuther. They can't git to me if they come afoot kase the +bayou'll stop 'em; an' I never heard of nobody coming up here in a +boat. Nothing bothers me 'ceptin' a bar. He comes over every night +to feed on the beech-nuts an' acorns, an' some night he'll come fur +the last time. I'll jest knock him over, and then I'll have meat +enough to last me a month. I build my fire and do my cookin' at +night, so't nobody can't see the smoke, an' that's what frightened +the bar away afore I could shoot him." + +"I've a notion to come here an' live with you, pap," said Dan. + +"'Twon't be safe," replied his father, quickly. "If you're missin' +from home folks might begin to hunt fur us, an' that's somethin' I +don't want 'em to do. 'Sides you must stay in the settlement an' help +me. I shall need things from the store now an' then, an' as I can't +go and git 'em myself, you'll have to git 'em fur me. But what was +you sayin' about Dave?" asked Godfrey, throwing himself down on one +of the piles of cane and motioning to Dan to occupy the block of +wood. + +"I was a sayin' that he's a little the meanest feller I ever seed," +replied Dan, "an' don't you say so too, pap? Kase why, he's goin' to +git fifty dollars fur them quail, an' he's goin' to give the money +all to the ole woman." + +"An' leave me to freeze an' starve out here in the cane?" exclaimed +Godfrey, with a great show of indignation. "Not by no means he won't. +If he don't mind what he's about we'll take the hul on it, Dan, me +an' you will." + +"_He_ won't get none on it, you kin bet high on that," said Dan. "I +told him I was goin' agin him, an' so I am. I'll bust his traps as +fast as I kin find 'em, an' I won't do nothin' but hunt fur 'em, day +an' night." + +"Now, haint you got no sense at all?" cried his father, so fiercely +that Dan jumped up and turned his face toward the path, as if he were +on the point of taking to his heels. + +"Wal, I wanted to go pardners with him an' he wouldn't le' me," +protested Dan. + +"What's the odds? Set down thar an' listen while somebody what knows +somethin' talks to you. What odds does it make to you if he won't go +pardners with you?" + +"Kase I want some of the money; that's the odds it makes to me." + +"Wal, you kin have it, an' you needn't do no work, nuther. I'm Dave's +pap an' your'n too, an' knows what's best fur all of us. You jest +keep still an' let Dave go on an' ketch the birds; an' when he's +ketched 'em an' got the money in his pocket, then I'll tell you what +else to do. Le' me see: fifty dozen birds at three dollars a dozen! +That's--that's jest----" + +Godfrey straightened up, locked his fingers together, rested his +elbows on his knees and looked down at the pile of ashes in the +fire-place. + +"It's a heap of money, the fust thing you know," said Dan. "It's +fifty dollars. Dave told me so." + +"Fifty gran'mothers!" exclaimed Godfrey. "Dave done said that jest to +make a fule of you. It would be fifty dollars if he got only a dollar +a dozen. If he got two it would be a hundred dollars, an' if he got +three, it would be----" + +Godfrey stopped, believing that he must have made a mistake +somewhere, and stared at Dan as if he were utterly bewildered. Dan +returned the stare with interest. "A hundred dollars!" he repeated, +slowly. "That thar Dave of our'n goin' to make a hundred dollars all +by hisself! Some on it's mine." + +"It's more'n that, Dannie," said Godfrey, who, as soon as he could +settle his mind to the task, went over his calculations again, adding +the astounding statement-- + +"An' if he gets three dollars a dozen, he'll get a hundred an' fifty +dollars for the lot." + +Dan's astonishment was so great that for a few seconds he could not +speak, and even his father looked puzzled and amazed. He was certain +that he had made no mistake in his mental arithmetic this time, and +the magnitude of David's prospective earnings fairly staggered him. +It made him angry to think of it. + +"The idee of that triflin' leetle Dave's makin' so much money," he +exclaimed, in great disgust; "an' here's me, who has worked an' +slaved fur a hul lifetime, an' I've got jest twenty dollars." + +"Eh?" cried Dan. + +Godfrey was frightened at what he had said, but he could not recall +it without exciting Dan's suspicions; so he put on a bold face and +continued:-- + +"Yes, I've got that much, an' I worked hard fur it, too. But a +hundred an' fifty dollars! We must have that when it's 'arned, +Dannie." + +"The hul on it?" + +"Every cent. I'm Dave's pap, an' the law gives me the right to his +'arnin's, an' yours, too, until you's both twenty-one years ole. Now, +Dannie, I've done a power of hard thinkin' since I've been here on +this island, an' I've got some idees in my head that will make you +look wild when you hear 'em. I didn't know jest how to carry 'em out +afore, but I do now. These yere hundred an' fifty dollars will keep +us movin' till we kin find them eighty thousand." + +"Be you goin' to look fur them agin, pap?" + +"No, I hain't, but you be." + +"Not much, I ain't," replied Dan, emphatically. + +"Who's to do it, then?" demanded his father. "I can't, kase I'm +afeared to go into the settlement even at night. You hain't goin' to +give up the money, be you? Then what'll become of your circus-hoss, +an' your painted boats, an' your fine guns what break in two in the +middle?" + +"I don't keer," answered Dan, doggedly. "I wouldn't go into that +tater-patch alone, arter dark; if I knowed it was chuck full of +yaller gold an' silver pieces." + +The savage scowl that settled on Godfrey's face, as he listened to +these words, brought Dan to his feet again in great haste. The man +was fully as angry as he looked, and it is possible he might have +said or done something not altogether to Dan's liking, had it not +been for an unlooked-for interruption that occurred just then. +Godfrey had raised his hand in the air to give emphasis to some +remark he was about to make, when he was checked by a slight +splashing in the water, accompanied by the measured clatter of oars, +as they were moved back and forth in the row-locks. This was followed +by a clear, ringing laugh, which Godfrey and his son could have +recognized anywhere, and a cheery voice said:-- + +"I'm getting tired. It is time for me to stop and rest when I begin +to catch crabs." + +There was a boat in the bayou, and Don and Bert Gordon were in it. +They were so close at hand, too, that flight was impossible. + +"I don't think there's much difference between riding on horseback +and rowing in a boat, as far as the work is concerned," said the same +voice. "I've done about all I can do to-day. There don't seem to be +any ducks in the bayou; so we'll stop here and take a breathing spell +before we go back." + +"Is thar any place in the wide world a feller could crawl into +without bein' pestered by them two oneasy chaps?" whispered Dan, +jumping up from his block of wood and looking all around, as if he +were seeking a way of escape. + +"Not a word out of you," replied Godfrey, shaking his fist at his +son. + +Following Godfrey's example, Dan threw himself behind one of the +piles of cane, and the two held their breath and listened. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +WHAT HAPPENED THERE. + + +"You're not going to get out, are you, Don?" asked Bert, and as he +was not more than four or five rods away, every word he uttered was +distinctly heard by the two listeners in the cane. + +"I want to stretch my legs a little," was Don's reply. "Come on, and +let's explore the island. You know it used to be a famous bear's den, +don't you?" + +"I should think I ought to know it, having heard father tell the +story of the animal's capture a dozen times or more. He must have +been a monster: he was so large and heavy that it was all a span of +mules could do to drag him from the shore of the lake, where he was +taken out of the boat, up to the house." + +"And didn't he make things lively before he was killed, though?" said +Don. "He destroyed nine dogs and wounded two men. I'd like to take +part in a hunt like that." + +"Well, I wouldn't. It looks gloomy in the cane, doesn't it? What +would we do if we should find a bear in there?" + +"I don't know," answered Don, with a laugh. "Our guns are loaded with +small shot, and they would hardly penetrate a bear's thick skin. If +he should come at us, I'd be a goner, sure, for I am so stiff I +couldn't run to save my life. But I don't think we'll find----Halloo! +Bert, just look here!" + +A chorus of exclamations followed, and Godfrey and Dan looked at each +other and scowled fiercely. + +"That's my canoe," said Don, and they heard the oars rattle as he +stepped into it. + +"There's no doubt about that," said Bert, in surprised and delighted +tones; "but how came it here?" + +"That's the question. The fellow who stole it took it up the bayou +and then turned it loose, having no further use for it, or else it +got away from him and drifted down here." + +"Who knows but the thief brought it here himself, and that he is on +the island now, hidden in the cane?" said Bert, lowering his voice, +but still speaking quite loud enough to make himself heard by Godfrey +and Dan. + +"I hardly think that can be possible," replied Don. "You see the bow +of the canoe was caught on this root; and that makes me think it was +brought down by the current and lodged here." + +Godfrey and Dan looked at each other again. They had taken no pains +to secure the boat when they left it, and the current had moved it +from its place on the bank and was carrying it toward the lake, when +it caught on the root where it was discovered by its lawful owner. + +"I am glad to get it again," said Don, "for I don't know what we +should have done without it. It is just the thing to chase crippled +ducks with. If I could see the man who stole it, I'd give him a piece +of my mind, I tell you." + +After that there was a pause in the conversation and the rattling of +a chain told Godfrey and Dan that the canoe was being fastened to the +stern of the boat in which the brothers had come up the bayou. Then +there was more conversation in a subdued tone of voice, and presently +a commotion in the cane indicated that Don and Bert were working +their way slowly toward the camp. Dan began to tremble and turn +white, and his father looked as though he would have been glad to run +if he had only known where to go. + +"Halloo!" exclaimed Bert, suddenly, "here we are. Come this way, Don. +I've found a path." + +"A path!" repeated his brother. "What should make a path through this +cane?" + +"I don't know, I am sure. What's this? Can you tell a bear track when +you see it?" + +"Of course I can," answered Don, and the listeners heard him pushing +his way through the cane toward the path in which his brother stood. +"But I don't call this a bear track," he added, after a moment's +pause, during which he was closely examining the footprint his +brother pointed out to him. "A barefooted man or boy has been along +here, and that track was made not more than ten minutes ago. And, +Bert," he continued, in a lower tone, "you were right about that boat +after all. Come on, now, and if the thief is here we'll have a look +at him." + +"Pap," whispered Dan, hurriedly, "they're comin' sure's you're +livin'. Le's slip around to the other side of the island, easy like, +and steal their boats afore they know what is goin' on." + +"We couldn't do it," replied his father, in the same cautious +whisper. "They'd be sure to see us. I'll fix 'em when they come nigh +enough. I'd like to shoot 'em both, to pay 'em for findin' my hidin' +place." + +"Don't do that, pap," said Dan, in great alarm. "Here they come, +an'---- Laws a massy? What's that?" + +As Dan uttered these words, a deep, hoarse, growl, so suddenly and +fiercely uttered, that it almost made his hair stand on end, sounded +close at his side. Don and Bert heard it, and they were as badly +frightened as Dan was. + +"What was that, Don?" asked Bert, in an excited whisper. "You heard +it, didn't you?" + +"I should think so," was Don's reply, and the words were followed by +the clicking of the locks of his gun. + +After that came a long pause. Don and Bert waited for the warning +growl to be repeated, and stooping down, tried to peer through the +cane in front of them, in the hope of obtaining a view of the animal, +which had been disturbed by their approach, while Dan, crouching low +in his place of concealment, looked first at his father and then +glanced timidly about, as if in momentary expectation of seeing +something frightful. He could hardly bring himself to believe that +the noise, which so greatly terrified him, had been made by his +father, but such was the fact. + +If there was a person in the world, Godfrey did not want to meet face +to face, that person was Don Gordon; and when he first became aware +that the boy was close at hand, and that he was about to explore the +island, he was greatly alarmed and utterly at a loss how to avoid +him. If Don saw him there, of course he would tell of it, and that +would set the officers of the law on his track (no evidence that +could be produced was strong enough to convince Godfrey, that he had +nothing to fear from the officers of the law) and compel him to look +for a new hiding-place. The conversation he overheard between the +brothers, regarding the capture of the bear, which had so long held +possession of the island, brought a bright idea into his mind, and he +acted upon it at the right time, too. It was the only thing that +saved him from discovery. Don was not afraid of a man, and if he had +known that Godfrey was hidden in the cane a few feet in advance of +him, he would have walked straight up to him, and accused him of +stealing his boat; but he had no desire to face a wild animal alone +and unaided, and he was in no condition to do it, either. We say +alone and unaided, because Bert would have been of no assistance to +him. Bert was a famous shot with his double-barrel, and no boy in the +settlement could show more game, after a day spent among the +waterfowl, than he could; but he was too timid and excitable to be of +any use to one placed in a situation of danger. Even the sight of a +deer dashing through the woods, or the whirr of a flock of quails as +they unexpectedly arose from the bushes at his feet, would set him to +shaking so violently that he could not shoot. + +"What do you suppose it was, Don?" asked Bert, and Godfrey did not +fail to notice that his voice trembled when he spoke. "Was it a wild +cat or a panther?" + +"O, no," replied Don. "One of those animals wouldn't warn us. He'd be +down on us before we knew he was about. I wish I had my rifle and the +free use of my legs. I'd never leave the island until I had one good +pop at him." + +A slight rustling in the cane told the listeners that Don was again +advancing slowly along the path. Dan was afraid that he had made up +his mind to risk a shot with his double-barrel, and so was Godfrey, +who uttered another growl, louder and fiercer than the first, and +rattled the cane with his hands. That was too much even for Don's +courage; and Bert was frightened almost out of his senses. + +"Look out, Don! Look out!" he exclaimed. "He is coming!" + +"Let him come," replied Don, retreating backward along the path. + +"Run! run!" entreated Bert. + +"That's quite impossible. I'm doing the best I can now. If he shows +himself I'll fill his head full of number six shot." + +Godfrey continued to growl and rattle the cane at intervals, but +there was no need of it, for Don was quite as anxious to reach his +boat and leave the island as Godfrey and Dan were to have him do so. +He retreated along the path with all the speed he could command, +holding himself ready to make as desperate a fight as he could if +circumstances should render it necessary, and presently a rattling of +oars and a splashing in the water told the listeners that he and his +brother were pushing off and making their way down the bayou. In +order to satisfy himself on this point, Godfrey crawled over the pile +of cane, behind which he had been concealed and moved quickly, but +noiselessly along the path, closely followed by Dan. On reaching the +edge of the cane they looked down the stream and saw the brothers +twenty rods away in their boat, Bert tugging at the oars as if his +life depended on his exertions. The danger of discovery was over for +the present, but how were Dan and his father to leave the island now +without swimming? Don had taken his canoe away with him. + +"If I could have my way with them two fellers they'd never trouble +nobody else," exclaimed Godfrey, shaking his fist at the departing +boat. "Whar be I goin' to hide now, I'd like to know?" + +"Stay here," replied Dan, "an' if they come back to pester you, growl +'em off 'n the island like you done this time." + +"An' git a bullet into me fur my pains?" returned his father. "No, +sar. Don'll be up here agin in the mornin', sartin, an' he'll have +his rifle with him, too; but I won't be here to stand afore it, kase +I've seed him shoot too ofter. He kin jest beat the hind sights off'n +you, any day in the week." + +"Whoop!" cried Dan, jumping up and knocking his heels together. + +"I don't see what bring them two oneasy chaps up here, nohow," said +Godfrey, taking no notice of the boy's threatening attitude. "I never +knowed them or anybody else to come up the bayou in a small boat +afore, 'ceptin' when that bar was killed here. That was an amazin' +smart trick of mine, Dannie. Howsomever, we hain't got no more time +to talk. I'm goin' to give you five dollars, Dannie, an' I want you +to go to the landin' an' spend it fur me. Get me a pair of +shoes--number 'levens, you know--an' two pair stockin's, an' spend +the heft of the rest fur tobacker. Then when it comes dark, I want +you to get that canoe agin, an' bring it up here with the things you +buy at the store." + +"How am I goin' to git the canoe?" + +"Take it an' welcome, like I did." + +Dan shrugged his shoulders, and his father, believing from the +expression on his face that he was about to refuse to undertake the +task, made haste to add:-- + +"An' when you come, Dannie, I'll tell you how we're goin' to work it +to git them hundred and fifty dollars that Dave's goin' to 'arn by +trappin' them birds fur that feller up North. I have a right to it, +kase I'm his pap: an' when I get it, I'll give you half--that is, if +you do right by me while I'm hidin' here. I'll give you half that +bar'l, too, when we find it. Then you kin have your circus hoss an' +all your other nice things, can't you?" added Godfrey, playfully +poking his son in the ribs. + +Dan's face relaxed a little, but his father's affected enthusiasm was +not as contagious now as it was when the subject of the buried +treasure was first brought up for discussion. Godfrey had no +intention of renewing his efforts to find the barrel--he could not +have been hired to go into that potato-patch after what had happened +there--but it was well enough, he thought, to hold it up to Dan as an +inducement. Besides, if he could get the boy interested in the matter +again, and induce him to prosecute the search, and Dan should, by any +accident, stumble upon the barrel, so much the better for himself. +The great desire of his life would be attained. He would be rich, and +that, too, without work. + +"Why can't you steal the canoe yourself?" asked Dan. + +"Kase I've got to pack up an' get ready to leave here; that's why. +It'll take me from now till the time you come back to get all my +traps together." + +Dan hurriedly made a mental inventory of the valuables his father +possessed and which he had seen in the camp, and the result showed +one rifle, one powder-horn and one bullet-pouch. All Godfrey had +besides he carried on his back. It certainly would not take him three +or four hours to gather these few articles together. + +"Pap's mighty 'feared that he'll do something he can make somebody +else do fur him," thought the boy. "But he needn't think he's goin' +to get me into a furse. I ain't agoin' to steal no canoe fur nobody." + +"An' since it's you," added Godfrey, seeing that Dan did not readily +fall in with his plans, "I'll give you a dollar of my hard-'arned +money for doin' the job." + +"Wal, now that sounds like business," exclaimed Dan, brightening up. +"Whar's the money, an' how am I goin' to get off'n the island?" + +"The money's safe, and I'll bring it to you in a minute," replied +Godfrey. "You stay here till I come back. As fur gettin' acrosst the +bayou, that's easy done. Thar's plenty of drift wood at the upper end +of the island, an' you kin get on a log an' pole yourself over. When +you get home, Dannie, make friends with Dave the fust thing you do, +an' tell him you was only foolin' when you said you was goin' agin +him. Help him every way you kin, an' when he gits the money we'll +show our hands." + +So saying, Godfrey walked down the path out of sight. After a few +minutes' absence, he came back and handed Dan the money of which he +had spoken, a five-dollar bill to be expended for himself at the +store, and a one-dollar bill to pay Dan for stealing the canoe. When +Dan had put them both carefully away in his pocket, he went back to +the camp after his rifle, and then followed his father through the +cane toward the upper end of the island. They found an abundance of +drift wood there, and from it selected two small logs of nearly the +same size and length. By fastening these together with green withes, +a raft was made, which was sufficiently buoyant to carry Dan in +safety to the main land. When it was completed, the boy swung his +rifle over his shoulder by a piece of stout twine he happened to have +in his pocket, and taking the pole his father handed him, pushed off +into the stream. + +Poling the raft was harder work than rowing the canoe, and Dan's +progress was necessarily slow; but he accomplished the journey at +last, and after waving his hand to his father, disappeared in the +bushes. He took a straight course for the landing and after a little +more than an hour's rapid walking, found himself in Silas Jones's +store. He was greatly surprised at something he saw when he got +there, and so bewildered by it that he forgot all about the money he +had in his pocket, and the stockings, shoes and tobacco of which his +father stood so much in need. There was David making the most +extravagant purchases, and there was Silas bowing and smiling and +acting as politely to him as he ever did to his richest customers. If +Dan was astonished at this, he was still more astonished, when David +threw down a ten-dollar bill and the grocer pushed it back to him +with the remark, that his credit was good for six months. Dan could +not imagine how David had managed to obtain possession of so much +money, and when he found out, as he did when he and his brother were +on their way home, he straightway went to work to think up some plan +by which he might get it into his own hands. This problem and a +bright idea, which suddenly suggested itself to him, occupied his +mind during the walk; and shortly after parting from his brother at +General Gordon's barn, Dan hit upon a second idea, which made his +usually gloomy face brighten wonderfully while he thought about it. + +Dan's first duty was to rectify his mistake of the morning, and make +his brother understand that he had repented of the determination he +had made to work against him, and that he was going to do all he +could to assist him. He tried to do this, as we know, but did not +succeed, for to his great surprise and sorrow David announced that he +was not going to waste any more time in building traps for Dan to +break up, and this led the latter to believe that nothing more was to +be done toward catching the quails. He walked slowly around the +cabin, after a short interview with his brother, and the first thing +he saw on which to vent his rage was Don's pointer, which came +frisking out of his kennel and wagging his tail by way of greeting, +only to be sent yelping back again by a vicious kick from Dan's foot. + +"I'm jest a hundred an' fifty dollars outen pocket an' so is pap," +soliloquized Dan, almost ready to cry with vexation when he thought +of the magnificent prize which had slipped through his fingers. "A +hundred an' fifty dollars! My circus hoss an' fine gun an' straw hat +an' shiny boots is all up a holler stump, dog-gone my buttons, an' +that thar's jest what's the matter of me. An' what makes it wusser +is, I lost 'em by bein' a fule," added Dan, stamping his bare feet +furiously upon the ground. + +Just then a lively, cheerful whistle sounded from the inside of the +cabin where David was busy arranging his purchases. Things were +taking a turn for the better with him now, and he whistled for the +same reason that a bird sings--because he was happy. + +"If I could only think up some way to make that thar mean Dave feel +as bad as I do, how quick I'd jump at it! I wish pap was here. He'd +tell me how. He's as jolly as a mud-turtle on a dry log on a sunshiny +day, Dave is, while I---- Whoop!" yelled Dan, jumping up and striking +his heels together in his rage. "Howsomever, I'll have them ten +dollars afore I take a wink of sleep this blessed night----" + +Here Dan stopped and looked steadily at the pointer for a few +minutes. Then he slapped his knee with his open hand, thrust both +arms up to the elbows in his pockets and walked up and down the yard, +smiling and shaking his head as if he were thinking about something +that afforded him the greatest satisfaction. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +DOGS IN THE MANGER. + + +David would not have been as happy as he was if he had known all that +was going on in the settlement. As it happened, his father and +brother were not the only ones he had to fear. These two had an eye +on the money he expected to earn by trapping the quails, and for +that reason they were not disposed to interfere with him until his +work was all done and he had reaped the reward of it; but there +were two others who had suddenly made up their minds that it was +unsportsmanlike to trap birds and that it should not be done if they +could prevent it. They were Lester Brigham and his particular friend +and crony--almost the only one he had in the settlement, in fact--Bob +Owens. + +Bob lived about two miles from General Gordon's, and might have made +one of the select little company of fellows with whom Don and Bert +delighted to associate, if he had been so inclined. But he was much +like Dan Evans in a good many respects, and had been guilty of so +many mean actions that he had driven almost all his friends away from +him. He rode over to the General's about twice each week, and while +he was there he was treated as civilly and kindly as every other +visitor was: but the brothers never returned his visits, and would +have been much better satisfied if Bob had stayed at home. + +These two boys, Lester and Bob, were determined that David should not +earn the hundred and fifty dollars if they could help it, and they +knew that by annoying him in every possible way, they would annoy +Don and Bert, too: and that was really what they wanted to do. What +reason had they for wishing to annoy Don and Bert? No good reason. +Did you ever see a youth who was popular among his fellows, and who +was liked by almost everybody, both old and young, who did not have +at least one enemy in some sneaking boy, who would gladly injure him +by every means in his power? Lester and Bob were jealous of Don and +Bert, that was the secret of the matter; and more than that, they +were disappointed applicants for the very contract which Don had +secured for David. + +Bob regularly borrowed and read the "_Rod and Gun_," and when his eye +fell upon the advertisement calling for fifty dozen live quails, he +thought he saw a chance to make a goodly sum of pocket money, and +hurried off to lay the matter before his friend Lester, proposing +that they should go into partnership and divide the profits. Of +course Lester entered heartily into the scheme. He knew nothing about +building and setting traps, but Bob did, and when they had discussed +the matter and calculated their chances for success, they told each +other that in two weeks' time the required number of birds would be +on their way up the river. That very day Bob addressed a letter to +the advertiser, and as soon as it was sent off he and Lester went to +work on the traps. + +It is hardly necessary to say that they lived in a fever of +excitement and suspense after that, and anxiously awaited an answer +from the gentleman who wanted the quails. The mail was brought in by +the carrier from the county seat, on Wednesday and Friday afternoons, +and Bob and Lester made it a point to be on hand when the letters +were distributed. One Wednesday, about two weeks after the letter +applying for the order was mailed, Bob went down to the post-office +alone, and the first person he met there was Bert Gordon. They leaned +against the counter and talked while the mail was being put into the +boxes, and when the pigeon-hole was opened, the postmaster handed +each of them a good-sized bundle of letters and papers, which +they began to stow away in their pockets, glancing hastily at the +addresses as they did so. It happened that each of them found a +letter in his bundle, which attracted his attention, and, as if moved +by a common impulse, they walked toward opposite ends of the counter +to read them. + +The letter Bert found was addressed to Don; but he was pretty certain +he could tell where it came from, and knowing that his brother +wouldn't care--there were no secrets between them, now--he opened and +read it. He was entirely satisfied with its contents, but the other +boy was not so well satisfied with the contents of his. When Bert +picked up his riding-whip and turned to leave the store, he saw Bob +leaning against the counter, mechanically folding his letter, while +his eyes were fastened upon the floor, at which he was scowling +savagely. + +"What's the matter?" asked Bert. "No bad news, I hope." + +"Well, it is bad news," replied Bob, so snappishly, that Bert was +sorry that he had spoken to him at all. "You see, I found an +advertisement in one of your father's papers, asking for live quails. +I wrote to the man that I could furnish them, and I have just +received an answer from him, stating that he has already sent +the order to another party, and one who lives in my immediate +neighborhood. What's the matter with you?" exclaimed Bob, as Bert +broke out into a cheery laugh. + +"When did you write to him?" asked Bert. + +"On the very day I borrowed the paper." + +"Well, Don was just three days ahead of you. I've got the order in my +pocket." + +"What do you and Don want to go into the trapping business for?" +asked Bob, with ill-concealed disgust. "You don't need the money." + +"Neither do you," replied Bert. + +"Yes, I do. I intended to buy a new shot-gun with it. I am almost the +only decent fellow in the settlement who doesn't own a breech-loader. +I have racked my brain for months, to think up some way to earn money +enough to get one, and when I am just about to accomplish my object, +you and Don have to jump up and rob me of the chance. The man tells +me that he would be glad to give me the contract, if he hadn't given +it to you. I've a good notion to slap you over." + +"It isn't for us," replied Bert. "It is for Dave Evans; and I think +you will acknowledge that he needs the money if anybody does." + +"Dave Evans!" sneered Bob. + +"Yes; and he needs clothes and food more than you need a new +shot-gun." + +"I guess I know what I want and how much I want it," retorted Bob. +"I'm to be shoved aside to give place to that lazy ragamuffin, am I? +If I don't make you wish that you had kept your nose out of my +business, I'm a Dutchman." + +Bert did not wait to hear all of this speech. Seeing that Bob was +getting angrier every minute, and that his rage was likely to get the +better of him, he drew on his gloves, mounted his pony and set out +for home. Bob followed a quarter of a mile or so in his rear, and +once or twice he whipped up his horse and closed in on Bert as if he +had made up his mind to carry out his threat of slapping him over. +But every time he did so a sturdy, broad-shouldered figure, with a +face that looked wonderfully like Don Gordon's, seemed to come +between him and the unconscious object of his pursuit, and then +Bob would rein in his horse and let Bert get farther ahead of him. +Presently Bob came to a road running at right angles with the one +he was following, and there he stopped, for he saw Lester Brigham +approaching at a full gallop. The latter was by his side in a few +seconds, and his first question was:-- + +"Been to the post-office?" + +"I have, and there's the letter on which I built so many hopes," +replied Bob, handing out the document which he had crumpled into a +little round ball. "We were too late. The order has been given to +that meddlesome fellow, Don." + +Lester looked first at his companion, then at Bert, who was now +almost out of sight, and began to gather up his reins. + +"You'd better not do it, unless you want to feel the weight of his +brother's arm," said Bob, who seemed to read the thoughts that were +passing through Lester's mind. "I gave him a good going-over, and +told him I had a notion to knock him down." + +"Why didn't you do it?" exclaimed Lester. "I'd have backed you +against Don or anybody else." + +"Haw! haw!" laughed Bob. "I shall want _good_ backing before I +willingly raise a row in that quarter, I tell you." + +"What do you mean by that?" demanded Lester. + +"O, I was just joking, of course. But what's to be done about this +business? Don got the contract for Dave Evans, and I want to know if +we are to be kicked out of the way to make room for him." + +Lester did not reply at once. He did not feel very highly flattered +by the low estimate Bob seemed to put upon him as a "backer" in case +of trouble with Don Gordon, and while he was trying to make up his +mind whether he ought to let it pass or get sulky over it, he was +unfolding and smoothing out the letter he held in his hand. When he +had made himself master of its contents, he said:-- + +"You come over and stay with me to-night, and we'll put our heads +together and see what we can make of this. I must go down to the +store now, and I'll meet you here in half an hour. That will give +you time enough to go home and speak to your folks." + +Bob spent the night at Lester's house, and it was during the long +conversation they had before they went to sleep, that they made up +their minds that it was a mean piece of business to trap quails, and +that nobody but a miserable pot-hunter would do it. They adopted the +dog-in-the-manger policy at once. If they could not trap the birds, +nobody should; and that was about all they could decide on just then. + +The next morning after breakfast they mounted their horses and rode +in company, until they came to the lane that led to Bob's home and +there they parted, Lester directing his course down the main road +toward the cabin in which David Evans lived. He met David in the +road, as we know, and laid down the law to him in pretty strong +language; but strange enough the latter could not be coaxed or +frightened into promising that he would give up his chance of +earning a hundred and fifty dollars. + +Lester was in a towering passion when he rode away after his +conversation with David. Lashing his horse into a run, he turned into +the first road he came to, and after a two-mile gallop, drew rein in +front of the double log-house in which Bob Owens lived. There was an +empty wagon-shed on the opposite side of the road, and there he found +Bob, standing with his hands in his pockets, and gazing ruefully +at the pile of traps upon which he and Lester had worked so +industriously, and which he had hoped would bring them in a nice +little sum of spending money. + +"Well, did you see him?" asked Bob, as his friend rode up to the shed +and swung himself out of the saddle. + +"I did," was the reply, "and he was as defiant as you please. He was +downright insolent." + +"These white trash are as impudent as the niggers," said Bob, "and no +one who has the least respect for himself will have anything to do +with them. I used to think that Don Gordon was something of an +aristocrat, but now I know better." + +"I wish I had given him a good cowhiding," continued Lester, who did +not think it worth while to state that he had been on the point of +attempting that very thing, but had thought better of it when he saw +how resolutely David stood his ground. "But never mind. We'll get +even with him. We'll touch his pocket, and that will hurt him worse +than a whipping. It will hurt the Gordons, too." + +"Then he wouldn't promise to give up the idea of catching them +quails? I am sorry, for if we could only frighten him off the track, +we would write to that man up North telling him that the party with +whom he made his contract wasn't able to fill it, but we could catch +all the birds he wants in two weeks." + +"That's a good idea--a splendid idea!" exclaimed Lester; "and perhaps +we'll do it any how, if the plan I have thought of doesn't prove +successful." + +Lester then went on to repeat the conversation he had had with David, +as nearly as he could recall it, and wound up by saying:-- + +"I told him that we were going to start a Sportsman's Club among the +fellows, and that after we got fairly going, our first hard work +should be to break up this practice of trapping birds. Of course that +wasn't true--I just happened to think of it while I was talking to +him--but why can't we make it true? If all the boys will join in with +us, I'd like to see him do any trapping this winter." + +"But who can we get to go in with us?" + +"We'll ask Don and Bert the first thing." + +"Nary time," exclaimed Bob, quickly. "If they are the sort you're +going to get to join your club, you may just count me out. I don't +like them." + +"You like them just as well as I do; but we have an object to gain, +and we mustn't allow our personal feelings to stand in our way." + +"Do you suppose Don would join such a club after getting Dave the +job?" + +"Perhaps he would. He likes to be first in everything, doesn't he?" + +"I should say so," replied Bob, in great disgust. "I never saw a +fellow try to shove himself ahead as that Don Gordon does." + +"Well, we'll flatter him by offering to make him President of the +club; and we'll promise to make Bert Vice or Secretary." + +"I'll not vote for either of them." + +"Yes, you will. We want to get them on our side; for if they promise +to go in with us every boy in the settlement will do the same." + +"That's what makes me so mad every time I think of those Gordons," +exclaimed Bob, spitefully throwing down a stick which he had been +cutting with his knife. "Every fellow about here, except you and me, +is ready to hang on to their coat tails and do just what they do. One +would think by the way they act that they belonged to some royal +family. They don't notice me at all. They've had a crowd of boys +in that shooting-box of theirs every spring and fall since I can +remember, and I have never had an invitation to go there yet. They +take along a nigger to cook for them, and have a high old time +shooting over their decoys; but the first thing they know they'll +find that shanty missing some fine morning. I'll set fire to it." + +"Don't say that out loud," said Lester, quickly, at the same time +extending his hand to his companion, as if to show that what he had +said met his own views exactly. "Don't so much as hint it to a living +person. We'll give them a chance to make friends with us if they want +to, and if they don't, let them take the consequences. But we can +talk about that some other time. What do you say to getting up a +Sportsman's Club?" + +Bob did not know what to say, for he had never heard of such a thing +until he became acquainted with Lester. The latter explained the +objects of such organizations as well as he could, and after some +debate they crossed over to the house, intending to go into Bob's +room and draw up a constitution for the government of the proposed +society. On the way Bob suddenly thought of something. + +"You and I want to earn this money, don't we?" said he. "That's what +we're working for, isn't it? Well, now, if we put a stop to trapping, +how are we going to do it?" + +"This is the way we're going to do it: we'll drive Dave Evans off the +track first. When that is done, we'll tell that man up North that we +are the only one's here who can fill his order. Then we'll go quietly +to work and catch our birds, saying nothing to nobody about it, and +when we have trapped all we want, we'll ship them off." + +"But somebody will see us when we are putting them on the boat." + +"No matter for that. The mischief will be done, and we'll see how Don +and Dave will help themselves. We can afford to be indifferent to +them when we have seventy-five dollars apiece in our pockets, can't +we?" + +"Lester, you're a brick!" exclaimed Bob. "I never could have thought +up such a plot. I'll have my gun after all." + +"Of course you will." + +"And what will become of the club?" + +"We don't care what becomes of it. Having served our purpose, it can +go to smash and welcome. Now will you vote for Don and Bert?" + +"I'll be only too glad to get the chance. But you'll have to manage +the thing, Lester." + +"I'll do that. All I ask of you is to talk the matter up among the +boys, that is, if Don and Bert agree to join us, and put in your vote +when the time comes." + +The two friends spent the best part of the day in Bob's room, drawing +up the constitution that was to govern their society. Lester, who did +all the writing, had never seen a document of the kind, and having +nothing to guide him he made rather poor work of it. He had read a +few extracts from game laws, and remembered that Greek and Latin +names were used therein. He could recall some of these names, and he +put them in as they occurred to him, and talked about them so glibly, +and appeared to be so thoroughly posted in natural history that +Bob was greatly astonished. Of course there was a clause in the +instrument prohibiting pot-hunting and the snaring of birds, and that +was as strong as language could make it. The work being done at last +to the satisfaction of both the boys, Lester mounted his horse and +galloped away in the direction of Don Gordon's home. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +NATURAL HISTORY. + + +Lester Brigham was not at all intimate with Don and Bert. The +brothers, as in duty bound, called upon him when he first arrived in +the settlement, and a few days afterward Lester rode over and took +dinner with them; and that was the last of their visiting. The boys +could see nothing to admire in one another. Don and Bert were a +little too "high-toned;" in other words, they were young gentlemen, +and such fellows did not suit Lester, who preferred to associate with +Bob Owens and a few others like him. Lester had been a leader among +his city schoolmates, and he expected to occupy the same position +among the boys about Rochdale; but before he had been many weeks in +the settlement he found that there were some fellows there who knew +just as much as he did, who rode horses and wore clothes as good as +his own, and who had some very decided opinions and were in the habit +of thinking for themselves. They wouldn't "cotton" to him even if he +was from the city, and so Lester made friends with those whom he +regarded as his inferiors in every way. + +Lester was not at all pleased with the task he had set himself on +this particular day. He never felt easy in Don's presence and Bert's, +and nothing but the hope of compelling David to give up his contract +and thus leave the way clear for Bob and himself, would have induced +him to call upon them. He rode slowly in order to postpone the +interview as long as he could, but the General's barn was reached at +last, and the hostler, who came forward to take his nag, told him +that Don and Bert had just gone into the house. The latter opened the +door in response to his knock, and Lester knew by the way he looked +at him that he was very much surprised to see him. But he welcomed +him very cordially, and conducted him into the library, where Don was +lying upon the sofa. + +"That night in the potato cellar was a serious matter for you, wasn't +it?" said the visitor, after the greeting was over and he had seated +himself in the chair which Bert placed in front of the fire. "Haven't +you been able to take any exercise at all yet?" + +"O, yes; I've been out all day. I've had almost too much exercise, +and that is what puts me here on the sofa." + +"We've had some excitement, too," added Bert. + +"Yes. We went up the bayou to see if the ducks had begun to come in +any yet, and we found a bear on Bruin's Island." + +"Did you shoot him?" + +"No. He gave us notice to clear out and we were only too glad to do +so. Such growls _I_ never heard before." + +"One's nerves do shake a little under such circumstances, that is, if +he is not accustomed to shooting large game," said Lester, loftily. +"You ought to have had me there. Perhaps I'll go up some day and pay +my respects to him." + +Don, who thought this a splendid opportunity to test Lester's +courage, was on the very point of telling him that he and Bert were +going up there the next day to see if they could find the animal, and +that they would be glad to have his assistance; but on second thought +he concluded that he would say nothing about it. He expected to have +some sport as well as some excitement during the trip, and he didn't +want his day's enjoyment spoiled by any such fellow as Lester +Brigham. + +"I came over to see you two boys on business," continued the visitor, +drawing an official envelope from his pocket. "We talk of getting up +a Sportsman's Club here in the settlement: will you join it?" + +"Who are talking of getting it up, and what is the object of it?" +asked Don. + +"All the boys are talking of it. One object is to bring the young +sportsmen of the neighborhood into more intimate relations, and +another is to protect the game. Perhaps I can give you no better idea +of the proposed organization than by reading this constitution, which +will be acted upon by the club at its first meeting." + +As Lester said this he looked from one to the other of the brothers, +and receiving a nod from each which signified that they were ready to +listen, he drew out the document of which he had spoken, and +proceeded to read it in his best style. He glanced at his auditors +occasionally while he was reading the paper, and when he came to a +certain paragraph, the one upon which he and Bob had expended the +most time and thought, he told himself that he had certainly made an +impression, for Bert looked bewildered and Don straightened up, drew +a note-book from his pocket and began making entries therein with a +lead-pencil. The paragraph read as follows: + +"The great object of the club being to put down pot-hunters and +poachers, and stop the practice, which is so common, of trapping game +and shipping it out of the country, it is hereby + +"_Resolved_, that on and after the date of the adoption of this +constitution, it shall be unlawful for any person to take by +trapping, at any season of the year, or on any lands, whether private +in their own occupation, public or waste, any of the game animals and +birds hereinafter described, to wit: pheasant (_T. Scolopax_); +partridge (_Picus Imperialis_); rabbit (_Ortyx Virgiana_); and red +deer (_Canis Lupus_). The penalty for disobedience shall be a fine of +ten dollars for the first offence, twenty for the second, thirty for +the third, and so on; the fines to be sued and recovered before any +justice of the peace in the county, and to be divided in equal parts +between the informer and the poor; and in default of payment the +offender shall be imprisoned for ten days in the county jail." + +When the document was finished, Don asked him to read this clause +over again. He complied with the request, and as he folded the paper +very deliberately waited for his auditors to say a word of +commendation; but as they didn't do it, he said it himself. + +"Now, I drew up that instrument, and I think it is just about right," +said he, complacently. "It is nothing but the truth, if I do say it +myself, that there is not another fellow in the settlement who could +have done it. Of course it will be open to amendments, but I don't +see how or where it could be improved. It covers all the ground, +doesn't it?' + +"It covers a good deal, and especially the article you read twice," +replied Don. "But I can't join such an organization as that. I'm a +pot-hunter myself. I never went hunting yet, without I intended to +shoot something for the table." + +"But you are not a poacher." + +"I don't know about that. I hunt in every field and piece of woods I +find, no matter who owns them." + +"Perhaps I had better change that," said Lester, after thinking a +moment, "and say market-shooters instead of pot-hunters." + +"There are no such things as market-shooters in the county." + +"But there are market-trappers," said Lester. "There are persons +here, who are catching quails and shipping them out of the state." + +"Yes, there is one who thinks of going into the business, and I got +him the job. It wouldn't look very well for me to turn around now and +tell him that he must not do it." + +"You could say to him that you have had reason to change your mind +lately, and that you know it isn't right to do such things." + +"But I haven't changed my mind." + +"You ought to. The first thing you know there will be no birds for +you and me to shoot." + +"I'll risk that. You may trap two hundred dozen if you want to, and +send them out of the county, and when you have done it, I will go out +any morning with my pointer and shoot birds enough for breakfast. +I'll leave more in the fields, too, than you can bag in six months," +added Don, and Bert saw the point he was trying to make, if Lester +did not. "Besides, what right have I to tell Dave what he shall do +and what he shall not do? He'd laugh at me." + +"Well, he wouldn't do it more than once. A few days in the calaboose +would bring him to his senses." + +"Who would put him there?" + +"The club would." + +"Where's the club's authority for such a proceeding?" + +Lester lifted the constitution and tapped it with his forefinger by +way of reply. + +"I think I had better have nothing to do with it," said Don, who +could scarcely refrain from laughing outright. + +"We intend to make you our president," said Lester. + +"I am obliged to you," replied Don, but still he did not take any +more interest in the Sportsman's Club than he had done before. He did +not snap up the bait thus thrown out, as Lester hoped he would. He +was not to be bought, even by the promise of office. Lester saw that, +and arose to take his leave. + +"Well, think it over," said he. "Sleep on it for a few nights, and if +at any time you decide to go in with us, just let me know. Good +evening!" + +"I'll do so," answered Don. "Good evening!" + +Lester bowed himself out of the room and Bert accompanied him to the +door. The first question the latter asked when he came back was:-- + +"Is there a beast or a bird in the world whose Latin name is +canis-lupus?" + +Don threw himself back upon the sofa and laughed until the room rang +again. "Is there a beast or a bird in the world whose English name is +dog-wolf?" he asked, as soon as he could speak. "I did give Lester +credit for a little common sense and a little knowledge, but I +declare he possesses neither. It beats the world how he has got +things mixed. Just listen to this," added Don, consulting his +note-book. "He speaks of a pheasant and calls it _T. Scolopax_. Now +_Scolopax_ is a snipe. He probably meant ruffed grouse, and should +have called it _Tetrao Umbellus_. He speaks of a partridge when he +means quail, or more properly Bob White, there being no quails on +this side the Atlantic----" + +"Why do people call them quails then?" asked Bert. + +"The name was given to them by our forefathers, because they +resembled the European quail. There is no pheasant in America either; +but our grouse looked like one, and so they gave it that name, Lester +calls a quail _Pious Imperialis_. Now that's an imperial +woodpecker--that big black fellow with a red topknot that we +sometimes see when we are hunting. He used to be called +cock-of-the-woods, but the name was twisted around until it became +woodcock, and some people believe that he is the gamey little bird we +so much delight to shoot and eat. But they belong to different +orders, one being a climber and the other a wader. Lester speaks of a +rabbit, not knowing that there is no such thing as a wild rabbit in +our country, and calls it _Ortyx Virgiana_, when he should have +called it _Lepus Virginianus_, the name he uses being the one by +which our quail is known to ornithologists. A deer, which he calls a +dog-wolf, is _Cervus Virginianus_. O, he's a naturalist as well as a +sportsman," shouted Don, as he laid back upon the sofa and laughed +until his sides ached. + +"Then he didn't get one of the names right?" + +"Not a single one. After all, his ignorance on these points is not so +astonishing, for everybody is liable to make mistakes; but that any +boy living in this day and age should imagine that, by simply getting +up a club and adopting a constitution, he could imprison or fine +another boy because he didn't do just to suit him, is too ridiculous +to be believed. That particular paragraph was probably copied after +some old game law Lester read years ago; but he ought to know that +before a sportsman's club, or any other organization, can have +authority to prosecute persons for trapping birds and sending them +away, there must first be a law passed prohibiting such trapping and +sending away; and there's no such law in this state. It doesn't seem +possible that he could have been in earnest." + +But Lester was in earnest for all that--so very much in earnest that +he was willing to run a great risk in order to punish Don for +refusing to join his society. Of course he was angry. He and Bob had +felt sure of obtaining the contract, had laid many plans for the +spending of the money after it was earned, and it was very provoking +to find that their scheme had been defeated, and that they were to be +pushed aside for the sake of such a fellow as David Evans. Lester was +sorry now that he had not given David a good thrashing when he met +him in the road that morning, and told himself that he would do it +the very next time he put eyes on him and risk the consequences. The +thought had scarcely passed through his mind when the opportunity was +presented. He met David coming along the road in company with his +brother Dan. David did not seem to remember that any sharp words had +passed between Lester and himself, for he looked as cheerful and +smiling as usual, and, following the custom of the country, bowed to +the horseman as he rode past. Lester did not return the bow, and +neither did he dismount to give David the promised thrashing. He was +afraid to attempt it; but, coward-like, he had to take vengeance upon +something, and so he hit his horse a savage cut with his riding-whip. + +"Dave can afford to be polite and good-natured," thought Lester, as +he went flying down the road. "He is rejoicing over his success and +my failure; but if he only knew it, this thing isn't settled yet. +I'll write to that man to-night, telling him, that the parties to +whom he gave the contract can't catch the birds, and then Bob and I +will go to work and make it true. If we don't earn that money, nobody +shall. As for those stuck-up Gordons--I'll show them how I'll get +even with them." + +The spirited animal on which he was mounted made short work of the +two miles that lay between Don's home and Bob's, and in a few minutes +Lester dismounted in front of the wagon-shed, where his crony was +waiting for him. + +"I've had no luck at all," said he, in reply to Bob's inquiring look. +"I might as well have stayed at home. Don says he can't join a club +of this kind, because, having got David the job of trapping the +quails, he can't go back on him. He says he's a poacher and +pot-hunter himself; and what surprised me was, he did not seem to be +at all ashamed of it." + +"Of course he wasn't ashamed," said Bob. "He thinks that everything +he and his pale-faced brother do is just right. Did he say anything +about what passed between Bert and myself at the post-office?" + +"Not a word." + +"I was afraid he would," said Bob, drawing a long breath of relief, +"for he knows that you and I are friends." + +Yes, Don knew that, but there were two good reasons why he had not +spoken to Lester about Bob's threat of slapping Bert over. In the +first place, he was not aware that Bob had made any such threat. Bert +was one of the few boys we have met, who did not believe in telling +everything he knew. Do you know such a boy among your companions? If +you do, you know one whom nobody is afraid to trust. Bert wanted to +live in peace, and thought it a good plan to quell disturbances, +instead of helping them along. He knew that if he told his brother +what had happened in the post-office, there would be a fight, the +very first time Don and Bob met, and Bert didn't believe in fighting. +But even if Don had known all about it, he would not have said +anything to Lester. He would have waited until he met Bob, and then +he would have used some pretty strong arguments, and driven them home +by the aid of his fist. How much trouble might be avoided, if there +were a few more boys like Bert Gordon in the world! + +"I am not sorry I went down there," continued Lester, "for I had the +satisfaction of showing those conceited fellows that there are some +boys in the settlement besides themselves who know a thing or two. I +read the constitution to them, and it would have made you laugh to +see them open their eyes. Bert was so astonished that he couldn't say +a word, and Don never took his gaze off my face while I was reading. +When I got through he asked me to read that clause with the Latin and +Greek in it over again, so that he could copy the names in his +note-book. He'll learn them by heart, and use them some time in +conversation and so get the reputation of being a very smart and a +very learned boy. If he does it in your presence, I want you to let +folks know that he is showing off on the strength of _my_ brains. I +don't suppose the ignoramus ever knew before----" + +"Well, who cares whether he did or not?" exclaimed Bob, impatiently. +"That's a matter that doesn't interest me. Is Dave Evans going to +make that hundred and fifty dollars and cheat me out of a new +shot-gun? That's what I want to know!" + +"Of course he isn't," replied Lester. "We can't stop him by the aid +of the Sportsman's Club, and so we will stop him ourselves without +the aid of anybody. Let him go to work and set his traps, and we'll +see how many birds he will take out of them. We'll rob every one we +can find and keep the quail ourselves. In that way we may be able to +make up the fifty dozen without setting any of our own traps. We'll +write to that man, as you suggested, and when Dave finds he can't +catch any birds, he'll get discouraged and leave us a clear field. +But first I want to touch up Don and Bert Gordon a little to pay them +for the way they treated me this evening. That shooting-box shall be +laid in ashes this very night. I expected an invitation to shoot +there last spring, but I didn't get it, and now I am determined that +they shall never ask anybody there. What do you say?" + +"I say, I'm your man," replied Bob. + +And so the thing was settled. Lester put his horse in the barn, went +in to supper, which was announced in a few minutes (Bob found +opportunity before he sat down to the table to purloin a box of +matches, which he put carefully away in his pocket), and when the +meal was over, the two boys went back to the wagon-shed, where they +sat and talked until it began to grow dark. Then Bob brought a couple +of paddles out of the corner of the wagon-shed, handed one to his +companion, and the two walked slowly down the road. When they were +out of sight of the house they climbed the fence, and directed their +course across the fields toward the head of the lake. Then they +quickened their pace. They had much to do, and they wanted to finish +their work and return to the house before their absence was +discovered. + +Half an hour's rapid walking brought them to the road just below +General Gordon's barn. The next thing was to make their way along the +foot of the garden until they reached the jetty, and that was an +undertaking that was not wholly free from danger. Don Gordon's hounds +were noted watch-dogs, and any prowlers they discovered were pretty +certain to be severely treated. But there was no flinching on the +part of the two boys. Bob led the way almost on his hands and knees, +stopping now and then to listen, and finally brought his companion to +the place where the boats were moored. There was only one of them +available, however, for the canoe, which they had intended to take, +was secured to a tree by a heavy padlock. + +"Did you ever hear of such luck?" whispered Bob. + +"Couldn't we paddle the other up there?" asked Lester, feeling of the +chain with which the sail-boat was fastened to the wharf, to make +sure that it was not locked. + +"O, yes; but why is this canoe locked up? That's what bothers me. +Perhaps Don suspects something and is on the watch." + +"Who cares if he is?" exclaimed Lester. "I've come too far to back +out now. I wouldn't do it if Don and all his friends stood in my +way." + +"All right. If you are not afraid, I am not. Be careful when you cast +off that chain. You know that sound travels a long way on a still +night like this." + +Lester was careful, and the boat was pushed off and got under way so +noiselessly that a person standing on the bank would not have known +that there was anything going on. Bob, who knew just where the +shooting-box was located, sat in the stern and did the steering, at +the same time assisting Lester in paddling. The heavy boat moved +easily through the water, and before another half hour had passed +they were at their journey's end. + +"Hold up now," whispered Bob, "and let's make sure that everything +is all right before we touch the shore." + +Lester drew in his paddle and listened. He heard a whistling in the +air, as a solitary duck flew swiftly up the lake, and that was the +only sound that broke the stillness. The trees on the shore loomed up +darkly against the sky, and presented the appearance of a solid wall +of ebony. Lester could not see anything that looked like a +shooting-box, but Bob knew it was there, and when he had listened +long enough to satisfy himself that there was nobody in it or about +it, he brought the bow of the boat around and paddled toward the +shore. + +"Which way is it from here?" asked Lester, when the two had +disembarked. "I can't see anything." + +"Hold fast to my coat-tail," replied Bob, "and I'll show it to you +in a minute." + +Lester being thus taken in tow was safely conducted up the bank. +Presently he heard a door unlatched and opened, a match was struck +and he found himself inside the shooting-box. He could scarcely have +been more surprised if he had found himself inside a little palace. +The shooting-box was not a shanty, as he expected to find it, but a +conveniently-arranged and neatly-constructed house. He borrowed a few +matches of Bob and proceeded to take a thorough survey of it. "Don +must have spent a good deal of time in fixing this up," said he. + +"He certainly has," replied Bob, "and he handles tools like a born +carpenter, too. I suppose this is a nice place to get away to when +the fellows are here shooting over their decoys. Joe Packard says so, +at any rate. They have mattresses and bed clothes in the bunks, a +carpet and rugs on the floor, camp chairs and stools enough for the +whole party, and they sit here of evenings and crack hickory-nuts +and tell stories and have boss times." + +"It's almost a pity to break up their fun." + +"It's a greater pity that Don should take money out of our pockets +and put it into those of that beggar, Dave Evans," answered Bob, +spitefully. + +"That's so," said Lester, who grew angry every time he thought of it. +"Set her agoing!" + +That was a matter of no difficulty. There was an abundance of dry +fuel and kindling wood in the little closet under the chimney, and +some of the latter was quickly whittled into shavings by the aid of +Bob's pocket knife, Lester standing by and burning matches to light +him at his work. More kindling wood was placed upon the shavings, +dry stove wood was piled upon the top of this, then the slats in +the bunks, the table and every other movable thing in the cabin +that would burn was thrown on, and Bob took a match in his hand +and extended another to his companion. + +"You light one side and I'll light the other," said he. "Then you +can't say I did it, and I can't say you did it!" + +The matches blazed up on opposite sides at the same instant. The +flames made rapid progress, and by the time the boys had closed the +door and got into the boat, they were roaring and crackling at a +great rate. They quickly shoved off and laid out all their strength +on the paddles, but before they could reach the jetty the flames +burst through the roof of the shooting-box, and the lake was lighted +up for a quarter of a mile around. But no one saw it, and Lester and +his companion put the boat back where they found it, made their way +across the road into the fields, without alarming the hounds, and +started for home on a keen run, no one being the wiser for what +they had done. + +[Illustration: The Burning of the Shooting-Box.] + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +A BEAR HUNT. + + +"I'll jest do it, an' it's the luckiest thing in the world that I +thought of it. That will make me wuth--" here he stopped and counted +his fingers--"twenty-two dollars and two bits, anyhow. Then my +clothes, an' stockings, an' shoes, an' all the powder an' lead I want +this winter, won't cost me nothing; so I shall be rich fur all that +thar mean Dave is workin' so hard agin me." + +It was Dan Evans who talked thus to himself, and he was standing +behind the cabin, with his hands in his pockets, and looking at Don's +pointer, just as he was the last time we saw him. He was so very much +delighted with certain plans he had determined upon that that he +did not dare meet his brother again just then, for fear that the +expression of joy and triumph which he knew his face wore would +attract David's notice and put him on his guard. So he remained in +the rear of the cabin with his thoughts for company, until his mother +came home. The dress David had purchased for her, and which he had +placed in the most conspicuous position he could find, was the first +thing that attracted her attention as she entered the door. Dan heard +her exclamation of joyful surprise, and listened with all his ears in +the hope of overhearing some of the conversation that passed between +her and David; but it was carried on in a low tone of voice, and Dan +was no wiser when it was concluded than he was before. He knew, +however, by the ejaculations that now and then fell from his mother's +lips that David was telling her something which greatly interested +her, and Dan would have given almost anything to know what it was. He +heard his mother laugh a little occasionally, and that brought the +scowl back to his face again. He could not bear to know that any one +about that house was happy. + +When supper was over, and David had done the chores and assisted +in clearing away the dishes, he and his mother seated themselves +in front of the fireplace and prepared to pass the evening in +conversation, as they always did, while Dan threw himself upon the +"shake-down" on which he and his brother slept, and in a few minutes +began snoring lustily. He was not asleep, however. His ears were +open, and so were his eyes the most of the time. He saw everything +that was done and heard all that passed between his mother and +David, but not a word did he hear that interested him. David had +already given his mother a history of the events of the day. She +knew what his plans were and approved them. + +When nine o'clock came David took possession of the other half of the +"shake-down" and prepared to go to sleep. He deposited his clothes at +the head of the bed, as usual, and Dan, through his half-closed eyes, +saw that he threw them down in a careless sort of way, as though +there was nothing of value in them. + +"But he can't fool me so easy," thought Dan. "Not by no means. Thar's +ten dollars somewhar in them thar dry goods, unless he give 'em to +the ole woman when she fust come hum, an' they'll be mine afore +mornin'. He wouldn't go snacks with me, like a feller had oughter do, +an' now I'll have 'em all!" + +In an hour from that time everybody in the cabin appeared to be +asleep. Mrs. Evans certainly was and David seemed to be, for he lay +with his eyes closed, and breathed long and heavily. Dan took a good +look at him--the blazing fire on the hearth made the cabin almost as +light as day--and then reaching out his hand drew David's clothes +toward him. He searched all the pockets carefully, but there was +nothing in them except a pocket-knife with two broken blades, and +that was not what Dan was looking for. Muttering something under his +breath Dan turned all the pockets inside out and then felt of the +lining of the coat; but as nothing rewarded his search he tossed the +clothes back upon the floor, and cautiously slipped his hand under +his brother's pillow. As he did so David suddenly raised himself +upright in bed, and seizing the pillow, lifted it from its place. + +"If you want to look under there, why don't you say so?" he asked. + +Almost any other boy would have been overcome with shame and +mortification, but Dan was not easily abashed, and although he felt +a little crestfallen, his face did not show it. + +"It isn't there you see, don't you?" said David. + +"What isn't thar?" growled Dan. + +"Why, the ten-dollar bill you saw me have at the landing. It isn't +in my clothes either, or anywhere about the house." + +"I wasn't lookin' fur it," returned Dan. + +"I'll tell you where it is, if you want to know," continued David. +"It is safe in Don Gordon's pocket-book, and you can't get it out of +there. I told you that you'd never have another chance to steal any +of my money, and I think you will believe it now. Good-night, and +pleasant dreams to you; that is, if you can sleep after such a +performance." + +Dan could sleep, and he did, too, after he got over his rage, but +his night's rest did not seem to refresh him much, for he was cross +and sullen the next morning, and ate his breakfast without saying a +word to anybody. David was as bright as a lark; and after he had +assisted his mother in her household duties, he took down his rusty +old single-barrel from the pegs over the fireplace, slung on his +powder-horn and shot-pouch, and when his mother was ready to go, he +accompanied her down the road toward General Gordon's, leaving Dan +sitting on the bench, moody and thoughtful. + +"They don't take no more notice of me nor if I was a yaller dog or a +crooked stick," growled Dan, when he found himself alone. "I'll pay +'em fur it by kickin' up a wusser row nor pap done 'bout that thar +bar'l, an' I shan't be long a doin' of it nuther!" + +Mrs. Evans and David separated at the forks of the road, the former +directing her course toward the house of the neighbor by whom she was +employed, and David hurrying on toward General Gordon's. When he +reached the head of the lake he heard a loud shout; and looking in +the direction from which it came, he saw Don and Bert standing on the +wharf beckoning to him. David ran across the garden to join the +brothers, and found that they were all ready to start on the hunt +they had planned the day before. A well-filled basket, which David +knew contained a substantial lunch, stood on the wharf, and near it +lay the General's heavy double-barrel gun, which Bert had borrowed +for the occasion, knowing that it would throw buck-shot with more +force than his light bird gun. Bert was unfastening the canoe, and +Don stood close by, with his trusty rifle in one hand and an axe in +the other. Two other axes lay near the lunch basket, and a couple of +Don's best hounds stood as close to the edge of the wharf as they +could get, wagging their tails vigorously and whining with +impatience. + +These hounds were large and powerful animals, and their courage +had been tested in more than one desperate bear fight. If they had +been with their master when he visited the island the day before, +something disagreeable might have happened. Godfrey Evans could not +have driven them away by imitating the growl of a wild animal. They +welcomed the newcomer with their bugle-like notes, and were answered +by a chorus of angry yelps from the rest of the pack, which had been +shut up in the barn and were to be left behind. + +"Now, I call this rather a formidable expedition," said Don, as David +came up. "If that bear is there to-day I wouldn't take a dollar for +my chance of shooting him. One bullet and three loads of buckshot +will be more than he can carry away with him. Here are the axes to +build the trap with, if we don't find him on the island; there's a +bag of corn for bait, an auger to bore the holes and the pins with +which to fasten the logs together. Bert and I worked in the shop last +night until ten o'clock, making those pins. I think we have +everything we wan't, so we'll be off." + +The canoe having been hauled alongside the wharf, and the articles +which Don had enumerated being packed away in it, the hounds jumped +in and curled themselves up in the bow, David took his place at +the oars and the brothers found comfortable seats in the stern. +Altogether it was a heavy load the little boat had to carry, and +she was so deep in the water that her gunwales were scarcely three +inches above the surface; but there were never any heavy seas to be +encountered in that little lake, and so there was no danger to be +apprehended. + +David sent the canoe rapidly along, and presently it entered the +bayou that led to Bruin's Island. As it approached Godfrey Evans's +cabin Dan arose from the bench on which he was seated in front of the +door, and ran hastily around the corner of the building. He did not +mean that Don and Bert should see him again, even at a distance, if +he could help it. He remained concealed until the canoe was out of +sight, and then came back to his bench again. + +While on the way up the bayou the young hunters stopped once, long +enough to pick up a brace of ducks which Bert killed out of a flock +that arose from the water just in advance of them, and at the end of +an hour came within sight of the leaning sycamore which pointed out +the position of Bruin's Island. There was no one to be seen, but that +was no proof that the island was deserted. There was some one there +whom the three boys did not expect to see or hear of very soon, and +that was Godfrey Evans. He was waiting for Dan to come with the canoe +and the tobacco and other articles he had been instructed to purchase +at the store. He had watched for him until long after midnight, then +retreated to his bed of leaves under the lean-to for a short nap, +and at the first peep of day he was again at his post behind the +sycamore. To his great relief he saw the boat coming at last, but his +joy was of short duration, for a second look showed him that Dan was +not in it. + +The canoe came nearer to the island with every stroke of the oars, +and presently one of Don's hounds started to his feet, snuffed the +air eagerly for a moment and uttered a deep-toned bay. Godfrey ducked +his head on the instant and crawled swiftly away from the sycamore on +his hands and knees. He was careful to keep the tree between himself +and those in the boat until he reached the cane, and then he arose to +his feet and worked his way toward his camp with all possible haste. + +"Them two oneasy chaps has come back agin, just as I thought they +would," said he to himself, "and our Dave's with 'em. Don's got his +rifle now and his dogs, too, so't thar ain't no use tryin' to scare +him this time. I must hunt a new hidin'-place now." + +Godfrey stopped in his camp just long enough to seize his rifle and +ammunition; after which he plunged into the cane again and ran toward +the head of the island. The muddy beach was thickly covered with +drift-wood, and behind a convenient pile of branches and logs Godfrey +crouched down and waited to see what was going to happen. + +The actions of Don's hounds made the young hunters almost as nervous +as they made Godfrey Evans. David stopped tugging at the oars and +looked over his shoulder; Bert caught up his father's double-barrel +and hastily loaded it with two cartridges containing buckshot; while +Don, after bringing the canoe broadside to the island, dropped the +paddle with which he was steering, and picked up his rifle. + +"He's there yet," said Bert. "The hounds have scented him already." + +"It looks like it," replied Don. "Well, we came here to find him, and +if he drives us away to-day he'll have to fight to do it. Dave, you'd +better load up--Bert has plenty of loose buckshot in his pocket--and +mind you now, fellows, don't get excited and shoot the dogs. I'd +rather let the bear go than have one of them hurt." + +While David was loading his single-barrel--his hands trembled a +little, and it took him longer than usual to do it--Don and Bert sat +with their guns across their knees, closely watching the island, +while the hounds stood in the bow snuffing the air. They caught some +taint upon the breeze, that was evident, for the long hair on the +back of their necks stood erect and now and then they growled +savagely. + +When David had driven home a good-sized charge of buckshot and placed +a cap upon his gun, he leaned the weapon against the thwart upon +which he was sitting and picked up the oars. Don dropped his paddle +into the water, and the canoe moved around the foot of the island and +along the beach, until it reached a point opposite the place where +Bert had found the path the day before. Then it was turned toward the +bank, and the moment the bow grounded, the hounds sprang out. The +boys followed with all haste, and Bert, as he stepped ashore, drew +the canoe half way out of the water, so that the current could not +carry her down the stream. + +"Now, we'll send the dogs in to drive him out," said Don, "and if +they can push him fast enough to make him take to a tree, he's our +bear; but if he takes to the water and swims to the mainland, we +shall lose him. We don't care for that, however. He'll be sure to +come back, and when he does he'll find a trap waiting for him. We'll +see as much sport in catching him alive as we would in shooting him. +Hunt 'em up, there!" he added, waving his hand along the path. + +The hounds, baying fierce and loud at every jump, went tearing +through the cane, followed by the boys, who moved in single file, Don +leading the way. A very few minutes sufficed to bring them to the +cleared spot in which Godfrey's camp was located, and there they +found the hounds running about showing every sign of anger and +excitement. + +"They're on a warm trail," said Don, looking first into each corner +of the cleared space and then up into the trees over his head. "The +game has just left here. This is somebody's old camp, and the bear +has taken possession of it. No doubt he slept in that shanty. Hunt +'em up, there!" + +The hounds followed Godfrey's trail through the camp, and diving into +the cane on the opposite side were quickly out of sight. The boys +followed, and presently stood panting and almost breathless beside +the drift-wood where the hounds were running about close to the +water's edge, now and then looking toward the opposite shore and +baying loudly. But Godfrey was safely out of their reach. Seizing the +opportunity when the hunters and dogs were hidden from view in the +cane, he stepped into the water and struck out for the mainland. He +had hardly time to climb the bank and conceal himself in the bushes +before Don's hounds were running about on the very spot where he had +been hidden but a few minutes before. Why was it that the hounds +followed his trail as they would have followed that of a bear or +deer? Simply because they scented him before they reached the island, +and because Godfrey took so much pains to keep out of their way. Had +he stood out in plain view while the boat was approaching, the hounds +would have paid no attention to him. + +"Well, he's gone," said Bert, and the deep sigh that escaped his lips +as he uttered the words would have led one to believe that he was +glad of it, "and now comes the hard work. It's an all-day's job to +build that trap." + +"It would be if we had to cut down the trees and trim off the +branches," replied David; "but there is some timber in this +drift-wood that will answer our purpose as well as any we could get +ourselves. Where are you going to build the trap, Don?" + +"In there where his den is would be the best place, wouldn't it? Now +let's go after the axes; and while you and Bert are cutting the logs, +I'll unload the boat and open a road through the cane, so that we can +haul our timber in without any difficulty." + +The work being thus divided rapid progress was made. By the time Don +had unloaded the boat and cut a path leading from Godfrey's camp to +the upper end of the island, Bert and David had selected and notched +all the logs that were needed for the trap. Then a stout rope, which +Don had been thoughtful enough to put into the boat, was brought into +requisition, and the work of hauling in the logs began. As fast as +they were placed in position, Don fastened them down with the pins he +and his brother had made the night before, and when lunch time came, +a neat log cabin about six feet square was standing in front of +Godfrey's lean-to. With a little "chinking" and the addition of a +door and perhaps a window, it would have made a much more comfortable +place of abode than the miserable bark structure which Godfrey had so +long occupied. + +Their hard work had given the boys glorious appetites, and they did +full justice to the good things Mrs. Gordon had put up for them. Don +said their lunch might have been much improved by the addition of one +of the ducks Bert had shot that morning, but their time was much too +precious to be wasted in cooking. The hardest part of their task was +yet to be done, and that was to build a movable roof for their cabin. +Don, who had received explicit instructions from his father the night +before, superintended this work, and by the middle of the afternoon +the trap was completed and set, ready for the bear's reception. + +It looked, as we have said, like a little log cabin with a flat roof. +One end of the roof rested on the rear wall of the trap, while the +other was raised in the air, leaving an opening sufficiently large to +admit of the entrance of any bear that was likely to come that way. +The roof was held in this position by a stout lever, which rested +across the limb of a convenient tree. A rope led from the other end +of the lever, down through a hole in the roof, to the trigger, to +which the bait--an ear of corn--was attached. The bear was expected +to crawl through the opening and seize the ear of corn; and in so +doing, he would spring the trigger, release the lever and the roof +would fall down and fasten him in the pen. When all the finishing +touches had been put on, the boys leaned on their axes and admired +their work. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +TRAPPING QUAILS. + + +"Now, I call that a pretty good job for a first attempt," said Don; +"and considering the work we have had to do, it hasn't taken us a +great while either. I wish I dare crawl in there and set it off, just +to be sure that it will work all right." + +"But that wouldn't be a very bright proceeding," replied Bert. "We +could never get you out. You would be as securely confined as you +were when you were tied up in the potato-cellar." + +Don was well aware of that fact. The roof was made of logs as heavy +as they could manage with their united strength, and there were other +logs placed upon it in such a position that when the roof fell, their +weight would assist in holding it down. All these precautions were +necessary, for a bear can exert tremendous strength if he once makes +up his mind to do it; and David had repeatedly declared that if they +should chance to capture an animal as large as the one that had been +killed on that very island years before, the pen would not prove half +strong enough to hold him. But it was quite strong enough to hold Don +if he got into it, and the only way his companions could have +released him would have been by cutting the roof in pieces with their +axes. + +The work was all done now, and the boys were ready to start for home. +While Bert and David were gathering up the tools and stowing them +away in the canoe, Don scattered a few ears of corn around, so that +the bear would be sure to find them the next time he visited the +island, and threw a dozen or so more into the trap close about the +trigger. The rest of the corn he hung up out of reach on a sapling +which he knew was too small for the bear to climb. + +Assisted by the current the canoe made good time down the bayou. Bert +and David lay back in the stern-sheets and said they were tired, +while Don, who was seated at the oars, declared that his day's work +had relieved his stiff joints, and that he began to feel like himself +again. He was fresh enough to assist in building another trap without +an hour's rest; and in order to work off a little of his surplus +energy, he thought when he reached home he would take a turn through +the fields in company with his pointer, and see if he could bag +quails enough for his next morning's breakfast. Bert said he would go +with him, for he wanted to see the pointer work. + +In about three quarters of an hour the canoe entered the lake and +drew up to the bank in front of Godfrey's cabin. David sprang out, +and after placing his gun upon the bench in front of the door, went +behind the building to unchain the pointer. He was gone a long +time--so long that Don and Bert, who were sitting in the canoe +waiting for him, began to grow impatient--and when he came back he +did not bring the pointer with him. He brought instead a chain and a +collar. His face told the brothers that he had made a most unwelcome +discovery. + +"Where's the dog?" asked Bert. + +"I don't know," answered David, looking up and down the road. "He +must have slipped the collar over his head and gone off; but I never +knew him to do it before." + +"Well, you needn't look so sober about it," said Don. "He isn't far +away. I'll warrant I can bring him back." + +Don set up a whistle that could have been heard for half a mile. +Indeed it was heard and recognised at a greater distance than that. +An answering yelp came from the direction of his father's house, +but it was not given by the dog Don wanted to see just then. It was +uttered by one of the hounds which had been shut up in the barn when +Don went away that morning, and afterward released by the hostler. +The others answered in chorus, and half a dozen fleet animals were +seen coming down the road at the top of their speed. But the pointer +was not with them. + +"It's likely we shall find him at the house," said Bert, who wanted +to say something encouraging for David's benefit. + +"I don't doubt it," returned Don. "If he's there, Dave, we'll take a +short hunt with him and bring him down in the morning." + +"If you don't care I'll go up with you," said David, "It would be a +great relief to me to know that he is safe." + +"All right. Jump aboard." + +David got into the canoe again and Don pulled up the lake toward the +wharf. When they reached it the boat was made fast to the tree again, +and the three boys started for the house. Don at once began making +inquiries concerning his pointer, but no one had seen him, and his +loud and continued whistling brought only the hounds, which snuffed +at the guns and yelped and jumped about as if trying to make their +master understand that they were there, and ready for anything he +might want them to do. + +"Never mind," said Don, who did not seem to feel half as bad as David +did; "dogs of his breed never stray far away, and he'll be at your +house or ours before morning, you may depend upon it. Good-by now, +and don't forget to be on hand at an early hour. We must set to work +upon those traps without any more delay." + +David reluctantly turned his face toward home, and Don and Bert +went into the house. "I didn't tell him just what I think about the +matter, for he feels badly enough already," said Don, when he and his +brother were in their room, dressing for supper. "There's an awful +thief about here, and it wouldn't surprise me at all to know that the +pointer has gone where our canoe went." + +"Do you know that that thought has been in my mind all the while?" +returned Bert. "Who is the thief?" + +"I give it up. If he lives about here he's foolish to steal my dog, +for he never can use him in hunting. There isn't a man or boy in the +settlement but would recognise him the moment he saw him." + +"Perhaps he was stolen in the hope that a reward would be offered for +his return," suggested Bert. + +"Well, there's something in that. But after all," added Don, a few +minutes later, "there isn't so much in it, for how could the thief +return the dog without making himself known? Still I hope it is +so--that is, if the dog was stolen--for rather than lose him, I'll +give ten dollars to anybody who will bring him back to me, and ask no +questions. If I have to do that it will ruin me, for it will take my +last cent." + +The ringing of the supper bell put a stop to their conversation for +the time being, but it was resumed as soon as the family were +gathered about the table. Various explanations were offered for the +pointer's absence, and when that matter had been talked over, the +events of the day were brought up for discussion. Bert acted as +spokesman, and when he told how the hounds had driven the bear from +his den and forced him to swim the bayou, Don was surprised to see +that his father smiled as if he did not quite believe it. "It's the +truth, every word of it," said Don, almost indignantly. + +"O, I don't doubt that you found something on the island and drove it +off," replied the General, "but I don't think it was a bear." + +"What was it?" asked Don. + +"It was something you will not be likely to catch in your trap. It +was Godfrey Evans." + +Don dropped his knife and fork, and settled back in his chair. "We +saw tracks in the mud that did not look to me like bear tracks, +that's a fact," said he. "If that was Godfrey, he's the one who stole +our canoe." + +"Then we have had all our trouble for nothing," said Bert. + +"Perhaps not," replied his father. "The island has been much +frequented by bears ever since I can remember, and it may be that +your labor will be rewarded in a day or two. It might be well for you +to watch your trap at any rate. If you should happen to catch a young +bear, that you could bring home alive, Silas Jones would give you +twenty dollars for it. That would be a big addition to David's little +capital, for of course you wouldn't want any of the money." + +"Of course not. All we want is the fun of catching the bear." + +Don and Bert were up the next morning before the sun, as they always +were, and as soon as they were dressed, they went out to the shop and +found David there busy with his traps. He knew where the key was +kept, under the door-step, and at the first peep of day he had let +himself in and gone to work. Of course the first questions that were +asked and answered were in regard to the missing pointer, but no one +had seen or heard anything of him. David seemed to take the loss very +much to heart. The animal was a valuable one, and he felt that he was +in some degree responsible for his safe-keeping. + +Three pairs of willing hands made light work, and by two o'clock in +the afternoon a dozen traps were completed and ready for setting. The +boys then stopped long enough to take a hasty lunch, which they ate +in the shop, in order to save time, and after that one of the mules +was hitched to a wagon and brought before the door. The traps, a +basket containing the "figure fours," with which they were to be +set, a bag of corn for bait, an axe, with which to clear away the +underbrush, and a spade to dig the trenches, having been packed away +in the vehicle, the boys got in and drove off. They directed their +course along the fence, which ran around the plantation, and wherever +they found a clump of bushes or a little thicket of briers and cane, +there they stopped long enough to set one of their traps. + +The traps were made of slats split from oak boards, and were a little +less than four feet square and a little more than a foot in height. +In the top was a slide covering a hole large enough to admit one's +arm, and it was through this hole that the captured birds were to be +taken out. The undergrowth was first cut away with the axe and the +trap put down in the clear space, a narrow board being placed under +two sides of it, to give it a solid foundation. A trench just large +enough to admit a single quail was dug under each of these boards, +one end of the trench being on the outside of the trap and the other +on the inside. A small ear of corn was tied firmly to the trigger, +the trap set with the "figure four," a few kernels were scattered +about in the immediate neighborhood, and the trap was ready for the +first flock of quails that might come that way. When they came, they +would, of course, find the corn, and while they were eating it they +would be sure to find the trap. One or more of them would go in and +spring it by pecking at the ear that was tied to the trigger, and the +others, no matter if there were a hundred in the flock, would all go +in to him through the trenches before spoken of. After they had eaten +the corn, they would look _up_ instead of down for a way of escape, +and, although the trenches at which they came in were still open to +them, they would not know enough to make use of them. If the trap was +once sprung, the capture of the entire flock was certain, provided +those outside were not frightened away before they had time to go in +to their imprisoned companions. + +In two hours' time the traps had all been set and the boys were at +home again. They had done a good day's work, but they wanted to do +a better; so as soon as the mule was unharnessed and the wagon put +under the shed where it belonged, they set to work in the shop again, +and before dark a large coop, which would just fit into the wagon +box, was completed. This was to be used to bring home the captured +quails. After that one of the unoccupied negro cabins was selected to +confine the birds in until the required number had been trapped. It +received a thorough sweeping, the floor was covered with clean sand, +and the broken window was boarded up so that the captives could not +escape. When this was done David started for home, and Don and Bert +went into the house to get ready for supper. + +The next day was spent much as the preceding one had been spent. At +eleven o'clock seven more traps were ready for the field. Then the +mule and wagon were brought into use again, and the new traps were +distributed along the fence. When the boys came back they took time +to eat lunch, after which the coop was put into the wagon, and they +set out to visit the traps they had set the day before. + +"There's nothing here," said Bert, as he drew rein in front of the +thicket in which the first trap was located. He could not see the +trap, but his ears told him all he wanted to know. If there had been +any quails in it they would have uttered their notes of alarm as soon +as they heard the wagon coming. + +"No, there's nothing here!" said Don, after listening a moment. "I'll +scatter a little more corn about and make sure that the trap is all +right." + +He got out of the wagon as he spoke, and while he was working his way +into the thicket he flushed a blue-jay, which flew into a tree close +by and scolded him with all its might. Don shied a stick at it and +kept on to the trap. It was down, and there was something in it which +fluttered its wings against the bars and made the most frantic +efforts to escape. Don knew it was not a quail, so he did not stop to +see what it was. He threw back the slide, thrust his hand into the +opening and when he clutched the bird received a severe bite from it. +"I have half a mind to wring your little neck for you," thought Don, +as he brought the fluttering captive, a beautiful red-bird, into +view. "Not because you have bitten me, but because you will make it +your business to come here and spring this trap every day. Red-birds +and blue-jays are perfect nuisances when a fellow is trapping, and I +wouldn't blame Dave for shooting every one he sees." + +But Don did not injure the bird. He was a sportsman, and never made +war on game of this sort. He tossed the captive into the air and it +flew away out of sight. + +Having set the trap again and scattered a little more corn about to +replace that which had been picked up by the birds, Don went back to +the wagon and Bert drove on down the field. They found the second +trap thrown, and the marks of little teeth on the ear of corn that +was tied to the trigger showed that a ground squirrel had been at +work. The third trap was also sprung, and the shrill, piping notes of +alarm which came to their ears when Bert stopped the wagon, told them +that they had made their first capture. Jumping quickly out of the +wagon the boys made their way into the bushes, and when they came +within sight of the trap they found that it was so full that the +little prisoners had scarcely room to turn about. + +"Here's the first instalment of your hundred and fifty dollars, +Dave," cried Don. "We've got more than a dozen, I know!" + +Having stopped up the ends of the trenches so that the quails could +not escape, Don thrust his arm through the opening in the top of the +trap and began passing out the birds to his brother and David, who +carried them to the wagon and put them into the coop. He counted them +as he took them out, and found that there were nearer two dozen than +one, twenty being the exact number. One, however, escaped from Bert, +who, through fear of injuring it, handled it too tenderly. + +"Never mind," said Don, when his brother told him of the loss. "He'll +go off and join some other flock, so we are bound to catch him +anyhow. I call this a good beginning, don't you, Dave? It looks now +as though you were going to earn your money in spite of Lester and +Dan." + +After re-setting the trap the boys got into the wagon and drove on. +They found some of their traps just as they had left them; a few had +been thrown by ground squirrels or red-birds; and from the others +they took enough quails to make their day's catch amount to a little +over four dozen. These were all safely transferred to the cabin, the +mule was unharnessed and the young trappers, greatly encouraged by +their success, replenished the fire in the shop, for the day was raw +and chilly, and went to work to build more traps. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +WHERE THE POINTER WAS. + + +"Yes, sar, I'm goin' to raise a furse here now, an' I won't be long +about it, nuther. They think I don't amount to nothin' in this yere +house, but I'll show 'em that I do. Pap bein' away, I had oughter be +the man of the family, an' that leetle Dave shan't crowd me outen the +place, nuther. When he comes back to-night his eyes'll stick out so't +a feller could hang his hat onto 'em. You hear me?" + +This was the way Dan Evans talked to himself, as he sat on the bench +in front of the door, gazing after his mother and David, as they +walked down the road toward General Gordon's. He was greatly enraged +over his failure to steal his brother's ten dollars, and really +thought David had been guilty of a mean piece of business in putting +his money where it would be safe. + +"He hain't went off with that thar shootin'-iron on his shoulder fur +nothin'," thought Dan. "He's goin' huntin' with them Gordon fellers, +and he'll have a nice time an' get somethin' good to eat, while I +must go without my dinner, dog-gone it, kase thar hain't nobody here +to cook it fur me. They don't take half so much notice of me as they +would if I was a pinter dog!" + +Dan sat on the bench for half an hour or more, now and then looking +down the road as if he were waiting for something, and all the while +his mind was occupied with such thoughts as these. At last the sight +of Don Gordon's canoe, which suddenly appeared in the lake, brought +him to his feet and sent him behind the cabin in great haste. It did +more. It recalled to him the fact that his father had told him to +steal that same canoe and bring it to Bruin's Island, together with +several necessary articles that were to be purchased at Silas Jones's +store. Dan had not once thought of this since he saw David at the +landing with ten dollars in his hand, and heard the grocer tell him +that his credit was good for six months; but he thought of it the +moment he saw the canoe with the hounds curled up in the bow. His +eyes were sharp enough to see that Don carried his rifle in his +hands, and that a heavy shot-gun, which Dan knew belonged to General +Gordon, leaned over Bert's shoulder. Godfrey's prediction was about +to be fulfilled. Don was going back to the island to shoot the bear +which had frightened him and his brother the day before. The thought +made Dan almost frantic. He jumped up and knocked his heels together, +slapped his hands, dashed his hat upon the ground and made other +demonstrations indicative of a very perturbed state of mind. + +"Pap's in fur it now, an' so am I," said he, in an excited whisper. +"He'll get his jacket wet swimmin' the bayou to get away from them +fellers, if they give him the chance, an' I'll get mine dusted with a +hickory, kase I didn't fetch that canoe up thar. I jest wish I knowed +what to do." + +Dan, almost ready to cry with vexation and alarm, watched the canoe +until it turned into the bayou and passed out of his sight, and then +went back to the bench and sat down to think about this new +difficulty in which he found himself, and to find a way out of it if +he could. His father would be compelled to hunt up a new hiding-place +now--there was no way to prevent that--and in order to leave the +island he would probably be forced to swim the bayou, for he would +have no time to build a raft. That would, of course, make him angry, +and he never could breathe easily again until he had taken +satisfaction out of somebody. That somebody Dan knew was certain to +be himself, unless-- + +"I'll fix him," thought the boy, his face clearing up, as a bright +idea came into his mind. "I'll take him the pinter. I was goin' to +hide him in the woods somewhar, but pap kin take keer on him as well +as not. Don'll pay a dollar or two to get him back, an' I'll give the +ole man half. But fust, I must go down to the landin' an' buy them +shoes an' tobacker; an' while I'm thar, I'll jest say a good word +to Silas fur myself. I'm a nobody about this yere house, am I? Dave +wouldn't give me them ten dollars to keep fur him, an' now I'll take +somethin' outen his pocket without sayin' a word to him." + +Dan shook his head in a very wise and knowing manner, and went into +the house after his rifle. He did not take it because he expected to +find any game while he was on the way to the landing, but because he +had fallen into the habit of carrying it with him everywhere he went +and felt lonely without it. + +Knowing that Don and Bert were not at home, Dan did not go around +through the fields to avoid the General's barn, as he usually did, +but boldly followed the road. There were a few idle men hanging about +the store, as there almost always were, but none of them appeared to +be doing any trading, and the grocer was ready to attend to Dan's +wants at once. The boy bought the articles his father wanted, and +having pocketed his change, cleared his throat, preparatory to saying +a good word for himself. + +"Mr. Jones, if you please, sar, Dave done sent me down here this +mornin' to ax you would you give me somethin' fur myself, if you +please, sar--some shoes an' sich like." + +"Certainly," replied the grocer, readily, and Dan was surprised to +see that he held out his hand as if he expected to receive something. + +"I hain't got no money," said Dan. + +"That makes no difference. I don't want any money from David." + +"Then I'll take a pair of them amazin' fine lookin' shoes of +your'n--number nines, please, sar." + +"All right. Hand out the order." + +"Sar!" exclaimed Dan, opening his eyes. + +"Why, if David doesn't come here himself and tell me to give you the +things, he must send a written order." + +"Dave, he done told me to git 'em," faltered Dan. + +"I don't doubt it; but in order to have things straight, you go home +and get an order for such things as you want and I'll give them to +you." + +Dan gathered the articles which he had purchased for his father under +one arm, took his rifle under the other, backed slowly away from the +counter and went out of the store. He wasn't quite so smart as he +thought he was. His shoes and stockings, and the ammunition for his +rifle, which he thought he was going to get for nothing, were likely +to cost him something after all. It was an easy matter to cheat +confiding fellows like Don and Bert, who were much more familiar with +Greek than they were with the way business was conducted, but it was +not so easy to deceive a man like Silas Jones. Dan was surprised +and disappointed, and of course as angry as he could be. He walked +rapidly along the road with his bundles, under his arm and his rifle +on his shoulder, and it was not until he reached home and had sunned +himself for a few minutes on the bench in front of the door, that he +cooled down so that he could think the matter over. But he could +think to no purpose even then; and after resting a few minutes +longer, he arose and went into the cabin. + +He walked straight to the "shake-down" which he and his brother +occupied, and drew from under the head of it a piece of rope he had +placed there the night before. With this in his hand he came out +again, and after looking up and down the road, to make sure that +there was no one in sight, he went around the building to the kennel +where Don's pointer was confined. The animal came out to meet him, +and Dan did not send him back with a kick, as he usually did. He took +off his collar, and having tied the rope about his neck, buckled the +collar again and threw it on the ground, hoping in this way to give +David the impression that his charge had liberated himself. He then +led the dog to the high rail fence which surrounded the lot, assisted +him to climb over it, and left him there in the bushes, while he +returned to the bench after his rifle and bundles. These secured, he +climbed the fence himself, picked up the rope and hurried into the +woods, the pointer trotting along contentedly by his side. + +Dan thought he knew just where to go to find his father. The latter +would, of course, be on the lookout for his son, and it was +reasonable to suppose that he would remain somewhere in the vicinity +of the island; so Dan followed the course of the bayou, taking care +to keep so far away from it that he would not be discovered by any +one who might chance to be passing in a boat, and when he had +approached close enough to the island to hear the voices of the young +hunters and the sound of their axes, he tied the pointer to a tree, +deposited his bundles on the ground near by, and with his rifle for +a companion crept through the bushes to see what they were doing. + +There was no one in sight when he first reached the bank of the +bayou, but in a few minutes Bert and David came out of the cane with +a rope in their hands. There were several logs scattered about the +beach, and David made the rope fast to one of them and he and Bert +dragged it into the cane. While Dan was wondering what they were +going to do with the log a twig snapped near him, and he turned +quickly to find his father almost within reach of him. + +"Halloo, pap!" said Dan, jumping to his feet and backing into the +bushes. + +"Whar's the tobacker?" demanded Godfrey, in a subdued tone of voice. + +"I've got it. You ain't mad, be you, pap?" + +"I ain't so scandalous mad now, but if I could have got my fingers +into your collar about the time I was a shiverin' in my wet clothes, +I'd a played 'Far'well to the Star Spangled Banner' on your back with +a good hickory, I bet you!" + +"'Kase if you be mad 'tain't my fault," continued Dan. "I tried my +level best to steal the canoe, but couldn't do it. It was locked up +tighter'n a brick. I tried to get ten dollars fur you too, pap, but I +couldn't do that nuther; so I brung Don Gordon's pinter along. Swum +the bayou, I reckon, didn't you?" + +"I didn't walk acrosst, did I? In course I swum it." + +"Your clothes ain't wet!" + +"No, 'kase I went back in the woods an' built a fire an' dried 'em. +Le's go back thar now, so't we kin talk. We don't want them fellers +to hear us." + +"What be they doin' over thar, anyhow?" asked Dan. + +"They're buildin' a bar trap, looks like. They'll be sartin to ketch +one too, 'kase thar's a bar comes thar a'most every night. If I had a +boat they wouldn't get much good of him arter they do ketch him." + +Dan handed his rifle to his father and went back after the pointer +and his bundles; and when he came up again Godfrey led the way toward +his temporary camp. He was gloomy and sullen, and there was an +expression on his face which Dan did not like to see there, for it +made him fear that a storm was brewing. But after they had been a few +minutes in the camp, and Godfrey had filled his pipe and smoked a +whiff or two, the scowl faded away and Dan began to breathe easier. + +"I've put you in the way to make a dollar, pap," said he, as soon +as the soothing effects of the tobacco began to be perceptible. "If +you'll take that pinter an' keep him till I call fur him, I'll give +you half of what Don pays me to get him back." + +"I seed you bringin' the dog an' I knowed what you was up to," +replied his father. "But Don don't get him back fur no dollar, I tell +you. That animile is wuth fifty dollars anyhow, an' if Don wants him +agin he'll have to plank down five dollars." + +"Whew!" whistled Dan. "We're gettin' rich, ain't we? Now, pap, thar's +your shoes an' stockin's, an' thar's the change Silas give me. You +kin put it with what you've got left of your twenty dollars, an' +when----O, laws!" + +Dan jumped to his feet, opened his mouth and eyes and looked at his +father in the greatest astonishment. Something he had said seemed to +produce a wonderful effect upon Godfrey. His pipe dropped from his +lips, the color all left his face and after sitting silent and +motionless for a moment, he gave utterance to a loud yell, sprang to +his feet and strode about the camp as if he were almost beside +himself. + +"What's the matter of you, pap?" Dan ventured to inquire, as soon as +he could find his tongue. + +"I hain't got no money at all no more!" Godfrey almost shouted. +"That's what's the matter of me. It's over thar on the island whar +them fellers is!" + +"No!" gasped Dan. + +"But I say, yes, it is too!" exclaimed Godfrey. "You see," he added, +controlling himself with a great effort, "when I fust seed them +fellers comin' up the bayou the sun was kinder shinin' on the water, +an' it blinded me so't I thought it was you. I was jest goin' to +speak, when I seed thar was three fellers in the boat; an' afore I +could ax myself what that meant, one of the hounds that Don had with +him set up a yelp. I knowed that meant business, an' it skeared me +so't I didn't think of nothin' only how to get off'n that thar island +without bein' diskivered. I got off all right, but I left my money in +that thar holler log, an' I never thought of it till this blessed +minute." + +"Mebbe they won't find it," said Dan. + +"Wal, that's a comfortin' thought," returned his father, sighing +heavily, as he picked up his pipe, "but luck's agin me. It allers is. +Other folks can get along smooth an' easy, but I can toil an' slave +an' slave an' toil till--jest look at me," added Godfrey, rising to +his feet again and turning slowly about, so that Dan could have a +fair view of him. "Ain't this a purty fix fur a man to be in who +owned niggers an' cotton, by the acre only a little while ago? That's +jest what makes me 'spise them Gordons." + +"An' that's what makes me 'spise that Dave of our'n," exclaimed Dan. +"He's gettin' richer every day. He's got ten dollars in greenback +money now, an' I done heard Silas Jones tell him that his credit was +good at the store for six months." + +Godfrey opened his eyes when he heard this, and so interested was he +in the story Dan had to tell that he forgot his troubles for the time +being. He seated himself again, and while he was refilling his pipe +Dan gave him a history of what had happened at the store, and told +how David had come by the ten dollars. He also described the manner +in which he had tried to obtain possession of it, and told how he had +failed in his attempt to induce Silas to give him a pair of shoes on +the strength of David's credit. This led to a long discussion between +the father and son, during which various plans were laid and one or +two things determined upon which will probably be revealed in due +time. Dan paid strict attention to all his father said, but he was +glad when the interview was over. Godfrey was almost beside himself +with fury. Having been unfortunate himself he was enraged to learn +that anybody else was prosperous; and when he heard of David's good +luck he looked and acted so savagely that Dan began to fear for his +own personal safety. He started for home as soon as he could find an +excuse for so doing, and it was not until he was out of sight and +hearing of his father's camp that he began to breathe easily. + +Dan did not go directly home. He was in no hurry to meet his brother, +for he was afraid the latter might have something to say to him about +the pointer. He roamed through the woods, and having shot a few +squirrels, built a fire and roasted and ate them. He stayed in his +camp until the sun went down and it began to grow dark, and then +shouldered his rifle and reluctantly turned his face toward the +cabin. He did not find his brother there, but he came in shortly +afterward, and then Dan found that he had been borrowing trouble, for +David never said a word to him about the pointer. He told his mother +of the loss, and of course she sympathized with him, and offered +every explanation except the right one. The thief opened his eyes and +looked surprised while they were talking, but neither of them paid +any attention to him; and Dan, muttering angrily to himself that he +was nothing more than a crooked stick about that house any way, +undressed and went to bed. + +Dan passed the next day in his usual idle and shiftless manner. He +saw David go up to General Gordon's, and would have been glad to know +what sort of work he was doing up there, and how much he was to +receive for it. He did not find out that day, but he did the next, +and the discovery made him feel like a new boy. + +Growing tired of staying by himself, Dan thought he would go down to +the landing, hoping that he would find a shooting-match going on +there, or that a steamer would come in, bringing a stranger or two +for him to stare at. The weather was raw and chilly, too, and Dan's +bare feet were blue with the cold. He must have a pair of shoes and +stockings; and since he couldn't get them in any other way, a portion +of the money he had hidden in that hollow log in the woods must be +brought into use. Dan took out the necessary amount, and groaned +when he looked at the small sum he had left. + +As soon as the sun had warmed the air a little, Dan shouldered his +rifle and set out. He did not follow the road, as he did before, for +that would take him past the General's barn, and Don and Bert were at +home now. He went around through the fields; and it was while he was +sitting on a log near General Gordon's fence, watching the only +squirrel he had seen since leaving home, that he accidentally learned +what it was that took David over to Don's house so regularly every +morning, and kept him there all day. He first heard the creaking of +wheels and the sound of voices, and they came from the General's +field, which was not more than twenty feet distant, and which was +concealed from his view by the thick bushes that lined the fence. Dan +recognised the voices, and his first impulse was to jump up and take +to his heels. His next was to stay where he was until the wagon +passed by, and this he did; for he was in an excellent hiding-place +and no one could have found him without taking pains to look for him. + +The wagon came nearer, the voices grew louder, and presently Dan +heard the shrill notes of a quail directly in front of him and just +on the other side of the fence. He paid no attention to the sound +until the wagon was brought to a stand-still in front of the thicket, +and somebody, after working his way into the bushes, called out in a +cheery voice: + +"Here's the first instalment of your hundred and fifty dollars, +David!" + +These words made Dan so excited that he almost betrayed his presence +by letting his rifle fall out of his hands. He cautiously raised +himself to a standing position on the log, and looking through the +tops of the bushes, listened intently to catch every word that was +said. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +TEN DOLLARS REWARD. + + +When the quails had been taken out of the trap and put into the coop, +the wagon drove on, and Dan sat down on his log to think about what +he had just heard, and to wait until the coast was clear, so that he +could resume his walk toward the landing. He had learned two things. +One was that his brother had not given up the idea of trapping the +quails, as he had supposed, and the other was that there was somebody +besides himself whom David had reason to fear. + +"Looks now as though you were goin' to 'arn your money in spite of +Dan and Lester," thought the listener, recalling the last words he +had heard Don utter. "That must be that Brigham boy up to that big +white house. What's he got to say 'bout it, I'd like to know? I'll +jest keep an eye on him. He don't want to let me ketch him foolin' +round them traps, 'kase I'll make him think war times has come back +sure enough. Now that I've got another chance to 'arn a share in them +hundred and fifty dollars, nobody shan't take it away from me." + +Dan was as good as his word. He kept a sharp watch over David's +interests, and perhaps we shall see that he was the means of +defeating a certain plan, which, if it had been carried into +execution, would have worked a great injury to the boy trapper. + +The wagon having passed on out of hearing, Dan shouldered his rifle +and started toward the landing. While he was skulking through the +woods at the lower end of the field, he stopped in a fence corner +long enough to see David and his two friends transfer another +good-sized catch from one of the traps to the coop in the wagon. The +sight encouraged him greatly. If David's good luck would only +continue for just one week, the fifty dozen birds would certainly be +captured, and Dan would stand a chance of making a small fortune. It +was not so very small either in his estimation. His share would be +seventy-five dollars--his father had told him so--and that would make +a larger pile of greenbacks than Dan had ever seen at one time in his +life. With it he was sure he could buy a new gun as fine as the one +Don Gordon owned (he would not have believed it if any one had told +him that that little breech-loader cost a hundred and twenty-five +dollars in gold), a jointed fish-pole, and some good clothes to wear +to church; and when he had purchased all these nice things, he hoped +to have enough left to buy a circus-horse like Don's, and perhaps a +sail-boat also. Godfrey, for reasons of his own, had held out these +grand ideas to him during one of their interviews, and Dan, being +unable to figure the matter out for himself, believed all his father +told him. + +Having seen the second catch put into the coop, Dan started toward +the landing again. It was mail day, and consequently there was a +larger number of loafers about the post-office than there usually +was. Among them were Lester Brigham and Bob Owens, who seemed to be +very much interested in something that was fastened to the +bulletin-board in the store. Having nothing better to do just then +Dan walked up behind them, and looking over their shoulders spelled +out with much difficulty the following-- + +"NOTICE. + +"_Ten Dollars Reward_. + +"Strayed or stolen, my black-and-white pointer, _Dandy_. I will pay +the above reward for his safe return, and ask no questions; or I will +give _Five Dollars_ for any information that will lead to his +recovery. + +"DONALD GORDON." + +"I am glad he has lost him, and I hope he will never see him again," +said Bob, spitefully. "If I knew where he was, I wouldn't tell him +for five times five dollars." + +"What does he want him back for, anyhow?" said Lester. "Don is +assisting in shipping quails out of the country, and the first thing +he knows the dog will be of no use to him." + +Dan did not waste five minutes in loafing about the store after that. +Here was something he had been waiting for ever since he stole the +pointer. The owner had offered a heavy reward for his safe return--it +was twice as much as Godfrey said they ought to have--and the next +thing to be settled was, how to obtain the money, without facing Don +Gordon. This was a question over which Dan had often bothered his few +brains, but without finding any way of answering it. Something must +be determined upon now, however, for there was a nice little sum of +money at stake. + +Dan made all haste to do his trading, and taking his stockings and +shoes under his arm, set out for home, avoiding the road, as he +always did when Don and Bert were about, and skulking around through +the woods and fields. When he reached the cabin, he seated himself +upon the bench beside the door, and there he remained building +air-castles until four o'clock in the afternoon. Then he began to +bestir himself, and David, who came home that night before his mother +did, was surprised to find a roaring fire on the hearth, a pile of +wood large enough to last all the evening beside it, and in a pan +upon the table a half a dozen squirrels, dressed and ready for the +frying-pan. + +"What in the world is up now?" thought David. "Dan's got an axe to +grind, for he never does such things, unless he intends to make +something by it." + +"Halloo, Davy!" exclaimed Dan, cheerfully. "I thought mebbe you'd be +cold when you come hum, so I built up a fire to warm you. Jest look +at them thar squirrels, will you? Every one on 'em was shot through +the head. Can you beat that?" + +"No," answered David. "It can't be beaten." + +"If we had a few quail now, we'd have a bully supper, wouldn't we?" +continued Dan. "You don't seem to shoot no more quail lately, do you, +Davy?" + +"O, I can't hunt them without a dog to tell me where they are." + +"Hain't you never heard nothin' from that pinter pup at all?" + +"Not a word." + +"I'm sorry. I wish I knowed whar he was, so't I could fetch him hack. +I'm scandalous mad at myself fur takin' that money from you an' Don, +an' if I had ten dollars I'd give 'em back to-night; but I hain't got +'em, an' so I'm goin' to try an' find his dog fur him." + +"He'll be very glad to get him," said David, who knew very well that +his brother had some other reason for taking this sudden interest in +the pointer. + +"I want to act decent now, like a gentleman had oughter act," Dan +went on; "an' if I do what I can fur Don, do you reckon he'll call it +squar'?" + +"I don't know. You must talk to him about that." + +"But I ain't agoin' to face him 'till I know how he feels towards me, +I bet you. I don't know whar the dog is, more'n the man in the moon; +but I'm kinder scentin' round, when I hain't got no work to do, an' +if I should happen to find him, would you take him to Don fur me?" + +"Of course I would, and be very glad to do it." + +"Then I'll do what I kin, an' if I do say it myself, I kin find him +if anybody kin. I kin afford to spend all my time lookin' fur him, +kase I was down to the landin' to-day, an' I seed a notice stuck up +thar sayin' that Don'll give ten dollars fur him an' ax no questions. +What's the matter of you?" demanded Dan, as David turned quickly +about and walked toward the door. "Hain't goin' off mad, be you?" + +"I don't know what to make of you, Dan," replied David. "A little +while ago you gave me to understand that the reason why you wanted to +bring the dog back to Don, was because you wanted to make everything +square between you and him; and now you say you want to do it because +Don has offered a reward for him." + +"An' I told you the gospel truth both times," exclaimed Dan. "That +thar animile is wuth every cent of fifty dollars; an' if I bring him +back, it'll be that much in Don's pocket an' ten dollars in mine. I +kin afford to work fur that, can't I?" + +"Very well," said David. "If you will produce the dog, safe and +sound, I'll take him to his master for you, and bring back the reward +if he gives it to me." + +This interview had a perceptible effect upon both the boys. It took +away all Dan's industry, and all David's peace of mind. The former +had gained his point. He had made his brother promise to take Dandy +to his owner and bring back the reward, and that was happiness for +one day. He didn't chop any more wood or take any more interest in +the supper. He seated himself on the bench again and resumed the +agreeable occupation in which he had spent the most of the +afternoon--that of building air-castles. + +David walked up and down the floor, with his hands in his pockets, +thinking busily. He told himself over and over again that if it were +not for his mother, he would not care if he should never see his home +again. He was cheerful and happy when he was away from it, but it +almost always happened that as soon as he crossed the threshold +something transpired to make him miserable and gloomy. His +conversation with Dan had confirmed a suspicion that had been lurking +in his mind ever since the pointer disappeared. He had all the while +held to the belief that Dan knew where the dog was, and Dan might as +well have confessed it, for his face and his actions constantly +betrayed him. David believed, too, that his father had not left the +country, as a good many people in the settlement seemed to think, but +that he was hiding in the woods somewhere in the immediate +neighborhood. Of this he had received proof that was almost positive. +He knew, if Don and Bert did not, that it was something besides a +bear they had driven off Bruin's Island, on the day they went up the +bayou with the hounds. He had seen footprints in the mud that were +made by a barefooted man; and more than that, having been the first +to come out of the cane when the dogs led the way toward the head of +the island, he had caught a glimpse of something, as it was +disappearing in the bushes on the main shore, which looked +wonderfully like the tattered hickory shirt his father had worn the +last time he saw him. This discovery, taken in connection with Dan's +behavior, led David to believe that his father and brother were often +in communication with each other; and when the pointer disappeared, +he promptly settled it in his own mind that Godfrey and Dan were to +blame for it. He was as certain now that Dan had had a finger in the +business as he would have been if he had seen him going off with the +dog; and he resolved that as soon as the next day dawned, he would +take pains to find out whether or not he was correct in supposing +that his father was Dan's accomplice. + +"Father hid on Bruin's Island while the Yankees were raiding through +here," thought David. "When we drove him off, thinking he was a bear, +of course he had to hunt a new hiding-place, and it is possible that +he is now camping close about there on the main shore. If I can find +his camp, I'll take a good look at it. If I don't see the pointer +there, well and good; I shall be very glad of it. But if he is there, +I must get hold of him somehow. Don has been swindled out of enough +money by the black sheep of our family, and he shan't lose any more +by them if I can help it." + +As this thought passed through David's mind, an expression of +determination settled on his face, which did not fail to attract the +notice of Dan, who just then happened to look into the cabin to see +what his brother was doing. + +"What you lookin' that ar way fur?" demanded Dan. "Ain't puttin' up a +job on me, be you?" + +David replied that he was not. + +"You'll take the pinter to Don an' fetch me back the ten dollars, +honor bright?" continued Dan. + +"That is what I promised to do, isn't it?" asked David in reply. "But +if I can help it you will never have the dog in your possession +again," he added, mentally. "I didn't promise that I wouldn't head +you off if I could." + +"An' you won't answer no questions? Don said in that notice that he +wouldn't ax none." + +"Then of course I shall not answer any. You needn't be afraid. I +shan't mention your name." + +"Kase if you're thinkin' of puttin' up a job on me, Davy," said Dan, +shaking his finger at his brother, "you won't never see that pinter +ag'in so long as you live. Keep still now. Here comes the ole woman." + +Dan settled back on the bench again, and David took his hands out of +his pockets long enough to throw a fresh log of wood on the fire--not +because it was needed, but for the reason that he wanted to hide his +face from his mother for a minute or two until he could call to it a +more cheerful expression than the one it was then wearing. He had +never said a word to his mother about his suspicions regarding his +father and Dan, for he wanted to talk to her about nothing but +pleasant and agreeable things. She had enough to trouble her already. + +David had everybody in the cabin up at an earlier hour than usual the +next morning, and after eating a very hasty breakfast, he took his +gun under his arm, bade his mother good-by and disappeared down the +road that led to General Gordon's. Dan sat on the bench and watched +him as long as he remained in sight. + +"It's a heap easier to have a feller to 'arn your money fur you nor +it is to 'arn it yourself," thought Dan. "Here's Dave a toilin' an' a +slavin' fur them hundred an' fifty dollars, an' when he gets 'em, +they'll go plump into pap's pocket an' mine, an' he'll never see no +good of 'em at all. I'll have ten dollars in my pocket this very +night. It's 'most too frosty to go slashin' round through the bushes +now, so I'll wait till the sun gets a little higher, then I'll go +arter that pinter." + +David kept on down the road, until he was out of sight of the cabin, +and then he climbed the fence and plunged into a dense thicket of +briers, through which he made his way with great difficulty, +following nearly the same path that Clarence Gordon followed on the +morning he went through there to release his cousin Don from the +potato-cellar. Reaching the woods at last, he took a straight course +for Bruin's Island, and half an hour's rapid walking brought him +within sight of it. + +David's first care was to satisfy himself that it was a man and not a +bear that Don's hounds had driven off the island; and in order to set +all his doubts on this point at rest, he looked for the footprints +which the man or animal must have made when he left the water and +climbed the bank. David found the tracks after a few minutes' search, +and a single glance at them confirmed his suspicions. They were made +by a barefooted man, and that man must have been Godfrey Evans, for +there was no one else in the settlement, that he knew of, who was so +very anxious to escape observation that he was willing to swim a +bayou on a cold day. + +"I was right," said David to himself, feeling grieved and mortified +when he remembered that his father had been hunted like a wild +animal. "He is somewhere about here, and if I find him, I shall find +the pointer with him. There he is now!" + +The sharp crack of a rifle rang through the woods at that moment, and +David scrambled up the bank and hurried away in the direction from +which it sounded. He knew it was his father's gun (those who are +experienced in such matters will tell you that there is as much +difference in the reports of rifles as there is in the sound of the +human voice), even before he received the proof that came a moment +later. Scarcely had the report died away when he heard an impatient +yelp just in front of him, and that he also recognised. It was +uttered by Dandy. Godfrey was probably out hunting for his breakfast, +and the pointer, excited by the report of the gun, was complaining +because he was tied up in the camp and left behind. This was the way +David explained the situation to himself, and the sequel proved that +he was right. + +After running through the bushes for a short distance, David came +within sight of a little cloud of smoke, which ascended from a hollow +just in advance of him. A few steps more brought him within sight of +the camp, and the first object his eyes rested upon was Don Gordon's +pointer, which was tied to a sapling near a little bark lean-to, +something like the one Godfrey occupied while he was living on the +island. The animal, hearing his approach, advanced to meet him as far +as the length of his rope would allow, and stood wagging his tail +with every demonstration of joy. + +"I've saved Don ten dollars," thought David, as he pulled out his +knife and cut the rope, "and I have kept Dan and father from playing +a most contemptible trick upon one who would be a good friend to +them, if they would only let him." + +David had taken no pains to approach his father's camp without being +discovered. He knew he was in the right, and he intended to be open +and above board in everything he did. He expected to meet his father +face to face, and he was ready to use every argument he could think +of to induce him to surrender the pointer, that is, if the animal +should be found in his possession. If arguments and entreaties +failed, he was prepared to use other means, although he knew that by +so doing he would bring certain punishment upon himself. Very +fortunately, however, he chanced to reach the camp during his +father's absence, and all he had to do was to liberate the pointer +and go home with him. + +"I'm glad it happened just as it did," thought David, drawing a long +breath of relief; "I don't want to get into trouble with father, for +I have seen him angry too many times. If he should catch me here now +I believe he'd half kill me." + +"Halloo, Dannie! What brung you up here so 'arly, an' whar be you +goin' with the dog?" + +David's heart seemed to stop beating, and his old single-barrel grew +so heavy that he could scarcely sustain its weight. His first impulse +was to take to his heels, but the unexpected sound of the familiar +voice seemed to have deprived him of all power of motion. He did +manage, however, to turn his head and look in the direction from +which the voice sounded, and saw his father standing a little way +off, with his rifle on his shoulder and a squirrel in his hand. + +"Dave!" exclaimed the latter, so surprised that he could scarcely +speak. + +"Yes, it's Dave," replied the boy, who saw that the battle for which +he had prepared himself was likely to come off after all. + +"What business you got up here, an' how come you by that pinter pup?" +demanded Godfrey. + +"My business up here was to get the dog. I found him in your camp, +and I cut him loose because I have a better right to him than you +have." + +"Wal, we'll see 'bout that thar," returned Godfrey, throwing down his +squirrel and leaning his rifle against the nearest tree. David's face +grew pale, for he knew what was coming now. His father's next move +would be to reach for a hickory. + +"Who told you I was up here?" demanded Godfrey, and David's +uneasiness increased when he saw that his father was running his eyes +over the bushes nearest him. He was picking out a good stout switch. + +"No one told me," answered David. + +"Then how did you know whar I was?" + +"I was up here with Don and Bert on the day you swam the bayou, and I +saw you just after you had climbed the bank and were dodging into the +bushes." + +"Don't you think you was a very grateful an' dutiful' son to hunt +your poor ole pap outen a good hidin'-place an' make him take to the +water like a hounded deer, in this cold weather too, an' my rheumatiz +so bad?" asked Godfrey, angrily. "Who told you the pinter was here?" + +"Nobody. I just guessed at it." + +"Wal, what be you goin' to do with him, now you got him?" + +"I'm going to take him back to his master and save him ten dollars." + +"Ten dollars!" repeated Godfrey. "Is that what he's goin' to give to +get him back? Now, Dave," and here Godfrey pulled out the +hunting-knife which he always carried in a sheath attached to his +bullet-pouch, and cut down the switch he had selected, "you jest take +that thar pinter dog back whar you got him an' tie him up thar; you +hear me?" + +"I do, but I'll hold fast to the dog. You and Dan have swindled Don +out of enough money already; and now I'll tell you what's a fact----" + +David did not finish the sentence. He saw his father dash his hat +upon the ground, and knowing what was coming, he faced about and took +to his heels. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +SOME DISCOVERIES. + + +David would have been glad to reason with his father, but he had not +been allowed the opportunity, and now it was too late to find one. +His first thought was of the pointer. Giving the animal a hasty kick, +to start him on his way home, David sought to save himself by flight, +although he had little hope of success. Everybody said he was a swift +runner for a boy of his age, and he did his best now, but fast as he +went, Godfrey gained at every step. David heard his heavy footfalls +growing louder and more distinct, and once or twice he lost all +heart, and was on the point of stopping and surrendering at +discretion. But he knew that the beating he would receive would be a +most severe one, and he was sure he did not deserve it, and that his +father had no business to give it to him. This thought lent him +wings, and a few more jumps brought him to the bayou. + +"I've got you now!" cried Godfrey, and David heard the switch whistle +through the air, as his pursuer made an effort to reach him with it. + +Godfrey thought the bayou would offer an effectual check to David's +flight, but the boy himself looked upon it as his only means of +escape. He ran straight to the bank, which at this point arose almost +perpendicularly from the water to the height of at least twenty feet, +and just as Godfrey was stretching forth his hand to seize him by the +collar, he disappeared. His pursuer tried to stop himself, but so +rapid was his flight that he made one or two involuntary steps, and +it was only by catching hold of a friendly bush that he saved himself +from following David over the bluff. + +"Dog-gone my buttons!" thought Godfrey, gazing in astonishment at the +bubbles on the surface of the water, which marked the spot where +David had gone down. "Who'd a thought he would a jumped into the +Bayou sooner nor take a leetle trouncin'? He's gettin' to be a +powerful bad boy, Dave is, an' I had oughter be to hum every day to +keep him straight. Come back here!" he shouted, as the fugitive's +head suddenly bobbed up out of the water. "If you'll ketch the pinter +fur me an' promise to say nothin' to nobody, I'll let you off this +time." + +David could not say a word in reply. He felt as if every drop of +blood in his body had been turned into ice. He wiped the water from +his eyes, glanced over his shoulder, to make sure that his father had +not followed him into the bayou, and struck out for the opposite +bank. Godfrey coaxed, promised and threatened to no purpose. David +would not come back, and neither would he make any answer. He held as +straight across the bayou as the current would permit, and when he +reached the shore, he climbed out and disappeared in the bushes. + +"He's gone," thought Godfrey, throwing away his switch and slowly +retracing his steps toward the camp, "an' here's more trouble for me. +The pinter's gone too, an' that takes money outen my pocket an' puts +it into the pockets of them pizen Gordons. Dave'll tell everything he +knows as soon as he gets hum, an' that'll bring the constable up here +arter me. I must go furder back in the cane, but I won't go outen the +settlement, an' nobody shan't drive me out nuther, till I get my +hands onto them hundred an' fifty dollars. Then nobody won't ever +hear of me ag'in--Dan nor none of 'em. It's jest a trifle comfortin' +to know that that thar mean Dave can't do no more shootin'; he lost +his gun." + +Yes, David's faithful friend and companion was gone. It slipped from +his grasp as he struck the water, and was now lying at the bottom of +the bayou. He felt the loss as keenly as Don Gordon would have felt +the loss of his fine breech-loader. + +David thought he had never before been so nearly frozen as he was +when he struck the opposite bank of the bayou; but a few minutes' +vigorous exercise put his blood in circulation again, and then he +began to feel more comfortable. He followed the bayou until he +reached the lake, and then he plunged into the water again, and swam +across to the other shore. It was cold work, but he had no boat, and +so there was nothing else he could do. He was a very forlorn-looking +object indeed, when he reached the cabin. Dan, who was still sunning +himself on the bench, must have thought so, for when his brother +first appeared in sight, he jumped up and stared at him as if he +could not quite make up his mind whether the approaching object was +David Evans, or one of the dreaded haunts that lived in the General's +lane. He could not wholly satisfy himself on this point until he had +made some inquiries. "Is that you your own self, Davy?" he asked, +holding himself ready to take to his heels in case a satisfactory +answer was not promptly returned. + +David replied that it was. + +"What's the matter of you, an' whar you been?" continued Dan. "Whar's +your gun?" + +"I have swam the bayou twice, and I have been taking a walk in the +woods. My gun is in the water near the foot of Bruin's Island." + +Dan opened his eyes and was about to propound a multitude of +questions, when something that came around the corner of the cabin +just then checked him. It was Don Gordon's pointer. He had found his +way to the cabin and taken quiet possession of his bed in the kennel, +and Dan was none the wiser for it until that moment. Hearing the +sound of David's voice, the dog came out to meet him, and the two +appeared to be overjoyed to see each other again. Dan opened his eyes +wider than ever, and backed toward his seat on the bench without +saying a word. + +"I found him right where you left him, Dan," said David, who thought +it high time his brother should know that some of his mean acts were +being brought to light. "I've got him again, you see, and you'll +never have another chance to steal him." + +"What have you got, an' whar did I leave him?" Dan managed to ask at +last. + +"O, I wouldn't try to play off innocent, if I were you. I know all +about it; and I want to tell you now that you had better turn over a +new leaf and be quick about it, too. Mother says that if folks don't +grow better every day, they grow worse, and I can see that it is true +in your case and father's. You are both going down hill, and the +first thing you know you'll do something that will get you in the +calaboose. Three months ago neither one of you would have been guilty +of stealing." + +"Whoop!" yelled Dan, jumping up and knocking his heels together. + +"I don't want to go back on either one of you," continued David, "and +neither do I want to tell mother how bad you are; but I'll do it +sooner than let you swindle Don Gordon or anybody else. Why don't you +go to work?" + +"Kase I've got jest as much right to set around an' do nothin' as +other folks has," answered Dan, who had had time to recover himself +in some measure. "That's jest why!" + +"Mother and I don't sit around and do nothing." + +"No, but them Gordons does." + +"No, they don't. They all work, Don and Bert as well as the rest." + +"If I hadn't seed them ridin' round so much on them circus hosses an' +sailin' in them painted boats of their'n, mebbe I'd be willin' to +b'lieve that," said Dan. "They don't work, nuther. They don't do +nothin', but have good times. They've got good clothes an' nice +things, an' I've got jest as much right to 'em as they have." + +"Those ideas will get you into trouble some day," replied David, +earnestly. "If you want nice things go to work and earn them; that's +the way to get them." + +While this conversation was going on, David was pulling off his wet +clothes and putting on his best suit, the one he wore on Sundays. It +was not just such a suit as the most of us would like to go to church +in, but it was whole and neat, and David looked like another boy in +it. He kept the pointer in the house with him all the while, for fear +that his brother might attempt to steal him again; but Dan was too +much astonished at the turn affairs were taking, and too badly +frightened, to make any more efforts to win the ten dollars reward. +He sat on the bench, with his eyes fastened thoughtfully on the +ground, and saw David come out with the pointer and lead him down the +road toward General Gordon's, without saying a word. + +When David reached the barn he walked straight through it to the +shop, and there he found Don and Bert, busy at work building more +traps. They were surprised to see him dressed in his best, and still +more surprised, and delighted too, when the pointer bounded in and +fawned upon them. + +"Father said that the offer of a reward would bring him if anything +would," exclaimed Don, as he wound his arms around the animal's neck +and hugged him as he might have hugged a brother he had not seen for +a long time. + +"Yes, the reward did it," replied David, and that was true. If Dan +had not seen the notice in the post-office, he never would have had +that conversation with David, and consequently the latter would not +have known where to go to find the pointer. + +"We all thought he was stolen," continued Don. "I am glad you are the +one to bring him back, for I would rather give you the ten dollars +than give it to anybody else." + +"I don't want the money," said David, "and I won't take it." + +"You can't help yourself. Where did you find him?" + +"Didn't you promise that you wouldn't ask any questions?" asked +David, with a smile. + +"Well----yes, I did," answered Don, somewhat astonished. "But I made +that promise just to let the thief see that he would run no risk in +returning the dog. I can question you, can't I?" + +"I'd rather you wouldn't." + +Don uttered a long-drawn whistle and looked at Bert to see what he +thought about it; but the blank expression on the latter's face +showed that he was altogether in the dark. + +"Well, let it go," said Don, picking up his hammer again. "I've got +the dog back and with that I'll be satisfied. You'll take him home +with you tonight, of course?" + +"No, I think not. I am afraid to take him there." + +"Then leave him here," said Don, who now began to think that he knew +pretty nearly what had been going on. "He'll be safe with us, and you +can find him when you want him. He isn't broken yet." + +"I know it, but I can't do any more for him. I shall have to give you +back your ten dollars." + +"I'll not take it. A bargain is a bargain. I want my dog broken, and +you need the money to send off your quails with." + +"I know it," said David again; "but I can't shoot any more birds over +him. I have no gun." + +"Where is it?" + +"At the bottom of the bayou." + +The brothers grew more and more astonished the longer they talked +with David, and Don told himself that there had been some queer +doings in the settlement that morning. His interest and curiosity +were thoroughly aroused, but he did not ask any more questions, for +he knew that David could not explain matters without exposing one or +more members of his own family. He turned the conversation into a +new channel by saying suddenly: + +"Bert and I made the rounds of the traps this morning, and took out a +hundred and fifty birds. What do you say to that?" + +Under almost any other circumstances David would have had a good deal +to say about it; but just now he seemed to have lost all interest in +his business. It would have been hard for any boy to wear a merry +smile and keep up a light heart after such a scene as David had +passed through that morning. He could not banish it from his memory. +His father was hiding in the woods, because he was afraid to show his +face among his neighbors again; he was a receiver of stolen property +and his brother Dan was a thief, and the remembrance of these facts +was enough to depress the most buoyant spirits. David wanted to do +something to bring his father and brother to their senses, and induce +them to become decent, respected members of the community, but he +did not know how to set about it, and there was no one of whom he +could ask advice. He never talked to his mother about the family +difficulties now. She had more than her share of trouble, and David +always tried to talk about cheerful things when he was in her +presence. + +"Doesn't it cheer you up any to know that your business is +prospering?" exclaimed Bert. "Then we will tell you something else. +How would you like to be mail carrier? How would you like to put +thirty dollars in your pocket every month?" + +"That is more money than I shall be able to earn for long years to +come," replied David. + +"Perhaps not. Father told us this morning that the old mail carrier +is going to give up his route, his contract having expired, and +he thinks he can get you appointed in his place. He's been to see +Colonel Packard, and Silas Jones, and all the rest of the prominent +men in the settlement, and they have promised to give you all their +influence and to go on your bond." + +"What does that mean?" asked David, who now began to show some +interest in the matter. + +"Why, there are certain legal forms to go through with, which father +explained, but which I don't pretend to understand," said Bert. "You +must promise to attend to your business----" + +"O, I'll do that," exclaimed David. + +"Of course you will," said Don, "but that will not satisfy the +authorities in Washington. They don't know you, and even if they did +it would make no difference. The law must be complied with, and you +must give bonds for the faithful performance of your duty. But that +needn't trouble you; father will attend to it. He says your chances +are good, for you are the only one on the track so far." + +This was the first time David knew that there was anybody on the +track. He was greatly astonished and delighted, and his attempts to +express his gratitude for the General's kindness and thoughtfulness +were awkward enough. Thirty dollars was a large sum of money in his +eyes. His earnings would amount to three hundred and sixty dollars +a year, and couldn't he and his mother live nicely on that and save +something for a rainy day besides? If he could get the contract, and +his father and Dan would only abandon their lazy, worthless mode of +life and go to work, how happy they would all be! + +"What's the matter?" asked Don, for David's face became clouded again +when he thought of his father and Dan. + +"There's a good deal the matter," replied David, "but it is nothing I +can help." + +"You don't act like yourself at all to-day," continued Don. "Suppose +you go home and take a rest. Don't brood over your troubles, whatever +they are. Let them go, if you can't help them. Think about pleasant +things, and to-morrow you will come up here, feeling like a new boy. +Bert and I will set the traps we have made this morning, and then +we'll go up and take a look at our bear trap." + +David thought it would be a good plan to follow this advice, so he +closed the door of the shop to keep the pointer from following him, +and started for home. + +"Well," said Bert, as he picked up his knife and resumed work upon +the figure four he was making, "Dave has seen his father!" + +"And had trouble with him, too," added Don. + +"It was about the pointer," said Bert. + +"My idea exactly. Godfrey is hiding somewhere in the cane; Dan wanted +to make a little more money without work, so he stole the pointer +and gave him to his father to keep until I offered a reward for him. +David found it out, and to save me from being swindled, he recovered +the pointer and got himself into difficulty by it." + +The boys, who were merely guessing at all this, would have been +surprised to know that their surmises were all correct. David and his +troubles, and his manful efforts to better his condition in spite of +his adverse circumstances, afforded them topics of conversation while +they were at work; and when the figure four, on which Bert was +employed, was completed, the mule was harnessed to the wagon, and the +boys drove off to set the half a dozen new traps they had built that +morning. It was twelve o'clock when they returned, and they found +lunch waiting for them. When they had done ample justice to it, they +began making hasty preparations for their visit to the island, and a +quarter of an hour more saw them well on their way up the bayou. + +They found to their great delight that the ducks were beginning to +come in now, and Don was kept busy rowing from one side of the bayou +to the other to pick up the dead and wounded birds that Bert brought +out of the numerous flocks which took wing as they approached. After +a dozen fine fat mallards had been brought to bag, Bert declared +that it was a sin to shoot any more, and took his place at the oars, +while Don sat in the stern and steered. + +"These ducks tell us that it is time to go to our shooting-box," said +the latter. "We always wait until they begin to come in before we +make up our party, you know." + +"We ought to go over there and fix up a bit first," said Bert. "If we +don't find anything in our trap, let's go over there and see how +things look. We have had some splendid times in that little +shooting-box, haven't we?" + +They certainly had, and they found much pleasure in living them over +again in imagination. While they were talking about the many happy +hours they had spent there, they reached Bruin's Island, and Don +brought the canoe around and ran the bow upon the beach. The hounds +jumped out, and running about with their noses close to the ground, +began to show the same signs of excitement that they had exhibited +on the day of their first visit to the island. The boys knew more +now than they did then, and consequently were not in such haste to +declare that it was a bear the dogs scented. It might be Godfrey +Evans; and that he or somebody else had been there since they left +was very evident. Their trap had been sprung by the aid of a long +pole, which was still fast under the heavy roof; the lever and rope +had been carried away; and the bag of corn which Don had hung upon +the sapling had also disappeared. Don was provoked, and laid up in +his mind a few sharp words, to be addressed to Godfrey on the +subject, should they ever happen to meet again; but he had very +little to say. The boys had been thoughtful enough to bring an axe, a +piece of rope and another small bag of corn with them, and, although +they had no assurance that their labor would not be wasted, they set +the trap again and started for home. + +"If Godfrey did that," said Don, "he must have swam the bayou, unless +he has a boat hidden away in the bushes somewhere, which is not +likely. If it was summer now, he would probably spring that trap +every day, just to keep us from catching that bear; but the weather +is getting frosty, and he'll not relish many more cold baths. I don't +think he will trouble us that way any more." + +When they reached the mouth of the bayou, Bert, who was steering, +directed the canoe across the lake, toward the point on which the +shooting-box was located. During a pause in the conversation, he +looked toward the place where it ought to be, but could see nothing +of it. "What's the matter?" asked his brother, who saw that there +was something wrong. + +"That's Long Point, isn't it?" asked Bert, in reply. "It certainly +is, but where's the house?" + +"You haven't been there in almost six months, and perhaps you have +forgotten where it is," said Don, with a laugh. + +"No, I haven't. It stood close beside a big shell-bark, didn't it? +Well, there's the tree; now show me the shooting-box?" + +Don faced about on his seat, expecting to point the building out to +his brother at once, and was a good deal surprised when he found that +he could not see it himself. There was the tree, sure enough, but the +spot which the shooting-box ought to have occupied, was vacant. After +running his eyes all along the shore, to satisfy himself that he had +made no mistake as to the locality, Don picked up the oars again, and +with a few more strokes brought the canoe to the bank. All there was +left of the shooting-box they could have carried away in their arms. +Even the stove had not escaped destruction. The chimney had fallen +upon it and it was completely ruined. + +"Godfrey means to put a stop to all our fun if he can, doesn't he?" +said Bert, who thought that a man who would steal a canoe and spring +a trap, would be guilty of any meanness. + +"Let's go home," was Don's reply. "We'll have another shooting-box +here some day, Bert, and it will beat the old one all to pieces." + +The boys thought they had had hard luck that day, and so did their +father, when he had heard their story; but they came very near having +worse luck that night, and they never knew anything about it until +several days afterward. The General found it out the next morning. +He went to the fields at an early hour, as he always did, to set his +negroes at work, and was met by the hostler, who had an exciting +piece of news to communicate. "Misser Gordon," said he, "Misser Don's +hound dogs done treed two fellers down dar in de quarter. Dey's been +dar all de blessed night top o' dat ar house; yes, sar, dat's what +dey says, sar!" + +The General replied that if the two fellows had come there for the +purpose of stealing, he was glad of it, and said he would go and take +a look at them. When he saw them, perhaps he would know where the +contents of his smoke-house had been going lately. He rode down to +the quarters as soon as his horse was brought out, and when he came +within sight of the cabin in which the boys kept their captured +quails, he saw two persons sitting astride of the ridge-pole and +Don's hounds gathered about the building, keeping guard over them. +The General could scarcely believe his eyes, although when he came to +recall several little things which Don and Bert had told him, he was +not so very much surprised after all. The persons whom the hounds had +forced to take refuge on the roof of the cabin were boys; and as soon +as the General was near enough to them to distinguish their features, +he saw that they were Lester Brigham and Bob Owens. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +BOB'S ASPIRATIONS. + + +"I think it my duty to inform you that the parties to whom you have +given your order for fifty dozen live quails will certainly +disappoint you. They did not seek the contract for themselves, but +for another person, who knows nothing whatever about trapping, and +who is much too indolent to put forth the necessary exertion if he +did. You will get no birds from him. If, after waiting a reasonable +time--I should think two weeks would be long enough--you become +satisfied of this fact, I shall be happy to receive your order, and +will guarantee you satisfaction." + +This was a rough copy of the letter Lester drew up to send to the +advertiser in the "_Rod and Gun_," on the evening of the day on which +he held that interview with Don and Bert, when the former refused to +join his sportsman's club. He read it to Bob in his best style and +was astonished when his friend declared that it wouldn't do at all. +"You seem to forget that I am working for a new shot-gun," said Bob. +"The language isn't half strong enough." + +"You can't improve it anywhere," replied Lester, who was rather proud +of the production. "Do you want me to abuse Don and the rest? That +would be poor policy, for the man would say right away that we were +jealous of them and trying to injure them. I have told him that he +will get no birds from David, and if he does, it will be our fault." + +Bob could not see the force of this reasoning. There was so much at +stake that it was necessary they should do everything in their power +to secure the contract, and he was sure it would help matters if a +few hard words were added respecting Don and David. So they were put +in, and the letter was copied and dropped into the post-office. + +After that Lester took up his abode with Bob Owens. According to an +agreement made between them, Bob went through the ceremony of sending +a note to Lester by a negro boy, inviting him to come over and spend +a week with him, bringing his horse and gun, and they would have a +fine time shooting turkeys and driving the ridges for deer. This +arrangement enabled the two conspirators to be together day and +night. They intended to pass the most of their time in riding about +through the woods, and if a deer or turkey happened to come in their +way and they should be fortunate enough to shoot it, so much the +better; but if the game kept out of their sight they would not spend +any precious moments in looking for it. Their object was to devote +themselves exclusively to destroying all David's chances for earning +the hundred and fifty dollars. They would watch him closely, and when +they found out where his traps were set, they would visit them daily, +and steal every quail they found in them. + +During the first few days the boys spent together they found out two +things: one was that there was a pile of traps in the yard behind +Godfrey Evans's cabin, and that they were never touched except when +the family happened to be in want of kindling wood. The other was, +that David left home bright and early every morning and went straight +to General Gordon's. What he did after he got there they could not +find out. They would always wait an hour or two to see if he came +out again, and then they would grow tired of doing nothing, and spend +the rest of the day searching the woods and brier-patches in the +neighborhood of the cabin, in the hope of finding some of David's +traps. But they never found a single one, for the reason that they +were all set on the General's plantation, and the boys never thought +of looking there for them. + +"It's my opinion," said Lester, one day, when the two were seated at +a camp-fire in the woods, broiling a brace of squirrels which Bob had +shot, "that David has given it up as a bad job and left the way clear +for us." + +"Hurrah!" shouted Bob. + +"Well--yes; but I'd hurrah louder if he had only set a dozen or two +traps and given us a chance to rob them. If he'd done that, we might +have had a hundred birds on hand now. The best thing we can do is to +set our own traps and catch the quails as fast as we can. We'll keep +an eye on David all the same, however." + +This programme was duly carried out--that is, they spent the rest of +the day in setting their traps, but they did not devote any more time +to watching David's movements. Two incidents happened within a few +hours that suggested new ideas to them, and made them sure that at +last they had the game in their own hands. They had built a good many +traps, and having no mule and wagon at their command, as Don Gordon +had, it took them all the rest of the day to set them, so that it was +dark by the time they reached home. They found the family at supper +and listening with great interest and attention to something Mr. +Owens was saying. + +Mr. Owens was like Godfrey Evans in two respects. His ideas ran just +as far ahead of his income as Godfrey's did, and he hated those who +were better off in the world than himself. Especially did he dislike +General Gordon. The latter was looked up to by all the best people as +the leading man in the community, and that was something Mr. Owens +could not endure. He wanted that honor himself; and because he could +not have it, he made it a point to oppose and injure the General in +every possible way. + +"What do you think Gordon is trying to do now?" Mr. Owens asked, just +as the boys came in and took their seats at the table. "Gardner's +mail contract has run out, and as he doesn't intend to put in another +bid, that meddlesome Silas Jones asked the General who would be a +good man to take his place; and Gordon hadn't any more sense than to +recommend Dave Evans." + +"Well, of all the things I ever heard of!" exclaimed Bob. + +"That's what I thought," continued Mr. Owens. "I heard them talking +about it at the post-office. Gordon was as busy as a candidate on +election day. He was going around speaking to all the men about it, +and asking them if they would lend their influence to secure the +contract for David, and, although I put myself in his way two or +three times, he never said a word to _me_. I suppose he thought my +influence didn't amount to anything one way or the other, but perhaps +he'll see his mistake some day." + +"What's the pay, father?" asked Bob. + +"Thirty dollars a month was Gardner's bid, and he rode the route only +twice each week. But he had to go rain or shine. How would you like +it, Bob?" + +"The best in the world!" exclaimed the boy, eagerly. "Three hundred +and sixty dollars a year! Couldn't I sport just as fine a hunting and +fishing rig as anybody? Can't you get it for me, father?" + +"I was thinking about it on the way home, and I made up my mind that +I could try. Gordon thinks he holds the whole state of Mississippi +under his thumb, but he hasn't got me there." + +"Nor my father, either," said Lester. "He'll help you, Mr. Owens." + +"I was counting on him. When I send in the application, I'll have to +send a bond for a few hundred dollars with it." + +"Father will go on it, if I ask him, and I will, for I'll do anything +to help Bob and beat that beggar, Dave Evans." + +The conversation continued for an hour or more in this strain, and +when the boys had heard David and all his friends soundly abused, and +Bob had provided for the spending of every cent of the money he would +earn during the first year he rode the route, if his father succeeded +in obtaining the appointment for him, he and Lester went out to +attend to their horses and talk the matter over by themselves. Bob +was in ecstacies; and while he was counting off on his fingers the +various articles he intended to purchase with his wages, Lester +suddenly laid his hand on his arm. + +"What's that?" said he, in a suppressed whisper. + +Bob looked in the direction indicated by his companion, and saw a +dark figure creeping stealthily along the fence. His actions plainly +showed that he had no business there, and, as if moved by a common +impulse, the two boys dropped to the ground and waited to see what +he was going to do. + +"It's some thieving nigger," whispered Bob. "If he lays a hand on +anything we'll jump up and catch him." + +"Hadn't I better go into the house and call your father?" asked +Lester. + +"O, no; you and I can manage him. Do you see those fence pickets over +there? Well, we'll sneak up and get one apiece, and then if he +attempts any resistance, we shall be ready for him." + +The pickets, of which Bob spoke, were piled about twenty yards nearer +to the barn than the boys then were, and they succeeded in creeping +up to them and arming themselves without attracting the notice of +the prowler. The latter followed the fence until he reached a point +opposite the spot where the barn, corn-cribs and other out-buildings +were located, and there he stopped to survey the ground before him. +Having made sure that there was no one in sight, he moved quickly +toward the smokehouse and tried the door. + +"I don't think you'll make much there, my friend," whispered Bob. +"That door is locked." + +The prowler found it so, and after a few ineffectual attempts to +force it open by pushing with his shoulder against it, he faced about +and disappeared in the barn. While the boys were trying to make up +their minds whether or not they ought to run up and corner him there, +he came out again, and he did not come empty-handed either. He +carried a bag of meal on his shoulder--the one Mr. Owens had put in +the barn that morning for the use of his horses--and in his hand +something that looked like a stick of stove-wood; but it was in +reality a strong iron strap, which he had found in the barn and which +he intended to use to force an entrance into the smokehouse. He +deposited his bag of meal upon the ground, set to work upon the hasp +with his lever and in a few minutes more the door swung open. + +"Now is our time," whispered Bob, as the robber disappeared in the +smoke-house. "Stand by me and we'll have a prisoner when we go back +to the house." + +Lester would have been very glad indeed to have had some excuse for +remaining in his place of concealment, and allowing his companion to +go on and capture the robber alone; but he could not think of any, +and when Bob jumped up and ran toward the smoke-house, Lester +followed him, taking care, however, to regulate his pace so that his +friend could keep about ten or fifteen feet in advance of him. Bob, +who was in earnest and not in the least alarmed, moved with noiseless +footsteps, while Lester, preferring to let the robber escape rather +than face him with no better weapon than a fence picket in his hand, +made all the noise he conveniently could, hoping that the man would +take the alarm and run out of the smoke-house before they could reach +it. But the thief was so busily engaged that he did not hear their +approach, and never dreamed of danger until the boys halted in front +of the door and ordered him to come out and give himself up. We ought +rather to say that Bob halted in front of the door and boldly stood +his ground there, while Lester took care to shelter himself behind +the building, and showed only the top of his cap to the robber. + +"We've got you now, you rascal!" exclaimed Bob, bringing his club +against the side of the smokehouse with a sounding whack. "Come out +and surrender yourself, or we'll come in and take you out." + +"Yes," chimed in Lester, in a trembling voice, at the same time +hitting the building a very feeble blow with his fence picket. "Come +out, and be quick about it. There are a dozen of us here, enough to +make----" + +Lester finished the sentence with a prolonged shriek of terror, for +just then something that seemed to move with the speed and power of +a lightning express train, dashed out of the intense darkness which +concealed all objects in the interior of the smoke-house, and Lester +received a glancing blow on the shoulder that floored him on the +instant. While the latter was calling upon the robber to surrender, +Bob heard a slight rustling in the smoke-house, and knowing very well +what it meant, he jumped back out of the door-way, and raised his +club in readiness to strike; but the thief was out and gone before he +could think twice. The instant the robber landed on his feet outside +the door, he turned toward the place where he had left his bag of +meal and happened to come into collision with Lester, who went down +with a jar that made him think every bone in his body was broken. It +was a minute or two before he could collect his scattered wits and +raise himself to his feet, and then he found that he was alone. Bob +was scudding across the field in pursuit of the robber, who carried +a side of bacon on one shoulder and the bag of meal on the other; +but burdened as he was he ran quite fast enough to distance Bob, who +presently came back to the smoke-house, panting and almost exhausted. + +"Is he gone?" asked Lester, who was groping about on the ground in +search of his club. + +"I should say he was," Bob managed to reply. "He ran like a deer. He +knocked you flatter than a pancake, didn't he?" + +"He didn't hurt me as badly as I hurt him," said Lester. "Did you +hear my club ring on his head?" + +"No, but I heard you yell. You didn't strike him." + +"What's the reason I didn't? I did, too, but it must have been a +glancing blow, for if I had hit him fairly, I should have knocked him +flatter than he knocked me. I yelled just to frighten him." + +"I guess you succeeded, for I never saw a man run as he did. He got +away, and he took the meal and bacon with him. They'll not do him any +good, however, for he'll be in the calaboose by this time to-morrow, +if there are men enough in the settlement to find him. I know him." + +"You do? Who was he?" + +"Godfrey Evans. He's been hiding in the cane ever since he and +Clarence Gordon got into that scrape, and no one has ever troubled +him. But somebody will trouble him now. I'll tell my father of it +the first thing. I wonder how Dave will feel when he sees his father +arrested and packed off to jail?" + +"I wouldn't do anything of the kind, if I were you," said Lester. + +"You wouldn't?" cried Bob, greatly astonished. "Well, I won't let +this chance to be revenged on Dave slip by unimproved, now I tell +you." + +"We can take revenge in a better way than that. We've got just as +good a hold on him now as we want, and we'll make him promise that +he will make no effort to catch those quails." + +"O, I am no longer interested in that quail business," said Bob, +loftily. "I'd rather have three hundred and sixty dollars than +seventy-five." + +"But you must remember that you haven't been appointed mail carrier +yet, so you are by no means sure of your three hundred and sixty +dollars. And even if you were, it would be worth your while to earn +the seventy-five dollars, if you could, for that amount of money +isn't to be found on every bush." + +Lester went on to tell his friend of a bright idea that had just then +occurred to him, and before he had fully explained how the events of +the night could be made to benefit them, he had won Bob over to his +way of thinking. The latter promised that he would say nothing to his +father about the theft of which Godfrey had been guilty, until he and +Lester had first told David of it and noted the effect it had upon +him. If they could work upon his feelings sufficiently to induce him +to give up the idea of trapping the quails, well and good. Godfrey +might have the meal and bacon, and welcome. But if David was still +obstinate and refused to listen to reason, they would punish him by +putting the officers of the law on his father's track. + +"It is a splendid plan and it will work, I know it will," +exclaimed Bob, in great glee. "It will be some time before my +appointment--those folks in Washington move very slowly--and while I +am waiting for it, I may as well make seventy-five dollars. I can get +my shot-gun with it, and spend my three hundred and sixty for the +other things I need." + +Bob slept but little that night for excitement, and dreaming about +the glorious things that might be in store for him, kept him awake. +He and Lester were up long before the sun, and as soon as they had +eaten breakfast, they mounted their horses and rode off in the +direction of Godfrey Evans's house. Early as it was when they arrived +there, they found the cabin deserted by all save Dan, who sat on the +bench by the door. David was hastening through the woods toward his +father's camp, intent on finding the pointer, and Mrs. Evans had gone +to her daily labor. + +"He's just went over to the General's house, Dave has," said Dan, in +reply to a question from Lester; and he thought he told the truth, +for we know that David went in that direction on purpose to mislead +his brother. "Yes, he's went up thar, an' 'tain't no ways likely that +he'll be to hum afore dark." + +The visitors turned their horses about and rode away, and as soon as +they were out of sight of the cabin, they struck into the woods to +make one more effort to find David's traps, if he had set any. But, +as usual, they met with no success, and Lester again gave it as his +opinion, that David had no intention of trying to trap the quails. +Bob thought so too; but in less than half an hour, they received +positive proof that they were mistaken. They were riding around the +rear of one of the General's fields, on their way home, when they +happened to cast their eyes through the bushes that lined the fence, +and saw something that surprised them greatly, and caused them to +draw rein at once. There was a wagon in the field, and Don and Bert +Gordon were passing back and forth between it and a little thicket of +bushes and briers that stood a short distance away. They left the +wagon with empty hands, and when they came back, they brought their +arms full of something, which they stowed away in a box. While Lester +and Bob were looking at them, a small, dark object suddenly arose +from the box and came toward them, passing swiftly over their heads +and disappearing in the woods. + +"That's a quail!" exclaimed Bob. "It escaped from Don's hands." + +"Yes, sir, and we have made a discovery," said Lester. "Dave Evans +hasn't given up trapping the quails after all. He's catching them +every day, and Don and Bert are helping him." + +"It's just like them," replied Bob, in great disgust. "They're always +poking their noses into other people's business. But I don't feel as +badly over it as I did a short time ago." + +"I know what you are counting on. You are as sure of that mail +carrier's berth as you would be if you were to ride the route for the +first time to-day; but if you should happen to slip up on it, you'd +be glad to have the seventy-five dollars to fall back on." + +"O, I am willing to work for it," replied Bob, quickly, "not only +because I want it myself, but because I don't want Dave Evans to have +it. What's to be done?" + +"That trap must have been as full as it could hold," said Lester, +thoughtfully. "They have made five or six trips between the wagon and +that clump of bushes since we have been here. We know where one of +the traps is set now, and that will guide us in finding the rest. +When we do find them, we'll carry out our plan of robbing them every +day. They must have trapped some birds before, and if we watch them +when they go home we can find out where they keep them. What do you +say to that?" + +Bob replied that he was willing, and so the two dismounted, and +having hitched their horses, set themselves to watch the wagon. They +followed it at a respectful distance, as it made the rounds of the +traps (they did not know that they also were followed by somebody, +who kept a sharp eye on all their movements), and Bob grew angry +every time he saw more quails added to those already in the coop. + +"Those fellows are always lucky," he growled. "I'll warrant that if +we visit those traps we set yesterday, we'll not find a single bird +in them. Don and Bert are hauling them in by dozens." + +"So much the better for us," returned his companion. "Every quail +they catch makes it just so much easier for us to earn seventy-five +dollars apiece." + +Bob, feeling somewhat mollified by this view of the case, turned his +attention to Don and his brother, who, having visited all their traps +by this time, climbed into the wagon and drove toward home. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +DON'S HOUNDS TREE SOMETHING. + + +Lester and his companion followed the wagon at a safe distance and +saw it driven to the negro quarters, which were located about half +a mile below the General's house. It stopped in front of one of the +cabins, and Don and Bert began the work of transferring the quails +from the coop to the building in which they were to remain until they +were sent up the river. Bob and Lester counted the number of trips +they made between the wagon and the door of the cabin, and made a +rough estimate of the number of birds they had caught that morning. + +"They've got at least a hundred," said Lester, when the wagon was +driven toward the house, "and that is just one-sixth of the number +they want. At that rate that beggar Dave will be rich in a week +more." + +"Not if we can help it!" exclaimed Bob, angrily. "That cabin will +burn as well as the shooting-box did!" + +"But we don't want to do too much of that sort of work," answered +Lester. "We may get the settlement aroused, and that wouldn't suit +us. I'd rather steal the birds, wouldn't you?" + +Bob replied that he would, but hinted that if they attempted it they +might have a bigger job on their hands than they had bargained for. +In the first place, there were Don's hounds. + +"But we braved them once--that was on the night we borrowed Don's +boat to go up and burn his shooting-box--and we are not afraid to +do it again," said Lester. "We didn't alarm them then." + +Bob acknowledged the fact, but said he was afraid they might not be +so lucky the next time. And even if they succeeded in breaking into +the cabin without arousing the dogs, how were they to carry away a +hundred live quails? The only thing they could do would be to put +them in bags, and it was probable that half of them would die for +want of air before they could get them home. They would be obliged to +make two or three trips to the cabin in order to secure them all, and +each time they would run the risk of being discovered by the hounds. + +While the two friends were talking these matters over, they were +walking slowly toward the place where they had left their horses. +Having mounted, they started for home again, and the very first +person they saw when they rode out of the woods into the road was +David Evans, who had just been up to the shop to restore the pointer +to his owner. + +"There he is!" said Bob, in a low whisper. "He is dressed up in his +best, too." + +"Best!" sneered Lester. "Why, I wouldn't be seen at work in the +fields in such clothes as those!" + +"Nor in any other, I guess. They are the best he can afford," said +Bob, who had some soft spots in his heart, if he was a bad boy, "and +I don't believe in making fun of him." + +"You believe in cheating him out of a nice little sum of money +though, if you can," retorted Lester. + +"No, I don't. I am working to keep him from cheating _me_ out of it. +If he will keep his place among the niggers, where fellows of his +stamp belong, I'll be the last one to say or do anything against him; +but when he tries to shove himself up among white folks, and swindle +me out of a new shot-gun and get appointed mail carrier over my head, +it's something I won't stand. Say, Dave," he added, drawing rein, as +the subject of his remarks approached, "can you spare us just about +two minutes for a little private conversation?" + +"I reckon," replied David. "Have you joined that sportsman's club, +and are you going to prosecute me for being a pot-hunter?" + +"Lester has already told you what we are going to do about that, and +you may rest assured that we shall _do_ it," answered Bob, sharply. +"What we say, we always stand to. What we want to talk to you about +now is this: We know, as well as you do, that your father is hiding +out here in the cane, and that he dare not show himself in the +settlement for fear he will be arrested. You wouldn't like to see +him sent to jail, would you?" + +"I know what you mean," replied David. "My father may have been +foolish, but he has done nothing that the law can touch him for." + +When he said this he was thinking of Clarence Gordon and the barrel +with the eighty thousand dollars in it. He did not know that Godfrey +was guilty of highway robbery, and he forgot that he had also +committed an assault upon Don, and that he had received and cared for +stolen property, knowing it to be stolen. + +"Hasn't he, though!" cried Bob. "He got into my father's smoke-house +last night and stole some meal and bacon. He forced a lock to do it, +too. The law can touch him for that, can't it?" + +David leaned against the fence and looked at the two boys without +speaking. He did not doubt Bob's story. He had been expecting to hear +of such things for a long time. He had told himself more than once +that when his father grew tired of living on squirrels, somebody's +smoke-house and corn-crib would be sure to suffer. Godfrey was +getting worse every day, and something told David that he would yet +perform an act that would set every man in the settlement on his +track. + +"We can send him to prison," continued Bob. "You would not like that, +of course, and you can prevent it if you feel like it. Lester and I +are the only ones who know that he robbed my father last night, and +we will keep it to ourselves on one condition." + +"I know what it is," said David. "You want me to promise that I will +trap no more quails. Perhaps you want the money yourselves." + +"That's the very idea," said Lester. + +"It isn't the money we care about," exclaimed Bob, quickly. "We've +set out to put down this business of trapping birds and shipping them +out of the country, and we're going to do it. You think that because +Don and Bert are backing you up, you can do just as you please; but +we'll show you that they don't run this settlement. You're getting +above your business, Dave, and it is high time you were taught a +lesson you will remember the longest day you live. What do you say? +Will you trap any more quails?" + +"Yes, I will," replied David, without an instant's hesitation. + +"Don't forget that we can put the constable on your father's track +to-morrow morning," said Bob, his voice trembling with rage. + +"I wasn't thinking of my father. He has made his bed and he must lie +in it. I was thinking of my mother. She must have something to eat +and wear this winter, and how is she to get it, if I give up this +chance of making a little money?" + +"Just listen to you, now!" Bob almost shouted. "One would think to +hear you talk that you are used to handling greenbacks by the bushel. +You are a pretty looking ragamuffin to call a hundred and fifty +dollars 'a little money,' are you not? It's more than your old +shantee and all you've got in it are worth. Go on!" he yelled, +shaking his riding whip at David, as the latter hurried down the road +toward home. "I'll send you word when to come down to the landing and +see your father go off to jail." + +"I never saw such independence exhibited by a fellow in his +circumstances," said Lester, as he and Bob rode away together. "One +would think he was worth a million dollars." + +"He thinks he will soon be worth a hundred and fifty, and that's what +ails him," answered Bob, whose face was pale with fury. "But there's +many a slip 'twixt the cup and the lip, as he will find before he is +many days older. I'll tell my father to-night what Godfrey Evans did, +and as soon as it grows dark we'll go down to that cabin and carry +off all the birds we can catch. The rest we will liberate." + +A part of this programme was duly carried out. As soon as they +reached home Bob told his father what had happened the night before, +and was a good deal surprised as well as disgusted, because Mr. Owens +did not grow very angry, and declare that Godfrey should be punished +to the full extent of the law. + +"A bag of meal and a side of bacon are hardly worth making a fuss +about," said Bob's father. "I will put a new lock on the smoke-house. +But how does it come that you boys did not tell me of this at once?" + +"Because we wanted to make something out of it," replied Bob. "If it +hadn't been for Dave, Lester and I would have pocketed a nice little +sum of spending money; but he's gone and got the job of trapping the +quails, or rather that meddlesome Don Gordon got it for him, and, not +satisfied with that, he has the cheek to run against me when I am +trying to be appointed mail carrier." + +"Well," said Mr. Owens. + +"Well," repeated Bob, "I told him his father was a thief, and I could +prove it, but I would say nothing about it if he would agree not to +trap any more quails. If he had done that, I should have brought up +this matter of carrying the mail, and made him promise to leave me a +clear field there, too; but he wouldn't listen to anything." + +"I am glad you told me this," said Mr. Owens, after thinking a +moment, "and it is just as well that you did not say anything to +David about the mail. No one knows that I am going to put in a bid +for the contract, and I don't want it known; so be careful what you +say. Gordon will never get that mail route for David, for the +authorities will think twice before appointing the son of a thief +to so responsible a situation." + +"But are you going to do nothing to Godfrey?" + +"I'll keep him in mind, and if it becomes necessary I'll put the +constable after him, and tell him that the more fuss he makes in +capturing him, the better it will suit me." + +The first thing the two boys did after they had eaten their dinner, +was to fit up one of the unoccupied negro cabins for the reception of +the birds they intended to steal that night. There were a good many +holes to be patched in the roof where the shingles had been blown +off, and numerous others to be boarded up in the walls where the +chinking had fallen out, and the afternoon was half gone before their +work was done. They still had time to visit their traps, but all the +birds they took out of them could have been counted on the fingers of +one hand. Bob looked at them a moment, then thought of the big box +full he had seen Don and Bert take home that morning, and grew very +angry over his ill luck. He proposed to wring the necks of the +captives and have them served up for breakfast the next morning, but +Lester would not consent. Every one helped, he said, and these five +birds, added to the forty or fifty they were to steal that night, +would make a good start toward the fifty dozen they wanted. + +After the boys had eaten supper, they secured four meal bags, which +they hid away in a fence corner, so that they could find them again +when they wanted them, and then adjourned to the wagon-shed to lay +their plans for the night's campaign. Of course their expedition +could not be undertaken until everybody about the General's +plantation was abed and asleep. That would not be before ten or +twelve o'clock--the negroes kept late hours since they gained their +freedom, Bob said--and they dared not go to sleep for fear that they +would not awake again before morning. They hardly knew what to do +with themselves until bed time came. They spent an hour in talking +over their plans, then went into the house and played checkers, and +were glad indeed when the hour for retiring arrived. They made a show +of going to bed, but they removed nothing but their boots, which they +slammed down on the floor with more noise than usual. They heard the +clock in the kitchen strike every hour, and when it struck twelve +they began to bestir themselves. + +Bob's room being located on the first floor, in one of the wings of +the house, it was a matter of no difficulty for him and his companion +to leave it without arousing any of the family. All they had to do +was to open one of the windows, drop to the ground, pull on their +boots and be off; and this they did in about the same time that it +takes to tell it. They picked up their meal bags as they passed along +the fence, and in half an hour more were inside General Gordon's +fence, and moving cautiously along the lane that led toward the negro +quarters. A few steps brought them into the midst of the cabins, +which were as dark and silent as though they had been deserted. Some +of them were deserted, while others were occupied by the field hands. +The one in which the quails were confined stood on the outskirts of +the quarters, and Bob, who had taken particular pains to mark the +building, so that he would know it again, had no difficulty in +finding it. It was the only cabin that was provided with a covered +porch; and that same porch, or rather the posts which supported the +roof, came very handy to the young prowlers a few minutes later. They +walked around the building two or three times to make sure that there +was no one near it, and then Bob cautiously mounted the steps and +tried the door. The patter of little feet and the shrill notes of +alarm that sounded from the inside told him that he had aroused the +prisoners. + +"Just listen to that," whispered Lester, greatly amazed. "The cabin +must be full of them." + +"We'll soon know how many there are," answered Bob. "I'd give +something if I could see Don Gordon's face when he comes down here in +the morning." + +As Bob spoke, he opened one of the meal bags and drew from it the +iron strap, which Godfrey Evans had used in prying open the door of +the smoke-house two nights before. Lester struck a match on his coat +sleeve, and when it blazed up, so that Bob could see how to work, he +placed the strap between the hasp and the door, and exerted all his +strength in the effort to draw out the staple with which it was +confined. But that staple was put there to stay. It was made by the +plantation blacksmith under Don's personal supervision, and as it was +long enough to be clinched on the inside of the door, Bob made no +progress whatever in his efforts to force an entrance. + +"We can do nothing here," said he, after he had pulled and pushed +until the inside of his hands seemed to be on fire. "We must try the +window." + +"But that is so high you can't reach it," said Lester. + +"Not from the ground, I know. You will have to hold me up." + +Descending from the porch with noiseless footsteps, the boys passed +around to the rear of the cabin, and when Lester had stationed +himself under the window, Bob quickly mounted to his shoulders. He +examined the window as well as he could in the dark, and began to +grow discouraged. It was boarded up with two-inch planks, and they +were held in their places by the largest spikes Don could find at Mr. +Jones's store. Bob pushed his lever under one of the planks, but when +he laid out his strength upon it, Lester rocked about in so alarming +a manner, that Bob lost his balance, and to save himself from +falling, jumped to the ground. + +"We might as well go home," said he, rubbing his elbow, which, owing +to Lester's unsteadiness, he had scratched pretty severely on the +rough planks. "If we only had a bundle of straw we'd start a +bonfire." + +"It's a pity to go home and leave all these birds here," replied +Lester. "Let's get up on the roof and tear off some of the shingles. +We can climb up by those posts that support the roof of the porch." + +"O, it is easy enough to get up there, but what good will it do to +tear off the shingles? We couldn't get the birds out unless one of +us went down after them, and it wouldn't be me, I tell you!" + +"We'll not try to get the birds at all. We'll leave the holes open +so that they can escape. Wouldn't that be better than allowing them +to stay here for Dave Evans to make money out of?" + +"I should say it would," exclaimed Bob, who always grew angry +whenever anything was said about David's chances of making money. +"But we'll first make one more effort to get the birds ourselves. +Hold me up again and don't wobble about as you did before." + +In a few seconds more Bob was again perched upon his companion's +shoulders, and this time he was sure that his efforts would be +crowned with success. The planks were fastened to the window casing, +which, on one side, was too badly decayed to hold the spikes. He +started some of them with the first pull he made at his lever, and, +encouraged by his progress, was about to prepare for a greater +effort, when Lester uttered an exclamation of alarm and jumped from +under him. + +"Great Moses!" exclaimed Bob, who came to the ground with fearful +violence. "Do you want to kill a fellow?" + +"No," said Lester, whose voice trembled so that it was almost +inaudible. "There's somebody coming!" + +Before Bob could ask any more questions, a loud, shrill whistle, +which sounded only a little distance away, rang through the quarters, +followed almost immediately by the impatient yelp of a hound. The +young prowlers were frightened almost out of their senses. Before +they could make up their minds what ought to be done, a voice +shouted: + +"Here they be! Take 'em, fellers! Take 'em down!" + +Another impatient yelp and the rush of feet on the hard road told the +boys that Don Gordon's hounds were coming. This aroused them, and +showed them the necessity of making an effort to escape. It was +useless to run; the only place of safety was the roof of the cabin, +and they made the most frantic efforts to reach it. They darted +quickly around the corner of the building, sprang upon the porch and +squirmed up the posts with the agility of monkeys. But with all their +haste they did not have a second to spare. They had scarcely left the +porch before the hounds bounded up the steps and a pair of gleaming +jaws came together with a snap close to Lester's foot, which he drew +out of the way just in time to escape being caught. Panting and +almost breathless with terror the two boys crept cautiously up the +roof--the moss-covered shingles were so slippery that it was all they +could do to keep from sliding off among the hounds--and seating +themselves on the ridge-pole looked at each other and at the savage +brutes from which they had so narrowly escaped. Then they looked all +around to find the person who had set the dogs upon them, but could +see nothing of him. + +[Illustration: Treed by Don Gordon's Hounds.] + +"Where has he gone, I wonder?" said Lester, who was the first to +speak. + +"Haven't the least idea," replied Bob. + +"Who was it?" + +"Don't know that, either. It didn't sound to me like Don's voice, +but it sounded like his whistle, and if it was him, I wish he'd come +and call the dogs off. I am willing to give up now, Lester. Luck is +always on his side, and if he will let us go home without making any +fuss about it, I'll promise to leave him alone in future." + +Lester could not find fault with his companion for losing his courage +and talking in this strain, for he was frightened half to death +himself, and he would have made all sorts of promises if he could +only have climbed down from that roof and sneaked off to bed without +being seen by anybody. Don did not show himself, although they called +his name as loudly as they dared, and neither did the hounds grow +tired and go away, as Lester hoped they would. They were much too +well trained for that. It not unfrequently happened while Don and +Bert were hunting 'coons and 'possums at night, that the game took +refuge in a tree much too large to be cut down in any reasonable +time by such choppers as they were. In that case Don would order the +hounds to watch the tree, and he and Bert would go home, knowing that +when daylight came they would find the dogs still on duty and the +game closely guarded. The animals seemed to be perfectly satisfied +when they found that Lester and Bob had taken refuge on the top of +the cabin. They walked around the building two or three times, as if +to make sure that there was no way of escape, and then laid down on +the ground and prepared to take matters very easily until their +master should come out to them in the morning. When Bob saw that, +he lost all heart. + +"If we never were in a scrape before, we're in one now," said he. "We +may as well make up our minds to stay here all night." + +"O, we can't do that," replied Lester, greatly alarmed. "Some one +will certainly see us." + +"Of course they will. How can we help it?" + +"I should never dare show my face in the settlement again, if this +night's work should become known," continued Lester, who was almost +ready to cry with vexation. "It would ruin me completely, and you, +too. Don and Bert would ask no better fun than to spread it all over, +and your chances of carrying the mail would be knocked higher than a +kite. Let's pull off some of these shingles and throw them at the +dogs. Perhaps we can drive them away." + +"You don't know them as well as I do. They'll not drive worth a cent. +We're here, and here we must stay until somebody comes and calls them +away. We'll hail the first nigger we see in the morning, and perhaps +we can hire him to help us and keep his mouth shut." + +This was poor consolation for Lester, but it was the best Bob had to +offer. Things turned out just as he said they would. They sat there +on the ridge pole for more than four hours, Lester racking his brain, +in the hope of conjuring up some plan for driving the dogs away, and +Bob grumbling lustily over the ill luck which met him at every turn. + +At last, when they had grown so cold that they could scarcely talk, +and Lester began to be really afraid that he should freeze to death, +the gray streaks of dawn appeared in the east. Shortly afterward the +door of the nearest cabin opened, and a negro came out and stood on +the steps, stretching his arms and yawning. + +"It's the luckiest thing that ever happened to us," said Bob, +speaking only after a great effort. "That's the hostler. He knows me +and will help us if anybody will. Say, Sam," he added, raising his +voice. "Sam!" + +"Who dar?" asked the negro, looking all around, as if he could not +make up his mind where the voice came from. "Who's dat callin' Sam?" + +"It's me. Here I am, up here on top of this cabin," replied Bob, +slapping the shingles with his open hand to show the negro where he +was. + +"Wal, if dat ain't de beatenest thing!" exclaimed Sam. "What you two +gemmen doin' up dar?" + +"O, we were coming through here last night, taking a short cut +through the fields, you know, and the dogs discovered us and drove us +up here." + +"I thought I heerd 'em fursin," said Sam; "but I thought mebbe they'd +done cotch a 'coon." + +"Well, call 'em off and let us go home," exclaimed Lester, +impatiently. + +"Dat's impossible, dat is. Dem dar dogs don't keer no mo' fur us +black uns dan nuffin, dem dogs don't. Can't call 'em off, kase why, +dey won't mind us. Have to go arter some of de white folks, suah!" + +"Go on and get somebody, then, and be quick about it," said Bob, +desperately. "And, Sam, if you can find Bert send him down. We want +to see him particularly, and it will save us walking up to the +house." + +The negro went back into his cabin, but came out again a few minutes +later and started up the road toward the house. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +CONCLUSION. + + +Bob and his companion were so utterly disheartened, and so nearly +overcome with the cold, that they no longer looked upon exposure as +the worst thing that could happen to them. They had made up their +minds that it could not be avoided, and told themselves that the +sooner it was over and they were allowed to leave their airy perch +the sooner they would breathe easily again. They could not talk now. +They could only sit and gaze in the direction in which the hostler +had disappeared, and wait for somebody to come and call off the dogs. +Bob hoped _that_ somebody would be Bert. He was a simple-minded +little fellow, and might be persuaded to believe the story that Bob +had told the hostler. But Bert did not come to their relief; it was +his father. When Bob saw him he wished most heartily that the roof +would open and let him down out of sight. + +"Why, boys, what is the meaning of this?" asked the General, as soon +as he came within speaking distance. + +"It means that we have been up here since midnight and are nearly +frozen," replied Bob, trying to smile and looking as innocent as a +guilty boy could. "We were out 'coon-hunting in the river bottoms and +came through your fields, because that was the nearest way home; but +the dogs saw us and drove us up here." + +The General had but to use his eyes to find all the evidence he +needed to prove this story false. The meal bags, in which the boys +expected to carry away the stolen quails, were lying on the ground +in plain sight, one of them having fallen in such a position that +the owner's name, which was painted on it in large black letters, +was plainly visible. More than that, under one of the planks which +protected the window, was the iron lever with which Bob had tried to +force an entrance into the cabin. He left it sticking there when he +fell off Lester's shoulders. + +"Well, you may come down now," said the General. "The hounds will not +trouble you." + +It was easy enough to say come down, but it was not so easy to do it, +as the boys found when they began working their way over the frosty +roof. The shingles were as slippery as glass, and their hands seemed +to have lost all their strength; but they reached the ground without +any mishap, and were about to hurry away as fast as their cramped +legs would carry them, when the General asked: + +"Hadn't you better go up to the house and get warm?" + +"O, no, thank you, sir," replied Bob. "We'll go directly home. Our +folks will wonder what has become of us." + +"Are these your bags?" + +"No, sir," replied Bob, promptly. "One doesn't usually carry meal +bags to bring home 'coons in." + +"I am aware of that fact," said the General, "but couldn't they be +used to carry quails in? These bags have you father's name on them, +and you had better come and get them." + +These words were uttered in a tone of command, and Bob thought it +best to obey. He snatched up the bags, and with Lester by his side +made his way down the lane with all possible haste. When they were +safe in the road, Bob drew a long breath and remarked: + +"That's the end of that scrape." + +"I don't see it," returned Lester. "It is only the beginning of it. +Everybody in the settlement will know it before night." + +"Who cares if they do?" cried Bob, who began to feel like himself, +now that he was on solid ground once more. "They can't prove that +we went there to steal the quails, and we'll not confess it." + +"No, sir," replied Lester, emphatically. "You're a sharp one, Bob, to +make up such a plausible story on the spur of the moment, but I know +the General did not believe a word of it." + +"So do I, but what's the odds? Let's see him prove that I didn't tell +him the truth. Now the next thing is something else; we must make up +a story to tell my folks when we get home." + +"Can't we run back to the house and go to bed before any of the +family are up?" + +"I am afraid to try it. A better plan would be to go back in the +woods and build a fire and get warm. Then we'll go home, and if +anybody asks us where we have been, we'll say we couldn't sleep, +and so we got up and went 'coon-hunting." + +"I wish we had one or two 'coons to back up the story," said Lester. + +"O, that wouldn't help us any. People often go hunting and return +empty-handed, you know." + +Leaving Bob and his friend to get out of their difficulties as best +they can, we will go back to Godfrey's cabin and see what the two +boys who live there are doing. The day of rest, which Don said would +work such wonders in David, did not seem to be of much benefit to him +after all. He had been somewhat encouraged by Bert's cheering words +and the knowledge that influential friends were working for him, and, +like Bob Owens, he had indulged in some rosy dreams of the future; +but that short interview with the young horsemen who met him in the +road below the General's house, reminded him that he had active +enemies, who would not hesitate to injure him by every means in their +power. He thought about his father all day, and wondered if there +was anything he could do that would bring him back home where he +belonged, and make a respectable man of him. He had ample leisure to +turn this problem over in his mind, for he was alone the most of the +day. As soon as he reached the cabin, Dan, who acted as if he did not +want to be in his brother's company, shouldered his rifle and went +off by himself; and it was while he was roaming through the woods +that he made a discovery which did much to bring about some of the +events we have already described. + +Dan felt so mean and sneaking that he did not want to see anybody, if +he could help it; and when he accidentally encountered Bob Owens and +Lester Brigham in the woods, he darted into the bushes and concealed +himself. He watched them while they were watching Don and Bert, +and when he saw them hitch their horses and creep along the fence +in pursuit of the wagon, he suddenly recalled some scraps of a +conversation he had overheard a few days before. He knew that Lester +was working against David, and believing from his stealthy movements +and Bob's that there was mischief afoot, he followed them with the +determination of putting in a word, and perhaps a blow, if he found +that David's interests were in jeopardy. He saw every move the two +boys made. He was lying in the bushes not more than fifty yards from +them, while they were watching Don and Bert put the captured quails +into the cabin, and when they went back to the place where they had +left their horses, they passed so close to him that he caught some of +their conversation. When they were out of sight and hearing Dan arose +and sat down on the nearest log to make up his mind what he was going +to do about it. + +"I'll bet a hoss you don't steal them quail nor set fire to the +cabin, nuther," said he, to himself. "Thar's a heap of birds in +thar--seems to me that they had oughter ketched 'most as many as they +want by this time--an' they shan't be pestered; kase if they be, +what'll become of my shar' of them hundred an' fifty dollars? It'll +be up a holler stump, whar I thought it had gone long ago!" + +Dan knew that if Lester and his friend had any designs upon the cabin +and the quails that were in it, they would not attempt to carry them +out before night; but the fear that something might happen if he went +home again troubled him greatly, and he resolved that he would not +lose sight of the cabin for a few hours at least. He did not know +what he would do to Lester and Bob if he caught them in the act of +trying to steal the quails; that was a point on which he could not +make up his mind until something happened to suggest an idea to him. +While he was sitting in his place of concealment, thinking busily, he +heard a rustling in the bushes and looked up to see one of Don's +hounds approaching. + +In the days gone by, before Dan became such a rascal as he was now, +he had often accompanied Don and Bert on their 'coon and 'possum +hunting expeditions, and the old dogs in the pack were almost as well +acquainted with him as they were with their master. Bose recognised +him at once, and appeared to be glad to see him. + +"I want you to stay here with me till it comes dark, ole feller," +said Dan, patting the animal's head. (He never kicked the hounds, as +he did the pointer. He knew better.) "If them fellers comes we'll +make things lively fur 'em. You hear me?" + +Dan waited almost twelve hours before he had an opportunity to carry +out the plan he had so suddenly formed. When he became tired of +sitting still and began to feel the cravings of appetite, he went +into the woods and shot four squirrels which Bose treed for him. +These he roasted over a fire and divided with his four-footed friend. +When it began to grow dark he went back to his hiding-place, where he +remained until he thought it time to take up a new position. This was +by the side of the road, and a short distance from the big gate, +which opened into the lane leading to the negro quarters. There Dan +lay for almost four hours, stretched out behind a log, with the hound +by his side. He saw several negroes pass in and out of the gate, and, +although some of them walked by within ten feet of him, no one saw +him, and the well-trained hound never betrayed his presence by so +much as a whimper. + +Finally, to Dan's great relief, the lights in the General's house +were put out, then a door or two was slammed loudly in the quarters, +and after that all was still. Dan had grown tired of watching and +must have fallen asleep, for he knew nothing more until a low growl +from the hound aroused him. He was wide awake in an instant, and +having quieted the animal by placing his hand on his neck, he looked +all around to see what it was that had disturbed him. He heard +footsteps in the field on the opposite side of the road, and +presently two figures appeared and clambered over the fence. They +crossed to the gate, which they opened and closed very carefully and +went down the lane. + +"Them's our fellers, Bose," whispered Dan, who was highly excited. +"They've got bags slung over their shoulders, an' they think they're +goin' to play smash stealin' them birds of our'n; but me and you will +see how many they'll get, won't we?" + +As soon as Bob and Lester were out of hearing Dan arose, and holding +the hound firmly by the neck with one hand he opened the gate with +the other, and moved noiselessly down the lane toward the quarters. +His plan was to make sure that Bob and his friend had come there to +force an entrance into the cabin in which the quails were confined, +and if he found that that was their object, he would make a pretence +of setting Bose upon them. He did not intend to do so in reality, for +he knew the dog too well. The animal always did serious work when +he began to use his teeth, and Dan didn't want either of the young +thieves killed or maimed. He knew that if he could excite the hound +and induce him to give tongue, the rest of the pack would be on the +ground in two minutes' time; and as they were all young dogs (Carlo +was shut up in the barn every night to do guard duty there), they +would not be likely to take hold of the boys, if left to themselves. +They would not permit them to escape, either. They would surround +them and keep them there until morning, and that was what Dan wanted. +He could not afford to watch the cabin every night, and he thought it +would be a good plan to give Bob and his friend a lesson they would +not forget. + +That the prowlers had come there to force an entrance into the cabin, +was quickly made plain to even Dan's dull comprehension. He saw them +try the door, and then go around to the other side of the building +and attempt to pry off the planks that covered the window. Dan heard +something crack as Bob laid out his strength on the lever he was +using, and believing that the thieves were on the point of +accomplishing their object, he uttered a loud whistle to let the rest +of the pack know that they were wanted, and shouted: + +"Here they be! Take 'em, fellers! Take 'em down!" + +Bose, who had been growing more and more impatient every moment, was +quite ready to obey. Uttering a loud yelp, which was almost +immediately answered by the rest of the pack, he raised himself upon +his hind legs, and struggled so furiously to escape that Dan was +obliged to drop his rifle and seize him with both hands. But when the +brute was thoroughly aroused, it was hard to restrain him. The thick, +loose skin on the back of his neck did not afford Dan a very good +hold, and almost before he knew it, Bose slipped from his grasp, and +bounded toward the cabin. At the same instant, a chorus of loud bays +sounding close at hand announced that the rest of the pack were +coming at the top of their speed. Bob and Lester had never before +been in so much danger as they were at that moment. + +Dan, who began to fear that the plan he had adopted for protecting +the quails was about to result in a terrible tragedy, was very badly +frightened. He stood for a few seconds as if he had been deprived of +all power of action, and then caught up his rifle and took to his +heels. He ran as if the pack were after him instead of Bob and +Lester, and never slackened his pace until he was out of hearing of +their angry voices. He crept home like a thief and got into bed +without arousing either David or his mother. But he could not sleep. +He was haunted by the fear that something dreadful had happened down +there in the quarters, and that there would be a great uproar in the +settlement the next morning. He felt that he could never be himself +again until he knew the worst, so a little while before daylight he +put on his clothes, slipped quietly out of the cabin and bent his +steps toward the big gate near which he had been concealed the night +before. By the time he reached it there, was light enough for him to +distinguish objects at a considerable distance, and we can imagine +how greatly relieved he was when he discovered Bob and Lester perched +upon the ridge pole of the cabin. At first, he thought his eyes were +deceiving him, but a second look told him that there was no mistake +about it. He would have been glad to know if either of them had been +injured by the hounds before they got there, but that was something +he could not find out just then. They had not been torn in pieces, as +he feared, and that was a great comfort to him. + +"They never had a closer shave, that thar is sartin," thought Dan, as +he turned about and trudged toward home. "I wonder what pap would say +if he knowed what a smart trick I played onto 'em! I wish I could go +an' tell him, but I am a'most afeared, kase he must be jest a bilin' +over with madness. He's lost the pinter--I reckon Dave must have +stole him, kase I don't see how else he could have got him--an' I +don't keer to go nigh him ag'in, till I kin kinder quiet his feelin's +by tellin' him some good news 'bout them hundred an' fifty dollars." + +The events of this night were the last of any interest that +transpired in the settlement for more than two weeks. Affairs seemed +to take a turn for the better now, and the boy trapper and his two +friends were left to carry out their plans without any opposition. +Bob and Lester kept out of sight altogether; but they need not have +been so careful to do that, for the General was the only one who was +the wiser for what they had done, and he never said a word about it +to anybody. They could not even muster up energy enough to go out of +nights to rob David's traps; and perhaps it was just as well that +they did not attempt it, for they might have run against Dan Evans in +the dark. The latter spent very little time at home now. He was +sometimes absent for two days and nights, and David and his mother +did not know what to make of it. He had built a camp near the field +in which the traps were set, and there he lived by himself, +subsisting upon the squirrels and wild turkeys that fell to his +rifle. + +Things went on smoothly for a week, and during this time David and +his friends were as busy as they could be. Quails were more abundant +than they had ever known them to be before. They seemed to flock into +the General's fields on purpose to be caught, and before many days +had passed, it became necessary to fit up another cabin for the +reception of the prisoners. In the meantime the General's timber and +nails were used up rapidly. The boys had the hardest part of their +work to do now, and that was to build a sufficient number of coops to +hold all the birds. Silas Jones said that the Emma Deane was expected +down every day, and Don declared that the birds must be shipped on +her when she came back from New Orleans, if it took every man and +woman on the plantation to get them ready. She came at last, and Don +was at the landing to meet her. He held a short interview with her +captain and Silas Jones, who was freight agent as well as express +agent and post-master, and when it was ended he jumped on his pony +and rode homeward as if his life depended upon the speed he made. +When he arrived within sight of the field where the traps were set, +he saw his brother and David coming in with another wagon load of +birds. + +"How many this morning?" asked Don. + +"We have enough now to make fifty-five dozen altogether," replied +Bert. + +"Hurrah for our side!" cried Don. "We'll ship them all. Some may die +on the way, you know, and that man must have the number he advertised +for. Captain Morgan will stop and get the birds when he comes back. +He will see them shipped on the railroad at Cairo, and all we have to +do is to be sure that the game is at the landing in time." + +"Did he say how much it would cost to send them off?" asked David. + +"No. He will put in his bill when he comes down again. He carries +freight by the hundred, you know. He will pay the railroad charges, +too, and add that to his own bill." + +"But what shall I do if both bills amount to more than ten dollars?" +asked David, with some anxiety. + +Don did not seem to hear the question, for he paid no attention to +it. The truth was he had arranged matters so that David would not be +required to use any of his ten dollars. Silas Jones was to foot all +the bills and pay himself out of David's money when it was forwarded +to him by the agent at S----, the place where the quails were going. +But Don couldn't stop to explain this just now. He told his brother +and David to make haste and put the quails into the cabin; and when +that was done and they came into the shop, he set them at work on the +coops. There was much yet to be done, but they had ample time to do +it in, with more than a day to spare. When the next Wednesday night +arrived fifty-five dozen quails, boxed and marked ready for shipment, +were at the landing, waiting to begin the journey to their new home +in the North, and Don carried in his pocket a letter addressed to the +advertiser, which Captain Morgan was to mail at Cairo. + +The boys camped at the landing that night to keep guard over their +property. They pitched a little tent on the bank, built a roaring +fire in front of it, and in company with Fred and Joe Packard, who +came down to stay with them, passed the hours very pleasantly. The +Emma Deane came up the next afternoon, and when the freight had been +carried aboard and she backed out into the stream again, David drew +a long breath, expressive of the deepest satisfaction. His task was +done, and he hoped in a few days more to reap the reward of his +labor. + +The boys felt like resting now. They had worked long and faithfully, +and they were all relieved to know that their time was their own. Don +and Bert paid daily visits to their bear trap, hunted wild turkeys +and drove the ridges for deer, while David stayed at home and made +himself useful there, until he began to think it time to hear from +somebody, and then he took to hanging about the post-office as +persistently as ever his father had done. Finally, his anxiety was +relieved by the arrival of the first letter that had ever been +addressed to himself. He tore it open with eager hands, and read +that the quails had been received in good order, and that the money, +amounting to one hundred and ninety-two dollars and fifty cents, had +been paid over to the agent from whom they were received. David could +hardly believe it. The man had paid him for the extra five dozen +birds; he was to receive forty-two dollars more than he expected; +and there had been no freight charges deducted. David could not +understand that, and there was no one of whom he could ask an +explanation, for Don and Bert had gone over to Coldwater that +morning, and were not to be back for a week. He had a long talk with +his mother about it that night, and when he went to bed never closed +his eyes in slumber. Every succeeding day found him at the landing +waiting for his money, and so little did he know about business that +he could not imagine who was to give it to him. + +At last the Emma Deane came down again. David stood around with the +rest and watched her while she was putting off her freight, and +having seen her back out into the stream, was about to start for +home, when Silas Jones came up and tapped him on the shoulder. + +"Don't go away," said he. "I want to see you." David waited an hour +before Silas was ready to tell him what he wanted of him. By that +time the most of the hangers-on had dispersed; and when the last +customer finished his trading, Silas stepped behind his desk and +opened his safe. + +"There it is," said he, slapping a package of greenbacks on the desk +and then holding it up to David's view. "How do you like the looks of +it?" + +David's eyes opened to their widest extent. He had never seen so +large a package of money before. He looked hastily about the store to +see if Dan was anywhere in sight, and was greatly relieved to find +that he was not. There were three, or four men standing by, and they +appeared to be enjoying David's astonishment. + +"Is--is it mine, Mr. Jones?" he managed to ask. + +"Some of it is, and some of it is mine. There are a hundred and +ninety-two dollars and a half here, and twenty-eight of it belongs to +me. Freight bills, you know. The coops you put those birds in were as +heavy as lead. If you had put less timber in them your expenses would +not have been so heavy." + +"Don thought it best to have them strong, so that they would not be +broken in handling," said David. + +"That was all right. Now let me see," added Silas, consulting his +books; "fifty-five dozen live quails at three fifty per dozen--one +ninety-two, fifty; less twenty-eight, leaves one sixty-four, fifty. +Just step around here and sign this receipt." + +David obeyed like one in a dream. He put his name to the receipt, +and, scarcely knowing what he was about, thrust the package of money +which Silas handed him into his pocket and walked out of the store. + +"There goes the proudest boy in the United States," said the grocer. + +Yes, David was proud, but he was grateful, too. He was indebted to +Don and Bert for his good fortune, and he was sorry that he could do +nothing but thank them when they came home. He went straight to the +cabin, and to his great surprise and joy found his mother there. She +was alone in the house, but David, profiting by his past experience, +made a thorough examination of the premises before he said a word to +her. Having thus made sure that Dan was not about, he pulled out his +package of greenbacks and laid it in his mother's lap. + +There was joy in the cabin that day. If David had never before +realized that it is worth while to keep trying, no matter how hard +one's luck may be, he realized it now. We will leave him in the full +enjoyment of his success, promising to bring him to the notice of the +reader again at no distant day, in the concluding volume of this +series, which will be entitled THE MAIL CARRIER. + +THE END. + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Boy Trapper, by Harry Castlemon + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BOY TRAPPER *** + +***** This file should be named 18076.txt or 18076.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/1/8/0/7/18076/ + +Produced by Alan Johns and Andrew Sly + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** + diff --git a/18076.zip b/18076.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..dd03b36 --- /dev/null +++ b/18076.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7c70d82 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #18076 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/18076) |
